TRANSACTIONS OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY

OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA INCORPORATED

PROFESSOR THOMAS HARVEY JOHNSTON

Professor T, H. Johnston, M.A., D.Sc., while still actively engaged as head

of the Department of Zoology at Adelaide University, passed away suddenly on

30th August, 1951, when in his seventieth year. His death is a loss that will be

greatly felt, more especially i in the field of parasitology.

In his youth he had studied under the world-famous zoologist, Professor

W. Haswell, and then continued throughout a long and active life to successfully

devote his energies to research, resulting in many outstanding contributions to

Australian science. He published some 299 papers,* mainly dealing with para-

sitology and, to a lesser extent, entomology.

Thomas Harvey Johnston, son of Thomas Johnston, was born in Sydney on

9 December 1881. He graduated at Sydney University Bachelor of Arts (1904)

and Bachelor of Science (1906); later Master of Arts (1907) and Doctor of

Science (1911), He was lecturer in Zoology and Physiology at the Sydney Tech-

nical College (1907-1909), and later was Assistant Microbiologist in the Bureau

of Microbiology, New South Wales Health Department, Sydney (1909-1911).

When the University of Queensland was initiated he was appointed lecturer

in Biology (1911), and later became Professor when provision was made for the

Chair of Zoology (1919). As a member of the Prickly Pear Travelling Com-

mission, he undertook investigations into the control of that menace which was

taking toll of vast areas of Queensland, The conduct of this work took him

around the world twice, in the period 1912-1914, in search of parasites to check

the spread of the pest. From this investigation followed the introduction of the

cochineal insect which ultimately led to the control of prickly pear and so to

the lasting benefit of Queensland. For this achievement he obtained the Walter

and Eliza Hall fellowship in Economic Biology. He was appointed Controller

of the Commonwealth Prickly Pear Laboratories (1920-1923).

In 1922 he was appointed to the newly created Chair of Zoology in the

University of Adelaide, and continued to occupy it with distinction until the time

of his death,

In the years that ensued, Professor Johnston made the best use of the very

limited resources available to build up an active Department of Zoology at

Adelaide in which, in addition to maintaining the teaching programme, he had

to cope with the demands of the rapidly growing numbers of medical and science

students. He and his limited staff of assistants succeeded in maintaining a steady

flow of research publications.

Though helminthology, in which he became a world authority, did occupy

first place in Harvey Johnston’s research, he inherited from Haswell a great

interest in marine life, and was easily persuaded to join, as Chief Zoologist, the

staff of the British, Australian, New Zealand, Antarctic Research Expedition.

He was thus engaged on the two Antarctic cruises of “Discovery I” during the

period 1929-1931. Throughout the duration of these operations, both in the

Antarctic and Sub-Antarctic, Johnston worked assiduously and unsparingly. The

scientific reports of the Expedition owe a great deal to his labour in connection

with the preparation and editing of the biological reports. He himself, and

jointly with certain of his graduates, contributed a number of papers to the

zoological reports; the last, dealing with Cephalodiscus, appeared only about one

week prior to his death.

*A complete list of titles of these is available for reference at the Barr Smith

Library of the University of Adelaide.

Professor Johnston also contributed to the successful publication of the

biological reports of the Australasian Antarctic Expedition of 1911-1914, for

in the case of the later volumes he undertook the editing earlier begun by Pro-

fessor Haswell.

He was an active member of the Anthropological Society of South Aus-

tralia and between the years 1929 and 1937 participated in several of the Univer-

sity field investigations among the natives of Central Australia,

During recent years he was a member of the Advisory Committee on water

supply to the Minister of Public Works; advising on matters relating to the

maintaining of purity in the city water supply.

His long association with the South Australian Museum deserves special

mention. Soon after appointment on the staff of the Adelaide University he

became actively interested in the work of the South Australian Museum in the

capacity of Honorary Associate. He was elected by the Royal Society of South

Australia as a member of the Board of Governors of the Public Library, Museum

and Art Gallery of South Australia, and as the Society’s representative sat on

that Board from May 1927 until September 1929. On the death of Mr. Edgar

R. Waite in 1928 he became Hon, Director of the Museum and worked in that

capacity for about three years.

Tn 1931 he was elected to the Board of Governors by the University of

Adelaide, and continued as a University representative until the composite Board

was disbanded in January 1940 and the three institutions became separate Govern-

ment departments, each with its own Board,

During the final five years of joint control Professor Harvey Johnston was

Chairman of the Museum Committee. He had urged for a long time the

desirability of separate control for the respective institutions, and when the care

and control of the Museum were delegated to an independent Board in 1940 he

was appointed Chairman by the South Australian Government and retained this

office until the time of his death.

His activity in the work of Scientific Societies was widely recognised: as

President of the Queensland Royal Society (1915-16), Biological Section of

A.N.Z.A.A.S. (1923), S.A. Royal Society (1931-32), S.A. Entomological

Society (1935-37), S.A. Anthropological Society (1937-38), Also corresponding

Member of the Zoology Society (London), the N.S.W, Royal Society, the

Washington Helminthological Society, and the American Association of Economic

Entomology (as foreign member). He was member of the board of editors of

the Australian Journal of Experimental Biology and Medical Science,

For his contribution to science he was awarded the David Syme Memorial

Medal (1913), the King’s Polar Medal (1934), the Sir Joseph Verco Medal of

the Royal Society of South Australia (1935), and the Mueller Memorial Medal

of the A.N.Z,A.A.S. (1939).

So has passed an indefatigable and remarkably thorough scientific worker,

who pioneered in many fields of observation in these southern lands. He will be

remembered for his quiet mien and sterling character: considerate and helpful

to the many students who have passed through his hands,

He is survived by Mrs. Johnston (nee Alice Pearce) and one daughter,

Mrs. W. W. Jolly (medical practitioner). His only son, J. H. Johnston (medical

practitioner), predeceased him by several years.

An account of his association with the medical profession will appear in

The Medical Journal of Australia, and his natural history activities in the South

Australian Naturalist; both contributed by Professor J. B. Cleland.

Dovuctas Mawson

—

Sean 1e & N

m _ ee eee ee

A 2 FS

LIST OF TITLES OF THE PUBLISHED WORKS OF

THOMAS HARVEY JOHNSTON, M.A., D.Sc.

(late Professor of Zoology at the University of Adelaide)

The following abbreviations are used in this list:

MRS, SA, = Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust.

P.R.S., N.'S.W. = _ Proc. Roy. Soc., N.S.W.

P.L.S., N.S.W. = Proc. Linn. Soc., N.S.W,

P.RS., Qld. = =Proc, “Royo, Old

Notes on some Australian parasites. Agr. Gaz., N.S.W., 20, 1909, 581-584. Re-

printed in Jour. Trop. Vet. Sci., 5, 1910, 349-353.

Descriptions of new Haemoprotozoa from Australian birds, etc. P.R.S., N.S.W., 43,

1909, 75-96 (with Cleland).

On a new melanin-producing Haematozoon from an Australian tortoise. P.R.S.,

N.S.W., 43, 1909, 97-103 (with Cleland).

On a new reptilian cestode. P.R.S., N.S.W., 43, 1909, 103-116.

On Abas Haemogregarines from Australian reptiles. P.L.S., N.S.W., 34, 1909,

400-410.

On Australian Chaetognatha. Rec. Aust. Mus., 7, 1909, 251-256,

On a new Haemoprotozoon. Rec. Aust. Mus., 7, 1909, 257-259.

On a cestode from Dacelo gigas. Rec. Aust. Mus., 7, 1909, 246 250.

On a new species of Aphrodita, Rec. Aust. Mus., 7, 1909, 241-245.

Notes on Australian Entozoa, I. Rec. Aust. Mus., 7, 1909, 329-344. (Part reprinted

in Jour. Trop. Vet. Sci., 5, 1910, 353-357.)

. The Entozoa of Australian Monotremata and Marsupialia, I. P.L.S., N.S.W., 34,

1909, 514-523.

Notes on some parasitic Protozoa. P.L.S., N.S.W., 34, 1909, 501-513 (with Cleland.)

On a new genus of bird cestodes. P.R.S., N.S.W., 43, 1909, 139-147,

. The potato blight (with Tidswell). Agr. Gaz., N.S.W., 20, 1909, 809-810; and

Farmers’ Bulletin, No. 27, N.S.W. Dept. Agr., 1909.

. On the réle of water in the spread of human Helminthiasis. Aust. Med. Gaz,

1909, 479-481.

Certain fungoid diseases of the potato. Agr. Gaz., N.S.W., 20, 1909, 998-1012

(with Tidswell); and Farmers’ Bulletin, No. 31, 1909.

. Notes and exhibits (of Entozoa, etc.), P.L.S., N.S.W., 34, 1909, 117-118, 217-219,

18.

412-413, 417-418, 590-591, 70-711.

Notes and exhibits (of Entozoa, etc.). P.R.S., N.S.W., 43, 1909. Abstracts pp. xv-

xvi, XX, XxXVIli, xxix.

. On the anatomy of Monopylidium passerinum. P.R.S,, N.S.W., 43, 1909, 405-411.

. Diseases of banana plants. Agr. Gaz., N.S.W., 20, 1909, 845-746 (with Tidswell).

Maize smut. Agr. Gaz., N.S.W., 21, 1910, 43-44.

Worm nests in cattle due to Filaria gibsoni, Preliminary report. Agr. Gaz.,

N.S.W., 21, 1910, 173-174 (with Cleland); also in Jour. Trop. Vet. Sci., 5, 1910

§20-521; and also in Jour. Meat and Milk Hygiene, 1, (1), 1911, 21-23.

. Brown rot of fruit. Agr. Gaz., N.S,W., 21, 1910, 194-195,

. Worm nests in Australian cattle due to Filaria gibsoni, with a note on similar

structures in camels. P.R.S., N.S.W., 44, 1910, 156-171 (with Cleland).

. On the anatomy and possible mode of transmission of Filaria (Onchocerca) gibsoni.

P.R.S., N.S.W., 44, 1910, 171-189 (with Cleland).

. Worm nests in cattle due to Filaria gibsoni. Jour. Comp. Path, Therap., 23, 1910,

335-353. (with Cleland).

. On Australian avian Entozoa. P.R.S., N.S.W., 44, 1910, 84-122.

. Notes on some plant diseases. Agr. Gaz., N.S.W., 20, 1910, 563-566.

. Notes on a fungus found destroying potatoes. Agr. Gaz., N.S.W., 20, 1910, 699-701.

. Some further notes on Maize smuts. Agr, Gaz., N.S.W., 20, 1910, 669-670.

. The Haematozoa of Australian Batrachia, I. P.R.S., N.S.W., 44, 1910, 252-261

(with Cleland).

. The Haematozoa of Australian Reptilia, I. P.L.S., N.S.W., 35, 1910, 677-685 (with

Cleland).

Note on the occurrence of Pentastomes in Australian cattle. P.R.S., N.S.W., 44,

1910, 315-318 (with Cleland).

The fungous disease of lucerne. In Farmers’ Bull, No. 37, Oct. 1910, 102-104.

35.

36.

of,

38.

39.

Ecto-parasites collected from rodents. Rep. Govt. Bur. Microbiol., N.S.W., for

1909 (1910), 20-21.

List of Entozoa recorded as occurring in man and domesticated animals and birds

in Australia. Rep, Govt. Bur. Microbiol., N.S.W., for 1909 (1910), 74-81.

Worm nests in cattle and camels. Rep. Govt. Bur. Microbiol, N.S.W., for 1909

(1910), 91-99 (with Cleland).

Plant diseases met with during the year. Rep. Govt. Bur. Microbiol. N.S.W., for

1909 (1910), 54-57.

Various papers, officially reprinted, in Rep. Govt. Bur, Microbiol., N.S.W., for

1909 (1910) :—

(a) (Articles on Australian parasitic) protozoa, 35-46 (with Cleland).

(b) Potato diseases, 57-63 (with Tidswell).

(d) Diseases of banana plants, 71-73 (with Tidswell).

(e) (Articles on Australian) Cestoda, 82-89.

The Haematozoa of Australian birds, I. T.R.S., S.A., 1910, 100-114 (with Cleland),

. The Haematozoa of Australian fish, I. P.R.S,, N.S.W,, 44, 1910, 406-415 (with

Cleland),

Notes and exhibits. P.L.S., N.S.W., 35, 1910, 28, 48, 136, 309-310, 522-523, 659-660,

804,

Notes and exhibits. P.R.S., N.S.W., 44, 1910. Abstr. xi-xiv, xvii.

Notes on worm nests in Australian cattle and in camels. Bull. Dept. Trade and

Customs, Commonw. Govt., 1911, 35-58 (with Cleland).

. American maize smut. Agr, Gaz., N.S.W., 22, 1911, 319-320.

. The Entozoa of Australian Marsupialia and Monotremata, II, P.L.S., N.S.W.,

36, 1911, 47-57,

New species of avian cestodes, P.L.S., N.S.W., 36, 1911, 58-80,

Notes on some Mallophagan generic names. P.L.S., N.S.W., 36, 1911, 321-328

(with Harrison).

Echinorhynchus pomatostomi, a subcutaneous parasite of Australian birds, P.R.S.,

N.S.W., 1911, 111-115 (with Cleland).

. A case of injury and repair in the cuticle of a nematode. Rep. Aust. Assoc. Adv.

Sci., 13, 1911 (1912), 299-300 (with Cleland),

. The Helminth parasites of man in Australia. Rep. Aust. Assoc. Adv, Sci,, 13, 1911

(1912), 301-314 (with Cleland).

The Haematozoa of Australian Reptilia, IT. P.L.S., N.S.W., 36, 1911, 479-491

(with Cleland).

Te Speers of Australian birds, IIT, P.R.S., N.S.W., 45, 1911, 415-443 (with

leland).

Proteocephalus gallardi, a new cestode from the black snake. Ann. Qld. Mus., 10,

1911, 175-182.

On the occurrence of worm nodules in catthe—a summary. P-.R.S., Qld., 23, 1911,

207-231.

. A census of Australian reptilian Entozoa. P.R.S., Old., 23, 1911, 233-249,

. A brief account of the worm nodules occurring in cattle, Qld. Agr. Jour., Dec.

1911, 309-311.

Notes and exhibits. P.L.S., N.S.W., 36, 1911, 93, 157-158.

Exhibits. Aust. Med. Gaz., 1911, 336.

. A Collection of Mallophaga from the Kermadecs. Trans. N.Z. Inst., 44, 1911,

363-373 (with Harrison),

On a re-examination of Krefft’s types of Entozoa, etc. Rec. Aus. Mus., 9, 1912,

1-36,

. The relative dimensions of the red blood cells of vertebrates, especially of birds.

Emu, 12, 1912, 188-197 (with Cleland).

. A census of Australian Mallophaga. P.R.S., Old., 1912, 1-15 (with Harrison),

A list of Mallophaga found on introduced and domesticated animals in Australia.

P.R.S., Qld., 24, 1912, 17-22 (with Harrison).

Notes on some Entozoa. P.R.S., Qld., 24, 1912, 63-91,

Internal parasites recorded from Australian birds, Emu, 12, 1912, 105-112.

New species of cestodes from Australian birds, Mem, Qld. Mus., 1, 1912, 211-214,

Notes on Australian Pediculids. P.R.S., Qld., 24, 1912, 105-109 (with Harrison).

Species of Haemoprotozoa met with during 1910-1911. Rept. Govt. Bur. Microbiol,,

N.S.W,, for 1910 and 1911 (1912), 74-83 (with Cleland).

. Tabular statements of Haematozoa occurring in wild and domestic animals in

Australia, Ibid., 83-88 (with Cleland).

Memorandum on Surra. Ibid., 72 (with Cleland),

72.

73.

iii

Introductory remarks concerning some modes of dispersal of Helminth parasites

(with Tidswell), ibid, 112-113.

Official reprint of various papers published elsewhere. Rep. Govt. Bur. Microbiol.,

N.S.W., for 1910 and 1911 (1912) :—

(a) The Helminth parasites of man in Australia, 113-119 (with Cleland),

(b) A note on the occurrence of Pentastomes in Australian cattle, 119-120

(with Cleland).

(d) Microfilaria in the blood of Australian birds, 136-137 (with Cleland).

(e) On some fungi found in potatoes, with special reference to Armillaria

mellea, 177-179.

(f) Irish blight in tomatoes, 179-180,

(g) American maize smut, 181.

(h) On some fungi found on fruit, 182-184.

(k) Fungous diseases of lucerne, 184-185.

Seeds. and Acanthocephala. Rep. Townsville Tropical Institute, 1911 (1913),

Second report on the Cestoda and Acanthocephala collected in Queensland. Ann,

Trop. Med. Parasit., 8, 1914, 105-112.

Notes and exhibits, Endoparasites (Trematoda). P.R.S., Qld., 26, 1914, 69.

On some new Queensland Endoparasites, P.R.S., Qld., 26, 1914, 76-84.

. Report of the Prickly Pear Travelling Commission, Nov. 1912—April 1914. Qld.

Parl, Rep. (1914), 1-20 and 131, 66 figs. (with Tryon).

. Notes on an exhibit of specimens of Ceratodus. P.R.S., Qld., 27, 1915, 58-59 (with

Bancroft).

Helminthological notes. Mem. Qld. Mus., 5, 1916, 186-196.

Mallophaga from Marsupialia, I. Parasitology, 8, 1916, 338-359, 14 text figs. (with

Harrison).

Presidential Address. P.R.S., Old., 28, 1916, 1-30.

Obituary of Frederick Manson Bailey, 3-10,

Obituary of C. W. Devis, 10-17.

The eradication of prickly pear, 22-26,

Worm nests in cattle, 26-30.

. Census of Endoparasites recorded as occurring in Queensland, arranged under

their hosts, P.R.S., Qld., 28, 1916, 31-79.

. The Endoparasites of the dingo. P.R.S., Qld., 28, 1916, 96-100.

. Ecological notes on the littoral fauna and flora of Caloundra, Old. Qld. Naturalist,

2, 1917, 53-63.

On a new species of Pedicellina from Sydney Harbour. P.R.S., Qld., 29, 1917,

60-63 (with Walker).

The cattle tick in Australia. Bull. 1 Advisory Council Sci. & Industry, Melbourne,

1917 (with Stewart and others).

. Worm nodules in cattle. Bull. 2 Advisory Council Sci. & Industry, Melbourne,

1917 (with Dodd and others).

. Notes on a Saproleugnia epidemic amongst Queensland fish. P.R.S., Qld., 29,

1917, 125-131.

. Tick resistance of cattle. Agr. Gaz., N.S.W., 29, 1918, 319-320 (with Bancroft).

. Tick resistant cattle. Qld. Agric. Jour., 9, 1918, 171-172 (with Bancroft).

. Notes on certain Entozoa of rats and mice, together with a catalogue of the

internal parasites recorded as occurring in rodents in Australia. P.R.S., Qld.,

30, 1918, 53-78.

. The Endoparasites of the domestic pigeon in Queensland. Mem. Old. Mus., 6,

1918, 168-174.

. A tick resistant condition in cattle. P.R.S., QOld., 6, 1918, 219-317 (with Bancroft).

. A note on the occurrence of Mullerian ducts in the male of Hyla caerulea.

P.R.S., N.S.W., 1918, 461-462 (with Gillies).

. Notes on records of Tree Kangaroos in Queensland. Aust. Zoologist, 1, (6), 1918,

153-156 (with Gillies).

. Myobolus hylae, a parasite of the reproductive organs of the Golden Frog, Hyla

aurea, Aust. Zoologist, 1, (6), 1918, 171-175 (with Bancroft).

Notes on miscellaneous Endoparasites, P.R.S., Qld., 30, 1918, 209-218.

. Some new Sporozoon parasites of Queensland freshwater fish, P.R.S., N.S.W.,

1918, 520-528 (with Bancroft).

. Report on Mr. Munro Hull's claims re resistant cattle. Qld. Agr. Jour., Jan, 1919,

31-35; also in Science and Industry, 1 (1), 1919, 57-62; also in Rev. Appl.

Entomol. B., 7, 1919, 112-114 (with Bancroft).

101.

102.

103.

104,

105.

106.

107.

108.

109.

110.

111.

112.

113.

114.

115.

116.

117,

118,

119.

120.

121.

122.

123,

124,

125.

126.

127.

128.

129.

130.

131.

132,

133.

134,

Pseudobonellia, a new Echinoid genus from the Great Barrier Reef. P.L.S.,

N.S.W., 44, 1919, 213-230 (with Tiegs).

Notes on Australian Chaetognatha. P.R.S., Old., 31, 1919, 28-41 (with Taylor).

a rea of the Queensland coast. P.R.S., Qld., 31, 1919, 46-82 (with Hirsch-

eld),

Tick resistance in cattle; a reply to criticism. P.R.S., Qld., 31, 1919, 173-180

(with Bancroft),

Sa the cattle tick; life history investigated. Science and Industry, 1, 1919,

419-425.

The life histories of Musca australis and Musca yetustissima. P.R.S., Qld, 31,

1919, 181-203 (with Bancroft).

Notes on the Chaloid parasites of Muscoid flies in Australia. P.R.S., Old., 32,

1920, 19-30 (with Bancroft).

Experiments with certain Diptera as possible transmitters of bovine Onchocerciasis.

P.R.S., Qld., 32, 1920, 31-57. (with Bancroft).

The life history of Habronema in relation to Musca domestica and native flies in

Queensland. J. Roy. Soc., Qld., 32, 1920, 61-88 (with Bancroft).

The Chalcid parasites of Muscoid flies in Australia. Science and Industry, Mel-

bourne, 2, 1920, 308-312.

The cattle worm-nodule parasite; some experiments wilh flies as possible trans-

mitters. Science and Industry, 2, 1920, 315-316 (with Bancroft).

Flies as transmitters of certain worm parasites of horses, Science and Industry,

Melbourne, 2, 1920, 369-372.

Notes on the biology of some Queensland flies. Mem. Qld. Mus., 7, 1920, 31-43

(with Bancroft).

A new species of Bonellia from Port Jackson. Rec. Aust. Mus., 13, 1920, 73-76

(with Tiegs).

Notes on the life history of certain Queensland Tabanid flies. P.R.S., QOld., 32,

1920, 125-131. (with Bancroft),

The cattle tick. Science and Industry, Melbourne., 2, 1920, 347-351.

Report on the Chaetognatha collected by the Australian Antarctic Expedition,

Rep. Aust., Antarctic Exp., 1911-1914, Series C, 6, (2), 1921, 16 pp. (with

Taylor).

Lectures on some Queensland pests. Brisbane Chamber of Commerce, 1920, 9-20.

(Prickly Pear, 9-14, Cattle Tick, 15-20).

The sheep maggot fly in Queensland. Qld. Agr. Jour., 15, 1921, 244-248.

New and little known Sarcophagid flies from South-eastern Queensland. P.R.S.,

Qld., 33, 1921, 46-90. (with Tiegs).

Biological control of prickly pear. Qld. Agr. Jour., 16 August, 1921, 65-68.

On the biology and economic significance of the Chalcid parasites of Australian

sheep maggot flies. P.R.S., Qld., 33, 1921, 99-128 (with Tiegs).

The nodule parasite and allied worms from Queensland cattle. Qld. Agr. Jour.,

16 Sept., 1921, 172-174.

The freshwater fish epidemics in Queensland rivers. P.R.S., Qld., 33, 1921, 174-210

(with Bancroft).

Onchocerciasis in Queensland cattle. T.R.S., S. Aust., 45, 1921, 231-247.

Notes on certain Queensland and bush flies. Trans. Intercol. Med. Congr., 11

(Brisbane), 1920 (1921), 265-272.

Sarcophagid flies in the Australian Museum collection. Rec. Aust. Mus., 13, 1922,

175-188 (with Tiegs).

What part can Chalcid wasps play in controlling Australian sheep maggot flies?

Qld. Agr. Jour., 17, 1922, 128-131 (with Tiegs).

New Gyrodactyloid Trematodes from Australian fish, together with a reclassifica-

tion of the superfamily Gyrodactyloidea. P.L.S., N.S.W., 47, 1922, 83-131

(with Tiegs).

Report on investigations regarding prickly pear control by biological means.

Qld. Agr. Jour., 17, 1922, 136-140.

Notes on the biology of some of the more common Queensland Muscoid flies.

P.R.S., Qld., 34, 1922, 77-104 (with Tiegs).

Some facts regarding the biology of the house fly. Med. Jour. Aust., Oct. 1922,

494-499,

Some facts of importance relating to sheep maggot flies. Qld. Agr. Jour., 18,

1922, 272-275.

New and known Australian Sarcophagid flies. P.R.S., Qld, 34, 1922, 56-61 (with

Tiegs).

135.

136.

137.

138.

139,

140.

141.

142,

143,

144,

145.

146.

147,

148,

149.

150.

151.

152.

hee

154.

155.

156,

157.

158.

159.

160,

161.

162.

163.

164.

165,

166,

167.

168.

169.

170.

171.

172,

173,

A synonymic list of some described Australian Calliphorine flies. P.R.|S., Qld.,

34, 1922, 66-69 (with Hardy).

Across the Andes. Qld. Geog. Jour., 37, 1922, 55-67.

Some Sarcophagid flies from Lord Howe Island. Rec. Aust. Mus., 14, (1), 1923,

62-71 (with Hardy).

A revision of the Australian Diptera belonging to the genus Sarcophaga, P.L.S.,

N.S.W., 48, 1923, 94-129 (with Hardy).

Observations regarding the life cycle of certain Australian blowflies. P.L.S., Qld.,

35, 1923, 21-42 (with Hardy).

A bacterial disease destructive to fish in Queensland, rivers. T.R.S., S. Aust., 47,

1923, 157-161 (with Hitchcock),

A bacteriosis of prickly pears (Opuntia sp.). T.R.S,, S. Aust., 47, 1923, 162-164

(with Hitchcock).

A Be of the Australian sheep maggot fly problem. T.R.S., S, Aust., 47, 1923,

-211.

The Australian prickly pear problem. (Presid. Address, Sect. D.) Rep. Aust.

Assoc. Ady. Sci. (New Zealand), 16, 1923 (1924), 347-401.

An Australian Caryophyllaeid Cestode. P.L.S., N.S.W., 49, 1924, 339-347.

sete of climate to the spread of prickly pear. T.R.S., S. Aust., 48, 1924,

Remarks on the commoner “bush-flies” of Australia, Health, Melb., 3, (4), 1925,

110-113.

Australian bloodflukes. Illust. Aust, Encyclopaedia, Sydney, 1, 1925, 174-175.

The sheep maggot-fly problem, Jour. Dept. Agr., S, Aust., 29, 1925, 216-222.

Observations regarding the non-parasitic stage of the Queensland cattle tick

(abstract). Proc. Pan Pacific Sci. Congr., Sydney, 1923 (1926), 2, 1,546.

Note on the occurrence of Coccidiosis in South Australian sheep, Rep. Aust. Assoc.

Adv. Sci., 1924 (1926), 712-714.

Prickly pear. Illust. Aust. Encyclop., Sydney, 2, 1926, 334-336.

Nemathelminthes. Illust. Aust. Encyclop., Sydney, 2, 1926, 188-189.

Remarks on the propriety of introducing insects to control prickly pear in Aus-

tralia. T.R.S., S.A., 50, 1926, 235-240.

New trematodes from an Australian Siluroid. T.R.S., S. Aust., 51, 1927, 129-136,

Remarks on the biological control of pests, Rep. Aust. Assoc, Adv. Sci., 18, 1926

(1928), 841-862.

New Trematodes from the Australian water hen, Gallinula tenebrosa. Rec. S. Aust.

Museum, 4, (1), 1928, 135-142.

Remarks on the synonymy of certain Tristomatid Trematode genera, T.R.S.,

S.A., 53, 1929, 71-78,

Australian Acanthocephala, I, Census, etc. T,R.S., S.A., 53, 1929, 146-154. (with

Deland).

Australian Acanthocephala, II. T.R.S., S.A., 53, 1929, 155-166 (with Deland).

The anatomy of the trematode, Macrophyllida antarctica. Aust. Jour. Exp. Biol.

and Med, Sci., 7, (3), 1930, 101-107,

A new species of trematode of the genus Anoplodiscus. Austr. Jour. Exp. Biol.

and Med. Sci., 7, (3), 1930, 108-112.

An Amphilinid cestode from an Australian tortoise. Austr. Jour. Exp. Biol. and

Med. Sci., 8, 1931, 1-7.

New trematodes from the Subantarctic and Antarctic. Austr. Jour. Exp. Biol.

and Med. Sci., 8, 1931, 91-98.

The parasites of the stumpy-tailed lizard, Trachysaurus rugosus. T.R.S., S.A,

56, 1932, 62-70.

The ecology of the aborigines of Central Australia: botanical notes. T.R.S., S.A.,

57, 1933, 113-124 (with Cleland).

History of the aboriginal narcotic, pituri. Oceania, 4, (2), 1933, 201-223; 4, (3),

1934, 268-289 (with Cleland).

History of the aboriginal narcotic, pituri, Oceania, 4, (3), 1931, pp. 268, 289

(with Cleland),

New trematodes from Australian Elasmobranchs. Austr. Jour. Exp, Biol. and

Med. Sci., 12, 1934, 25-32.

Notes on some Monocotylid trematodes. P.L.S., N.S.W., 49, 1934, 62-65.

Remarks on some Australian Cestodaria. P.L.S., N.S.W., 49, 1934, 66-70.

Report on proposals for the discharge of effluent from the Glenelg Sewage Treat-

ment Works. Govt. Printer, Adelaide, 1934, 20 pp.

Some Australian Anaporrhutine trematodes. T.R.S., S.A., 58, 1934, 139-148.

Report on the Trematoda. Rep. Austr. Antarctic Exp., 1911-1914, Ser. C.

Report of the Acanthocephala. Rep. Austr. Antarctic Exp., 1911-1914, Ser. C.

Report on the Ixodoidea. Rep. Austr. Antarctic Exp., 1911-1914, Ser. C.

Remarks on the cestode genus Porotenia. T.R.S., S.A., 59, 1935, 164-167.

. Blood grouping of aborigines of the Musgrave Ranges in the north-west of South

Australia. Jour. Trop. Med. Hyg., 39, (3), Feb. 1936, 25-28 (with J. B. Cleland

and C. J. Hackett).

. A note on the occurrence of the nematode, Gongylonema pulchrum, in man in New

Zealand. New Zealand Med. Jour., 38, June 1936, 172-176.

“Zoology of South Australia.” In “Centenary History of South Australia”, 1936,

pp. 336-338. Published by Roy. Geogr. Soc., South Austr., 1936.

. Blood grouping of aborigines of the Diamantina district in the north-east of South

Australia (1934), Jour. Trop. Med. Hyg., 39, (9), May 1936, 104-105 (with

J. B. Cleland).

Remarks on the nematode, Gongylonema pulchrum. T.R.S., S.A., 60, 1936, 76-87.

One hundred years of Zoology in South Australia, T.R.S., S.A., 60, 1936, xli-lv.

. Entozoa from the Australian hair seal. P.L.S.. N.SW., 62, 1937, 9-16,

Biological organization and Station List. Brit. Aust. N.Z., Antarctic Research

Exped. (1929-1931), Reports, Ser. B.1, (1), 1937, 1-48.

Report on the Trematoda. Rep. Aust. Antarctic Exp, (1911-1914), Ser. C, 10, (1),

1937, 1-29.

Report on the Acanthocephala, Rep, Aust, Antarctic Exp. (1911-1914), Ser. C,

10, (2), 1937, 1-20 (with Best).

. A note on the occurrence of Rhabdoplenra annulata in South Australian Waters.

Rec. South Aust. Mus., 6, (1), 1937, 105-107.

. Larval trematodes from Australian terrestrial and freshwater molluscs, Part I.

Survey of literature, T.R.S., S.A., 61, 1937, 191-201 Gwith E, R. Cleland).

Larval trematodes from Australian terrestrial and freshwater molluscs. Part II.

Cercaria (Furcocerearia) jaenschi. T.R.S,, S.A., 61, 1937, 202-206 (with E. R.

Cleland).

Rhabdopleura. Rep. Aust, Antarctic Exp. (1911-1914), Ser. C, 3, (4), 1937, 1-8.

. The Cestoda of the Australasian Antarctic Expedition. Rep. Austr. Antarctic

Exp. (1911-1914), Ser. C, 10, (4), 1937, 1-74.

Report on the Ticks (Ixodoidea) of the Australasian Antarctic Expedition. Rep.

Austr. Antarctic Exp. (1911-1914), Ser. C, 2, (3), 1937, 1-19.

. A survey of the literature relating to the occurrence in Australia of helminth

parasites of man. T.R.S., S.A., 61, 1937, 250-277 (with J. B. Cleland).

. Notes on native names and uses of plants in the Musgrave Ranges region. Oceania,

8, (2), 1937, 208-215 (with J. BR. Cleland).

Blood grouping of aborigines in the north-west portion of Central Australia

(1936), Jour. Trop. Med. Hyg., 41, Jan. 1938, 10-12 (with J. B. Cleland).

Report on the parasitic nematodes of the Australasian Antarctic Expedition. Rep.

Austr. Antarctic Exp, (1911-1914), Ser. C, 10, (5), 1938, 1-31.

Blood grouping of aborigines of the Northern Flinders Ranges in South Australia.

Jour. Trop. Med. Hyg., Jan. 1938, 26-27 (with J. B. Cleland).

Notes on native names and uses of plants in the Musgrave Ranges region (con-

tinuation). Oceania, 8, (3), 1938, 328-342 (with J. B. Cleland).

. Larval trematodes from Australian terrestrial and freshwater mollusca. Part ITI.

Leucochloridium australiense. T.R.S., S.A, 62, (1), 1938, 25-33 (with E. R.

Cleland).

. An account of some filarial parasites of Australian marsupials. T.R.S., S.A,

62, (1), 1938, 107-121 (with P. M. Mawson).

Larval trematodes from Australian terrestrial and freshwater molluscs. Part IV.

Cercaria murrayensis. T.R.S., S.A., 62 (1), 1938, 127-131 (with E. R. Cleland).

2. A census of the free-living and plant-parasitic nematodes recorded as occurring

in Australia, T.R,S., S.A., 62, (1), 1938, 149-167,

Strongyle nematodes from Central Australian kangaroos and wallabies, T.R,S.,

S.A., 62, (2), 1938, 263-286 (with P. M, Mawson).

Parasitic Infusoria from Macquarie Island. Rep, Austr. Antarctic Exp. (1911-

1914), Ser. C, 1, (3), 1938, 1-13.

. Report on the Echinoderida. Rep. Austr. Antarctic Exp, (1911-1914), Ser. C, 10

(7), 1938, 1-13.

. Some nematodes from Australian marsupials. Rec. South Austr. Mus., 6, (2), 1938,

187-198 (with P. M. Mawson).

Aboriginal names and uses of plants at the Granites, Central Australia. T.R.S.,

S.A., 63, (1), 1939, 22-26 (with J. B. Cleland).

208.

209,

210.

211.

212,

213.

214.

215.

216.

217.

218.

219.

220.

221.

222,

223.

224.

BOR

226.

227.

228.

229.

230.

231.

232,

233.

234.

235,

236,

237.

238.

239.

240.

Vil

Larval trematodes from Australian freshwater molluscs. Part V. T.R.S., S.A,,

63, (1), 1939, 63-68 (with E. R. Simpson).

Strongylate nematodes from Queensland marsupials. T.R.S., S.A., 63, (1), 1939,

121-149 (with P. M. Mawson).

Pituri (summary of Presidential address). Mankind, 2, (7), 1939, 224-225,

Strongylate nematodes from marsupials in New South Wales. P.L.S., N.S.W., 64,

1939, 513-536 (with P. M. Mawson).

Internal parasites of the pigmy sperm whale. Rec. South Austr. Mus., 6, (3),

1939, 263-274 (with P. M. Mawson).

Aboriginal names and uses of plants in the Northern Flinders Ranges. T.RS.,

S.A., 63, (2), 1939, 172-179 (with J. B. Cleland).

Larval trematodes from Australian freshwater molluscs. Part VI. T-.R.S., S.A,

63, (2), 1939, 200-203 (with L. M. Angel).

Sundry nematodes from Eastern Australian marsupials. T.R.S., S.A., 63, (2), 1939,

204-209 (with P. M. Mawson).

The Diplostomulum stage of Cercaria murrayensis. T.R.S., S.A., 63, (2), 1939,

230-237 (with E. R. Simpson).

Some nematodes from Victoria and Western Australian marsupials. T.R.S., S.A,,

63, (2), 1939, 307-310 (with P. M. Mawson).

On a collection of nematodes from Australian marsupials. Rec. Austr, Mus., 20,

(5), 1940, 36-366 (with P. M. Mawson).

Handbooks of the Fauna and Flora of South Australia. Austr, Jour. Sci. June

1940, 175-176,

Nematodes from South Australian marsupials. T.R.S., S.A., 64, (1), 1940, 95-100

(with P, M. Mawson),

The adult stage of the trematode, Leucochloridium australiense. T.R.S., S.A., 64,

(1), 1940, 119-124 (with E, R, Simpson),

New and known nematodes from Australian marsupials. P.L.S., N.S.W., 65, 1940,

468-476 (with P. M. Mawson).

Endoprocta. Brit. Austr. N. Z. Antarctic Research Exp. Rep., Ser B, 4, (7), 1940,

213-231 (with L. M. Angel).

The Anatomy and life history of the trematode, Cyclocoelum jaenschi n.sp,

T.R.S., S.A., 63, (2), 1940, 273-278 (with E. R. Simpson).

Larval trematodes from Australian freshwater molluscs. Part VII. T.R.S., S.A,

64, (2), 1940, 331-339 (with L. M. Angel).

Some nematodes from Australian freshwater fish. T.R.S., S.A., 64, (2), 1940,

340-352 (with P. M. Mawson).

Some filarial parasites of Australian birds. T.R.S., S.A., 64, (2), 1940, 355-361

(with P. M. Mawson).

A key to the nematode parasites of Australian marsupials and monotremes.

T.R.S., S.A., 64, (2), 363-370 (with P. M. Mawson).

The morphology and life history of the trematode, Dolichopera mocalpini Nicoll.

T.R.S., S.A., 64, (2), 1940, 376-387 (with L. M. Angel).

Nematodes from Australian marine mammals, Rec. South Austr. Mus., 6, (4),

1941, 429-434 (with P. M. Mawson).

Blood grouping of Australian aborigines at Ooldea, South Australia (1939 Series),

Jour. Trop. Med. Hyg., 44, (12), June 1941, 76-78 (with J. B. Cleland).

Some parasitic nematodes in the collection of the Australian Museum. Rec. Austr.

Mus., 21, (1), 1941, 9-16 (with P. M. Mawson).

Some nematodes from Australian birds of prey. T.R.S., S.A., 65, (1), 1941, 30-35

(with P. M. Mawson),

Ascaroid nematodes from Australian birds. T.R.S., S.Austr. 65, (1), 110-115 (with

P. M. Mawson).

Life cycle of the trematode, Diplostomum murrayense. T.R.S,, S.A., 65, (1), 140-

144 (with L. M, Angel).

Plankton of the coast of New South Wales (a review). Austr. Jour. Science,

4, (1), 1941, 19-21.

The aboriginal as a human being. Aborigines Friends’ Assoc. Quarterly Review,

Adelaide, Aug. 1941, 7-9,

Some nematode parasites of Australian birds. P.L.S., N.S.W., 66, 1941, 250-256

(with P. M. Mawson).

Some nematodes from Kangaroo Island, South Australia. Rec. South Austr. Mus.,

7, (1), 1941, 145-148 (with P. M. Mawson).

Additional nematodes from Australian birds. T.R.S., S.A., 65, (2), 1941, 254-262

(with P. M. Mawson).

241.

242.

243.

244,

245,

246,

247,

248.

249,

250.

251.

252.

253.

254.

255.

256.

257.

258,

259,

260.

261.

262.

263.

264.

265.

266.

267.

268.

269.

270.

71.

272.

273.

viii

Bather’s itch (schistosome dermatitis) in the Murray swamps, South Australia.

T.RS., S.A., 65, (2), 1941, 276-284.

Life cycle of the trematode, Petasiger australis ns. T.R.S., S.A., 65, (2), 1941,

285-291 (with L. M. Angel).

The life history of Echinostoma revolutum in South Australia. T.R.S., S.A,

65, (2), 1941, 317-322 (with L. M. Angel).

Some aboriginal routes in the western portion of South Australia. Proc. Roy.

Geogr. Soc. S. Austr., 42, 1941, 33-65.

Death, burial and associated ritual at Ooldea, South Australia. Oceania, 12, (3),

1942, 189-208 (with R. M. Berndt).

Some new and known Australian parasitic nematodes. P.L.S., N.S.W., 67, 1942,

90-94 (with P. M. Mawson).

The Gallard collection of parasitic nematodes in the Australian Museum. Rec.

Austr. Mus., 21, (2), 1942, 110-115 (with P. M. Mawson).

Larval trematodes from Australian freshwater molluscs. Part VIII. T.R.S., S.A,

66, (1), 1942, 50-59 (with L. M. Angel).

Nematodes from Australian albatrosses and petrels. T.R.S., S.A., 66, (1), 1942,

66-70 (with P. M. Mawson).

Avian nematodes from Tailem Bend, South Australia. T.R.S., 5.A., 66, (1), 1942,

71-73 (with P. M. Mawson),

Aboriginal names and uses of plants at Ooldea, South Australia. T.R.S,, S.A,

66, (1), 1942, 93-103 (with J. B. Cleland).

The life history of the trematode, Paryphostomum tenuicollis (S. J. Johnston).

T.R.S., S.A., 66, (2), 119-123 (with L. M. Angel).

Some nematodes from Australian frogs. T.R.S., S.A., 66, (2), 172-179 (with

E. R. Simpson).

Remarks on some parasitic nematodes. Rec. South Austr. Mus., 7, (2), 1942, 183-

186 (with P. M. Mawson),

The metacercaria stage of Australian species of Clinostomum. Rec, South Austr.

Mus., 7, (2), 1942, 187-191.

Trematodes from Australian Birds. JI. Cormorants and darters. T.R.S., S.A,

66, (2), 226-242.

Australian Acanthocephala. No. ITI. T.R.S., S.A., 66, (2), 250-254 (with E. W,

Best).

Endoparasites from the Subantarctic Islands of New Zealand. Rec, South Austr.,

Mus., 7, (3), 1943, 237 (with P. M. Mawson).

Some ascarid nematodes from Australian marine fish. T.R.S., S.A., 67, (1), 1943,

20-35. (with P. M. Mawson).

Native names and uses of plants in the north-eastern corner of South Australia.

T.R.S., S.A., 67, (1), 1943, 149-173 (with J. B. Cleland).

Remarks on some nematodes from Australian reptiles. T.R.S., S.A., 67, (2),

183-186 (with P. M. Mawson).

Nematodes from Australian elasmobranchs. T.R.S., S.A., 67, (2), 187-190 (with

P.M. Mawson),

Australian Acanthocephala, No. IV. T.R.S., S.A., 67, (2), 226-230 (with E. W.

Best).

Aboriginal names and utilization of the fauna in the Eyrean region. T.R.S., S.A.,

67, (2), 244-311.

Remarks on some parasitic nematodes from Australia and New Zealand. T.R.S.,

S.A., 68 (1), 60-66. (with P. M. Mawson).

Life history of the trematode, Echinochasmus pelecani, n.sp. T.R.S., 5.A., 61,

(1), 113-119 (with E. R. Simpson).

Larval trematodes from Australian freshwater molluscs, Part IX. T-_R.S., S.A.,

68, (1), 125-132 (with E. R. Simpson).

Some parasitic nematodes from South Australian marine fish. T.R.S., S.A., 69,

(1), 114-117 (with P, M. Mawson).

Parasitic nematodes. Brit. Austr. N.Z. Antarctic Research Exp. Rep., Ser. B,

5, (2), 73-160 (with P. M. Mawson).

Larval trematodes from Australian freshwater mollusca, Part X. T.R.S., S.A.,

69, (2), 229-242 (with A. C. Beckwith).

Some capillariid nematodes from South Australian fish and birds. T.R.S., S.A.,

69, (2), 243-248 (with P. M. Mawson).

The life cycle of the sheep liver fluke in South Australia. T.R.S., S.A., 70, (1),

1946, 121-126 (with A. C. Beckwith).

A zoological survey of Adelaide beaches. Handbook Austr. New Zealand Assoc.

Adv. Sci. (Adelaide), Aug. 1946, 42-47 (with P. M. Mawson).

274.

275.

276.

277.

278.

279,

280.

281.

282.

283.

284.

285.

286.

287.

288.

289,

290.

291.

292,

293.

294,

295.

296.

297.

298.

299,

The transmitting agent of the sheep liver fluke in South Australia. Jour. Dept.

Agric., South Austr., Nov. 1946, 194-197,

Some nematodes from Australian lizards. T.R.S., S.A., 71, (1), 1947, 22-27 (with

P. M. Mawson).

Australian Acanthocephala, No. 5. T.R.S., S.A., 71, (1), 1947, 13-19 (with S. J.

Edmonds).

Some avian and fish nematodes, chiefly from Tailem Bend, South Australia. Rec.

South Austr. Mus., 8 (4), 1947, 547-553 (with P. M. Mawson).

Australian Acanthocephala, No. 6. Rec. South Austr., Mus., 8, (4), 1947, 555-562

(with S. J. Edmonds).

Larval trematodes from Australian freshwater molluscs. Part XI. Rec. South

Austr. Mus., 8 (4), 1947, 563-584 (with A. C. Beckwith).

Larval trematodes from Australian freshwater molluscs. Part XII. T.R.S., S.A,

72, (2), 1948, 324-333 (with A. C, Beckwith).

A new cestode Raillietina (R.) leipoac from the mallee hen. Rec. South Austr.

Mus., 9, (1), 1948, 89-93 (with H. G. Clark).

Microphallus minutus, a new trematode from the Australian water rat. Rec.

South Austr. Mus., 9, (1), 1948, 95-102.

Some new records of nematodes from Australian snakes. Rec. South Aust.

Mus., 9, (1), 1948, 103-108 (with P. M. Mawson).

Australian Acanthocephala, No. 7. T.R.S., S.A. 72, 1948, 69-76 (with S. J.

Edmonds),

Cestodes from Australian birds, I, pelicans. T.R.S., S.A., 72, 1948, 77-82 (with

H. G. Clark).

A brief survey of the parasitological and Anthropological work of Professor J. B.

Cleland. Med. Students’ Society Review (Adelaide University), 30, (1), Oct.

1948. (The M.S.S. Review.)

The life cycle of the trematode Echinoparyphium ellisi from the black swan. Rec.

South Austr. Mus., 9, (2), 1949, 247-254.

Larval trematodes from Australian freshwater molluscs. Part XIII. T.R.S., S.A.,

73, 1949, 1950, 23-28 (with L. M. Angel).

Some nematodes from Australian hosts, together with a note on Rhabditis allgeni.

T.R.S., S.A., 73; 1949, 63-71 (with P .M. Mawson).

Larval trematodes from Australian freshwater molluscs, Part XIV. T.R.S., S.A.,

73, 1949, 102-108 (with N. G, Muirhead).

Some Australian Caryophyllaecid cestodes, Rec. South Austr. Mus., 9, (3), 1950,

339-348 (with N, G. Muirhead).

Australian Acanthocephala, No. 8. T.R.S., S.A., 74, 1950 (with S. J. Edmonds).

Additional nematodes from Australian fish. T.R.S., S.A., 74, 1950 (with P. M.

Mawson).

Plagiorchis, T.R.S., S.A., 74, 1950 (with L. M. Angel),

Apatemon. T,R.S., S.A., 74, 1950 (with L. M. Angel).

Report on some parasitic nematodes from the Australian Museum, Rec, Austr.

Mus., 22, (4), 1951, 289-297 (with P. M. Mawson).

Cephalodiscus, Brit. Aust. New Zealand Antarctic Research Exp., Ser. B, 1, (3),

1951, 89-120 (with N. G. Muirhead).

Australian Acanthocephala, No: 9. T.R.S., S.A., 75, 1951 (with S. J. Edmonds).

Some nematodes from Australian birds and mammals. T.R.S., S.A., 75, 1951 (with

P.M. Mawson).

INDIVIDUAL ASPECTS IN THE CULTURE OF THE AUSTRALIAN

ABORIGINES

BY H. V. NOONE (COMMUNICATED BY N. B. TINDALE)

Summary

The remarkable variety in form, size and function of the stone implements used by the Australian

aborigines, and the employment of several different stone-working techniques in producing them,

prompts speculation as to whether it is likely that this well-developed industry is the outcome of the

Australian aborigine’s own natural inventiveness and dexterity, and if so to what extent this is true.

INDIVIDUAL ASPECTS IN THE CULTURE OF THE

AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINES

By H. V. V. Nooxe

(Communicated by N. B. Tindale}

{Read 12 April 1951]

The remarkable variety in form, size and Function of the stone imple-

ments used by the Australian aborigines, and the employment of several

different stone-working techniques in producing them, prompts speculation

as to whether it is likely that this well-developed industry is the outcome of

the Australian aborigine's own natural inyentiveness and dexterity, and if

so to what extent this is true.

Most unfortunately stratigraphic evidence has not yet been established

to reveal a chronological sequence of the various implement-types that have

been found. Furthermore, the question of whether or not it can be said

that the Australian aborigine’s occupation of Australia, as to duration and

outside interference, was such as to permit independent evolution, has not

yet been satisfactorily answered. That he enjoyed a prolonged period af

isolation and freedom [rom contact of any consequence with more highly

evolved physical stocks is believed to be evidenced by the primitive physical

characteristics he still exhibits amongst the tribes found in all areas except

the extreme north. D. J. Mahony (4) claimed on the basis of the geolo-

gical evidence of a skull found at Keilor, near Melbourne, that Australoid-

Tasmanoid types of men were living in Australia some 140,000 years ago,

which early date, however, has not yet received general acceptance. After

careful study of the question of influence on North-western Australia from

the East Indies, Dr, D, 5. Davidson (2, p. 78) says “at least we have no

eviderice to indicate any perceptible foreign influence on the Australian race

or culture prior to the latter half of the 18th century.” Melanesian contacts,

via Cape York and adjacent territory, sufficient to have any notable result,

seem to be of comparatively recent date and also of limited effect.

Going on to an examination of the many stone implements used in Ats-

tralia, one finds (compare 5, 7 and &) that they range from crude, archaic-

type specimens of an almost “eolithic” aspect. through what may be con-

dered transitional stages, to more speciaiized and developed examples of

excellent workmanship, in fact such a series as one might expect to find

in a more-or-less self-contained industry. Tools occur in this Australian

aboriginal ensemble which are merely suitably-shaped blocks used along their

natural edges, with perhaps some rudimentary trimming, together with

roughly-flaked core implements, such as the “horse-hvof,” “karta,” and pebble

choppers, As a possible result of improved craftsmanship, flaked hifacial

tools are found of elliptical and cordiform shapes. A further step may be

the presence of flake tools culminating in the semi-discoidal “tula” adze-flake,

and a somewhat larger form known as the “arapia”. Related tu this advance

in technique, which required the preparation of the nucleus, may be certain

blade tools, such as the women’s knife and the excellent long quartzite knives

and points used by the men. Improvements in secondary working by the

employment of trimming by pressure produced the South Australian uniface

spearhead, called the “pirri,” which was apparently developed into a bifacial

form, examples of which have been manufactured during recent times of

bottle glass.

Trans, Roy. Soc. 5, Aust, 75, September 1952

A microlithic industry, comprising most of the established geometric

farms, but lacking the micro-burin, completes the Australian aboriginal’s

range in rough outline, A standardized hurin outfit is absent, but most

of the other tools and weapons of European Stone Age man from Palaeo-

lithic and Mesolithic horizons are represented, as recently pointed out by

the writer (9), and with these the Australian aboriginal examples comm-

pare favourably, Thus there would seem to be a fair indication that we have

in Australia a people who have employed the various stone-working tech-

niques to produce the many forms of implements used in Europe during a

period of roughly half a million years duration. Unless we assume (in spite

of the Jack of archaeological evidence of the necessary intervening routes of

diffusion) that the Australian aborigine acquired his methods of manufacture

and stone implement types from each one of the European Stune Age cul-

tures, by not one only, but by repeated culture contacts extending over many

thousands of years, the probability must be admitted that much of his stone-

craft has been independently developed. It may well be that being free to

fallow hig own bent in the practice of the crude stone-working technique,

with which he was apparently endowed when he entered Australia, he insti-

tated by his natural genius new methods of manufacture and improved forms

of implements to meet his changing reytiirements, and in this manner carry-

ing out the usual evolution of the stone industry: core and fake ——>

blade —— microlith.

Uutil recently edge-ground stotie axes were in use over part of the

eastern area of the Australian continent, but this technique, together with

the method of shaping by pecking, appears to be of a recent and limited

foreigu intreduction,

Turning to other items of the Australian aborigine'’s material culture,

as well as his social organization, certain traits, just as in the case of the

stone implements, will be fotind which reveal the presence of simple, possibly

proto-type, forms together with transitional varietics alongside the more

complex or developed aspects of the culture. For instance, the several types

of spear-thrower, spear-shafts, spear-heads, the simple thrawing-sticks, as

well as the vatious boomerang forms, different burial customs, initiation

ceremonies, body decoration, the various classificatory and marriage systems,

and the conception beliefs.

From another point of view there are certain items of Australian abor-

ginal culiure which appear to be exclusive {o it, as they are unknown as

standard farms in the rest of the world, such as the Aake-pick and hatchet

(kodj), and the fake-adze cum: spear-thrower, and stone tjuringas, In

addition, there are jeatures which are not found among any vf the tribes

inhabiting either the Adjacent islands or the mainland, These juclude

(a) a developed geometric microlith industry, (b) a knapping technique that

produced superb blades, (c) pressure-trimmed spear-heads, (d) mastic gum

hafting, (e) stone barbed spear-heads, (£) composite chipped saw-kniyes

(taap), (2) rock-engravings, and (h) subincision. These ail imply the definite

cultural independence of the Australian aboriginal. Furthermore, as Porteus

(10, pp. 245-246) has stated, certain aspects of Australian aboriginal culture

show a unity of pattern and form only appropriate to an inhospitable

environment, such as exists om the Australian continent. They seem quite

tinsuitable to the living conditians of people occupying islands of tromcal

luxuriance and extended seahnards, and hence are unlikely to have originated

among them. These traits include (a) the boomerang and the (b) spear-

thrower cum Aake-adze (Suited only for open country), (c) infanticide,

‘(d) totemie food taboos, (¢) advanced tracking technique, (f) severe jnitia-

tory rites, (g) certain marriage regulations (such as infan( betrothal), and

(h) absence of hereditary chieftainship. All these are peculiarly adapted to

the harsh living conditions, which have no counterpart on the islands imme-

diately adjacent to his homeland.

The absence from Australian aboriginal culture of garden cultivation

and domestication of animals (except the dingo), the lack of pottery, and

non-tise of the bow and arrow, which are all so characteristic of the cultures

of adjacent areas, including New Caledonia, may well he due to environ-

mental unsuitability, or on the other hand, to prolonged cultural isolation,

which the writer believes is inuch more probable.

This contention that much of his material culture is probably due to the

Australian aboriginal's own independent development receives sume support

from an analysis of Tasmatian culture traits. A comparison of these with

those found in Australia has shown many similarities. Dr. D. S$. Davidson

(1) has stated in his paper on “The Relationship of Tasmanian and Aus-

tralian Cultures” that “Tasmanian and Australian cultures not only are

characterised by a general similarity of pattern but fairly comparable traits

are most like old Australian traits,” and also “secondly cognizance should

be taken of the fact that there are no Tasmianiat traits of any importance

which do not also appear in Australia with one major exception, which has

puzzled so many writers—Tasmanian stone work.”

Shortly before the publication of Dr, Davidson's paper, Mr, N. B. Tindale

(11) had identified among a series of Tasmanian implements some examples

of the “horse-hoof,” “karta,’ and pebble-choppers typical of the non-flake

stone industry of Kangaroo Island (South Australia), and he further points

aut that the dingo is absent from both islands. Now this pebble industry has

been shown by Prof, H. L. Movius, Jr. (6) to date ultimately from Middle

Pleistocene times on the basis of evidence from yarious localities in South-

eastern Asia. Its oceurence in Australia and Tasmania implies not only a

considerable antiquity for the original immigrant Tasmanians, hut also a

northern origin.

ln 1943 Dr. T, D. Campbell and the writer (3) reported on the finding

of old camp-sites south-east of Adelaide, South Australia, which yielded

quantities of nosed scrapers (the most typical of Tasmanian implements),

as well as concave and squat end-scrapers of the same type as those produced

by the Tasmanians, In addition, the majority of these tools were mantiiac-

tured by a technique similar to that found in Tasmania, The major excep-

tion quoted by Dr, Davidson, therefore, no longer holds good, for we now

know that the stone-making industries of Australia and Tasmania have a

close analogy lo a certain extent, and furthermore that the apparent relation-

ship does not extend beyond a comparatively early developmental stage. It

is precisely this arrested development, or “lagging-behind” feature, which

Dr, Davidsan found to be frue in the case of his comparison of other culture

traits. Whereas the Australian aborigine further developed his lithic art

until he could produce fine blades and spear-heads trimmed by advanced

pressure-flaking technique. as well as delicate geometric microliths and

abrupt trimmed points, together with a wide variety of stone implement

types, the Tasmanians secm to have stagnated and not progressed beyond a

mediocre flake implement stage and a few standardized types. lt may be

said that the Tasmanians used one or two forms of implements which

resemble those of the Mausterian and Aurignacian cultures, but the Austra-

lian aborigine evolved types likc some in use during the Perigordian, Solu-

trean and Mesolithic times in Europe (compare Noone, 9). At most the

Tasmanians achieved what is little more than at elementary tool outfit

mainly comprising core, carinate and concave scrapers, a few chopping-toals,

some squat end-scrapers and borers, but their main standby—in fact their

dominant implement—was the nosed scraper.

In view of the above it seems highly probable that at some time in the

distant past, before contact with Tasmania was broken off, the Australian

shorigine had reached a stage of development in stone working which is

represented, more or less, by what we now regard as “Tasmanian”. If that

is so, then all the further advances which we find that the Australian abori-

gine has made in his lithic art beyond that stage are either due to subsequent

contacts with higher cultutes, or to his own independent efforts, It has been

shown above that several important items found in the Australian stone-

working industry are either exclusive or not found, as far as is now known,

among the peoples of the nearby islands. To this extent an independent

development seems to be definitely indicated.

Generalizing, the view may be advanced that there are fair grounds for

considering that whatever and whenever his early origin, the Australian

aborigine, as a result of his geographical isolation, and largely by his own

efforts, has differentiated himself [rom the outside world by successfully

accommodating his life to his own particularly harsh environment, and in

so doting has evolved a varied and efficient culture which includes many

traits {especially marked when the techniques employed in the manufacture

of stone tools is considered) that show parallel development with other

primitive Stone Age cultures of the world. Alternatively (and this docs not

seem at all likely) we are faced with the explanation that Australia is an

unique emporium and custodian of various primitive arts and customs

acquired, down through many ages, from all quarters of the globe.

REFERENCES

(1) Daymsox, D. S. 1937 The Relationship of Tasmanian and Australian Cultures. Publ.

Philadelphia Anth. Soe, 25th Anniv. Studies, 1, pp, 47-62

(2) Davison, D, S. 1938 North-Western Australia and the Question of Iniluence from

the East Indies. Jour. Amer. Orient, Soc., 58, No. 1, pp. 61-80

{3} Camruett, T. D., and Noons, H. V. V. 1943 Some Aboriginal Camp-sites in the

Woakwine Range Region of the South-East of South Australia. Rec. 5. Aust.

Mus., 7, No. 4, pp. 371-395

(4) Matony, D. J. 1943 The Problem of the Antiquity of Man in Australia. Mem. Nat.

Mus., Melbourne, No. 13, pp. 7-56

(5) McCarruy F. D., Brametr, E, und Noone, H. V. V. 1946 The Stone Implements of

Australia. Mem. Aust. Mus, Sydney, 9, pp. 1-94

(6) Movius H. L., Ir. 1944 Early Man and Pleistocene Stratigraphy in Southern and

Eastern Asia, Papers Peab, Mus, Harvard Univ,, 19, iti, pp. 1-125 (out of print).

See ralso: ficd, 1949 The Lower Palaeolithic Cultures of Southern and Hastertt

Asia. Trans. Amer. Phil. Soc., 38 iv, pp. 329-420

(7) Noose, HV. V. 1943 Some Aboriginal Stone Lmplements of Western Australia,

Rec. 5S. Aust. Mus., 7, No. 3, pp. 271-280

(8) Noowe, H, V. V, 1943 Some Aspects of Aboriginal Stone Cultures, Mankind, 3,

No. 5, pp. 136-139

(9) Noone, H. V. V. 1949 Some Implements of the Australian Aborigines with European

Parallels. Man, 49, art. 146, pp, 111-114

(10) Porreus, S. D, 1931 The Psychology of a Primitive People—a Study of the Aus-

tralian Aborigine. New York and London, 438 pp.

(11) Trspace, N. B, 1937 Relationship of the Extinct Kangaroo Island Culture with

Cultures of Australia, ‘Tasmania and Malaya, Rec. S. Aust. Mus, 6, No. 1,

pp. 39-60

LAKE EYRE IN FLOOD, 1950 —- MUDS, SALTS, ETC

BY CHARLES FENNER

Summary

Lake Eyre lies in a great tectonic (probably Plesitocene) sag or downwarp in northern South

Australia. It has a vast catchment area of about 400,000 square miles, mostly arid to semi-arid. Now

and then, in the history of white occupation, there have been shallow pools of water brought down

by the endoreic streams from Queensland, South Australia, and Northern Territory. The shore line

is about 40 feet below sea level, and the depth of the lake, when full, appears to be something about

20 feet, making the bottom approximately 60 feet below sea level. But, with an evaporation of

nearly ten feet per year, these pools soon dry up, and for the most part “Lake” Eyre has been no

more than a vast playa or salt-pan, nearly 4, 000 square miles in extent.

LAKE EYRE IN FLOOD, 1950 — MUDS, SALTS, ETC

By Chances FENNER*

[Read 12 April 1951]

Lake Eyre lies in a great tectonic (probably Pleistocene) sag or down-

warp in northern South Australia. It has a vast catchment area of about

400,000 square miles, mostly arid to semi-arid. Now and then, in the history

of white occupation, there have been shallow pools of water brought down

by the endoreic streams from Queensland, South Australia, and Northern

Territory. The shore line is about 40 fect below sea level, and the depth of

the lake, when full, appears to be something about 20 feet, making the

bottom approximately 60 feet below sea level. But, with an evaporation of

nearly ten feet per year, these pools soon dry up, and for the most part

“Lake” Eyre has been no more than a vast playa or salt-pan, nearly 4,000

square miles in extent,

It naturally attracted little interest. Rut in 1949 and im the early winter

of 1950, as well as in later months of the same year, exceptional floods

occurred in the Cooper, Diamentina, Finke, Warburton, Macumba, Frome,

and other contributing streams, and the Lake became full of water for the

first time in recorded history, (over 100 years). This aroused the interest

of various enthusiastic young men, mostly of the HKrooks and Bonyihon

families, The area was visited by car, flown over by aeroplane, and boats

were launched for exploratory purposes.

In 1923 G. II. Halligan, of Sydney, flew over Lake Eyre, and noted well-

defined deltas at the mouths of the principal streams, tree-lile deltas as

pictured by Holmes (Walkabout, November 1950), A few months. luter

Halligan made an effort to effect a boat landing at the mouth of the Frome

River, but found the lake “dry as far as he could see.” In 1929, Dr. C. T.

Madigan flew over the “Jake,” but could detect no water, and put forward

his belief that the lake would never fill again.

Howchin mentions that despite its enormous evaporation each year of

almost 120 inches, Lake Eyre is not excessively salt as compared with other

internal basins stich as the Great Salt Lake and the Dead Sea, but its exact

salinity was not then known. This fact, taken with the recent period of

fertility (plant and atiimal life of the later Diprotodon Age, Pleistocene to

Recent) suggests that Lake Eyre has been formed within comparatively

late geological times,

Warren Bonython and party have also visited the lake seyeral times. to make

records of evaporation, salinity, ete.

The purpose of this note is to describe four interesting specimens handed

to Mr, H. M. Hale (Director South Australian Museum) by Mr. H. G. Brooks

in July, 1930, as well as my own impressiotis of a flight over the lake in

October, 1950.

No. 1 was a sample of water irom 15 miles inside the lake. It was clear,

with a small amount of clay that settled as sediment. It is fresh to the taste

and is apparently characteristic Cooper Creek flood water. From the air

the salt-water parts of the lake appear as a beautiful green-blue colour; the

fresh-water portions are brown with mud. The whole outlook upon this rare

inJand sea was beautiful and impressive,

* South Australian Museum,

Trans. Roy- Suc. S. Aust., 74, September 1952

No, Z2 specimen was of some shore sands. These have been examined

under the lens and tested with acid, ete.; they are wholly of translucent

quartz, with an occasional fragment of black material, possibly ironstone,

(Plate i, fig. 2). All the grains were of fairly even size and equally waterworn

flattish and irregular in outline, The largest pieces are about 3 mm, in their

longest diameter, and the smallest range down to 1 mm. They closely

resemble in shape the material of a shingle beach, except that their size is

so small and their composition so regular, They suggest a fairly long historic

period of shore-line erosion.

No, 3 is the most interesting of the specimens, consisting af a handful

of wet plastic mud from the bottom vf the lake, which had stuck to the oars

of the boats used. When handed to the writer by Mr. [ale it had the can-

sistency of plasticene, but black and sticky. It was placed on a table in the

Museum, In a few weeks it had dried, and had developed an extraordinary

covering of long, transparent, twining hair-like crystals. These were photu-

graphed on 15/8/50.

In, order to obtain a better and unbroken specimen, the mud and erystals

were wetted and worked up to their original muddy appearance; this mud

was placed in a ring-like form in a glass dish on 17/8/50. In five days the

ficst signs appeared of short upright crystals growing from the crystalline

content that had been sealed up in the mud, In three weeks a rich crap of

shining transparent crystals had again appeared, These did not resemble

any known muneral, least of all the cubic crystals of sodium chloride, which

mineral was, of course, the one most to be expected,

Dr. 5. W. Pennycuick, of the University of Adelaide, kindly analyzed

a specimen, and proved it to consist of over 90% common salt, with a small

amount of sulphates.

Because of the extraordinary hair-like and twining habit of the crystals,

it was considered worth while having a second photograph taken and

recorded, which was done on 20/10/50, after about eight weeks drying.

During the period of growth the specimen was covered by a glass basin, and

was nut subjected to any air movement whatever, (Plate i, fig. 1). Current min-

eralogical text books describe salt (NaCl) as occurring in various forms:

cubic, granular, massive, columnar, éte., but not as twisting hair-like crystals.

Prof. Sir Edgeworth David had suggested that in the Pleistocene Ice

Age, when Tasmania and the Kosciusko areas were glaciated, “Lake Eyre

was probably about ten times as large as it is at present, and over 200 feet

deep, extending to beyond Lake Frome in the south-east and nearly to

Cordillo Downs on the north-easi.’ (Explanatory notes to a new geological

map of Australia: David, 1932).

During what may become an historic flood period, in October, 1950, when

north Lake Eyre was brimming full, and the Cooper, Diamentina, Alberga,

Mucumba, Finka, and cther endoreic rivers were Hooded, the writer was in

a plane which fiew at a low level over the lake and river mouths, thence

eastward till the eastern shores of Lake Frome were visible. A careful look-

eut was kept for possible lake terraces or structures of the ancient larger

Lake Eyre (“Lake Dicri"), but apart irom some suggestive “cliffs” nothing

definite was te be seen, A land search for these ancient terraces is desirable.

It is clear that there is great scientific interest in Lake Eyre, and it is

hoped that further information will steadily be collected, as is at present

being done by Messrs. H. G, Brooks, Elliott Price, Eric Bonython, and sthers

already mentioned, Lake Callabonna is adjacent to the Lake Eyre system,

and here, many years ago were found the remains of the giant marsupial

(Diprotodon), the giant flightless birds (Genyornis), turtles, crocodiles, lung-

fish, kangaroos, molluscs and other animals and plants that must but recently

have become extinct, It is hoped that further excursions, surface excavations,

and collections may soon be made from this mysterious and fascinating

region. It was to the generosity of the late Sir ‘Thomas Elder and the

scientific skill and persistence of Sir Edward Stirling and Mr. A. Zietz that

we owe the wonderful discoveries of over 50 years ago.

Before the period of post-glacial desiccation set in, forests with figs and

tree-ferns flourished at Fossil Creek, near Oodnadatta, and this was probably

the case elsewhere in that great depression. More remains of the giant

flightless bird, Genyornis newtoni, are much needed, for the specimens obtain-

ed have been few and much broken. They were collected over 50 years ago.

It is true also that we need more knowledge of the Liprotodan australis, sa

that we may be better able to picture the animal as it lived and moved;

at least four scientific efforts to reconstruct this animal have been made, and

each is very unlike the other; of all of them the reconstruction pictured by

C, H. Angas seems to be the most unlikely for an animal which, in a

relatively brief period, extended its domain over all Australia.

The salinity of the waters (sample 4) is alsa of interest. Mr. H. Brooks

brought in some salty water from far out in the lake, this was handed to me

on 26/10/30. A sample was sent to the Department of Mines for azalysis,

and this was done by Mr. T. W. Dalwood. I have compared it with the

salinity of the oceans,

The salinity of the oceans is remarkably constant, though there are

minor differences in the oceans and larger seas, The salinity is about 3°3%

to 3°7%. This diminishes towards the Poles; also it diminishes to a depth

of &800-1,000 fathoms, and thence increases towards the bottom of the ocean

beds; 2,311 to 2,616 grains per gallon.

The salts of Lake Eyre, as determined by Mr. Dalwood are:

Grains per gallon

Sodium chloride eh pel bake wy 2647°8

Calcium sulphate iad ae pr) Re 85°43

Magnesium sulphate 2.000... ee sees 28°86

Magnesium chloride .... peed wast wer, 19-34

Calcium carbonate x... cM mt oe 6°67

2788-10

Stated in another way, the figures are:

Grains per gallon

Chlorine ny weg (gaty aes wis 1620°5

Sodium = Qang — wie ne 1041-7

SO, radicle vive vas ang’ svad sen5 83°31

Calcium sess dele evi west nis 27-82

Magnesium Lins inp <A a whee 10°77

CO, radicle sa? eat Ge eas ea 4-00

2788-10

This gives us a salinity for Lake Fyre of 3-983% when in full flood,

which occurs at most once in 100 years. As the waters evaporate this will,

of course, rise towards 100% salinity, The salinity of the mtds is extra-

ordinarily high, as shown in earlier paragraphs, but thesé muds have not

been analysed.

Thus the salinity of the Lake Eyre samples, when in full flood, is

definitely greater than that of the oceans. This appears to be a matter of

extreme interest, and worthy of placing on record along with the account

of the muds, sands, etc. From the air the tree-like shapes of the deltaic

muds are noticeable, as recorded by Halligan. It may be a century before

further observations can be made of Lake Eyre in flood, so that these notes

appear worthy of record in scientific literature,

REFERENCES

(1) Davin, Sir T. W. Epceworta 1932 Explanatory Notes to a new Geological Map of the

Commonwealth of Australia. Sydney

(2) Mawson, Str Douctras 1950 Occurrence of Water in Lake Eyre, South Australia.

Nature, 166

(3) Hotmes, Coartes H. 1950 A Lake like an Inland Sea. “Walkabout,” Melbourne

(4) BonyrHon, Ertc 1950 By Boat down the Lower Cooper. “Walkabout,” Melbourne

Trans. Roy. Soe. S. Aust, 1952 Vol. 75, Plate

Fig. 1

The mass of hair-like salt crystals that developed

from a sample of Lake Eyre mud.

Fig. 2

The small shingle-like abraded quartz crystals

found along the shores of the lake,

THE DACETINE ANT GENUS MESOSTRUMA BROWN

BY WILLIAM L. BROWN, JR. (COMMUNICATED BY G. F’. GROSS)

Summary

The author described the characteristics of the genus Mesostruma and of M. laevigata n. sp. (from

the Victorian Mallee), and M. turneri (from the vicinity of Mackay, Queensland). The validity of

the species M. monstrosa Viehmeyer is also discussed.

THE DACETINE ANT GENUS MESOSTRUMA BROWN

By Witiram L. Brown, Jr.*

(Communicated by G, F, Gross)

[Read 12 April 1951]

Text Fig. 1, a-c

SUMMARY

The atithor describes the characteristics of the genus Mesostruma and of

M. laevigata n. sp (from the Victorian Mallee), and M, t#trnert (from the vicinity

of Mackay, Queensland), The validity of the species M. monstrosa Viehmeyer is

also discussed.

Mesostruma was erected in my preliminary revision (1948) to include

Epopostruma turneri Forel and an undescribed species sent by Mr. John Clark.

It is the purpose of the present paper to describe the essential features of Meso-

struma and of both included species.

\ ) YS

vas

AV ;

a. Mesostruma laevigata n.sp., small worker paratype, head, dorsal view,

b. same, lateral view of propodeal lamella and pediccl, c. M, turneri Forel,

worker cotype, lateral view of propodeal lamella and pedicel.

MesostrumMA Brown 1948

Mesostruma Brown 1948 Trans, Amer. Ent. Soc., 74, 118-119.

Epopostruma Forel 1895 Ann, Soc. Ent. Belg., 39, 424, as sub-genus of

Strumigenys, part. Emery 1897 Term. Fiizetek, 20, 573, part; idem

1922 Gen. Ins., Fasc. 174, 330, part.

Worker and female—With the general characteristics of the Epopostruma

complex, i.e. with large, dorsqlaterally placed compound eyes; broad tongue-

shaped labrum covering entirely the lesser mouthparts and biiccal aperture; palpal

segmentation, maxillary five, labial three. Antennal funiculus with five segments,

proportioned as in Epopostruma.

In generic characters intermediate between Epopostruma and Alistruma

Brown, especially the following: head shape, mandibular form, appendages of

petiole and postpetiole. Head with posterior excision less deep and lateral

occipital lobes less broadly expanded than in Epopostruma, but in both respects

less highly modified than in Altstruma, Mandibles not so elongate as in Epo-

postruma, with feebly concave external borders, the space between the shafts

proper and the middle (line of closure) filled in entirely with a semi-transparent

* Harvard University.

Trans, Roy. Soc. S, Aust., 75, September 1952

lamina, this lamina with straight, culirate mesial (apical) margin and straizht

horizontal basal margin, these two margins meeting at the apex of the oblique,

spiniform basal tooth, The basal tooth is similar to that of Epopastrima ii Form

and position, but is entirely enclosed in the aforementioned lamina, through which

it is clearly visible. The dentition of the apical border restricted to the stout acute

apical tooth and a smaller subapical tooth dorsal to the apical and apparently

tepresenting the reduced dorsal tooth of the apical fork as seen in Epopostruma.

Alitrunk much as in 4listruma, with or without subdentiform humeri; propodeal

lamellae well developed, upper part without well defined internal tooth, Petinle

with weakly defined peduncle, well developer node, and without lateral teath or

processes of any kind, Postpetiole transverse, with broad, flat, winglike lateral

lamellate expansions resembling those of Microdaceton Santschi from the Ethio-

pian region,

Sculpture much like that of Epopostruma, the dorsum of the head and often

other parts of the body with spaced circular foveolae or fossettes, each tubercilate

and bearing a much reduced, scarcely detectable hair. These foveolae are smaller

and more numerous than in Efopostruma, Pilosity appressed or subappressed,

resembling a very dilute pubescence. Colour varying shades and combinations af

ferrugineous, but much darker colouration, may easily exist in members of this

genus as yet unknown.

Male unknown.

diate te Sirumigenys (Epopostrumd) turnert Forel, designated by Brown,

1948.

Mesostruma turneri and M, laevigata spp, nov. are quite distinct from each

other, bul preserve the essential generic characters in unequivocal form. The

genus 3s uf great interest in its clearcut intermediate phylogentic position, connect-

ing Epopostrume, with strumigeniform head and mandibles, to Alistrima, which

has the head and mandible form, as well as other striking characters of a con-

vefgent mature, similar to those of Smithistruma. It now seems clear that

Epopostruma, Hexadaceten Brown and the Ethiopian Micredaceton are the

primitive members of the Epopostruma complex, since the general head form and

gnathal apparatus which I call “'strumigeniform” occurs in all four recent dacetine

lines (subtribes} or complexes; it is the only one known in the Orectagnathus

complex (Arestognathiti?) and the Daceton complex (Dacetiti), of which the

latter group is to be regarded as the most primitive surviving dacetine line on the

basis of obvious characters.

Amony the Epopostrumiti, the genus Alstruma occupies a central position in

the derived half of the subtribe haying triangular mandibles with serially denticu-

late apical margins and alifort expansions of both petiole and postpetiole.

Colobestruma Wheeler and Clarkistruma Brown are aberrant derivatives of

Alistrwma, as ig evident From their structure, Mesostruma therefore appears to

link the “higher” and “lower” halves of the subtribe. Disregarding the extra-

Australasian Micredaceton, we see a truly remarkable series of “step genera”

among the living epopostrumites, All of these steps are existing today in Aus-

tralia and New Guinea (the latter region supports one species of Altstruma as

©) The four recett and one fossil complexes within the tribe Dacetini may be

treated as subtribes. I prefer to use the suffix “ati* rather than “-jna’ because the latter ts

foo much like a great mary (nominative singular) generic name endings, The suffix here

used is extremely rare aS a termination for generic names, and has the further advantage of

differing from the vernacular expressions used for taxonomic groups in all common languages

employed in the modern literahire. The subtribal names m the Dacetini, with their type genera

in parentheses, are as follows: Dacetiti (Daceton); Orectognathiti (Orectognathus) ; Epo-

postrumiti (Epopostruma) ; Strnmigenitt (Strumgenys) ; Hypopomyrmiciti (A ypopomyrmer).

All of these subtribal names are here proposed for the first time.

so far known), and there is no reason to accept them as other than the actual

surviving stages in the evolution of the group. This evolution is al] the more

remarkable when one considers its trend. The most derivative of the genera,

Clarkistruma, is remarkably convergent in structure, habits and habitat to Smfhr-

struma Brown, a genus derived from Strwemigenys-like ancestors which is par-

ticularly well developed in the warmer parts af the North Temperate Zone.

Smithistruma is absent from Australia so far as is known; it has reached certain

mountainous regions of western New Guinea, but has not yet been found on the

eastern half of that island, in spite of some very thorough dacetine collecting by

Biré and others, One is tempted iu draw the conclusion that the elongation of

the head, shortening of the mandibles, and development of the extraordinary

aliform structures of the pedicel, which are in many respects similar to the

spongiform appendages su well developed m Smithistruma of cooler regions, are

all modifications which have developed in response to the stimulation of an unfilled

ecological niche, That the short-mandibulate forms are best developed and most

numerous in species and individuals in the cooler parts of Australia and Tasmania

certainly is a fact, and one strengthening the belief that these species were

developed to meet the challenge of the same sort of opportunity which led to the

evolution of SmtlAtstruma.

Several stocks of the apparently more efficiently competing Strumigeniti have

reached Australia from the direction of New Guinea, but it is evident that these

migrants have come into the continent relatively recently, for they have failed

in all cases to produce forms sufficiently different to merit recognition of even

separate species-groups from those known in the Indo-Papuan region, and the

total number of species is few. Strumigenys perplexa (Fred. Smith) is the only

strumigenite known to have reached Victoria and Tasmania, and this species

is an cficient tramp through commerce. Had S!rumigenys artived earlier in

Australia, the evolution of the epopostrumites would probably have taken a very

different course. As it is, the Epopastrumiti present one of the most perfect

living evolutionary series imaginable, with Hexedecton near the base and

Clorkistruma at the apex. The latter genus has strongly fused second, third

and fourth funiculat segments, a condition also found in some strumigenite

genera, particularly the probably recently evolved Miccosiruma of the Ethiopian

region.

Mesostruma, to teturn to the original subject of this paper, is a rare atid

little-known group. Both laevigata and turnert are known only from the type

callections, and neither collection was accompanied by ecological data. Laegate

cettainly, and ¢urneri probably, were taken in yather dry, warm areas, where

probably they were found under stones or logs, Since both Epopostruma and

Alistruma are predatory upon Collembola (Brown, unpublished notes), it seems

prciaile that Mesostruma also follows this very deep-seated dacetine mode of

iving.

MrsostrumMa TURNER? (Forel)

(Text fig. 1, c)

Strumigenys (Eeepneirama) turneri Forel, 1895, Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., 39, 424,

worker.

Epopastruma turneri Emery 1922, Gen. Ins., Fase, 174, 330,

Mesostruma turnaeri Brown, 1948, Trans, Amer. Ent. Soc., 74, 119,

Worker—A cotype sent by Mr. Clark measured 3-0 mm. in synthetic aggre-

gate length (TL-). Head length (HT) 0°76 mmm.; mandibular extension (ML)

() Measurements. and ifidices used here are essentially as in my other papers on

the dacetine ants. For explanations, see Mushi, xx, 2 (1949), A much more thorough

explanation will appear in a forthcoming article soan to be published im the Atnerican

Midland Naturalist;

0-34 mm.; maximum measurable length of alitrunk (WL) 0-84 mm: cephalic

index (CI) 100; mandibulo-cephalic index (MI) 45. A second cotype sent by

Mr. I. Donisthorpe from the British Museum had an IIL of 0°80 mm.; MI 43,

CI 98. Two or three other cotypes seen in Australian museums were close to

these in size and proportions, but were not actually meastired. Sufficient material

is nut available for me to say much about the degree of polymorphism it the

worker caste of this species,

Distinguished by the broad, convex head, with very convex, protruding eyes,

Humeri broadly and evenly rounded, without traces of angulation or dentation.

Propodeal lamellae and petiole as in fig. 1c. Body in general rather opaqvely

sculptured, with spaces between foveolae mostly minutely teticulate, coriaceous

or subgranulose; segment I of gaster with dorsum finely striate longitudinally

and suhopaque for more than the basal half of its length, Head ferrugineons in

colour, darker than the rest of the body, which is ferrugineous yellow, gastric

segment I dorsally lighter yellow.

Female and male unknown to me.

Type locahty—Mackay, Queensland (Gilbert Turner, May 1894). Catypes

in the Fore] Collection, British Museum (Natural History), J. Clark collection,

and in several of the larger Australian museums, The locality near Mackay,

Where Turner probably collected this ant, is now apparently under cultivation,

Originally, it was more than likely dry, low woodland like that covering most

of the coastal strap of Queensland.

Mesestruma laevigata, n. sp_

(Text fig. 1,a,b}

Worker—Holotype and 14 paratypes. Weakly polymorphic, TL 2-9 to

42 mm.; HL 0°66 to 0°89 mm.; WL 0:72 to 1-12 mm.; Cl 85 (smaller indi-

viduals) to 93 (larger individuals); MI 37 to 44 (70% of individuals 39 to 41,

mean 40, no correlation between MI and HL or €1). Present series, irom a single

nest, too small and so not suitable for statistical analysis, but shows slight ten-

dency loward division into large, broad-headed and small, narrow-headed castes.

Head shape as in fig, la; narrower than in turneri, with larger but only

weakly convex eyes. Humeral angles acutely subdentate. Propodeal lamellae

as in figure, the upper and lower angles varying slightly in prominence; trans~

lucent, without distinct trace of solid tooth in upper angle. Petiole narrower and

relatively less massive than that of turner’; posterior descending face of node

weakly or not at all convex seen in profile,

Body over-all much more smooth and shining than in furneri, with the

spaces between the foveolae, especially on the thorax, petiole and postpetiole wider

ant smooth and polished for the most part. Gastric dorsum smooth and shining,

with a few minute, indistinct vestiges of Jongitudinal costulae or striae in the

articular groove between postpetiole and gaster. Colour medium ferrugineous

yellow, gaster lighter, clear honey-yellow.

Female—Gynetype and one paragynetype, TL 4:7, 5-4 mm; IIL 0-92,

0-93 mm.; WL 1:36, 1;40 mm.; CI 91, 93; MI 37, 39. Dealate. Differing only

in the usual features of full sexuality from the workers.

Type locality—Sea Lake, Victoria (J. C. Goudie). Sea Lake is in north-

western Victoria, in the dry Mallee District. Dominant vegetation in this region

is the shrubby mallee (£ucalyptus dumosa and related forms), but I have no

information as to the precise type of nest site.

The holotype and gynetype, pith paratypes, returned to Mr. John Clark, jor

eventual placement in the Comunonwealth Scientific and Industrial Research

Organization collection at Canberra; paratypes also in the collections of the

Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard University, the U.S. National

Museum, the South Australian Museum, and elsewhere,

? MEsOSTRUMA MONSTROSA

Mesostruma monsirosa Viehmeyer wicertae sedis Epopostruma monstrasa

Viehmeyer, 1925, Ent. Mitt. 14, 30-31, female?

? Mesostruma monstrosau Brown, 1948, Trans, Amer. Ent. Soc, 74, 119.

gynandromorph?

This species was described from a speciinen showing right-left asymmetry

of the mandibles; from the somewhat vague details given, one would assume it

to be a gynandromorph. Viehmeyer conrpared it with furnert and with Epo-

postruma quadvispinosa Forel. Adapted extracts from the original description:

“Length 4°5 mm. Reddish-brown, gaster dark brown, Mandibles basically

as in furneri, with the same basal tooth. Right shorter, a bit broader than the

left, and with a more convex (mehr gebogen) outer border. The left with two

quite similar acute teeth at least three times as long as broad. The right has only

the under one similarly formed; the upper one is only a short, truncate piece (as

in Odentomachus) in appeafance.”

“Head longer and more slender than in twrmeri, more deeply excised behind.”

Viehmeyer mentioned that the closest form is E. quadrispinosa, and the de-

scription of the left mandible, especially the (apical?) teeth, seems to bear this out.

However, the description as a whole is confused and vague and seems to show

that the author had no clear idea of either of the two species against which com-

parison was made, This form can only be considered hopelessly uncertainly

placed until it is critically re-examined by a competent worker. The locality

given is Trial Bay, but Mr. Clark (im litt.) questions the accuracy of this and

other Australian locality citations of Viehmeyer, After having dealt with this

and other examples of Viehmeyer’s systematic publication, { am inclined to the

opinion that not only the genus and type locality are to be questioned, but perhaps

even the tribal placement in the Dacctini. It is unfortiinate that this apparently

abnormal specimen was ever fotmally named.

Key for the separation of the two adequately known Mesostruma species,

based on the workers.

Humeri acutely stbdentate; gaster largely smooth and shining (Vic- ,

torian Mallee) .... ree Ne ale ith wis ease an ... laevigata 1. sp.

Humeri gently rounded; gaster finely longitudinally striate over the basal

half or more of the dorsum of segment I (vicinity of Mackay,

Queensland) =... Gon ey “hi bees ata iia aid wa. turneri (Forel)

REFERENCES CITED

Brown, W. L. 1948 A preliminary generic revision of the higher Dacetini

(Hymenoptera: Formicidae) Trans. Amer. Ent. Soc., 74, 101-129, figs.

TWO UNDESCRIBED AUSTRALIAN GASTEROMYCETES

BY G. H. CUNNINGHAM (COMMUNICATED BY J. B. CLELAND)

Summary

Hymenogaster effodiendus n. sp. Peridium pyriforme, basi brevibus radicibus ad. Substratum

adjunctum, nodoso-areolatum, viriditate flavum, siccitate brunneo-rubrum, a 600 p crassum, duobus

Stratis, interiore parte pseudoparenchymatosa, 30-70 u crassa, brunnea, exteriore hyphis in radiis

laxo ordinatis et in matrice crassa et glutinosa sitis. Gleba pallide ferruginea, cellulis ellipticis, ad

0.5 mm. longis, a latere compressis, vacuis, lamellis tramae 90-150 u crassis, hyphis hyalinis

intextis, basidiis 2-4 sporis. Sporae globosae aliquot subglobosae, 9-12 u diam, endospora fusca, | p

crassa, epispora fusca, glutinosa, 1.5 u crassa, fortiter areolata et opaca, tecta.

TWO UNDESCRIBED AUSTRALIAN GASTEROMYCETES

G. H, Cunninouam*

(Communicated by J. B. Cleland)

[Read 10 May 1951]

Hymenogaster effodiendus n. sp.

*Peridium pyriforme, basi brevibus radicibus ad substratum adjunctum,

nodoso-areolatum, viriditate flavum, siccitate brunneo-rubrum, a 600 crasstum,

duobus stratis, interiore parte pseudoparenchymatosa, 30-70 crassa, bruntiea,

exteriore hyphis in radiis laxo ordinatis et in matrice crassa et glutinosa sitis,

Gleba pallide ferruginea, cellulis ellipticis, ad 05 mm. longis, a latere compressis,

yacuis, lamellis tramae 90-150 » crassis, hyphis hyalinis intextis, basidiis 2-4 sporis.

Sporae globosae aliquot subglobosae, 9-12 diam., endospora fusea, 1 u. crassa,

epispora fusca, glutinosa, 1-5 » crassa, fortiter areolata et opaca, tecta.

Plants pyriform, 5-7 mm. tall, 4-5 mm. diameter, attached by a short rooting

base 1-2 mm. long. Peridium nodose-areolate, when fresh bright yellow, drying

reddish-brown, to 600 @ thick, probably viscid when fresh; of two layers, att inner

natrow zone of pseudoparenchyma, 30-70, thick, with hyphal cells coloured

brown, the outer of loose hyphae radially arranged and embedded in a thick

gelatinous matrix. Gleba pallid ferruginots, with a large sterile basal part, fitm,

cells elliptical, laterally compressed, to 0-5 mm. long, empty ; tramal plates 90-150

thick, of woven partly gelatinized hyphae, hyaline, slightly scissile; basidia

2-4 spored. Spores globose, a few subglobose, 9-12 » diameter, or 10-12 x 9-11 ,,

shortly pedicelled, epispore fuscus, 1 thick, covered with a gelatinous fuscus

epispore 15 » thick and strongly ateolate, opaque.

Aabitat—Buried 35-50 mm. in peaty soil.

Distribution—Victoria. Glenelg River, June 1950, H. H. Finlayson,

Plants were collected upon the surface of the ground, being dug up from

their place of origin 1-5-2 in. beneath the surface by small marsupials. In its

double peridium, particularly the structure of the exterior layer, the species

resembles. Hymenogaster visctdus (Mass. and Rodw.) Dodge and Zell, It differs

in the small size and different shape of the peridium, and globose almost opaque

smaller pores.

Secotium fragariosum n. sp.

‘ Peridium pyriforme, 8-12 x 6-12 mm., colore fragorum, tenuiter tubercu-

losum, obscuratum, hyphis intextis, siccitate brunneo-rubrum, 466-600 » crassum,

Stipes pallide luteus, 5-10x 0-5-1 mm.,, aequalis, fibrillosus, cavus. Gleba cellu-

losa, pallide ferruiginea, Jamellis tramae 25-75 » crassis. Sporae ellipticae, rotundis

capitibus, 15-19 x 10-13 p», epispora hyalina, levi, 1-5» erassa-

Peridium pyriform, 8-12 mm. tall, 6-12 mm. diameter, apex rounded, base

truncate, excavated, or decurrent, exteriorly strawberry-colour, finely tuberculose,

dull, drying reddish-brown, 400-600 % thick when dry, warts to 150, tall and

broad, of densely woven mainly parallel partly gelatinized hyphae, in section bay-

brown, shining and appearing cartilaginous, with pigment granules on walls of

the outer hyphae. Stem light yellow, 5-10x 0-5-1 mm., fibrillose, equal, hollow;

* Plant Diseases Division, Department of Scientific and Industrial Research,

Auckland, New Zealand,

©) IT am grateful ta Miss B. Hooton, Librarian of this Division, for preparing

Latin diagnoses,

Trans, Roy, Soc. S. Aust., 75, September 1952

columella free from the gleba save at the apex. Gleba cellular, pallid ferruginous

cells elongate-elliptical, laterally compressed, numerous, to 2 mm. long; tramal

plates 27-75 » thick, of woven mainly parallel hyphae, not scissile. Spores elliptical

with rounded ends, with or without a brief pedicel, 15-19 x 10-13, epispore

hyaline, smooth, 1:5 p thick.

Habitat—Growing solitary on the ground amongst grass.

Distribution—Norfolk Island. Cascade Bay, September 1947, W. Cottier.

Specimens were collected growing amongst grass under forest trees and in

appearance when fresh closely resembled in colour and shape fruits of wild

strawberry. The species shows a general resemblance to small specimens of

S. erythrocephalum Tul., differing in the roughened peridium, colour, and thick-

walled spores,

AUSTRALIAN ACANTHOCEPHALA, NO. 9

BY T. HARVEY JOHNSTON AND S. J. EDMONDS

Summary

. An account is given of the larval stage of Corynosoma clavatum Goss from the mesentery of

a fish, Platycephalus fuscus, South Australia.

. Micracanthocephalus hemirhamphi Baylis is recorded from a South Australian garfish,

Hemirhamphus intermedius.

. Moniliformis semoni (Linstow) is described from eastern Australian bandicoots, Isoodon

torosus, I. obesulus and Perameles nasuta.

. The large acanthocephalan recorded from introduced species of Rattus in Australia is

regarded as Moniliformis dubius Meyer.

AUSTRALIAN ACANTHOCEPHALA, No. 9

By T. Harvey Jonnston and S. J. Enmonps *

[Read 10 May 1951]

SUMMARY

1. An account is given of the larval stage of Corynasoma clavatum Goss from

the mesentery of a fish, Platycephalus fuscus, South Australia.

2, Micracanthocephalus hemirhamphi Baylis is recorded from a South Australian

garfish, Hemirhamphus intermedius.

3, Moniliformis semoni (Linstow) is described from eastern Australian bandi-

coots, [soodam torosus, I, obesulus and Perameles nasuta.

4. The large acanthocephalan recorded from introduced species of Raftus in

Australia is regarded as Moniliformis dubtus Meyer.

We are indebted to Dr. E. A. Derrick, Institute of Medical Research, Bris-

bane, for material from bandiconts, Jsooden foresus, and from rats from south-

eastern Queensland. The remainder was collected by the senior author. Mr.

W. A. Rainbow, Australian Museum, Sydney, kindly sent us a photograph of

Linstow’s figures of Moniliformis semoni. Al measurements given in this paper,

unless otherwise stated, ate for worms cleared in methyl salicylate. Specimens

of the parasites have been deposited in the South Australian Museum.

CoryNosoma cLAVATUM Goss (encysted), Platycephalus fuscus, St. Vincent

Gulf, S. Aust.

MICRACANTHOCEPHALUS HuMIRUAMPHI Baylis. Hetmiriiumphus intermedius,

Port Willunga, S. Aust.,

MoniLirorMis semMont (Linstow), Jseodon obesulus, Sydney, N.S.W.; Lsoedon

torosus, S.E. Old; Perameles nusuta, Gostord, N.S.W..

Mowtuirormtis nuprus Meyer. Rattus vatius, Brisbane, Sydney; Rattus norvegi-

cus, Brisbane, Sydney.

CorYNOSOMA CLAVATUM Goss. Fig. 1-3

About twelve larval specimens of Corynosoma clavatiusm Goss (1940) were

found attached to the mesentery of a flathead, Plalycephalus fuscus, caught in

St. Vincent Gulf, South Australia, in November 1933. The worms were removed

in the encysted form from the fish and the proboscis of all became wholly or

partly everted when the organisms were placed in fresh water. Some of the

parasites came completely out of their cyst walls. We have had to rely on the

size and spination of the proboscis for our identification of the specimens.

The length of the proboscis is 0°69-0°75 mm. and its maximum width is

0:30-0'32 mm. It is armed with 16 rows, each of 10 hooks. The anterior six

hooks of each row are larger and bear rooting processes. The size and shape

of some of them is shown in fig. 3. ‘The proboscis sheath is double-walled and

about 1:0 mm. long.

Thete is a neck, 0:59-0°70 mm, long and 0-22-0°51 mm. wide at its base.

The length of the body of the parasites (measured from the base of the neck)

is 2°1-2°6 mm.; and the maximum width is 1-0-I1-5 mm, The anterior portion

of the body bears numerous sinall spines. The genital aperture of the completely

freed worms is surrounded by a few very small spines.

* University of Adelaide.

‘Trans, Roy, Soc, S, Aust., 75, September 1952

C. clavatum has now been reported from a number of hosts in Australia.

The adult form was described by Goss (1940) from shags, Phalacrocorax varius,

P. melanoleucus and P. ater from Western Australia. In South Australia the

adult has been reported by Johnston and Best (1942) from P, varius and from a

seal, Gypsophoca dorifera,

Fig. 1-3—Corynosoma clavatum: 1, proboscis of larva; 2, larva; 3, some proboscis

hooks. Fig. 4-7—Micracanthocephalus hemirhamphi: 4, body of male; 5, proboscis

6, posterior region of female; 7, eggs. Fig. 8-9—Moniliformis dubius: 8, proboscis;

; 9, eggs.

MICRACANTHOCEPHALUS HEMIRHAMPHI Baylis. Fig. 47

One male and two female specimens of this parasite were found in the

intestine of a garfish, Hemirhamphus intermedius, caught at Port Willunga, South

Australia, in March 1934, The proboscis of only one specimen, a female, was

in a sufficiently satisfactory condition for measuring.

The male specimen is slightly flattened. The length of the body is 2'8 mm.

and its maximum width 0°35 mm. The proboscis sac is 0°7 mm. long. Two

testes, arranged in tandem, may overlap each other but not the proboscis sac.

The cement glands are pressed closely together and we have been unable to deter-

mune their number. The genital aperture is subterminal. There are (wo lemnisct,

each a little larger than the proboscis sac. The anterior region of the body bear

about 14 or 15 transverse rows of spines

The body length of the females is 4-04-9 mm. and the maximum width

0-44-0°70 mm, The proboscis, 0°57 mm, long and 0°20 mm. wide, is bent almost

at right angles to the body. It is armed with 12 rows of 11 hooks per row

(fig. 5), The proboscis sac is 0°70 mm. long and its width is 0-11 mm. In both

female specimens there is a finger-like appendage near the genital aperture, The

posterior region of the body of our specimen is not sharply bent so as to form

a hook as reported by Baylis. The genital aperture is lateral rather than sub-

terminal, Ellipsoidal eggs are 58-60 » long and 18-20» wide.

Macracanthocsphalus hemirhamphi was described by Baylis (1944) from

the same host species, Hemirhamphus intermedius, from Otago, New Zealand.

Monitirormis semMon! (Linstow). Fig. 10-17

Matiy specimens of this species. from bartidicoots, Iscodon torosus, from

Woombye, Nambour and Cowan Cowan, south-eastern Queensland, were sent

to us for identification by Dr. E. H. Derrick,

The parasites are long and either cylindrical or somewhat flattened, The

body shows external pseudo-segmentation and at first sight looks like that of a

cestode. The width of the worm gradually increases tewards the posterior region

and in the male is greatest in the region of the testes. The length of the male is

46-48 em.; that of the female 10°4-14-0 em, The maximum width of the ‘male

is 2°0 tm., and of the female 1-9 cm.

The small flask-shaped proboscis cofisists of an armed portion, 0-46-0-56 mm.

long, and a short unarmed portion, 0:15-0:17 mm. long. The width of the pro-

boscis anteriorly is 0-26-0°30 mm., and posteriorly G-17-0-22 mm. It seems most

likely therefore that the length of the organ given by Linstow, wiz., O°7 mm., is

that of the combined Jength of the armed and warmed portions, How to describe

the arrungement of the proboscis hooks has proved difficult. There are 12 rows

of hooks, each row consisting of three larger anterior hooks arranged longi-

tudinally and provided with strong rooting processes, followed by 10-12 smaller

and more slender hooks arranged spirally, 1e., there ate 12 rows of ahout 13-15

hooks per row. In some rows the posterior hooks are arranged somewhat irregu-

larly, Janstow described the species as possessing 21 transverse rows each of

6 hooks, and Meyer has suggested 12 rows of 10-11 hooks, Neither of these

descriptions secms to us to be satisfactory. The number of hooks is greater than

that given by these two workers.

The maximum length of the double-walled proboscis sheath ts 1:2 mm, and

its maximum width 0-4 mm. An elliptical ganglion is siluated at its base. There

are two long coiled lemnisci, The body wall is thick and appears to contain only

one collecting vessel in the lacunar system,

Two elliptical testes of approximately equal size are situated in the posterior

region of the male, Their maximum length ts 3-8 mm. and width 14mm. The

cement glands are elliptical or flask-shaped and are closely packed together. In

two specimens they ovetlap the posteriar testis, but this may have occurred during

fixation, The glands in our specimens are so tightly pressed together that we

were unable io determine directly their number. The ducts from the cement

glands, however, do not fuse but run separately to the bursa. In some males the

posterior region is flexed and flattened at about the level of the cement glands.

Saefftigen’s pouch is about 1-7 mm. long, There are well-developed penis and

bursa, The genital aperture is terminal.

The female genitalia, consisting of uterus and vagina, are about 1:0 mm.

long in the adult. The vagina is a short, stout structure. Eggs mounted in Canada

balsaim are 70-80 » long and 32-36 » wide.

WKS

“mk $+

ihe eee

“uw TO

MN if

Fig, 10-17—Moniliformis semoniz 10, anterior region; 11 some proboscis hooks;

12, adult male; 13, adult female; 14, proboscis; 15, posterior region of male; 16, T.S,

through cement ducts; 17, T_S. through proboscis sac. Fig. 12 and 13 are drawn

to same scale.

Osun

Systematic position

This species was described as Echinorhynchus (Gigantorhynchus) semoni

by Linstow (1898, 469-471), from Perameles obesulus from the Upper Burnett

River region in south-eastern Queensland. Porta (1908) and Johnston (1909,

521) transferred it to Gigantorhynchus, the latter recording the parasite from

the samme host species, Isoodon obesulius, from Sydney. Juhnston (1911, 50;

1910, xvii) also reported the presence of Gigantorhynchus sp. (?G. semont) in

Perameles nasiuta from Gosford, New South Wales; and Gigantorhynchus sp. in

Phascogale penicillata in New South Wales (1910, xvii; 1911, 50), The material

from #. nasuta belongs to M. semoni and that from Phascogale probably belonged

to the same species. Travassos (1917, 25) transferred the species to Prosthe-

worchis, Johnston and Deland (1929, 146) left it under Gigantorhynchus, Meyer

(1932) placed it in an appendix ta the Moniliformidae. We consider that the

species belongs to Moniliformis.

Montuirormis punivs Meyer. Fig, 8-9

About 25 specimens of an echinarhynch identified hy us as Moniliformuis

dubius Meyer 1932 were examined. The material was collected [rom Rattus

rettus and Jt, norvegtens by Dr. Derrick from Brisbane and by the senior author

from vats at Brisbane and Syduey. We were unable to notice any significant

difference between the material {rom the different hosts,

The worms are long and usually moniliform. The length of the males is

2-8-4-2 cm., and of the females 2-0-16°4 em, The maximum width of the male

is about 1:3 mm., and of the female 2°3 mm., excluding the flattened specimens,

The proboscis of most specimens is almost cylindrical, but in a few specimens it

is rather club-shaped. Jt varies rather considerably in length, being O°42-0:53 mm.

long, and consisting of an armed portion 0-36-@:48 mm, in length and a small

unarmed portion 0°03-0-07 mm. long. Its maximum width is 0°17-0-19 mm.

The proboscis is armed with 12 longitudinal rows of hooks, 10-11 hooks per raw.

The size, shape and atrangement of these hooks is shown in fig. 8,

The proboscis sheath is sac-like, about 0-7 mm. long and bears spiral stria-

tions. The lemnisci may be 3°5 mim, in Jength. Two testes, 1-7-2°5 mm. long

aiid 0-40-0-65 mm. wide, lie in the posterior region of the male. ‘The cement

glands are pressed closely together and the male genital aperture is terminal. Van

Cleave (1924), when describing the eggs of his @, moniliformis, which according

to Meyer (1932) and Chandler (1941) is synonymous with M. dubiws, says:

“The outer embryonic membrance is not a firm, highly resistant shell, such as. is

found in mast species of Acanthocephala, On the contrary, it is rather delicate

and subject to much distortion." This describes exactly the condition noticed

in the eggs of most of our specimens. The outer membrane is 109-]18 p long

and 46-57 » wide. Within this membrane lies a thicker elliptical shell, 76-84 4

Jong and H-MGS py, wide,

After studying a large number of moniliform Acanthocephala collected From

rats in different parts of the world, Van Cleave (1924) came to the conclusion

that ihe material which he had examined was identical with that of M_ mwuails-

formis (Bremser 1811), He redescribed the species and extended the range of

measurements of some organs.

Meyer (1932) tecognised three closely-related species of moniliform

Acanthocephala from rodents: —(1) M. moniliformis (Bremser 1811); (2)

M, dubius (syn. Monilifarmis sp. Chandler 1921; and M. moniliformis Van

Cleave 1924); and (3) M. travassasi (syn. M. moniltifornis Travassos 1917), In

addition he admitted three geographical variations within the species MZ. monili-

formis (Bremser),

Chandler (1941) considered that his Mouiliformis sp, {rom the Texas rat

was sylionymous with M_ dubins Meyer 1932, i.¢., that the name dufins was valid.

He went on to say thnt in bis opinion M, trovossosi Meyer 1932 was synonymous

with M, dubites.

Our study of a limited number of specimens, unfortunately, docs not help

much towards solving the problem of the number of valid species. The dimen-

sions of the proboscis of our specimens lie between those of M. moniliformis

(Bremser) and M. dubius Meyer. As the number and arrangement of the pro-

boscis hooks and the size and shape of the eggs of our specimens are similar to

those of M, dubius, we have placed our parasites under M, dubius. The parasite

recorded as Hormorhynchus moniliformis by one of us from rats in Sydney, Bris-

bane and North Queensland (Johnston 1909; 1912; 1913; 1918) is also M. dubins.

REFERENCES

Bayuts, H. A. 1944 Three new Acanthocephala from marine fishes of Australasia, Ann.

Mag. Nat. Hist., Ser. 11, 11, 462-472

Cuanpier, A, C, 1921 Notes on the occurrence of Moniliformis sp. in rats in Texas.

Jour. Parasit.,-7, 179-183

EAM in 1941 Specific Siatus of Moniliformis of Texas Rats. Jour, Parasit, 27,

Goss, O, 1940 Platyhelminth and Acanthocephalan parasites of local shags. Jour, Roy Soe.

W. Aust. 26, 1-13

Jonnston, T. H. 1910 Exhibits (of entozoa), Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 44, Abstr, p. xvii

N.S.W., 34, 514-523

Jounstox, T. H. 1910 Exhibits (of enozoa). Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 44, Abstr. p. xvii

Jounston, T. H. 1911 The entozoa of Monotremata and Australian Marsupialia, II. P.L.S,,

N.S.W., 36, 47-57

Jounston, T. H. 1912 Notes on some entozoa. Proc. Roy. Soc, Old., 24, 17-22

Jounston, T. H. 1918 Notes of certain entozoa of rats and mice, ete. Proc. Roy. Soc.

Qld., 30, 53-78

Jounston, T, H., and Drrann, E. W. 1929 Australian Acanthocephala, No. 1, Trans.

Roy, Soc. S. Atist., 53, 146-154 :

Jounston, T, H, and Best, E. W. 1942 Australian Acanthocephala, No. 3. Trans. Roy,

Soc. S. Awst., 66, 250-254

Linstow, QO. vow 1898 Nemathelminthen, ete. In Semon’s Zoologische Forschungsreisen in

Australien, Bd. 5, 469-471

Meyer, A. 1932 Acanthocephala. Bronn'’s Klassen and Ordmimgen des Tierreichs, Bd. 4,

2 Abt., 2 Buch, 221-233

Travassos, L. 1917 Contribuicoes, etc. Revisao dos acantocefalos brasilieros, TI. Mem. Inst;

Osw. Cruz, 9, 5-62

Vaw Curave, 11. J. 1924 Critical Study of the Acanthocephala described and identified by

Joseph Leidy. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci, Philadelphia, 76, 279-344

AN ENUMERATION OF THE VASCULAR PLANTS OF KANGAROO

ISLAND : SECOND LIST OF ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS

BY J. B. CLELAND AND J. M. BLACK

Summary

In the “Transactions of the Royal Society of South Australia,” 65, (2) 1941, we gave a list of

Additions and Corrections to our Enumeration of the Plants of Kangaroo Island. Various

additions have been made since that date and the appearance of the second edition of Parts I and

II of Black’s Flora of South Australia has led to various alterations in nomenclature.

AN ENUMERATION OF THE VASCULAR PLANTS OF KANGAROO ISLAND

Second List of Additions and Corrections

By J. B. CLecawo and J. M. Brack

[Read 14 June 195)]

In the “Transactions of the Royal Society of South Australia,” 65, (2) 1941,

we gave a list of Additions and Corrections to our Enumeration of the Plants of

Kangaroo Island. Various additions have been made since that date and the

appearance of the second edition of Parts I and II of Black’s Flora of South

Australia has led to various alterations in nomenclature,

The total number of vascular plants recorded from Kangaroo Island now

comes to 856 with 29 yarieties in addition, of which 725 and 27 yarietics in addi-

tion are natives and 131 and 2 varieties are introduced.

Attention has been called by others to the abserice of kangaroo grass

(Themeda australis) from Kangaroo Island. It is also remarkable that no species

of Lomandra has been recorded.

It is of interest to compare the number of plants now known from Kan-

gayvoo Island with those of an area on the adjacent mainland, namely the Encounter

Bay district. In the “South Australian Naturalist” from time to time we have

recorded the species found there; the Sixth List of Additional Records has been

prepared and will, we hope, be soon published in that periodical. The area extends

from the Tunkalilla Road in the west to Currency Creek in the east and embraces

the catchment areas of the Inman and Ilindmarsh Rivers. The Surveyor-General,

Mr. A. D. Smith, has kindly had estimated for us the size of this area which is

233 square miles. The area of Kangaroo Island is 1,680 square miles, For the

Encounter Bay District 948 species and 21 varieties have been noted, of which

705 species and 18 varieties are natives and 243 species and 3 varieties introduced.

Thus, though the area of the Encouriter Bay District 1s less than one-seventh of

that of Kangaroo Island, 705 species of native Australian plants are now recorded,

nearly the same as on Kangaroo Island (725), As might be expected, the intro-

duced plants are nearly double those of the Island.

In the following list, an asterisk (*) indicates an introduced species,

FILICALES

Hypolepis rugulasa, Ravine des Casoars at the Cape Borda road, Feb. 1950,

GRAMINEAE

+Stenotaphrum secumdatuon (buffalo grass), C. de Couedic. *£Arharta longi-

flora. *Phalaris tuberosa (Toowoomba canary grass), Stipa semiburbata var.

gracilis in Black's Flora, Eehinopogon ovatus, already recorded, also Rocky River.

Agrostis Billaydieri replaces Calamagrostis filiformis var. Billardieri, and 4.

avenacea replaces C. filiformis, A. aemula, Rocky River. Deyewria quadriseta

replaces C. guadriseta, and D. minor replaces C. manor, *dvena barbata (bearded

oat), Amphibromus Neesii replaces A. nervosa, Distichlis distichophylla replaces

D, spicata, Poa poaeformis replaces P, cacspitosa var, Billardiert, Poa tenera?

Stunsail Boom and Rocky Rivers. *Bromus mollis, as well as *B.hordeaceus.

*Vulpia bromoides replaces Festuca bromoides, *Scleropoa rigida. replaces F.

rigida, *Lolium subulatum, Kingscote. *Leptaurus cylindricus, Kingscote. *Pho-

liurus incurvus, Kingscote, Viyonne Bay.

Trans. Roy, Soc. S, Aust., 75, September 1982

CYPERACEAE

Schoenus nitens, already recotded, Rocky River, identified by S. T. Blake

as “forma”. Scirpus validus, S,W. River, Carex breviculmis, Rocky River

24 Nov. 1945, identified by S. T Blake.

RESTIONACEAR

Lepyrodia valliculae, perhaps the “Lepyrodia sp.” of Tepper,

LILIACEAE

*Asparagus medeolvides, White’s Lagoon. Reya umbellata replaces Burchar-

dia umbellata, flowers unusually small at Seddon, *Allium Ampeloprasum.

*A. sp., roadside near Kingscote,

TRIDACEAE

*Watsoma Meriana, densely established around the cemetery at Iarvey’s

Return, probably also at Vivonne Bay, *Romulea sp. *Moraea xeerospatha var.

monophylla.

CASUARINACEAE

Casuarina quadrivalvis. Large groves of shcoaks, often in pure sand, clothe

the upper parts of the sides of watercourses such as Breakneck, Sandy, West Bay

and the Ravine. The trunks may be one to three or four; the trees spread stightly

fanwise. The habit is unlike that of trees on the mainland which are usually

widely separated from cach other,

PROTEACEAE

Hakea Muelleriona replaces H. ulicina var. flevilis, Grevillea muricata is a

synonym of G. Rogersi. G. aspera requires confirmation,

SANTALACEAE

Eucarya replaces Fusanus.

POLYGONACEAE

*Emex australis.

CHENOPODIACEAE

Chenopodium pumilio replaces Ch, carinatum. *Ch, album, Rocky River,

Ch. ambiguwm replaces Ch. glaucum, Threlkeldia diffusa, already recorded, also

at mouths of Stunsail Boom River and Ravine des Casoars, S' alicornia: Blackiana,

coast of Flinders Chase, previously recorded as doubtful.

AMARANTHACEAE

*Amaranthus albus, Cape Borda.

AIZOACEAE

Tetragonia expansa, Cape Borda, probably a garden escape.

PoRTULACACEAE

Portulaca oleracea (purslane).

CARYOPHYLLACEAE

Polycarpon tetraphyllum.

CRUCIFERAE

*Diplotaxis tenuifolia, already recorded, also Kingscote. Lepidium hyssopt-

folium, Lepidium pseudo-ruderale is given by Black orly for our North; perhaps

this should be L. halmaturinum, Stenopetalum sp., near Rocky River. Cakile

edentula is given by Black for Kangaroo Island, not C. maritima; plants at. Kings-

cote have pinnatipartite leaves and fruits with or without horns—the two species

seem to intergrade,

LEGUMINOSAE

Acacia euthycarpa in Black’s Flora, A, Sophorae replaces A. longifolia.

Daviesia pectinata requires confirmation. Pultenaea largiflorens var. latifolia in

Black’s Flora. *Trifolium subterrancum. *Medicago truncatula, Kingscote, Rocky

River. Hardenbergia wiolacea replaces H. monophylla.

GERANTACEAE

*Erodium moschatum, Cape Borda. Pelargonium inodorum replaces P, aus-

trale var. eradioides,

RUTACEAE

Correa rubra var. orbicularis and var, puchella, both in Black’s Flora.

C. minor replaces C. rubra yar. glabra.

EUPHORBIACEAE

Beyeria Leschenaultit var. latifolia in Black’s Flora,

RHAMNACEAE

Cryptandra tomentosa in Black’s Flora. C. amera in Black’s Flora.

MYRTACEAE

Eucalyptus viminalis var. Huberiana seems to be the form of E. viminalis

at least at Rocky River. E. rugosa (R, Br.) Blakely, E. Lansdowneana (== E

odorata yar, erythandra),

UMBELLIFERAE

Trachymene heterophylla var. Tepperiin Black’s Flora. Eryngium

vesiculosum, already recorded. On Febuary 1 1950 in a drying swamp near the

mouth of S.W. River, a number of young plants were coming up which had nar-

row “jointed” leaves (like those of Lilaeopsis, which they were at first thought

to be). They had a parsley-like taste and were not rigid like the older leaves. In

“The Victorian Naturalist,” 66, (10), p. 197, February 1950, T, S. Hatt has an

article entitled “Heterophylly in the Prickfoot (Eryngium vesiculosum) in which

he notes that the young leaves are hollow and subulate and several inches long.

Black, in his description of E, Plantagineum, recorded from near Cooper’s Creek,

notes that the leaves may be “linear, flaccid and grasslike , . . , compressed-hollow

and marked with distant transverse partitions.”

ISPACRIDACEAE

Conoslephium halmaturinum—a new species (and a new genus for the State)

described by J. M. Black, Seddon, February 6 1948.

OLEACEAE

*Olea europaea (olive), Kingscote.

APOCYNACEAE

*Vinca major.

CONVOLVULACEAE

*Convolvulus arvensis, Kingscote.

LABIATAE

*Stachys arvensis,

COMPOSITAE

Helichrysum apiculatum var. minys Benth., identified by J. M. Black, road

to Cape de Couedie, February 3 1948. Picris hieracioides var. squarrosa, Kings-

vote, along the cliffs near the sea; this is evidently R, Tate’s record of P. hiera-

cioides, and as it is a native variety the * should be deleted.

ON A NEW FORM OF HETERONYMPHA PENELOPE WATERHOUSE

(LEPIDOPTERA RHOPALOCERA, FAMILY SATYRIDAE)

BY NORMAN B. TINDALE

Summary

A description is given of a new race, Heteronympha penelope maraia from the Grampian

Mountains, western Victoria. H. p. panope is recorded from altitudes of 2,400-3,800 feet on

Mount Barrow in the north-eastern highlands of Tasmania. There is a discussion on the possible

climatic significance of the development in isolation of six different races of this butterfly in

south-eastern Australia and Tasmania.

ON A NEW FORM OF HETERONYMPHA PENELOPE WATERHOUSE

(LEPIDOPTERA RHOPALOCERA, FAMILY SATYRIDAE)

By Norman B, TINDATE *

[Read 14 June 1951]

SUMMARY

A description is given af a new race, Heteronympha penelope maraia trom

the Grampian Mountains, western Victoria, H, p. panope is recorded from alti-

tudes of 2400- 3,800 feet on Mount Barrow in the north-eastern highlands of

Tasmania, There is a discussion on the possible climatic significance of the de-

velopment in isolation of six different races of this butterfly in south-eastern

Australia and Tasmania,

HETERONYMPHA PENELOPE Waterhouse

Visitmg Tasmania in January and February 1948 1 took a long series of

Heteronympha penelope panope Waterhouse, of both sexes, on Mount Barrow

in north-eastern Tasmania, at elevations of 2,400- 3,800 feet, on 9 February.

They were flying in natural grassy meadows just below a belt of Antarctic beech

forest on the north-castern slope of the mountain, also above it; all were freshly-

emerged specimens, In November 1950 some H. penelope larvae were taken,

feeding at night on soft native grasses, Pou caespttosa and Danthonia pilosa, on

the banks of Fyans Creek, Grampians, western Victoria. When reared they

proved to be a new form of this butterfly.

These fiids drew my renewed attention to the species, which, as Waterhotse

(1937) had already realised, shows considerable variation in form and markings,

in the several isolated arcas in which tt occurs.

The following races previously have heen described, all by G. A, Water-

house -—

(1) Heteronympha penclope penelope Waterhouse 1937. From New South

‘Wales at Battingion Tops, in January and February, also from Stonehenge,

Ebor (4,800 fect), the Blue Mountains, Moss Vale, and on Motint

Kosciusko at 5,000 feet, in February. The type locality is at Barrington

Tops.

(2) Heteronympha penelope sterope Waterhouse 1937, From Gisborne and

Fern Tree Gully, eastern Victoria, flying from January to March.

(3) Heteronympha penelope alope Waterhouse 1937. Lorne, Victoria, in Feb-

ruary and March.

(4) Heteronympha penelope diemeni Waterhouse 1937, The holotype is from

New Norfolk near Hobart in Februaty; it is knowti also from above

Flobart, on the slopes of Mount Wellington (at clevations up to 1,000 feet),

at Dunally, and on Maria Island. Waterhouse alsu placed here a female

from Launceston (February) and a worn pair taken at Burnie. There are

in the South Australian Museum collection several specimens, labelled

(Launceston, F. M. Littler), including one taken in March.

Heteronympha penelope panepe Waterhouse 1937. Cradle Mountain,

western Tasmania (2,000 feet), at Derwent Bridge near Lake St. Clair

and Mount Magnet (in January). Only the male is so far described;

Mr. L. Couchman has in preparation a detailed study of dates of capture

and localities in Tasmania,

—

* South Australian Museum.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust, 74, September 1952

Heteronympha penelope maraia subsp. nov.

Plate I]

Male—Porewings black, with rich orange-brown marlings; a large ocellus

below apex partly surrounded abeve by orange-brown, and with an orange-brown

spot below it; a large similarly coloured patch in upper half of cell, broadly con-

nected to another orange-brown patch extending nearly to inner margin and to

base of wing; the latter is partly divided by a thin black band at about one-half;

sex scales in cell grey, with a prominent black spot defining their distal limit.

Hindwing broadly orange-brown, with a large ocellus near inter angle and a small

black spot below costa. representing a vestige of a subapical one, without defined

centre; a very limited black atea in cetitre of wing. Forewings beneath with

pattern of markings as above, but with apical fifth of wing chocolate-brown,

ocellus with a double ring and light areas pale orange, lighter towards costa; cell

orange, with a conspicuous black circular patch at one-half, and an angled black

patch partly margining apex of ¢ell. Hindwings pale chocolate-brawn with a broad

outer chocolate margined area possessing a purple sheen and connecting the two

eye-spots: the subapical eye-spot small, one at inner angle relatively large.

Expanse 60 mm.

Female—Similar to male, but with outer margin straighter and inner angle

of hindwing more acute; base of wings infuscated with patches of dark scales,

obscured hy long hairs, so as to appear grey; brown area above subapical ocellus

of forewing conspicuously «ark: subapical ocellus of hindwing with traces of a

white centre; wings below slightly paler than in male and patch below subapical

ocellus of forewing almost white. Expanse 67 mm.

Why

révy

F le oe

aieet ee | ree

Ne ?,

She .

Acer ae

Loculity—Western Victoria; Fyans Creek, Grampian Mountains (800 ft.),

Holotype a male, emerged 26 January 1951, and allotype female, emerged

30 January 1951 (I. 19088 in S.A.M.), collected and presented by N. B. ‘Tindale,

also 2 paratype male, emerged 25 January 1931, and 5 males and 4 fernales from

there and from Mount Rosea, January-Febriiary 1952. The name suggested for the

race ig based on the aboriginal word “Maraia,’ a Marditjali tribe name for the

Grampian Mountains. :

This race differs from the others of the species in the great extent of the

rich brown colour of the wings, in both sexes, and the relative absence of dark

infuscations on the hindwings aboye. In its wing markings it is nearest to

H_ >}. sterope, sharing with most examples of that form the interconnected orange-

brown areas of upper cell and tornal regions. Jt diffets in detail of markings.

The tips to forewings beneath, and hindwings, instead of the relatively pale

ochreous colour characteristic of the Eastern Victorian race, are rich brown.

In HA. £. marcia the brown of the ground colour in the female is. almost as

dark 4s in the male, whereas in H. , sterope, as also in H. p. diement, the female

ig by far the paler of the two.

From #8. p. alope and H. pf. fanape it differs in its relatively larger size,

and in having the spot immediately below the subapical ocellus of the forewing

above, decp orange-brown in both sexes, instead of pale brown in the male, and

white in the female as in these often smaller forms, It also differs in having a

single small subapical eyc-spot on the hindwing, almost devoid of white centre,

instead of the biocellate subapical condition usual in the Tasmanian form, In this

character it resembles H. p. alope.

Life-history—Eggs and larvae have been examined and agree with Water-

house’s description of those of the eastern races. The pupa (fig 1) is 17 mm. in

length, robust, pale brown in colour, Some pupae have dark spots and. blotches.

Pupation takes place among a few strands of loose silk, embracing leaves, The

pupa figured, that of the allotype female, emerged after an interval of 41 days.

Key ror THE SeraraTION Or RaAcres of HETERONYMPHA PRNELOPE

I Size large (60 mm. or over) vn ee ae ead eet ae ane v4

Size small (below 55 mitt) eye see rte seek ene tee ates 5

2 Oratige spot in cell of forewing commected with that of dorsum oh 3

Orange spot in cell of forewing not connected with that of dorsum «x 4

3. Tip of forewing beneath brown ae a siege ae RKO

Tip of forewilig beneath pale achreou Sites lume wre na SERV OPS

4 Wings strongly angulate ort alMetto © gprume Jus fut oe ... penelope

Wings somewhit rounded PTT 20277127)

5 Hindwings uniacellate ... oss sein ieee Seite te a a. dlope (male)

Hindwings bioceltate ite jue we py" jute me . i

Hindwings trideellate .. aii eT vw = bas wee panofe (most)

& Wings with dark markings dominant

Wings with ochreous markings dominant oes ee, OPO CEetmale)

Note—The above key is intended to separate all but an occasional variant.

Some AH. p. sterope have the discoidal spot partly divided from that of dorsum

by a few dark scales. Mr, L. Couchman tells me he has specimens of H. p. alope

much larger than here indicated, and that, in a long series, H. p, alape appears to

intergrade with H, p. sterope. Such large H, p. alape specimens will, in this key,

fall out with A. p. sterope,

nine veer ones one wee punope

Discusston ow THK Forms or HETERONYMPHA PENELOPE

It seems possible that H. p. panope and H. », alope form a natural group of

slightly smaller races with well-rounded wings in both sexes, while the H. penelope

series, Penelape, sterope, diemeni and muraia comprise generally larger forms

with more angular wings; the last-named character 1s especially noticeable in the

females, and least evident in the males of diementi.

At first it was thought that the panope and penelope series might be bwo

separate species, but this appears not to be the case.

H. p. panope, in gerieral, tends to be a mountain form in northern Tasmania,

appearing for a brief season in January and early February at rather high eleva-

tions. Gn Mount Barrow it appears abundantly just below an Antarctic beech

forest zone; and also up beyond it to the bare rock slopes at 3,800 feet. It also

occurs in the uplands of western Tasmania, where it breeds at elevations of over

2,000 feet.

On the broad lowland belt between these two highland areas and extending

across the somewhat drier and relatively low midland region of Tasmania from

Launceston to Hobart, as well as on islands such as Maria Island, occurs the

larger, more angular-winged H, p. diemeni which emerges in late January, Feb-

rtiary and early March; this form is rather closely related to H. p. sterope of the

foothills of Eastern Victoria.

H. p. alope of the Lorne area seems to be the mainland representative of

the panopeé series, but this tentative conclusion may be modified when more

material is available from the Lorne district.

The presence in Tasmania of a mountain form, panope, occupying two

separate aureus, formerly completely glaciated, with a different race, diemeni, in

the always unglaciated country of the broad, generally lowland belt, in between,

opens up interesting avenues for speculation on the possible late Pleistocene and

Rerent history of the species in south-eastern Australia.

Jiidging from present-day capacities of panope larvae to resist cold it is

possible that the late Pleistocene ancestor of the panope fornt was abie, during

the Wurm (Last) Glaciation to maintain its footing either in the area af the

present northern Tasmanian lowlands, er at least in the Iowlands now under the

ocean, of which King Island is a relic. Perhaps the capacity of this ancestral

form to resist cold may have been brought abaut by gene selection during the

onset of that or earlier glacial episodes,

As climate began to ameliorate in Recent time the ancestral panope began

slowly to recolomise the Eastern and Western Highlands, and, except in the south,

eventually perhaps abandoned the warmer lowlands in between as these became

too mild or otherwise unsuitahle, Thereafter eastern and western population of

H. p. panope perhaps developed in isolation from each other. If so, the interval

of time since they became separated has not been great enough to cause them

to become greatly differentiated, It has not been possible to fad consistent charac-

ters to separate them.

Perhaps later than the postulated separation of the two panope populations,

the large and rather different Victorian ancestor of sterope found its way south

to Tasmania, following the extension southwards of the warmer climatic helt.

Since this form may have become, or remained adjusted to a warmer climatic

range than ancestral punope it came to breed in, and occupy, the lowlands of

Tasinania.

As Tasmania became cut off by the Post-Glacial rise in sea-level jt has been

differentiated a little from the Victorian sterape, and today appears as the large

form dtemeni,

Only in some such way does it scem possible to account for the presence of

two separate races of FH, penelope in Tasmania,

The presumptively lowland and highland breeding forms seem to have

remained isolated from each other and to have been safficiently free of recent

gene exchange to have maintained characteristic appearances.

There is a posstbility that panope may appear a little earlier than diemeni.

The insects fly at a period of the year of maximum. warmth and drysiess, con-

sidering the relatively wet environment of Tasmania. They are not far-ranging

forms and probably do not fly far from the natural banks and meadows in which

they breed.

When more intensive collecting is done, however, it may be found that at a

jew places there have arisen natural hybrid populations, panope x dierent after

the manner of the natural hybrid Tisiphone abeona joanna reported by Water-

house (1928) in northern New South Wales. In such a case it would not be

surprising to find a very variable local population, similar to that which was estab-

lished to be of hybrid origin by the breeding experiments made by Waterhouse

on neighbouring races of Tisiphone abeona.

Tt was at first thought that the eastern and western panop? populations might

be distinguishable, but examination of the very long series taken on Mount Barrow

and of the majority of the known specimens from the western highlands con-

yvinced me they cannot be separated, for, unlike most of the other established

races, it cloes not seem possible to find any character sufficiently different and

stable to enable them to be keyed apart.

Either the rigid selection which enabled panope to survive in its cold environ-

iment has restricted its genetic plasticity, as compared with mainland races, or the

‘Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1952 Vol. 7

win da te Woo

Fig. 1-16

ont

. Plate

(leteronynipha penelope Waterhouse (x § nat. size)

Hf. p. marata Tindale, male, upper surface, Fyans Creek, Victoria

”

” ”

”

. Pp. sterope Wat

” ”

i. p. dtement

” uy

” ”

wp, fonope

” ”

, ,

’ ”

”

erhouse, male, upper surface, Fern Tree Gully, Victoria

female, upper surface, Fyans Creek, Victoria

male, lower surface, Fyans Creek, Victoria

female, lower surface, Fyans Creek, Victoria

female, upper surface, Gisborne istrict, Victoria

male, lower surface, Fern Tree Gully, Victoria

female, lower surface, Gisborne District, Victoria

male, upper surface, Launceston, Tasmania

female, upper surface, Launceston, Tasmania

male, lower surface, Launceston, Tasmania

female, lower surface, Launceston, Tasmania

male, upper surface, Mt. Barrow (3,800 ft.), Tas.

female, upper surface, Mt. Barrow (2,475 ft.), Tas.

male, lower surface, Mt. Barrow (3,800 ft.), Tas.

female, lower surface, Mt. Barrow (2,475 ft.), Tas.

interval of time of separation of the two populations has been too small to allow

the appearance of recognisable differences of the type considered by present-day

Lepidopterists to be of subspecific value.

What may be a similar or slightly greater interval of time, however, has

permitted sterope and diement to develop small though appreciable differences.

Did the “mainland” forms retain greater genetic plasticity? Another possibility is

that diemeni is a natural hybrid, compounded of early crosses of ancestral panope

and sterope.

H. p. méraia of the Grampians is probably the western geographical isolate

of the ancestral sierope form. The same climatic factors which are postulated by

Tindale (1947, 1949) as responsible for the development in the Grampians area of

the geographical races Oveixenica kershawi kanunda, Tisiphone abeona antont

and several other moisture-loving butterflies, seem to have been responsible for

the development of this striking race.

The nymotypical race H. p. penelupe happens to be the larger and rather

isolated form found on Barrington Tops in northern New South Wales, When

the penelope faunas of areas between there and southern Victoria are better

known, other forms may be found connecting penelope and slerope.

There is at present no foundation for garbled early reports that H. penelope

had been taken in Western Australia and South Australia. Naturalists should

make careful collections in favourable localities between January and March to

ensure that it is not somewhere being passed over as the common Heteronympha

merape,

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

I am indebted to Messrs. J. C. Le Soeuf and B. Given, my companions on

the visit to the Grampians, and to Messrs, L. Couchman and F. E. Wilson for

reading through my paper and offering most useful criticism.

REFERENCES CITED

WarterHousE, G. A. 1937 Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., Sydney, 62, 253-258

Warternouse, G. A, 1928 Australian Zoologist, Sydney, 5, 217-240, and biblio-

graphy

Tinpvare, N, B. 1947 Rec. S. Aust. Mus., Adelaide, 8, 613-618

Tinpatr, N. B. 1949 Rec. S. Aust. Mus., Adelaide, 9, 143-155

SOME NEMATODES FROM AUSTRALIAN BIRDS AND MAMMALS

BY T. HARVEY JOHNSTON AND PATRICIA M. MAWSON

Summary

Austrofilaria rhipidurae n. sp., is described from Rhipidura leucophrys, Adelaide, differing

in the form of the vestibule and length of spicules from the only other known species in the

genus, A. vestibulata.

Diomedenema diomedeae n.g., n.sp., Filariidae, from the body cavity of Diomeda

chrysostoma, South Australia. The new genus appears to be related to Litomosa,

Litomosoides and Austrofilaria, differing from the first two in the presence of cephalic

papillae and buccal teeth, and from the third in having an undivided oesophagus, and in the

position of the vagina.

An amplified description of Tetrameres australis from the black swan, and an account of

some of its growth stages are given.

Cosmocephalus australiensis n. sp., is described from water rats, Hydromys chrysogaster.

Occurences of various Ascaridate, Spirurate, Filariate and Strongylate worms are recorded

from Australian hosts.

BOME NEMATODES FROM AUSTRALIAN BIRDS AND MAMMALS

By T. Harvey Jounston and Parricta M. Mawson *

(Read 14 June 1951)

SUMMARY

1, Austrofilaria rhipidurag n.sp., is described from Rhipidura leucophrys, Ade-

laide, differing in the form of the vestibule and length of spicules from the

only other known species in the genus, 4. wvestibulata,

2, Diomedenema diomedeae n.g., n.sp., Filariidae, from the body cavity of

Diomedea chrysastoma, South Australia. The new genus appears to be related

to Litomosa, Litomosoides and Austrofilaria, differing from the first two in

the presence of cephalic papillae and buccal teeth, and from the third in

having an undivided oesophagus, and in the position of the vagina.

3. An amplified description of Tetrameres australis from the black swan, and

an account of some of its growth stages are given,

4. Cosmocephalus australiensis n,sp., is described from water rats, Hydromys

chrysogaster.

5. Occurrences of various Ascaridate, Spirurate, Filariate and Strongylate worms

are recorded from Australian hosts.

HOST-PARASITE LIST

MAMMALS

Gypsophoca tasmaniensis Scott and Lord :—Contracaecum osculatum (Rud.);

Stomachus sp. immature. Lady Julia Percy Island, Victoria.

Pulpes vulpes L.:—Uncinaria stenocephala Rall, Adelaide.

Hydromys chrysagaster Geoff,:—Cosmocephalus australiensis n.sp.; Spirura

(s.) sp. South Australia.

Macropus major Shaw :—Hypodontus macropodis Monnig, N.S.W.; Pharyngo-

strongylus alpha, Narandera, N.S.W.

Macropus rufus Desm, (albino) :—Pharyngostrongylus alpha J. and M. Adelaide

Koala Park, but originally from Mount Pleasant, S, Aust.

Isoodon torosus Ramsay :—Echinonema cinctum Linstow; Subulura peramelis

Baylis. South-east Queensl.

Birps

Diomedea (Thalassarche) chrysostoma Fotster-—Seuratia shipleyi (Stoss.);

Stegophorus diomedeae (J. and M.); Diomedenema diomedeae t.g., n, sp.

Brighton, S. Aust.

Falso peregrinus Tunstall:—Serratospiculum. guttatum (Schn.). Kangaroo Island,

5. Aust.

Chenopis atrata Lath. :—Tetrameres australis J. and M. Tailem Bend, S. Aust.

Rhipidura leucophrys Lath.:— Austrofilaria rhipidurae n.sp, Adelaide, S, Aust.

We acknowledge assistance in regard to material from Dr. H, Derrick,

Queensland Institute of Medical Research, Brisbane; Messrs. A. Rau, South Aus-

tralian Museum; G. G. and Bryce Jaensch, Tailem Bend, South Australia; H, M.

Gordon, McMaster Laboratory, Sydney; and J. McNally, Fisheries and Game

Department, Victoria. The material iram an albatross was obtained by one of

us from a bird washed ashore at Brighton, South Australia, after a storm. The

work has been assisted by a State Research Grant to the University of Adelaide.

Types of new species are being deposited in the South Australian Museum.

* University of Adelaide.

Trans, Roy. Soc, §. Aust., 75, September 1952

Austrofilaria rhipidurae n. sp.

(Fig. 1-3)

Several filarial worms were taken by Mr, A. Rau from behind the eye of a

willy-wagtail, Rhipidura leucophrys, Adelaide, Males up to 14:7 mm. long;

females to 28 mm. Anterior end rounded, with four large oral papillae. Oral

aperture sometimes on small projection (fig. 2). Vestibule present, with strongly

chitinized walls and narrow lumen.

€

; Fig. 13

Austrofilaria rhipidurae—1, head of female; 2 oesophageal region; 3, male tail.

Fig. 4-7

Diomedenema diomedeae—4, 5, 6, head in lateral, dorsal and in face views respectively ;

7, mate tail.

Fig. 8-11

Cosmocephalus austvaliensis—8, head of adult; 9, male tail; 9a, fip of longer spicule;

10, 11, heads of worms 3-4 and 6-3 mm, long respectively. Fig. 4, 5, 6 to same scale;

i, 10, 11 to same scale; 8 9 to same scale. b, buccal capsule; 1, intestine; ic, inflated

cuticle; oa, op, anterior and posterior regions of oesophagus; v, vulva.

Walls consisting of anterior region 19% long, and posterior part 53, long.

Oesophagus -7 mm. long, narrower anterior part “L6 mm. long with sttongly

cuticularized lining which appears to be continuous with the vestibule ; posterior

pare *55 mm. long. Vulva in oesophageal region, -6 tim. from. head end, Eggs

504 by 26, with embryos 65, long; anus close to rounded tip of tail. Male tail

cviled into short spiral; spicules equal, -5 mm. long; no gubernaculum, caudal

papillae absent.

The gents, originally erected for A. vestibulata trom Apheloeephala nieri-

cincit, appears to be near Litomasoides Chandler, resembling it in Uhe presence

vf a subdivided vestibule whose posterior part scems to be encircled hy the

anterior portion of the oesophagus ; but it is distinguished by the form of the

apicules, the presence of oral papillae, and the position of the vulva. We have

placed our species in Ars/rofilaria because of the presence of a marked chitinous

vestibule, « bipartite oesophagus, small equal spicules, atid the oesophageal posi-

tion of the vulva, It differs fram 4. vestibulata in the form of the vestibule and

in the length of the spicules.

Diomedenema diomedeae n. g., n. Sp.

(Pig. 4-7)

A large number of these worms was found in the body cavity of a yellow-

nosed albatross, Diomedea chrysostoma, washed ashore at Brighton, South Aus-

tralia. Males up to 12 mm. long; females 10 17 mm. Cuticle with minute puncta-

tions arranged in anuuli and more obvious on some regions, e.g., submedian line,

but absent from end of tail, Anterior end compressed laterally ; small rectangu ar

mouth, dorso-ventrally elongate. Hight large papillae in two rings in submediais

positions on head. Small amphids present. Vestibule 30p long, Sa wide from side

vo side, about 8-10, dorso-ventrally; at its entrance, on cach lateral wall, a. strongly

chitinized tricuspid tooth, Oesophageal lining strongly chitinized. Ocsophagus

‘6 mm. long in both sexes, part posterior ta nerve ring wider. Exeretary pore

-24 mm. from head end (in female ) } herve ring at -21 mm. in male.

Posterior end of male curyed ventrally; anus +1 mn, from tip of rounded

tail; spicules acicular, unequal, -21 and «16 mm, lufig; one pair postanal papillae,

one pair adanal, three pairs preanal,

Vulva anterior, 4:7 mm. from head end in wotm 14-7 nim, long. Eggs 23.

by 58s.

Generic diagnosis Relatively short filarial worms with anterior end com-

pressed Jaterally; eight cephalic papillae in two rings, Mouth elongated durso-

ventrally, entrance ta buccal cavity with two lateral tricuspid teeth; Gesophapus

not differentiated externally into two regions. Male iail short, rounded, without

alae; spicules unequal, Vulva anterior, post-cesuphageal, Parasites af biris,

Type Liomedenema diomedeae n.sp.

This genus falls close to Desmidacereelia Yorke and Maplestone, It differs in

the shortness of the oesophagus, the presence of teeth in the buccal capsule, and

im the absence of any spinose area on the tail.

It differs from 4ustrofilaria in the presence of buceal teeth and the positinn

of the vulva. It shows some similarity to Buckleyfilaria Singh 1949, from

passerine birds, in ils cuticular ornamentation atid in the presence of a buccal

cavity; but it differs in the position of the vulva, the number of cephalic papjjlae

and the dissimilarity of the spicules,

SERRATOSPICULUM GUTTATUM (Sch.)

This filariid is now recorded tram Falco peregrinus, collected by A. Rau on

Kangaroo Island. We had reported it previously from Moorook, South Australia

EcHINONEMA CINCTRUN Linstow

Several specimens. were found amongst material collected by Dr. H. Derrick

localities in south-eastern Queensland.

from bandicoots, Tseedon torosus, from

SEURATIA SHIPLEYI (Stoss.)

Diomedea chrysosioma, washed ashore

This species is now recorded from

at Brighton, South Australia, We have already recorded the parasite from other

Australian albatrosses (1942, 69).

SrecOPHORUS DIOMEDEAE (J. and M.)

us under Paryseria (1942, 69) from three

species of Australian albatrosses including Diomedeu chrysosioma, the latter from

Sellicks Beach, South Australia. We now record finding the same species of

nematode in another yellow-nosed ‘albatross trom Brighton, South Australia, We

transferred the species to Sfegophorus (1945, 142).

This species was described by

Fig, 12-16

- f lateral view; 13, 14, anterior end of male,

dorsal and lateral views respectively; 15, head of young female, sublateral view;

2, 15 to same scale. a, lateral ala;

16, head of gravid female, lateral view. Fig. 1

cp, cervical papilla; ep, excretory pore,

Tetrameres australis—l2, head of male,

TRTRAMERES AUSTRALIS J. and M.

(Fig. 12-21)

This species was originally described by us (1941) from males. The present

collection, also from the black swan, Chenopis atrata, from Tailem Bend, South

Australia, includes adult males and females,

stages of development,

Male—Up to 8:1 mm. in length, The original account of the head is now

amended, There are four lips, typical of the genus,

purely cuticular, whereas the laterals are wider and contain “pulp”. Four large

submedian papillae. The cuticular thickening of the dor

continued as a reticuliim around the head as far back as the level of the base of

as well as yotirig females in various

the dorsal and ventral being

sal and yenttal lips is

the buccal capsule, and laterally forms the “spines” in the lateral alae (fig. 12).

These alae are broad and yuluminous. Each arises from a lateral lip and has

the appearance of a ribbon attached along its centre, narrowing towards the

cervical papilla, behind which it is attached along one edge. Sub-lateral rows of

spitles commence at -1-'13 mm, from the head end. Cervical papillae, each in

the form of a single curved spine, lie at the level of the third or fourth spine,

about -16 mm. from the head end. Buccal capsule 104 in diameter from side to

side, and 154 dorso-ventrally, its base 28-40», from top of lips. Nerve ring at

‘24 mm., and excretory pore at “3 mm. from head end. Oesophagus 1'6 mm.

long in 4 worm 8'] mm, in length,

Female—Young specimens up to 4°9 mim, long, length decreasing in older

worms, The most swollen females were 3*5 mm. Jong, Lips not distinct. Lateral

alae commence just behind cephalic papillae and extend to level of yulva, are

fess voluminous than in male, and are not associated with spines, Cervical papillae

715-17 mm. from head end, Buccal cavity in young specimens cylindrical, about

25-30, long, 7 internal diameter: anterior margin of buccal capsule denticulate,

with 10-12 projecting teeth, surrounding mouth opening. In gravid females

buccal capsule hecotnes barrel-shaped. Oesophagus with anterior and posterior

regions, ~3 and 1-1 mm. long respectively. Nerve ring at ‘22 mm, and cervical

papillae at -4 mm, from head end. As the body increases in volume, the swelling

of the body wall in the four submedian fields extends to include the posterior part

of the oesophageal region, and most of the tail, the tip of which in the largest

female is almost lost to sight. The tip of the tail in younger females is surrounded

by a distinct coronet of 6-7 spines. In gravid females the tail tends to be annu-

lated and the spines, though present, are shorter and less distinct. Vulva at 5 mm,

and anus at 2°3 mm. from tip of tail, in a specinien 4 mm. Tong, in which the

body swelling is just beginning to occur,

The species is characterised by the very long male spicule. The presence of

tail spines in this genus does not seem to be a purely larval condition as it is in

some Acuariids. The species does not fall into cither of the subgenera proposed

by Travassos in 1915, as it possesses features described ag distinctive of both

subgenera, wés., the excessively long spicule of Microtetrumeres, and the body

spines as in Tetrameres s, str.

Cosmocephalus australiensis, m sp,

(Fig. 8-11)

Several collections of a species of Cosmocephalus have been taken fram

water rats, Hi\dromys chrysoyaster, from the lower River Murray, at Tailem

Bend anu Bow Hill, South Australia.

Females up to 12°2 mm, long; males 10:1 mm, The cordons which botind

raised cuticular areas reach 4 point 04 mim. from the head end, but are not as

tnarkedly convoluted as in some species of the genus. Vestibule -1 mm. long, Ya

wide. Cervical papillae ~3-38 mm. from head end, tricuspid in both sexes,

except in one specimen where the smaller cusp was double. The foregajng

measurements apply to both sexes. Citucle strongly annulate from head to

cervical papillae.

Amongst the material examined were some apparently fully mature worms

in which the cuticle of the anterior end was oniy slightly annulated, In them

the position of the cetvical papillac in relation to the cordon length is quite

different, the cordons reaching to *21 mm. from the head, the cervical papillae

being ‘3 mm. from the head. It would appear that in these forms, for some

reason. possibly age or physiological differences in reaction to fixation, the cuticle

and the external cuticular structures with it have not been lyngitudinally

contracted.

Vulva in the third quarter of the hady length. Eggs 40« by 29), Posterior

end of the male coiled into a spiral; four pairs of preanal and five pairs of post-

anal papillae; spicules °57 and -11 mm. long, the shorter being broad with a

blunt tip at right angle to shaft, longer acicular with a flap-like termination which

may be in line with the shaft or may be bent backwardly from it (fig. 9a).

With the adult worms are several, presymably of the same species, in

various stages of development. Since none of these has a spinous tail typical of

Actiariid larvae, these worms are presumably young adults, They show

the growth of the cuticular appendages characteristic of the genus. The smallest

is 2-5 mm. long and has a vestibule 70 in fength, iz., nearly that oi the adull,

while the cordons extend for only 302 from the head end (fig. 10). In other

specimens the cordons are longer; in a worm 6°3 mm, in length, the vestible is

904 long, and the cordons extend to 90. from the head, In the specimens with

very short cordons, each cervical papilla appears as a single projection, nut highly

chitinized ; in those with “half grown” cordons (90, long), the cervical papillae

ate bifid, The shortest worm in which the papillae were trifid was a male, 7-1 mm,

Fig. 17-21

Successive stages in growth of adult female of Tefrittieres australis, All to sante scale.

a, anus; al, ala; c, cervical papilla; e, excretory pore; i, iestine;

v, vulva.

in length. The shortest specimens whose sex was ileterminable were females. In

a worm 3:8 mn. in length, the ovaries, vagina and vulya were recognisable, the

vulva being situated 2-2 mm. from the head. The smallest specimen in which

catidal papillae were distinguishable was 4:4 mm. long, and there were indications

of incipient spicules. In all the sexually differentiated young worms the cordons

were as long as, or longer than, the vestibule, and the cervical papillae were bifid,

not simple, In connection with the growth of cordons and cervical papillae, one

may mention the work of Chabaud (1950) on the life history of Synhimantus

spinulatis,

We have nut found any record of the occurrence of adult Cosmocephalus in

a mammalian host, although Chandler (1942) reported Sywhimanlus longi-

gqulluratus trom £rocyon lotor, but inferred that it was an accidental infection.

The [ood of the Australian water rat includes the yahbie (Cherax destructor),

and various fish, either of which might harbour the larval siage of a bird parasite.

We have dissected ten water rats from the Torrens and Lower Murray, and on no

occasion were bird remains found in the digestive tract, This fact and the oecur-

tence of C. australiensis in a flourishing condition in several water rats from

different localities and at various times between 1938 and 1951 make the sugges-

tion of an accidental infection unlikely. The only known species of the gents

froin Australian birds is C. jaenschi J, and M,, from the same locality as the

present specimens, but te species differ in the propurtions of the lengths of the

cordons and of the vestibule to cach other.

Sprrura (s,1,) sp,

(Fig. 22)

In several collections made from Hydromys chrysogaster from the lower

Murray River, there occurred the posterior ends of a large species of a nema-

tode, apparently a Spirurid, Males and females were found. In no case was an

anterior end present, digestion having apparently proceeded from the head back-

wards in all cases. This deficiency obviated identification of the species. Measure-

ments and a figure of the male tail are given, so that it may be possible to recog-

nise the worm in the future.

Longest part of a female present, 23-5 mm.; of a male 7 mm., and in these

an oesophagus was not present. Two ovaries and uteti are opposed; uteri unite,

leading to a short vagina and vulva, the latter 6°2 mm, from the posterior end;

eggs in vagina measure 40 by 28y.

In the male are four pairs of prearial papillae and five pairs of postanal, the

preanal pair nearest the ants is double-headed. Caudal alae are absent. Sicules

are unequal, +9 and -18 mm. respectively.

The size of the eggs and the relative lengths of the spicules in these worms

and in the specimens of Cosmocephalus australiensis found with them, are similar;

but the latter are distinctly smaller and the male tail is coiled in several spirals.

Fig. 22—Spirura (s.1.) sp, from Aydromys, male tail. Fie, 23—Swbulura peramelis, male tail.

Fig. 24S/ypodontus macropodis, butsa.-

CONTRACAECUM OSCULATUM (Rud.)

This species is now recorded from the seal, Gypsophoca tasmaniensis, The

collection included adult as well as the “phocascarid type” of immature worms

described elsewhere by us (1945), and was obtained by Mr. J. McNally, from

Lady Julia Percy Island, Victoria.

STOMACHUS sp. immature

Young forms were collected by Mr. McNally from Gypsophoca tasimaniensis,

Lady Julia Percy Island, Victoria. In two specimens the lips had attained the

adult form and the ventriculus was slightly sigmoid. The material suggests

S. similis which occurs in elephant seals. The latter no longer occtir in Australian

waters, haying been exterminated from Bass Strait by the early sealers.

SUBULURA PERAMELIs Baylis

From bandicoots, [soodon forasus, collected by Dr. H. Derrick from south-

eastern Queensland. Males up to 12 mm, long; females to 17 mm. As in other

collections of this species sttidied by us, the worms are longer than those described

by Baylis, and have only three teeth in the buccal capsule,

PHARYNGOSTRONGYLUS ALPHA J. and M.

From a “white kangaroo” (Macropus rufus, albino), from the Koala Park,

Adelaide, but previously from Mount Pleasant, South Australia; and from

Macropus major from Narandera, New South Wales, In our original account

we mentioned “six rounded inner lips,” but since in specimens from Macropus

major and in the present material, these are not obvious, it is suggested that the

lip-like appearance was due to contraction of muscles surrounding the mouth.

Hypovontus macropopis Ménnig

From a kangaroo, presumably Macropus major, the worms having been for-

warded from the McMaster Laboratory, C.S.LR.O., Sydney. The differences

between H. macropodis and our II. thetidis depend on body length, the branching

of the dorsal ray of the bursa, and the length of the gubernaculum. In the present

material, the dorsal ray resembles that of M. thetidis,; but the lengths of the worm

and the gubernaculum agree with H. macropodis. Prebursal papillae are present,

as in the latter species; the position of the excretory pore is similar; and there is

a backwardly-directed prolongation of the stem of the lateral ray, as noted by

Monnig (1929).

UNCINARIA STENOCEPHALA Railliet

This hookworm has been identified from a fox, Vulpes vulpes, shot in the

Adelaide Botanic Gardens,

LITERATURE

CuHaAsaup, A. G. 1950 Ann. Parasitol., 25, 150-166

CHANDLER, A. C. 1942 Parasitol., 28, 255-268

JOHNSTON, ee H., and Mawson, P. M, 1940 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 64,

355-361

Jounston, T. H,, and Mawson, P. M. 1941 Trans. Roy. Soc, S. Aust., 65,

254-262

Jounnston, T. H., and Mawson, P. M. 1945 Brit., Aust. N.Z, Antarct. Res.

Exp. Rep., B, 5, (2), 73-160

AUSTRALIAN RECENT AND TERTIARY MOLLUSCA (TEREBRIDAE,

RISSONIDAE, FASCIOLARIIDAE, VOLUTIDAE) PLATES III AND IV

BY BERNARD C,. COTTON

Summary

All Australian Recent and Tertiary species of Terebridae and Rissoinidae are reviewed. Three

new species of the family Terebridae, Pervicacia subplicata, P. helenae and Nototerebra

flindersi are introduced. Keys to the genera of Rissoinidae and the subgenera of Rissoina are

given and the new species Rissoina vincentiana, R. grata, R. fiscina, R. jaffa and R. axiscalpta

are described.

AUSTRALIAN RECENT AND TERTIARY MOLLUSCA

{Terebridae, Rissoinidae, Rissoidae, Fasciolariidae, Volutidac)

Plates T1T and IV

By Bernarp C, Corron *

[Read 14 June 1951]

SUMMARY

All Australian Recent and Tertiary species of Terebridae and Rissoinidae

are reviewed. Three new species of the family Terebridae, Pervicacia subplicata,

P, helenae and Nototerebra flindersi are introduced, Keys to the genera of

Rissoinidae and the subgenera of Rissomma are given atid the new species Rissoina

vincentiana, R. grata, R. fiscina, R, jaffa and FR. axiscalpta are described,

A new gents and species of the Rissoidae is proposed and the Tertiary

species of that family are listed.

Two genera of the Fasciolariidae, Pleuroploca and Colus, are considered.

To the family Volutidae is added a new species, Ericusa orca.

Family TEREBRIDAE

This family, some species of which possess a poison gland similar to that

of the Conidae, is grouped with that family in the Toxoglossa.

Names which have heen incorrectly used for Australian shells and later

proved to be exotic only are;—Terebra brevicula Deshayes 1859 = T, albocincta

Carpenter, Californa. Terebya buccinuluwm Deshayes 1859=“Bullia turrita

Gray” belonging to the family Nassidae. Terebra fenestrata Hinds 1843 =

Terebra caelata Adams and Reeve 1850, China. Terebra turrita Smith 1873,

Torres Straits = T, fextilis Hinds 1843, Manila Bay. Terebra polygyrata Des-

hayes 1859 = T. subtextilis Smith 1879, Japan. Terebra flamimea Lamarck 1822

= T. incomparabilis Deshayes 1859 = Epitonium feldmanni Bolten 1798, West

Indies. Duplicaria addite Deshayes 1859= 7. spectabilis Hinds 1843, Ceylon.

The large Indo-Pacific species of typical Terebra with characteristic colour pat~

terns occur plentifully as species and individuals in the Damperian, Banksian, and

Solanderian regions of northern Australia.

TrErerra Lamarck

Terebra Lamarck 1799. Mem. Soc. Hist. Nat., Paris, 71.

Genotype—T. subulata Linne 1767. A synonym is Terebrum Montfort 1810-

Species of the genus which have been recorded principally from northern Aus-

tralia, most of them with a wide Indo-Pacific distribution, are 7, subulata Linnie

1767, T. crenulata Lanne 1758, T. dtmidiata Linne 1758 = T. guttata Bolten 1798,

T..oculaia Lamarck 1844, T. muscaria Lamatck 1822, T. affinis Gray 1834, T. can-

cellata Quoy and Gaimard 1822, T. chlorata Lamarck 1822, T. cireumcincta Des-

hayes 1857, 7. columellaris Hinds 1844, T. evigua Deshayes 1859, T, jukesi Des-

hayes 1857, T. marmorata Deshayes 1859, T. ornatum Martyn 1786, T. polygyrata

Deshayes 1859, T. straminea Gray. 1934, T. taylori Reeve 1860, T. tenera Hinds

1844, T. turrita Smith 1873, T. wndulata Gray 1934, T. hostata Gmelin 1791,

T, bathyraphe Smith 1875, T. bernardi Deshayes 1857, T. albuia Menke 1943,

T. sublata Linne 1758, W.A., T. walkert Smith 1899 — T. assimilis Angas 1867,

T. lauretenae Tenison Woods 1879, T. tabifica Iredale 1925.

* South Australian Museum.

Trans, Roy. Soc. S, Aust., 75, September 1952

In the South Atstralian Museum collection 7. muscarta, T, bernardi,

T. chlorata were noted from Moreton Bay, and T. circumeincta from Caloundra,

Pervicacta Iredale

Pervieacia Ivedale 1924, Proc, Linn. Soc. N.S,W., 49, 262.

Genotype—Terebra ustulaia Deshayes 1857 Tasmania. Species belonging to

this genus and their range are as follows,

P. ustulata Deshayes 1857. Tas. (type), N.S-W., Vict., S. Aust, The species

is rare in South Australia. We have it from Pondolowie Bay, Yorke Peninsula,

and some small specimens dredged in 10 fms. off Yankalilla. Pl. iii, fig; 2,

P. assecla Iredale 1924. N.S.W. (type), S. Aust,, Vict. The New South

Wales type was dredged in 10-25 ims. Sotth Australian specimens were taken

in 110 fms. off Beachport and 130 fms, off Cape Jaffa.

P. kieneri Deshayes. 1859. N. Tas. (type), Vict. 5, Aust. This is the shell

originally referred to as Terebra duplicata var. junior Wiener. Kiener gave

“Thdian Ocean and Mauritius” for its locality, The figure is an excellent one of

the South Australian species. It is the most common Terebra in southern Australia

and can be taken in numbers in certain localities on the beach or dredged down

to 22 fms. We have it from Hopetoun, King George Sound, Rottnest and Albany,

Western Australia. The name T, “sfulata Deshayes in Adcock’s. list of South

Australian shells was intended for this shell, but as mentioned above P. ustulate

ig rare in South Australia. There is great variation in comparative attenuation

and costation, Some have well-marked and subdistant ribs, others have them very

crowded and fine, while others again haye the former sculpture in early whorls

and the latter in the later volutions. Colour varieties may be pure white through-

out, or the nucleus and earlier whorls dark purple and a light purple tinge in the

rest of the shell, Some of the albino variants have the tibs rather distant and

valid and approach the Tasmanian shells once named T. jukesi later corrected to

T hicolor, The tibs of T. bicolor are more numerous than jn our shell, the groove

separating the infrasutural nodules from the lower part of the shell is much

wider and gutter-like, and there are sublenticular inter-costular spiral striae, and

the lower half of the shell is coloured too, giving a median white band. There

are three principal yariants.

a. Axial ribs more distant and valid, nodulose at the suture and spiral sulcus,

More attenuate than average.

b. White, less solid, apex purplish in some, white in others.

c. White, natrow, solid, atca beneath suture depressed, Ribs subdistant,

valid, Almost like an albino form of P. ustulata but more attenuated than

the average example of that species,

P, bicolor Angas 1867. N,S.W. (type), Vict.

Typical specimens of this do net occur in South Australia, its piace appar-

ently being taken by P. subplicata sp, nov. Odd specimens labelled T, bicolor in

the Museum Collection said to come from South Australia haye iio definite

locality.

P. fictilis Uinds 1844. N.S.W. (type), Vict.

The species, like P. bicolor, appears to be confined to the Petonian region.

Hedley 1900 refigured and described the species and noted that Terebra assimilis

Angas 1867 is a synonym, 4 differs from P- bicolor in being stonier, and im

having broad, low axial ribs.

Pervicacia subplicata sp. nov.

(Pl. iii, fig. 3)

Shell thin, protoconch of two smooth turns, slightly mammillate, blunt;

spite whorls sloping, slightly constricted just above the centre, suture distinct;

aperture obliquely ovate, small; outer lip thin; columella convex thin; sculpture

of adult whorls consists of obsolete irregular roundly flattened sinuous axial

riblets which in the last whorl are very faintly marked below the periphery;

whole surface yery closely but irregularly subleriticularly jaggedly spirally

incised; colour brown, light horn or layender with dark horn coloured sinous

longitudinal markings chicfly in the spaces between the axial tiblets, Height

14 mm,, width 3-5 mm.

Locality—Backstairs Passage 20 fms. (type). Beachport 40-150 fms. Rare

on the beach,

Remarks—Holotype Reg, No. D. 10177, S. Aust, Museum.

It may be a South Australian species related to P. bicoloy being similar in

protoconch features, but the adult shell of P. subplicata is thinner and less validly

sculptured,

Pervicacia helenae sp. noy,

(Pl. iti, fig. 1)

Shell clongate, subulate, rather solid, glossy, whorls dark-cream coloured

with a narrow dark brown spiral band occupying the space between the suture

and the subsutural sulcus beneath; base of ihe body whorl also dark brown.

Sculpture of thick sinuous axial ribs, the tips cut off by a weak subsutural sulcus

sittated very close to the suture. Protoconch of two smooth, white giossy whorls,

the first mammillate. Adult whorls eleven, the sculpture consistent from the first

to last whorl. Outer fip rather thick, columella smooth, concave, Height 24 mm.,

diameter 11 mm.

Locality—Eyre Peninsula, Farme Beach, Coffins Bay. Holotype Reg.

No. 1). 14436, S. Aust, Museum,

Remuarks—A series shows the shell to be consistent in characters and not

variable, The holotype and other specimens presented to the South Australian

Museum are adults. They differ from P, ustulata in being smaller, having a weak

substitural sulcus very near to the suture, convex, shorter whorls. A series of

specimens was taken by Mr. J. Veitch, a West Coast collector, and forwarded

for examination to the South Australian Museum by Mr. B. J, Weeding. They

are named after Mr. Veitch’s daughter, a keen collector,

Noroterrsra Cotton

Nototerebra Cotton 1947, Rec, S. Atist. Mus., 8, No, 4, 667,

Genotype—Terebra albida Gray 1834. Vict, WN. albida Gray 1834. Vict.

(type), S. Aust., Tas., W. Aust.

The rusty colouration is sometimes disposed as an infrasutural tow of sports

and at other times in oblique longitudinal markings. One individual has a de-

pressed infrasutural band scarcely visible in the earlier whorls, but quite distinct

in the later ones. The shell is not actually smooth, there are oblique sinuous

accremental striae minutely crenulating the suture, and in some specimens these

are gathered into groups so as to form very flat, low triangular riblets most valid

just below the suture. The protoconch is of one turn and a half, slightly inflated

whorls. Our specimens are from Middleton, Spencer Gulf, Port Phillip and

Esperance, Western Australia,

Nototerebra flindersi sp. nov.

(PI. iii, fig, 4)

Shell elongate, white, faintly marked with rust-like stains, protoconch of

one and a half smooth, very slightly inflated whorls; adult whorls nine, narrow,

very litle conyex, suture linear, weakly margined below by an obscure spiral

impression; sculpture of sinuous, axial, irregular aceremental striac, Height

25 mm,, width 6 mm.

Lacaliw~w—S. Aust., Beachport, 100 fms. (type) 150 tms., Cape Jaffa

130 frots,; W. Aust., Rottnest, Ellenbrook. Holotype Reg. No, 1. 14435, S. Aust.

Mnseun,

Remorks—The species is smaller and narrower than N, albida and the sub-

sutural depression is comparatively more marked.

Acuminsta Dall.

Acuminia Dall, 1908, Nautilus, 21. No, 11, 124-123.

Genotype—Terebra lanceata. Linne 1788, Indo-Pacific.

Typical species of this genus have no presutural sulcus, the shell is slender

and smooth, whorls flattened, earlier whorls plicated, white, with chestnut axials.

Columella with one fold.

A, bragieri Angas 1871, N.S.W. (type) Vict., ‘Tas. 5, Aust. The proto-

conch is elongate and consists of four and a half glossy, smooth dark purplish~

brown whorls, Adult whorls are sculptured with axial riblets which nodulate

the margin of the suture, the axials becoming comparatively weaker in the latter

part of the shell, Dredged alive in 22 fms. off Royston Head, 20 fms, off New-

land Head, also 15 fms, in Investigator Straits, Backstairs Passage and Gulf

St. Vincetit. It is also infrequently taken dead on the beach, Tate took it in

the Great Australian Bight. The whorls which are typically “obsoletely distantly

plicate” may be quite validly costellate, the costellae being broadly concavely

triangulat in section, The spire and body whorls are sublenticularly spirally

striate, the striae crossing the axial riblets. There is a rare variant sometimes

taken in South Australia which has the shape of A. brasieri but longitudinal

plications are almost as well marked as those of Pervicacia kleneri, This variant

we have from Royston Head 22 fms,, Newland Head 26 fms., Investigator Strait

14 fms., anid Kangaroo Island 13 fms.

Parviterenra Pilsbry

Parviterebra Pilsbry 1904, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Philad., 56, 5,

Genolype—Parviterchra paucivolvis Pilsbry 1904, Japan.

The genus is distinguished by the narrow, fusiform shell, few whorls, absence

of subsutural groove, long, gradually tapering body—whor] without a differen-

tated siphonal fasciole at the base, columella straight abruptly truncated below.

The Australian species P. brasieri and P. trilineata were once placed in the genus

Euryta H, and A, Adams 1853 (not Gestel 1848), a synonym of Mazat/anta Dall

1900, belotiging to the family Pyrenidae, where Theile also places Parziterebra.

P. brasieri Angas 1875, Jackson Heads, 25 fms. N.S,W. (type), Tas. Vict.

5, Aust, W. Aust. Synonyms are Euryta angasi Tryon 1884, Rapid Head,

s, Aust., a name introduced by Tryon to replace Euryta pulchella Adams and

Angas 1863, Rapid Bay, S. Aust., “preoccupied in Terebra by Deshayes," Man-

gelia hayvisoni Tenison Woods 1878, Clarke Island, Vict., Olivella australis

‘Tenison Woods 1878, Clarks Island, Vict. Shells of the present species in the

Verco Collection were identified by Sowerby from types in the British Museum

of E, pulchella and Vereo confirmed the identification on a later visit ta London.

He writes in M.S.S.: “The type is a dead shell and very Eaintly coloured,”

The specimens of E. brazieri in the British Museum from off Port Jackson Heads

are, Verco continues, “exactly the same, only more highly coloured, like the best

coloured of mine.” Localities of specimens in the Museum Collection are-—

S. Aust., Investigator Strait 15 fms., 20 fms., Newland Head 20 fms., Pondo-

lowie Bay, Backstairs Passage 20 fms., Porpoise Head 12 fms., Spencer Gulf;

he Seite Hopetoun 35 ims., King George Sound 12-14 fms., Bunbury, Rottnest;

. Tas.

There is a narrow variant taken at Hopetoun 35 fms., one specimen, Beach

specimens are rare, the species apparently living in deep water.

P. iA prea Adams and Angas 1863, Port Jackson, N.S.W. (type), Vict.,

5. Aust,

This is more slender than P. brasieri and the whorls are encircled with

thread-like lines, We have it from South Australia, St, Francis Island, Port

Lincoln, Edithburg, Backstairs Passage 17 Ims., Investigator Strait.

‘TRIPHOSTREPHANUS Dall.

Triphostrephanus Dall 1908. Nautilus 22, No. 11, 124-125.

Génotype—Terebra triseriata Gray 1834, China.

Very elongate and narrow, presttural sulcus present, whorls nodulous at

both margins.

T, praelonga Deshayes 1859. Q, (type), N.S.W., NLA.

A series of this species from Port Keats, north Australia, confirms the fact

(Iredale 1931) that Australian shells taper less rapidly than the Chinese geno-

type. Our specimens suggest that 7. praelonga does not attain to the great length

of 7. triseriata, our only shell of that species from Japan measures 135 mm. and

the maximum Port Keats shell 90 mmm.

DrpLomeriza Dall

Diplameriza Dall 1919. Nawtilus, 33, No. 1, 32.

Genotype—Terebra duplicaia Vamarck 1844. Indian Ocean.

The genetic name was introduced to replace Dupliceria Dall 1908, pre-

occupied by Refinesque 1833 for a species of Chilina.

D. duplicata Lamarck 1844. N.W.A., N.A.

A series of living specimens from Broome, N.W.A., range in colour from

pure white to dark brown. We haye also a series from Darwin and Melville

Island.

D., bailina Hedley 1915. N.S.W. (type), Old.

The type came from Trial Bay, collected by C. Laseron, and Kesteven took

it at Caloundra. It is not represented in the South Australian Museutn Collection.

Hedley compared it with D. ustulata Deshayes in the original description, remark-

ing that it differed “hy being more slender, and has fewer wider-spaced ribs.’

D. vallesia Hedley 1912. N.S.W, (type).

The type was collected by C_ Laseron at Trial Bay. This species is repre-

sented in the South Australian Museum Collection by typical specimens from that

locality.

D. australis Smith 1873. S.W.A. (type), N.W.A,, N.A,

So far no authentic specimens of this species have been found iti the South

Australian Museum Collection, but numerous juvenile specimens of 1), duplicata

from Broome and Darwin approximate to this species,

Pertrioe Dall

Perirhoe Dall 1908, Nautilus, 22, No. 11, 125.

Genotype—Terebra circumcincta Deshayes 1857. Red Sea,

Australian species belong to the subgenus Dimidacts Iredale 1928 introduced

for Perirhoe melamans Iredale 1928 for species having the spiral lines punctate

as distinct from typical Perirhae which has the spiral lines not punctate. Iredale

1928 pointed out that Partsch 1923 proposed the subgenus Terebrina, genotype

Terebra cingulifera, a punctate type, bit this name is preoccupied by Terebrina

Rafinesque 1815,

P. cingulifera Lamarck 1822. Described from unknown locality.

Our specimens are from Mauritius and Port Douglas, Queensland. A

synonym is Terebra pallida Deshayes 1857. Marqtiesas group.

P. monile Quoy and Gaimard 1833. Mariancs or Carolines (type), Qld.

P. albomarginata Deshayes 1859, Australia (type), N.S.W. P. exulta Iredale

1931, N.S.W. (type). 2. melamans Iredale 1829. N.S.W. Sydney Harbour

(type), P. pertusa Born 1778. Qld., N.S.W., N.A. (type).

OxyMeEnris Dall

Oxymeris Dall 1903. Proc, U.S. Nat. Mus., 26, 951,

Genotype—Buccinum wiaculatym Tanne 1758. Indo-Pacific. Whorls rapidly

enlarging, presutural sulcus obsolete in the adult.

©. maculata Linne 1758. We have a typical series from Melville Island, North

Australia (Sayers), Murray Island (A, M. Lea) and the Barrier Reef, Queens«

land.

O. felinum Dillwyn 1817, Indo-Pacific; Queensland. South Australian

Museum specitnens are {rom Seychelles, Mauritius and Moreton Bay, Queensland.

Formerly named Terebra tigrina Gmeliti 1791, pre-occupied.

O. nebulosa Sowerby 1824, This species has been recorded from Queensland,

but our only series is from Zanzibar.

Trrenon.a Iredale

Terenolla Iredale 1929. Mem, Qld. Mus., 9, pt. iii, 282,

Genotype—Terebra pygmaca Hinds 1843. Straits of Malacca.

This has nut so far been seen in the South Australian Museum collection,

but it was recorded from Michaelmas Cay, Queensland, by Iredale, 1929.

Euterchra inconspicua and Gradaterebra scalariforimis of southern Australia

and Tasmania complete the list of recent Australian species of the family.

Hastuta H. and A. Adams

Hastula H. and A, Adams 1853. Gen. Rec. Moll. 1, 225.

Genotype—Buccinum strigilatum Linne 1758, Indo-Pacific.

Shells small, slender, sculpture of regular, moderately developed axial ribs,

no presutural sulcus, suture appressed.

H. strigilata Linne 1758, Queensland, North West Australia. South Aus-

tralian Musetiin specimens are from Louis Island atid Broome, West Australia,

and Moreton Bay, Queensland.

H. cerithina Lamarck 1827. Timor (type); Queensland, Six specimens from

Moreton Bay, Queensland.

H. hastatwm Gmelin 1791, Indo-Pacific (type); Queensland. Twa speci-

mens from Moreton Bay, Queensland.

TERTIARY SPECIES

None of the Australian Tertiary species of Terebridae appear to belong to

the typical genus Terebra, In these notes I have placed them tentatively in the

genera named. The numbers following the type locality refer to the range of the

species according to the Marine stage listed below.

1, Werrikooian - - - = Upper Pliocene

2. Kalimnan - - - - - Lower Pliocene

3. Cheltenhamian - — - - - Upper Miocene

4. Balcombian - = - - Middle Miocene

5. Janjukian - - - - Lower Miocene

Pervicacia crassa Tate 1886. Aldinga, South Australia, upper beds, 2.

P. additoides Tenison Woods 1877. Table Cape, Tasmania, 5,2.

P. mutica Tate 1889. Muddy Creek, lower beds, 4.

Acuminia leptaspira Tate 1888, Muddy Creek, lower beds, Victoria, 4.

A. profunda Chapman and Gabriel 1914. Mallee bore, Victoria, 2.

Nototerebra simplex Tenison Woods 1876, Table Cape, 5, 2.

N. platyspira Tate 1886. Muddy Creek, lower beds. 4.

N, angulosa Tate 1888, Murray Desert, well sinking, South Australia. 3, 2,

N. mitrellaeformis Tate 1886. Aldinga, upper heds, 2.

TRIPIIOSTREPHANUS PLATYSPIRA Tate

Triphostrephanus platyspira Tate 1886, Muddy Creek, Jower beds, 4.

The species is placed in this genus because it is comparatively very elongate

and has numerous (25 )whoris. The sculpture is different from that of the geno-

type, that of T, platyspira being comparatively weakly developed. The protoconch

is rather distinctive, large, bulbous, considerably broader than the first few shell

whorls, apex reverted and immersed.

GeMMATEREBRA Cotton 1952

Genotype—Terebra catenifera Tate 1886. M uddy Creek, upper beds,

Shell pyramidal, whorls flattened, slightly overlapping, two spirally and axially

Striate; protoconch mamillate of two rather large, smooth, convex whorls.

G. catenifera Tate 1886. Muddy Creek, upper beds, 2. PI. iii, fig. 5.

G. subcatenifera Tate 1889. Cunninghame and jJemmy’s Point, Gippsland. 2,

NovITEREBRA Cossman

Noditerebra Cossman 1896. Pal. Comp., 2, 51.

Genotype—Terebra geniculata Tate 1886. Muddy Creek, upper beds. 2.

N. geniculate Tate 1886, Fragments of this species were noted in Adelaidean

material [rom bores, PI. iii, fig. 7,

SPINEOTEREBRA Sacco

Spineoterebra Sacco 1891. Moll. Piemonte Figuria, 58.

Genotype—Terebra spinulosa Doderlein. Miocene, Italy.

In this genus the shell is pupoid, subsutural sulcus absent, aperture narrow,

suture appressed, columella callous, truncate anteriorly, whorls costulate.

S. subspectabilis Tate 1889, Muddy Creek, upper beds, 2, 4.

S. convexiuscula Tate 1889. Muddy Creek, upper beds. 2.

Family RISSOINIDAE

The typical Rissoina is axially costate and has the aperture produced below.

This genus and its associates are here recognised as constituting the family

Rissvinidae as distinct from the Rissoidae,

Tate 1889, Trans. Roy, Soc, S. Aust., 23, 230, reviewed the recent Rissoidae

of Australia, placing the 78 species then recorded from Australian waters in the

two genera Rissoa and Risseina, “viewed in their widest acceptation.”” In his

“Rissoinae” (Rissoinidae), he used nine “subgroups” which are nowadays

regurded by conservative workers as sections or subgenera and by others as full

enera,

i In this account four genera are recognised, Scaliola, Rissoina, Rissolina and

Stiva, They may be distinguished by the following key,

KEY To GENERA

a, Operculum spiral

b. No funicular rib on base

e. Smooth, with agglutinated sand grains «.. ais we Sealiola

ce. Sculptured de wast wits Sa eeddpersef jun a Rissoinad

bb. Funicular rib on base inh ele bad melt ap wu. Rissalina

aa, QOperculum not spiral ae fe a nat os ww Shiva

Scarroca Adams 1860

Genolype—Scaliala bella Adams 1860. Japan.

Shell turriculate, umbilicate, thin, white, whorls smooth but covered with

agglutinated grains of sand. The genus ranges from Japan to Australia and the

Red Sea. It was originally described as a subgenus of Scala, Theile places it in

the family Finellidae. From apertural features it is regarded here as belonging

to the Rissoinidae.

S. bella Adams 1860. Japan (type), North Australia, Queensland.

= J. lapillifera Hedley 1899. Funafuti (type).

S. adrenosa Adams 1862. Japan (type), North Australia, Queensland.

S, ealedonica Crosse 1870. New Caledonia (type), Queensland.

S. elata Issel 1869. Red Sea (type), Queensland.

Tryon, in his Manual of Conchology, mentions two further species,

S. glareosa and S. gracilis Adams from Japan.

Rissoina Orbigny 1840

Genot\pe—Rissoina inca. Orbigny 1840, Peru.

Shell axially costate, aperture produced below, no funicular rib. The type

species is strongly axially costate throughout, the costae becoming stronger on

the body whorl, Apex mammillate, aperture similunar, lip thickened and a little

reflected, anteriorly effuse or [aintly channelled,

Operculim corneous, thick semilunar, paucispiral, with a claviform process

on the interior face, The getius is cosmopolitan in warm and temperate seas.

Australian species may be arranged in subgenera. Meerchiella, Phosinella,

Zebinella, Pyranidelloides and Schwartsiella.

Key To SUBGENERA

a. Aperture with strong basal emarpination

b. No nodulose spiral ribs

c. Avwially costated shoe bias sats ‘yas seb w. Moerchiella

tc. Reticulate

d. Sculpture coarse .. 0 neue eee ee Photinia

dd. Sculpture fine sie un am ia sine wn =Zebinelle

bb. Nodulose spiral ribs ,, 0 we wee wee Peyramidelloides

aa. Aperture with weal basal emurgination nig ay. w = Schwartsiella

MoeERcHIELLA Nevill 1880

Genotype—Rissoina gigantea Deshayes 1848. Philippines.

Shell comparatively large, thick, upper part of shells axially ribbed, lower

part smooth or spirally striate. This subgenus is preferred for the Australian

species, the true Rissoina being very boldly axially ribbed through, including the

body whorl.

Thiele 1925, inadvertently introduced Morchiella to replace Mérchia Adams

1860, preoccupied by Albers 1850. He later, 1931, corrected this to Mérchinella.

That genus: belongs to the Adeorbidae.

R. spirata. Sowerby 1825. Philippines (type). New Guinea, North Australia.

A synonym is A. montrousieri Souverbie 1862,

R. triangularis Watson 1886. Ascension Island (type), Queensland, North

Australia.

R. variegata Angas 1867. New South Wales, Port Jackson (type); Tas-

mania, King Island; Victoria, Port Phillip; South Australia, St. Francis Island,

Sceales Bay, Guichen Bay, Port Elliston, Macdonnell Bay; West Australia, Ellen-

brook, Yallingup, Esperance, Rotrnest and Hopetoun.

R. gertrudis Tenison Woods 1875, Tasmania, King Island (type) ; Victoria;

South Australia, Guichen Bay, Macdonnell Bay, Beachport 45 fms., 110 fms.,

Edithburg.

Rissoina vincentiana sp. nov.

(Pl. iii, fig. 9)

Shell large, thick, cream-coloured to white with a spotted brown band below

the suture; whorls seven, rather fattened, very ftely spirally striate and axially

plicate, the axials becoming weaker on the later whorls, obsolete on the body

whorl and absent towards the middle and base; suture very narrowly channelled,

aperture large, pyriform, outerlip effuse below and yery thick; protoconch of two

smooth whorls. Height 10 mm., width 3°5 mm.

Locality—South Australia; Gulf St. Vincent, Glenelg (type). In shell sand

and generally along the southern Australian coast and dredged. Investigator Strait

15-20 fms., Port Lincoln 9 fms. West Australia: Ellenbrook, Rottnest, Yallin-

gup, Victoria.

Remarks—Holotype, Reg. No, D14438 Sth. Aust. Museum, This Flindersian

species is large, thick, and has a gradually weakening axial sculpture, It has been

confused with R. spirata Sowerby 1824, Philippines, R. variegaia Angas 1862,

New South Wales, R. gertrudis Tenison Woods 1836 and FR. orbignyi Adams

1853, Philippines and other Indo-Pacific species, It is most like RF, spirata, which

is much longer and has a marked torsion of the axis, A specimen of J. spirata

from Milne Bay, New Guinea, measures 15 mm, in length, has ten whorls and

a comparatively small protoconch.

Rissoina grata sp. nov,

(Pl. iii, Ge. 6)

Shell small, narrow, solid, shining white, suture impressed, whorls round;

axial ribs stout a little sinaus equivalent in width to the interspaces, nine on the

body whorl, nodulating the suture; aperture semilunar, lips thickened, protoconcl

of two smooth whorls the second fairly large and bulbous.

Height 4 mm., width 1°25 mm.

Localifty—West Aust,: Ellenbrook (type), King George Sound 80 fms,

80 miles west of Eucla; S. Aust.; Cape Borda 55 fms.

Remarks—The shell is related to R. gertrudis Tenison Woods but it has few

and strong axials. Holotype, Reg. No, D,14439, Sth, Aust. Museum.

Rissoina fiscina sp, nov.

(Pl. iii, fig. 12)

Shell small, short, solid, shining white, strongly axially ribbed, ten oblique

ribs on the penultimate whorl, no spirals; whorls five, suture a little impressed,

protoconch rather small and comparatively elate, of two smooth whorls the

second considerably wider than the first, but narrower than the first adult whorl;

aperture semilunar. Height 3°5 mm.; width 2 mm.

Locality—West Aust.: King George Sound (type), Ellenbrook, Rottnest.

Remarks—Holotype, Reg. No. D14440, Sth. Aust. Museum. This shell has

less developed axials than those of It. grata,

PuHostnetta Morch 1876

Genotype—Rissoina sagraiana Orbigny. West Indies.

Shell reticulated by subequal sculpture; aperture profoundly sinuated below ;

operculum denticulate posteriorly.

R., hedleyi Tate 1899. Sth. Aust.: Fowler Bay (type), Backstairs Passage

17 ims., St. Francis Island, Eyre Peninsula, Cape Borda 55 fins,. West Aust.:

Rottnest, King George Sound beach, Ellenbrook, Victoria,

Besides the typical form there is a variant with axial costae obsolete and

niore numerous spiral lirae, eight on the penultimate whorl, twenty-four on the

body whorl inclusive of three small ones at the extremity of the pillar.

R. efficata Brazier 1877, Old. (type). A synonym is P, Semisculpta Tate

1899. ‘Tas. (type, error).

R. clathrata Adams 1853. Philippines (type). Nth. Aust.: Torres Straits.

R, exasperata Souverbie 1866. New Caledonia (type), Funafuti, Qld.,

N. Atist. A synonym is R, quasillus Melwvill.

R. horrida Garrett 1873. Viti Island, Port Curtis (type), Nth, Aust., Qld.

Synonyms are R. curtisi Smith 1881 and &, australis Sowerby 1878.

R, allanag Laseron 1950. N.S.W.: Woolgoolga (type).

ZERINELLA Morch 1876

Genotype—Rissoina decussata Montagu, West Indies.

Shell very finely longitudinally costate and spirally striate, aperture widened

and emarginate helow,

Z, lintea Hedley and May 1908, Tas.; Cape Pillar 100 fms, (type); Vict.;

S. Aust:: Beachport 40 tms., 47 fms. 110 fms., 150 fms., Cape Borda 55 fims.,

Cape Jaffa 130 fms.

All South Australian specimens have numerous distinct spiral iricisions, some

are colourless, some light straw-coloured and others have two brown spirals on

the spire-whorls and five on the body-whorl as in R. fausta. A living specimen

from Cape Borda 55 fms., has no colour bands but is of a. uniform light greyish-

brown.

R. rhyllensis Gatliff and Gabriel 1908. Vict.: Western Port (type). Verco

1908 recorded Sotith Australian Iocalities irom Gulf St. Vincent to Beachport,

25 Ims. to 150 fms., remarking that the species seems to liye in about 100 fms.

in South Australia and to be less frequent in the shallower and deeper water.

The following localities can now be added: Spencer Gulf, Cape Jaffa 300 fms.,

St. Francis Island, Beachport 40 fms. and 200 fms.; West Aust.: Esperance,

Tt is a tather variable shell. In some examples the whorls are quite flat, in others

nearly all the whorl is flat, but the lower part is sharply convex, so. that each

whorl is overhung by the one above it. The sutures may be linear, or slightly

impressed or slightly channelled. The surface may be quite smooth and shining,

There may be spiral hair-like lines and similar axial lines, These may be of

about equal validity, so as to produce a microscopic latticing, or either spirals

or axials may be less valid up to complete obsolescence. Colour thay be absent

or there may be spiral rows of brown or orange spots, only one ar two on the

body whorl, and one on the spire whorls, or these spots may he axial blotches

extending nearly from suture to suture. J’. lintea approximates to the channelled

suture and valid spirals and R. fawsta to the smooth and painted variety.

R. rhyllensis has a priority of one month,

R fausta Hediey and May 1908 Tas.: Cape Pillar 100 fms, (type);

Sth. Aust, Cape Borda 55 tms. and 60 fms., Beachport 110 fms., 40 [ms., rare

in South Australia, Those from Cape Borda are almost smovth except for dine

close-set spirals and have five of six orange spirals about one-third the width of

the interspaces on the body-whorl, three on the spire-whorls, Specimens from

Beachport 110 fms. have five microscopic incisions and one or two orange lines

or series of orange blotches; body whorl with one to five orange lines or a series

of curved axial blotches, Specimens from 60 ims. off Cape Borda are smooth

with a single row of orange dots or with numerous axial yermicular orange lines

on the spire and body whorl.

Rissoina jaffa sp, nov.

(Pl, iii, fig. 8)

Shell attenuate, translucent, cream to yellow, whorls eight, flatly convex,

sutures lightly impressed, apex rather blunt, protoconch of two smooth, shining

depressed whorls; sculpture of close, fine, weak regular axtal plicae crossed by

even finer striae; aperture expanded effuse; columella slightly sinuous. Height

9 mm.,. width 2-5 mm.

Lecality—Sth. Aust.: Cape Jatia 300 ims. (type), 90 and 150 f{ins., Beach-

port 150 and 206 fms. Cape Wiles 40 miles south, 100 fis, (ITedley) ; West

Aust,: Great Australian Bight 40 miles west of Eucla, 72 ancl 120 fms.

Remares—Uoulotype, Reg. No. D.14441, South Australian Museum. This

species is retuarkable for its attenuated translucent shell and weak though regular

sculpture. It is of the R. rhyllensis group, but axially and spirally costate. Accord-

ing to specimens examined from Cape Wiles, 100 fms., it is the species recorded

from that locality by Hedley 1911, as R. rhyllensis.

Rissoina axiscalpta sp. nov.

(PL iii, fig. 10)

Shell elongate-ovate, apex blunt, sutures narrowly channelled, spiral lirae

about twelve on the body whorl and a few on the base, axial litac about twelve

in the penultimate whorl; aperture oblique, semilunar, inner lip slightly arcuate,

outer lip free, thick, with an anterior channel. Ifeight 6 mm., width 3 mm,

Locahty—Sth. Aust.: Beachport 110 fms. (type), Newland Head 24 ims,

Cape Borda 62 fms., Neptunes 45 fms. Beachport 49 fms.

Remarks—Holotype, Reg. No. Di4442, South Australian Museum. FR, axi-

scalpta is quite distinct from any other Australian species but is somewhat like

R, wedalei Laseron 1950, differing in ihe greater comparative length, flatrer

whorls, weaker spaced axials.

RR. elegantula Angas 1880, Sth, Aust.: Aldinga Bay, beach (type), Beach-

port 49 1o 150 {ms., Cape Borda 62 fms., Yankalilla beach, Porpoise Head

17 tms.. Newland Head 20 tms,, Backstai?s Passage 17 tms., Wallaroo 15 fins.,

Neptunes 104 fms., Cape Jaffa 130 fims., St. Francis Island 35 fms. and beach,

Kingston, beach; West Atist.: Rottnest, Yallingup, King George Sound, Bun-

bury 15 fms.; Tas.; Vict. The species is not uncommon from the heach to 17 ims.,

rarer in deeper water. Although there are no longitudinal lirae of the usual type,

there are microscopic striae cutting the very fine interstaces between the spiral

lirae.

R. reticulata Sowerby 1824, West Indies (type), Philippines, Old,

Nth. Aust. A synonym is. R. princeps Mirch 1876.

R. inermis Brazier 1877. Nth. Aust. (type).

R. iredalei Laseron 1950, N.S.W., Port Jackson, 15 fms. (type).

ScHWARTZIELLA Nevill 1884

Genotype—Rissoina bryerca Montagu 1803. Cuba.

Shell with flexuous axial costae equal smooth interstaces, no spiral striae,

lip with a longitudinally striate varix, rounded below, aperture without basal

emmargination,

R, nivea Adams 1851. Sth. Aust.: Port Lincoln (type), Eyre Peninsula,

Investigator Strait 20 fms., Gulf St. Vincent, beach and dredged in shallow water,

Cape Borda 55 fms., St, Francis Island 15-20 fms., and beach, Backstairs Pas-

sage 22 fms., Kingston; W. Aust.: King George Sound, beach and 12-14 fims.,

Bunbury [5 fms., Rottnest, Yallingup, Ellenbrook, Tlopetoun; Tas.: north-west

coast; Vict,

Synonyms are R, lirata Angas 1880, Aldinga and Holdfast Bay (type).

R, toxopleura Tate 1893 new name for R. lirafa Angas, not Gould 1861.

R. fasciata Adams 1853. N.S.W.; Sydney (type); Vict.; Tas.; Sth Aust. =

American River, Kangaroo Island, Yankalilla, Pondolowie, Investigator Straits

15 to 20 fms,, Beachport 110 fms., 49 fms., Cape Borda 55 fms., 62 fms., Robe,

Kingston.

Tt is a shallow water species, good examples not being taken below 25 ims. ;

deeper water specimens are in poor condition. Synonyms ate R. flexuosa Gould

1861, N.S.W. (type). R. cicta Angas 1867, N.S.W, {type), FR. hanleyi

Schwartz 1860.

R. eretacea Tenison Woods 1878, N.S.W. (type).

R. usitdta Laseron 1950. N.S.W.: Clarence River, 15 fms. (type)-

PykAMIpDELLOInES Nevill 1884

Genotype—Rissoina insolita Deshayes 1863. Mauritius.

Shell narrowly turretted, with spiral nodulose ribs, tuberculated below the

suture, outer lip crenulately varicose, laterally compressed aperture.

R, miranda 1861. Nth. Aust.: Cape York (type).

R, nodicincta Adams 1853. Philippines (type); Qld.; Nth Aust.; New

Guinea,

Rrssotina Gould 1861

Genotvpe—Rissoina elegauntissima Orbigny 1853. West Indies.

Shell with an acttte elevated ridge and an adjacent constriction around the

anterior extremity, sculpture of predominating axial folds.

R. angasi Pease 1872. N.S.W.: Port Jackson, deeper water (type); Vict.;

‘Tas.: Sth. Aust.; Gulf St. Vincent, Spencer Gulf, Kangaroo Island, Robe,

Middleton, Beachport 49 ims., Cape Borda 52 fms., 62 Ims., Cape Jaffa 130 fms. ;

West Aust.; Yallingup, Esperance, King George Sound, Rottnest, Hopetoun,

Ellenbrook. A synonym is Rassoina turricula Angas 1867, not Pease 1860.

R. crassa Angas 1871. N.S.W.: Bottle and Glass Rocks, under stones,

Port Jackson (type); Vict.; Old.; Sth, Aust: Port Sinclair, St. Francis Island,

Venus Bay. Edithburg; West "Aust. 2 Ellenbrook, Rottnest, Hopetoun, Yallingup,

King George Sound 12-14 fms., and beach.

R., cardinalis Brazier 1877, Old. (type); Nth. Aust. A synonym is I. mier-

curialis Watson 1886 Wednesday Island, Cape York, north-cast Australia,

8 fms. (type).

R. teres Brazier 1877. Nth, Aust. (type).

R. tnconspicua Brazier 1877. Nth. Aust. (type),

R. pulchella Brazier 1877. Nth, Aust (type); Qld, A synonym is R. hono-

luluensis Watson 1886. Honolulu (type).

R. flicata Adams 1851, Philippines (type) ; Old.; Nth. Aust. Synonyms are

R. scalarina Adams 1853, R. turricula Pease 1860.

R. scolopax Souverbie 1877, New Caledonia (type); Nth, Aust.; Qld.

R. kesteveni Wedley 1907. Qld.: Mast Head Reef (type).

R. obeliseus Schwattz 1860, Mauritius (type); Old, A synonym is

R. schwartziana Dunker, Upota (type).

R. thawmasia Melvill and Standen 1898. Madras (type) ; Qld.; Nth. Anst.

Stiva Hedley 1904

Genotype—Stiva ferruginea Hedley 1904. N.S.W. (type); Sth. Aust.

Shell Jarge, solid, resembles a Scala in general appearance but has the typical

aperture of the Rissvinidae, The operculum is peculiar, being concentric and

having a hollow projecting articulating limb.

S. ferruginea Hedley 1904, N.S.W.; Woolongong 100 fms. (type). A stnall

specimen resembling this species rather than S$, royara was found in dredged

material at Beachport, 1550 fms,

S. royana Iredale 1924, N.S.W.: Twofold Bay 10-25 fms, (type); Vict-:

Gabo Island 10-15 fms.

S. nielsent Laseron 1950. N.S.W.: Crookhaven 30-35 fms. (type).

TERTIARY SPECIES

Rissoina Orbigny 1840. Rissoa indica Orbigny, Peru,

Subgenus Zebinella March 1876,

R. elegantula Angas 1880. Recent. Adelaidean. Pliocene.

R. varicifera Venison Woods 1877. Table Cape, Miocene, 2, 4,

Subgenus Schwartsiella Nevill 1884.

R. nivea Adams 1851. Recent. Adelaidean. Pliocene.

Subgenus Mérchiella Nevilie 1884,

R. johnstoni Tennison Woods 1877. Table Cape. Miocenc.

Rissolina Gould 1861. Rissoina elegcitissima Orbigny 1853. West Indies.

R. profunda Chapman and Gabriel. 2, 3.

Family RISSOIDAE

The Recent Australian species of this family were reviewed by the author

in the Trans. Roy, Soc. S. Aust., 68, (2), 1944, 286-314, pl. xvi, fig, 1-12. In

the Rec. Aust. Mus., 22, No. 3, 257 -287, C. F, Laseron adds a few new genera

and species from New South Wales. He comments on the gents Leevilitorina

Pfeffer here regarded as belonging to the family Littorinidae. A new species of

the genus Eusetia Cotton 1944 is now described.

Eusetia laterna sp. nov.

(PLili, fig. 11)

Shell thick, solid, pyramidal, white to slate-coloured; suture linear, aperture

round, expanded; sculpture of microscopic crowded axial striae; protoconch

rather depressed, of two smooth whorls. Height 3°25 mm., width 2 mm.

Locality—Beachport 200 fms. (type), also 40 fms., 150 fms., and 10 fms.;

Cape Borda 55 fms.; Cape Jaffa 130 fms.; St. Francis Island 35 fms.

Remarks—Holotye, Reg, No, D.14443. S. Aust. Museum.

R. laterna is probably most like H, colurmnaria May 1910, but it is much

smaller, has less swollen whorls and is of a different shape.

TERTIARY SPECTES

Tertiary species of this family are arranged as follows:—

Haurakia Iredale 1915.

FH. tateana Tenison Woods 1877, Table Cape, Miocene,

ra: . gabrieli Chapman and Crespin 1928. Sorrento Bore, Victoria, Balcombian.

2,4,5.

H. demessa Tate and May 1900. Recent. Recorded from the Adelaidean,

Pliocene.

H. novarensis Frauenfeld 1867. Recent. Recotded ftom the Adelaidean,

Pliocene.

Linemera Finlay. 1924,

L. suprasculpta May 1915, Recent. Recorded {rom the Adelaidean, Pliocene.

L, sculptilis May 1919. Recent, 2, 3.

Epigrus Hedley 1903,

E. chrysalidus Chapman and Gabriel 1914, Mallee bore, Victoria, Kalimnan,

Pliocene.

E. cylindraceus Tenison Woods 1878, Recent, 2, 3.

Estea Tredale 1915.

E. bicolor Petterd 1884, Recorded from the Adelaidean, Pliocene.

E. kershawi Tenison Woods 1877. Recent. 2, 3, 4.

Scrobs Watson 1886.

§. gatliffiana Chapman and Gabriel 1914. Mallee bore, Kalimnan, Pliocene.

Botelloides Strand 1928.

B, bassiana Hedley 1911. Recent. Mallee bore, Kalimnan, Pliocene,

Kauvenella Ludbrook 1941.

K. denotata Ludbrook 1941. Adelaidean, Pliocene.

Subestea Cotton 1944,

S. stevensiana Tenison Woods 1877. Table Cape, Miocene. 2, 4.

Eusetia Cotton 1944,

E. bulininvides Tate and May 1900. Recent, Kalimnan,

Lironoba Iredale 1915.

L, australis Tenison Woods 1877, Recent, Kalimnan.

Family FASCIOLARIIDAE

The two genera Pleuroploca and Colus are reviewed here. The remaining

genera, Recent and Tertiary, are being worked out. The genotype of the typical

genus is Murex tulipa Linne 1758 from North America. Related Australian

species are placed in the genus Pleuroploca Fischer.

PiLeuropioca Fischer

Pleuroploca Fischer 1884, Genotype—Murex trapezium Linne 1758, Am-

boina. Fasciolaria audouini Jonas 1846, Red Sea, is said to be a synonym.

3z.

P. trapezium Linne 1758, Indo-Pacific. Two South Australian Museum

specimens, 1.6923, are labelled “North Queensland” and are the only records

for the species in Australia to my knowledge.

P. filamentosa Bolten 1798, Indo-Pacific, Nth. Aust,, Old. We have speci-

mens of this coral-living species from Cape York, Townsville, and Murray Island.

P_ ferruginea Lamarck 1822. Australia (type). Broome. This species is

narrower than P. filamentosa, A synonym is Fasciolaria imermis Jonas 1846,

Red Sea.

P, altimasta Iredale 1930. Qld.: Port Curtis (type). The coastal represen-

tative of P, filamentosa,

P. fusiformis Valenciennes 1840. Sth. Aust.; Tas, The figure in Kiener,

Coquilles Vivantes, 6, 13, pl, iv, Ag. 2, published 1840, are like the shell from

the South-East, South Australia. Kiener gives the locality “Notvelle-Hollande.”

It is a small thick, narrow shell with the upper whorls somewhat axially ribbed,

the lower whorls without axials, the outer Jip well bevelled and validly spirally

lirate within.

P. australasia Perry 1811. N.S.W., Vict. Tas. West Aust. Sth. Aust.

This species described by Perry as “a native of New Holland and Van Diemen’s

Land” is one of the most common larger gastropods of South Australia and

occurs all along the coast alive {rom low tide mark down to 55 fms. Perry's

figure is unmistukable and represents a medium-sized shell with the typical large

protoconch, rounded whorls with scarcely any shoulder, rather faint rounded

axial ribs, colour olive-green, ribs tinted by brown spiral lirae, the aperture

spirally streaked within the labrum, the columella three-plaited.

P. coroenala Lamark 1822. Vict., N.S.W., Sth. Aust., Tas., West Aust-

This species was deserthed from “des tes King et des Kanguroos,’”’ It is only

a variant of P. austrélasia and with the same geographical and vertical distribu-

tion, lt may be sharply angled and coronated at the shoulder, but grades: into

the round-shouldered P. aystralasia. Both have angled and coronated early spire

whorls, the adult only showing to which variant the form belongs,

P, bakeyi Gatliff and Gabriel 1912. Vict, (type), N.S.W. A specimen in

the South Australian Musetim, D.7966, irom Gabo Island, 70 fms. is typical

but large, measuring 148 mm. in length, It has ihe strong whorls and longitudinal

plications. Two specimens, D.68396, dvedged off Eden, New South Wales, are

atypical but probably belong to this species.

Pleuroploca eucla sp. nov.

(PL iv, fg, I, 2, 3)

Shell elongate, fusiform of seven whorls excliding the protoconch of two

smooth glassy, slightly pulliform whorls; spire whorls trapezoidal, with a sharp

central keel, concave above, slightly convex below where they are embraced by

the stture; the keel has plicate tubercles from which long, basal axial costae

extend, gradually fading out at the sutures, eleven in the body and penultimate

whorl; axials crossed by spiral lirae equidistant except over the base where they

become more oblique and distant; aperture elongate oval, outer lip crenulate

throughout, numerous close spiral striae within; columella smooth, three oblique

plaits; periostracum thin, greyish; aperture and shell white.

Length 143 mm, width 55 mm.

Locality—West Aust., 60 miles west of Eucla, 72 fms, (type).

Remarks—HAHolotype, 0.14445, Sth. Aust. Museum.

A half-grown specimen 80 mm. x 35 mm. is typical but has a comparatively

larger almost bulbous protoconch, but it is undoubtedly the same species, A third

specimen, a juvenile, is 33 mm, in length and shows the typical features. The

species 1s readily separated from P. australasia coronata in being more elongate,

keeled, white in colour and of more delicate structure, The holotype was men-

tioned as a variant of Fesciolaria oustralasia by Verco 1912.

Corus Humphrey

Colus Humphrey 1797, Mus. Calonnianum, 34,

Genotype—Murex colus L.inne 1758, Indo-Pacific. North Austrahan species

besides the genotype are C. forceps Petty 1811, C. nicobaricus Lamarck 1822.

From New South Wales are recorded C, sinuvellus Iredale 1928, C, consetli Ire-

dale 1928, C. wariegatus Perry 1811 = C. twrrispictus Martyn 178 = C. lati-

costatus Angas 1877 — C. genticus Iredale 1936. From Queensland are tecorded

C, boardmani Iredale 1930, and from Western Australia C. philippt Jonas 1846,

C. ventricosus Menke 1843, C. multicarinatus Lamarck 1822, C. longicaudus

Lamarck 1816, N-W.A., C. exits Menke 1943.

C. australis Quoy and Gaimatd 1833, Sth, Aust. All along the coast from

low tide down to 40 {ms,, and dead at 50 fms, to 150 fms. West Aust., Bunbury,

Albany beach dredged down to 28 fms, King George Sound, 50 fms, to 120 fms,

Great Australian Bight, west of Eucla.

The species is very common in South Australia, Verco 1895 gives Pusus

crebriliratus Reeve 1847, B. marmoraius Philippi 1846, I’. rudicostatus Sowerby

1880, F. laevigatus Sowerby 1880, F, nodicinctus Adams 1855, F. aureus Reeve

1847, and F. caudatus Quoy and Gaimard 1833 as synonyms. The protoconch is

of two and a half whorls, the first two round and smooth and then half a whorl

with axial bars only, ending in a simple verticle Jip. From this point start

abruptly the spiral firae of the mature shell. The two smooth whorls may be

swoller) and in some specimens the axials cover more than a whole whorl.

Colus novaechollandiae Reeve 1848. Tas. (type), N.S.W., Vict., Sth, Aust:

Hardwicke Bay, Willunga, Glenelg, one from the beach at cach locality, dredged

Investigator Straits all small broken specimens in poor condition; West Aust.,

90 miles west of Eucla 100 fims., four young specimens rather sharply keeled in

the middle of the whorls.

Family VOLUTIDAE

The family was reviewed by the author in (he Rec. S- Aust. Mus., 9, No. 2,

181-195.

The following species may now be added:—Lyrencta laseroni Iredale 1937,

N.S.W. Lyria deliciosa hawensis Tredale 1937, Lord Howe Island. Lyria

opposite Iredale 1937, Mast Head Reef, Cymbiola punctata Swainson 1825,

N.S.W, and Qld. Ericusa sericata Thornley 1951, Broughton Island, N.S.W,,

and the new species here described.

Ericusa orca sp. noy.

(Pl. iv, fig. 4, 5, 6)

Shell fustferm, elongate, rather thin, spire and body whorl comparatively

narrow for the genus; polished, smooth except for fine accrentental striae; whorls

natrow, only slightly convex and not angled; columella with three weak plaits,

outer lip a little thickened at the edge; colour cream except for a faint pink tinge

towards the suture and obscure short axial pale-pink flames just below the suture;

jiterior of aperture dark cream. suture close and simple; proteconch papillary,

bluish, oblique, first whorl very small, second large, the third of the same diameter

as the second, merging into the first adult whorl, all polished and smooth except

for microscopic accremental striae; first two adult whorls microscopically striate.

Length 148 mm., width 58 mm.

Locality—West Aust: 90 miles west of Eucla, 100 fms.

Remarks—The species is somewhat like E. fulgetrum Sowerby but is nar-

rower, thinner, has less convex whorls; and the protoconch is comparatively

smaller though basically similar, Holotype, D, 13816, S. Aust. Museum.

Holotype, D. 13816, S. Aust. Musetim.

ERICUSA FULGETRUM (Sowerby)

The species occurs right along the South Australian coastline, Collectors

take it alive in shallow water on sand banks. Between Coobowie and Wool

Bay on the east coast of Yorke Peninsula the tides sometimes form a sand-bar

which is exposed at a very low tide to the heat of the sun, When the sea begins

to cover the bar, as the tide rises, these volutes and also such shells as the “Talse

Helmet” Hypocassis bicarinata and “Lyre Shells” Lyria mitraeformis emerge

from the sand. Collectors say that a dozen or more specimens have been taken in

a few hours. Of the eight varieties described by Verco 1912, the figured specimen

of one only is entered by him in the Museum Register, November 1915, as “D. 439

Ericusa fulgetrum Sby. Var. dictua Verco type shell.” I have not seen specimens

of the untcincta and bicincta varieties.

It is not found in Victoria and the only Western Australian representative

is the deeper water species described above as E, orca, Deeper water specimens

are usually of the dictua, lunisligata or connectens varieties. E. fulgetrum con-

nectens is usually quite small but a fine living specimen recently dredged by Mr. J.

Veitch at Port Lincoln measures six and a quarter inches in length.

Trans. Roy, Soc. S. Aust., 1952 Vol. 75, Plate

1 Pervicacia hefenae sp.nov... = te, zh ee:

2 Pervicacia ustulata Deshayes .... Ak ee es i kL Rd

3 Pervicacia subplicata sp.nov. .... eo rea tae say

4 Nototerebra flindersi sp.nov. .... eh hol ee Va oe

5 Gemunaterebra catentfera Tate rts pan 207 mee eel

6 Rissoina grata sp. nov. Se in a nf Se aw

7 Noditerebra geniculata Tate... a: ae. aes re eet

8 Rissoina jaffa sp. nov. .... as BM Ns. 54 OSS

YQ Rissoima vincentiana sp.nov. .... ai Ri, o wee NAS

10) Rissotna axtscalpta sp.m0v. —... ae ie ao oe Ose

11 Fusetia laterna sp. nov. rm dh FA a Ha SEES

12) Rissoma fiscina sp. nov. en ae a cae Lees:

Trans. Roy Soc. S. Aust. NIE Yooy, Teens: IKK!

Audine C.

1 Pleuroploca eucla sp. nov., ventral... me he we xO4

2 Plewuroploca eucla sp. nov., protoconch =e ie ay es

3. Pleuroploca eucla sp.nov., dorsal... ‘ : ‘ x0-4

4 fEricusa orca sp. nov., ventral ... see aA Ss ge exes

5 Ericusa orca sp,nov., protoconch — .... oh oa cet aie)

6 Ericusa orca sp. nov., dorsal... nde st 23 Exige

SOME SOUTH AUSTRALIAN DESMIDS

BY GERALD W. PRESCOTT AND ARTHUR M. SCOTT (COMMUNICATED BY H. B. S.

WOMERSLEY)

Summary

For the material on which the present study is based we are greatly indebted to Mr. Ivan L.

Ophel of St. Peters, South Australia. With one exception, as noted, the collections were made by

Mr. Ophel in 1945 and 1946, from the stations listed below:

C12.

From pool, Rocky River, Flinders Chase, Kangaroo Island. Squeezed from

Nitella sp. Collected by Miss C. M. Eardley, January 1940 (Tate Expedition)

From pool, Breakneck River, near road, Flinders Chase, Kangaroo Island.

Among Nitella sp. January 1946.

As above but slightly upstream, and squeezed from Myriophyllum sp.

Pool near road bridge, Sou’ West River, Kangaroo Island. Among Chara,

Nitella, and Utricularia. January 1946.

Pool under road bridge, Sou’ West River, Kkangaroo Island. Among Nitella,

Utricularia, etc. January 1946.

Pool in drying-up stream, Harriet River, Vivonne Bay, Kangaroo Island.

January 1946.

As C30, but slightly downstream.

Dam above American River inlet, Kangaroo Island. January 1946.

Pool at Square Waterhole, Mount Compass Swamps. October 1945.

Plankton collection from Happy Valley Reservoir, Adelaide. October 1946.

SOME SOUTH AUSTRALIAN DESMIDS

Geratp W. Prescott * and ArtHur M, Scott tf

(Communicated by H. B. S. Womersley)

[Read 12 July 1951]

For the material on which the present study is based we are greatly indebted

to Mr. Ivan L. Ophel, of St. Peters, South Australia. With one exception, as

noted, the collections were made by Mr, Ophel in 1945 and 1946, from the stations

listed below:

C12, From pool, Rocky River, Flinders Chase, Kangaroo Island, Squeezed

from WNitelle sp. Collected by Miss C. M. Eardley, Jatuary 1940

(Tate Expedition).

C24. From pool, Breakneck River, near road, Flinders Chase, Kangaroo

Island. Among Nitella sp. January 1946.

C24X. As above hut slightly upstream, and squeezed from Myriophylium sp.

C27, Pool near road bridge, Sou’ West River, Kangaroo Island, Among

Chara, Nitella, and Utricularia, January 1946.

C28, Pool under road bridge, Sou’ West River, Kangaroo Island. Among

Nitella, Utricularia, ete. January 1946,

C30. Pool in drying-up stream, Harriet River, Vivonne Bay, Kangaroo

Island, January 1946.

C33. As C30, but slightly downstream.

C39. Dam above American River inlet, Kangaroo Island. January 1946.

B42. Pool at Square Waterhole, Mount Compass Swamps. October 1945.

B50. Plankton collection from Happy Valley Reservoir, Adelaide. October

1946,

Kangaroo Island, from which most of the collections were obtaincd, is a

large island lying a few miles off the coast of South Australia, in Lat. 36° S.,

Long, 138°E., and therefore in the south temperate zone. The desmid-flora,

therefore, might be expected to show considerable resemblance to that of the

States of New South Wales, Victoria and Tasmania, which have been studied

by previous workers, and our examination shows this to be the case. It differs

considerably, however, from that of North Australia and the northern part of

Queensland, since these are in the south tropical zone, and their desmid-flora

includes many of the large and highly elaborated species that are found in the

Indo-Malayan-Indonesian region.

In the following descriptions all measurements are given in microns, and

these abbreviations are used: L.= length; W.= width; T.— thickness; L.—=

isthmus.

We wish to express our thanks to Dr, Hatinah Croasdale for providing the

Latin diagnoses, and to Mrs. Dorothy Perine, Jr., for inking the junior author's

pencil drawings.

Where possible, references have been given to general works, which ate more

easily accessible than the original descriptions. In the case of new varieties the

references are to the species, and for new forms the references are to descriptions

of the variety.

NETRIUM

Netrium digitus var. Naegelii (Bréb.) Krieg. L, 92; W. 21. Breakneck

River, C24X. West and West, 1904, p. 66, pl. VIT, fig. 4, 5.

* Michigan State College, Michigan, U.S.A.

+ New Orleatis, U.S.A.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S, Aust., 75, September 1952

CLOSTERIUM

Closterium: aciculare T. West. Pl. 1, fig. 9, A needle-like species almost

imperceptibly curved throughout the median two-thirds of the cell length, but more

strongly toward the apices which are drawn out to fine points. L. 502-550;

W. at centre; W. at poles 2. Happy Valley Reservoir, B50, West and West 1904,

p. 176,

Closterium cornu Ehrbg. L. 148; W. at centre 5; W. at poles 1°5. Break-

neck River, C24. West and West, 1904, p. 157, pl. XX, fig. 1-5.

Closterium cynthia De Not. fa punctatum fa. nov. Fig. 1, No, 3. Differing

from the typical by having punctations in the wall between the striations which

are relatively prominent, about 7 striae in 10, and also differing in having the

wall light straw-coloured rather than colourless, L. 120; W. at centre 19; W. at

poles 6. Breakneck River, C24X. West and West 1904, p, 113.

Sf } Tig. 1

1 Closteritn dianue Ehrbg.

2 Closteriwm dianae var, arcuairatnr

(Bréb.) Rab,

3 Closterium cynthia. De Not. fa. pune-

talium fa. noy-

4 Closlerium paorvilum Naezg, var. ap-

gustemn West and West.

5 Closterinm striolatum Ehrb.

6,7 Closterium gracile Bréhb,

& Clostenum Kuetsingii Bréb,

9 Closteritun aciculare T. West,

10 Triploceras gracile var. bidentate

Nordst. fa. spinoswn fa. nov.

UL Exuustrun dubtum Naeg. var. glibrum

var, nov.

12 Cosmariwn constrictum Delp, fa.

minor Fritsch and Rich,

13° Cosmurivm capitulum yar, australe

G. S. West.

t4 Cosmurium quadrifarium Lund, fa,

trifidum ta, nov.

15. Cosmurium protumphalum Skuja var.

unqulare var, nov.

16 Cosmarinm. titctin Ralfs.

17 Cosmernim psendoquadratulwm — sp,

nov.

on et . : u

Lee 18 Cesnarim subtumidum Nordst, var,

bachydermum var. nov.

Forma a planta typica differens possessione punctationum in membrana inter

striationes prominentes, circa 7 per 10», necnon membrane pallida straminea

colore potius quara sine colore. Tong. 120; lat, 19; poli 6.

Closteriwm dianae Ehrbg. Tig. 1, No. 1. Poles obliquely truncate and bearing

a granular thickening on the inner surface near the pole, L. 330; W- at centre 25;

W. at poles 7. Breakneck River, C24X. West and West 1904, p. 130.

Closterium dianae var, arcuatum (Bréb.) Rab. Fig. 1, No. 2. A form that is

more strongly curved than the typical, L, 220; W. at centre 19; W. at poles 5,

Breakneck River, C24X. West and West 1904, 1, 131.

Closterium Ehrenbergii Menegh. L. 420; W. 106. Rocky River, C12,

West and West 1904, p. 143, pl. XVII, fig. 1-4.

Closterium gractle Bréb. Fig. 1, Nos, 6, 7. The tapering of the apices and the

curvature at the poles of the Australian plants suggest Cl. Ralfsit var. novae-

angliae (Cush.) Krieg. The former are almost imperceptibly striate, or smooth-

walled, however, and have the proportions of Cl. gracile. L. 142-166; W. at centre

5-6; W. at poles 1-5-2, Breakneck River, C24. West and West 1904, p. 166.

Closterium Kuetzingu Bréb, Fig. 1, No, 8, Walt finely and closely striate, 22

striae visible across the cell in ours. L. 400; W. at centre 16; W. at pole 3. Break-

neck River, C24. West and West 1904, p, 186.

Closterium parvulum var. angustum West and West. Fig. 1, No. 4. A form

in which the curvature creates more of an arc than in the typical; poles strongly

tapering, L. 69; W. at centre 10; W. at poles 3. Breakneck River, C24. West

and West 1904, p, 134,

Closterium sirtolatum Ehrbg, Fig. 1, No. 5. Cells broadly convex dorsally

but nearly straight along the ventral margin; striae 5-10 in 10 (16 striae visible

in our specimens). L. 252; W, at centre 27; W, at pole 10. Mount Compass, B42.

West and West 1904, p. 122,

Closterism venus Kuetz. L. 25; W. at centre 3; W. at poles 1:5, Breakneck

River, C24. West and West 1904, p. 137, pl. XV. fig. 15-20.

Fig. 2

Tetmemorus laevis (Kuetz.) Ralfs.

Pleurotagnivm corenutum (Bréb,)

ab.

Pleurotaenium Hhrenbergit var. un-

dulatuym. Schaarschm,

Plevrotaentum trahecula var. rectum

(Delp) West and West, Fa.

Fuasirum ansatun var. dideltiforme

Ducell, fa, australianum fa. nov.

Euasirum ansatum var. dideltiforme

Duicell,

na un

PLEURATAENIUM

Pleurotaenium coronatum (Bréb.) Rab, Fig, 2, No. 2, L. 406; W, at base

33; W. at pole 24; I. 27. Sow’ West River, C27. West and West 1904, p. 199.

Pleurotaenium Ehrenbergti var. undulatum Schaarschm, Fig. 6, No. 3. L.

326; W. at base 24; W. at poles 17; I. 21. Breakneck River, C24X, West and

West 1904, p, 207.

Pleurotaenium trabéecula vat. rectum (Delp.) West and West. Fig. 6, No. 4.

L. 302; W. at base 22; W. at poles 15; I. 18. Dam on Kangaroo Island, C39.

West and West 1904, p, 209,

TRIPLOCERAS

Triploceras gracile var, bidentatwm Nordst. fa. spinosum fa, nov. Fig. 5,

fig. 10, A form differing in the main from the typical variety by having lateral

protuberances of the wall arranged in seven or eight irregular vertical series, each

protuberance furnished with a relatively long, sharp, mostly horizontally directed

spine, at the base of which are two shoulders which may be elarigated to form

spinescences; polar lobules trispinate as in the variety. L. 414479; W. at base

including spines about 36. Breakneck River, C24X. Krieger, W. 1937, p. 444,

Forma a planta typica differens protuberationthus lateralibus membranae

in 7 vel 8 seriebus yerticalibus, irregulariter ordinatis, quaque protuberatione spina

relative longa, acuta, plerumgue horizontaliter proiciente instructa; duohus

humeris spinae in basi ad spinescentiam efficiendam fortasse elongatis; lobuli

polares trispinati ut im yarietate. Long. 414-479; lat. in basi cemiecllulae, cum

spinis, circa 36,

TETMEMORUS

Tetimemorus Brebissoni; Menegh, L. 286; W. at base 52; W. at pole 33;

1, 30, Mount Compass, B4Z, West and West 1904, p. 216, pl. XXXII, fig. 1, 2.

Tetmemorus laews (Kuetz.) Ralfs, Fig. 2, No. 1. L. 142; W. 27; 1, 26.

Mount Compass, B42, West and West 1904, p. 222.

EUASTRUM

Ewastrom ansatum var, dideltiforme Ducell. Fig. 2, No. 6, The Australian

plants show one of the many variations of E. ansatum; in this case intermediate

between var. dideltiforme Ducell, and var. campounulatum (Playf.) Krieg. The

facial protuberances are but slightly developed as seen in front view, L. 135-158;

W. 77-79; I. 18. Mount Compass, B42, Krieger W., 1937, p, 488.

Euastrum ansotum vat, dideltiforms Ducell. fa, australianum fa, nov. Fig. 2,

No. 5. A form differing from the variety by having two mucilage pores, one

above the other, in the mid-region of the semicell, and in having the angles and

the facial protuberances deeply scrobiculate, the remainder of the cell wall finely

scrobiculate or punctate, L. 90; W. 42; 1.12. Mount Compass, B42, Krieger, W.,

1937, p. 488.

Forma a varietate typica differens possessione duorum pororum mucosorum,

uno supra alterum, media in semicellula, et angulis atque protuberationibus pro-

funde scrobiculatis, reliqua membrane subtiliter scrobiculata punctatave, Long.

90; lat. 42; crass. 27; isthm. 12.

Euastrum conicum (Playf.) Krieg var. imperforatum var. nov. Fig. 3, Nos.

1, 2. A variety differing from the typical by lacking the four mucilage pores in

the mid-region of the semicell, by a complete reduction in the facial protuberances,

and by its greater thickness; side view oblong with broadly convex lateral margins

and a slight swelling of the hasal angles. L, 118-119: W. 36; T. 28; I, 10-12.

Mount Compass, B42, Playfair, G, T., 1907, p. 174.

Varietas a planta typica differens inopia quattuor pororum mucosorum

media in semicellula, atque redictione completa protuberationum super-

ficialem, atque maiore crassitudine; semicellula a latera visa oblonga, marginibus

lateralibus late convexa, angulis basalibus subinflatis. Long. 118-119; lat. 36;

crass, 28; isthm, 10-12,

Euastrum dubium Naeg. var. glabrum var. nov, Fig. 1, No. 11. Breakneck

River, C24X. A variety differing from the typical by its almost complete smooth-

ness of the cell wall, and in the shape of the semicells as seen in lateral view ; setni-

cells rectangular in face view, the lateral margins of basal lobes prominently and

equally hilobed, the sinus narrow and closed throughout, one centra! facial tubercle

and a smali tooth just within each basal angle of the semicell and slightly supra-

isthmial; in lateral view semicells broadly oval, the apex rounded, with two

minute teeth showing at the base of the semicell within the margin. L. 20; W. 16;

T. 10; I. 4°5. Breakneck River, C24X, West and West 1905, p. 43.

Varietas a planta typica differens levitate fere tota membranae cellulae,

atque forma semicellularum a latere visrum; semicellulae a facie: visae rectangu-

lares, marginibus lateralibus loborum basalium prominenter aequeque bilobatis,

sinu omhino angusto inapertoque; unum tuberculum centrale facialeque et dens

parvus admodum intra quemgue anguiliin basalem semicellularum et paulum

supraisthmalis; semicellulae a latere visae late ovatac, apice rotundato, duobus

dentibus minutis intra marginem ad basim semicellulae. Long. 20; lat. 16; crass.

10; isthm, 475.

Euastrum sphyroides Nordst. Vig. 3, No. 3. L. 40; W. 30; T. 20; I. 9,

Mount Compass, B42. Krieger, W. 1937, p. 625.

Fig. 3

1,2 Euastrum conicum (Playf.) Krieg.

var. imperforatwen var. nov.

3 Euastrion sphyroides Nordst.

4 Cosmarium rectangulare var. sub-

hexagonuin Playf. fa. granulatum

fa. nay-

5 Cosmarium rectangulare var. australe

Playf. fa. multigranulaim fa. nov.

Caswiarigen. rotundum sp. nov.

Cosmarium Opheliz sp. nov.

Cosmarium contractum var. ellipsat-

deum (Eliv.) West and West.

Arthrodesmus phinus Turn. fa. con-

vexus, Ta. lov.

10 Arthrodesmus phintus var. occidentalts

West and West fa. minimissimus

fa. Noy,

Co CNH

MTCRASTERIAS

Micrasterias moahabulashwarensis var. ampullacea (Mask.) WNordst. fa,

australiensis fa. noy. Fig. 4, No. 4, A form differing from the typical by having

a reduction in the granulations of the face of the semicell (except within the

margin of the polar lobe and a tow of prominent granules across the base of the

semicell) ; lateral lobes divided into two arms, the upper of which is extended

almost horizontally but somewhat arched near the body of the cell. L. 154;

W. 130; 1. 25, Breakneck River, C24X. Krieger, W., 1939, p. 50.

Forma a varietate typica differens reductions granulationum faciei semi-

cellulae (nisi quod habet granula intra marginem lobi polaris atque ordinem granu-

lorum prominentium trans basim semicellulae) ; lobi laterales in two brachia divisi,

brachio superiore fere horizontaliter extenso, subarctiato, autem, prope corpus

celinlae. Long. 154; lat. 130; isthm, 25. ;

Micrasterias Thomasiana yar, notatu (Nordst.) Grinbl. Fig. 4, No. 3.

[.. 251-255; W. 218-236; I, 29-33. Breakneck River, C24X. Krieger, W., 1939,

p. 111,

COSMARIUM

Cosmarium binum Nordst L. 64; W. 45; 'T, 27; L 15. Harriet River, C30,

West and West 1908, p. 246, pl. LXXXVIIT, fig, 10-14.

Cosmarium bioculatum Bréb. fa, L. 22; W. 21; 1, 6, Breakneck River, C24.

West and West 1905, p. 165, pl. LXI, fig. 3-7.

Cosmariwn Blyttii Wille fa. L, 16; W. 14; 1. 4-5 Sou’ West River, C28.

West and West 1908, p. 225, pl, IXXXYVI, fig. 1+.

Cosmarium capitulum var, australe G, S, West. Fig. 1, No, 13, Breakneck

River, C24X, L, 20; W. 21; 1. 6. West. G. S., 1909, p. 1-88.

Cosmarium constrictum ta. miner Fritsch and Rich. Fig, 1, No. 12, L, 17-22;

Nadel ; T. 8; I. 3. Mount Compass, B42. Fritsch, F. E., and Rich, Florence.

1924,

As Fritsch and Rich suggest, this form approaches C. inane Turn., with

which it should be compared. Probably Turner’s name is synonymous,

Cosmarium controctum. var, cllipsaideum (Elfy.) West and West. Tig, 3,

No. 8, A small form of a variety of C, contractum, which is a species that has

much variation in size, aid (as interpreted by various workers) varies in shape.

Mount Compass, B42. L. 33; W, 27; T. 18; 1. 8. West and West 1905,

Cosmarium cucurbitinum (Biss.) Luetkem, Fig, 4, No. 11. Wall finely

punctate; wall at the poles «lecidedly thickened and pitted. L, 67; W, 34; 1, 33,

Dam on Kangaroo Island, C39. Luetkemiiller, J., 1902, p. 406,

Cosmorinm dentiferum Corda. Fig. 4, No, 7, L. 73; W. 71; T, 32; 1, 18.

Sou’ West River, C27. West and West 1908, p. 156,

Cosmarium. difficile var. sublaeve Laetkem, L. 31; W, 20; I, 4. Rocky River,

C12. West and West 1908, p, 97, pl, LXXIII, fig, 4, 5

Cosmarium grandtum Bréb. L. 25-27; W,, 16-18; T. 8; 1. 6 Breakneck

River, C24, C24X, Dam on Kangaroo Island, C39, West and West 1905, p. 186,

Pl. LXITI, fig. 1-3.

Cosmarium impressulum Elfy, fa, L. 15-16; W, -1213: L 4. Breakneck

River, C24X, Elfving, F., 1881, p. 13, pl. 1, fig. 9.

Cosmarium wargaritatum (Lund,) Roy and Biss, L, 82; W. 87; T. 42:

1.24, Dam on Kangaroo Island, C39. West and West 1912, p. 18.

Cosmarium margaritatum (Lund,) Roy and Biss. fa, pyramidatum fa, nov.

Fig. 4, No, 6. A form differing from the typical variety by having the semicell

elevated and narrowed at the poles rather than being flattened or broadly convex

at the apex; lateral walls of semicells pith round granules, polar tegion with cone-

shaped gramiles, all granules surrounded by a circle of deep punctations or

minute pores. L. 121; W. 90; T. 30, Mount Compass, B42.

Forma a varietate typicu differens semicellula elevata atque ad polos

angiistate potius quam complanata aut late convexa ad apicem; latera semi-

cellylarum granulis fotundatis praedita, regio polaris granulis conicis, granulis

omhibtis cireulo punctationum profundarum aut pororum minutorum circumdatis.

Long. 121; lat. 90; isthm, 30,

Cosmarium multigranulatum sp. noy, Fig. 4, No. 10. Cells of medium size,

twice as long as wide, very slightly constricted in*the mid-region to form a broad

isthmus; wall densely set with transverse rows of grantiles (about 15 rows in

each semicell) ; circulat in end view, L. 39; W. 19; I. 17, Mount Compass, B42.

Cellulae medioeres, duplo Jongiares quam latae, ovatae, semicellulis elongato~

ovatis, media in parte ad isthmum latum formandum paululum constrictis ; mem-

brana ordinibus transversis granulorum dense obsita (circa 15 ordinibus quaque

im senucellula), cellula a vertice visa circularis. Long, 39; Crass, 19; isthm. 17.

Cosmarium multiordinatum West and West, Fig. 4, No. 8. Semicells trans-

versely oval but with definitely truncate apices; untformly heset with concentric

rows of sharp granules; wall in the median portion of the semicell with a

large circular area in which the graniles are interspersed with pores which are

larger and more prominent in the centre of the area, wall lightly punctate between

the granules. L. 79; W. 73; T. 48; I. 23. Breakneck River, C24X, West and

West 1897, p, 121.

SOCAN Aun LON

Xanthidium armatum (Bréb.) Rab. var. depressum var. nov.

Xanthiditon simplictus Nordst. var. pseudasmithit var. nov.

Micrasterias Thomastana var. notata (Nordst.) Grénbl.

Micrasterias mahabuwlashwarensis var. anpullacea (Mask,) Nordst, fa. ais-

lraliensis fa, nov,

Cosmarium porrectum Nordst.

Cosmarium marguritatum (Lund.) Roy and Biss. var. pyramtidaten var.

nov.

Cosmarium dentiferum Corda,

Cosmarium multiordinatum West and West.

Cosmarium retusiforme var, major Gutw-

Cosmarium multigranulatum sp. nov.

Cosmarium cucurbitinum (Biss.) Luetkem.

Cosmarium Ophelii sp. nov. Fig, 3, No. 7, Cells medium-sized, very slightly

longer than wide, nearly cirenlar in outline; semicells semicircular with flattened

truncate apex which appears slightly produced because of an invagination on

either side, the lateral margins with five pronounced undulations; sinus narrow

and closed throughout, with a slight enlargement at the apex; wall with an

irregular patch of punctations in the mid-region of the semicell where there ts

a triangular arrangement of three granules; side view of semicell approximately

circular, with a pair of granules showing at the margin on each side in the mid-

region, and a pair of granules at the base of the semicefl within the margin;

polar view narrowly oval with 2 row of three granules in the mid-region on each

side. L, 37; W. 33; T, 20; 1. 10, Breakneck River, C24X.

Cellulae mediocres, paulula longiores quam latae, quasi circulares; semi-

cellulae semicirculares, apice complanato truncatoque, aspectu ob invaginationem

marginis utroque in latere subproducto, lateribus 5 undulationes menifestas prae-

bentibus; sinus angustus, omnio inapertus, ad apicem subampliatus; membrana

maculam irregularem punctationum atque 3 granula in ordinatione triangulari

media in semicellula habens; semicellula a latere visa propemodum circulars,

pari granulorum ad marginem utrimque media in parte atque pari granulorum

ad hasim semicellulac intra marginem praedita; semicellula ab apice visa anguste

ovata, ordine trium granulorum media in parte utroque in latere. Long 37; lat, 33;

crass, 20; isthm. 10.

This species should be compared with C. sublatereuntdatum West and West,

which is without granules and has a differently shaped apex.

Cosmarisxm Portianum Arch. L. 25; W. 18; I. 7-5. Dam on Kangaroo

Island, C39. West and West 1908, p. 165, pl. LXXX, fig. 4-7.

Cosmarium porréctum Nordst. Fig. 4, No. 5. L. 97-107; W. 99-108; T, 43:

I, 29-32, Breakneck River, C24X_ Nordstedt, 0. 1870, p. 207.

This plant should be compared with C. gutdrim Lund. and C. biretwm Breb.

arid its varieties, The former comparison suggests the desirability of contbining

C. quadrum and C. porrectum. Comparison should also be made with C. dentt-

ferum var. porrectum Playf.

Cosmarium protomphalusm skuja var. angulare var nov. Fig. 1, No. 15. A

form differing from the typical by having the lower lateral margins rather sharply

diverging from the isthmus to form an angulation about midway to the apex;

upper lateral margins convex and converging to the apex which is not so nearly

truncate asin the typical; with a large tubercle just within the margin at the apex,

L, 30: W. 22; T. 16; 1. 7:5. Rocky River, C12. Skuja, H., 1937,

Varietas a planta typica differens marginibus inferioribus lateralibys ab

isthmo subabrupte divergentibus ad efficiendam angulationem quasi media in parte

lateris; marginibus superioribus lateralibus convexis et ad apicem minus trun-

ratum quam in planta typica, convergentibus; tuberculum magnum admodum

intra marginem in apice, Long, 30; lat. 22; crass, 16; isthm, 7*5.

Cosmarium pseudoprotuberans Kirchn. fa. L. 48; W. 37; T. 24; I. 12, Dam

on Kangaroo Island, C39, West and West 1908, p. 82, pl. LXTV, fig, 6-8,

Cosmayinmt pseudopyramidatum Lund. fa, L, 51; W. 30; T. 21; L. 12.

Rocky River, C12. West and West 1905, p. 201, pl. LXIV fig, 9-12.

Cosmarium pseudoquadratulum sp, nov. Fig, 5, No. 12, Cells small, 14 times

longer than wide; semicells quadrate but with the lower lateral margins diverging

from the basal angles which bear a small tubercle; upper lateral margins retuse,

forming a slightly produced apex; apical margin convex but with a slight median

notch (or retuseness) ; semicells in lateral view circular; in end view broadly

oval; isthmus narrow, sinus closed. L. 15; W. 12: T. 8; 1, 4. Rocky River, C12.

Cellulae parvae, 14 plo longiores quam latac; semicellulaé quadratae, mar-

pinitmes, autem, inferioribus laterahbus ab angulis qui tuberculum parvum ferunt,

divergentibys; margines superiores laterales retusi, apicem paulum productum

efficientes; margo apicalis convextis, in medio, autem, subincisi (aut retusus) ;

semicellulae a latere visae circulares; ab apice visae late ovatae 5 isthmus angustus,

sinu inaperto. Long. 15; lat. 12: crass. 8; isthm. 4. _

This species should be compared with C. quadvatulum (Gay) De Toni,

especially with its variety applanatum. Insam and Krieger; also with C. Regnelit

Wille. it is about the same size as (he latter, but does. not have a swelling in the

mid-region of the semicell. The plant has a strong resemblance to Euastriwm binale

vat, Aians W. West, especially in the front view, ‘The apex is suggestive of

Euastrum, but the facial markings and protuberance are lacking.

Cosmarium punctulatum Bréb. L. 23; W. 21; T, 12; 1 7. Rocky River,

Ci2. West and West 1908, p. 206, pl. LE XXIV, fig. 13, 14.

Cosmarium punctulatum yar. subpunctulatum (Nordst-) Boerges, Fig. 5,

Nos, 9, 10. L. 30-33; W. 27-30; .T. 21; 1. 9. Happy Valley Reservoir, B50, Break-

neck River, C 24X. West and West 1908, p. 209. Our figures show two vana-

tions in pattern of granulation.

Cosmartwn pachydermum fa. transitoria Heimerl, 1. 81-88; W. 64-70;

T. 39; I 30-32. Rocky River, C12. Breakueck River, C2X. Heimer, A,, 1891,

p. 596.

Cosmarium quadrifarium Lund, fa. trifidum ta. nov. Fig. 1, No. [4, A form

differing from the typical hy having the marginal verrucae conspicuously triden-

tate, and im haying three rows of verrucae (two within the lateral margins as

seen in face view) ; in lateral view the semicells broadly oval with a slight median

protuberance on each side hearing two vertical series of granules, and with six

vertical rows of granular verrucae extending from the base of the semicell to the

apex, L. 51; W. 39; T. 26; L. 15. Mount Compass, B42, Tundell, P. M., 18/1,

p- 32.

Forma a vartietate typica differens verrucis marginalibus perspicue tridenta-

tis, et possessione 3 ordintim verriucarum (2 intra margines latetales a facie

visorum); semicellulae a latese visae late ovatae, protuberatione media parva

quoyue in latere 2 series verticales pranulorum ferentes, et 6 ordinibus verticalibus

verrucarum grauulosarum a basi semicellulae ad apicem extensis. Long, 51;

fat. 39; crass, 26; isthm. 15,

This is probably a form of C. quadrifaritun var. gemmulatum described by

Maskell from New Zealand.

Cosmarinm rectangulare var. australe Playf, fa, multigranulatum fa, nov,

Fig. 3, No. 5, A form differing from the typical yariety in having an oval pattern

of five granules on the face of the semicell; in side view semicells subcircular,

with a pair of granules showing on the lateral margins; polar view broadly

elliptic with a row of three granules in the median part of the lateral margins.

L. 44; W..35; £. 10. Dam on Kangaroo Island, C39, Playfair, G.1., 1910, p. 480.

Torma a varietate Lypica differens possessione ordinationis ovate quinque

granulorum in facie semicellulae; semicellulae a latere visae circulares, hinis

gtanulis itv margine laterali semicellulae a polo visae cllipticac, ordine trinm

granulorum media in parte marginem lateraliam, Long. 41; lat. 35; isthm. 10,

Cosmariyin rectanyulare yar, subhexagonum Playf. fa. granulatum fa. nov.

Fig. 3, No. 4. A form differing from the typical variety by having an are of

three granules just above the mid-region of the semicell, one gramile just within

the apex and one on either side of the apex (upper lateral angles) ; apex truncate-

convex; in side view semicells citcular and showing one granule at the apex and

two on either side; vertical view broadly elliptic with a slight swelling having

three granules in the mid-region on each side, and with a cruciform arrangement

of four granules (one within each lateral margin and one within each pole) ; wall

at the poles of the cell and in the lower Jateral angles coarsely punctate. L. 30;

W. 26; T. 17; 1.7. Rocky River, C12. Playfair, C, I, 1910, p, 483.

Forma a varietate typica differens possessione arcus 3 granulorum admodum

supra mediam semicellulam, granulo uno admodum intra apicem atque uno

utroque in latere apicis (angulis superioribus Jateralibus); apex truncato-con-

vexus; semicellulae a latere visae circulares, unum granulum in apice, atque duo

granula utrogue in latere praebentes; semicellulae a vertice visae late ellipticae,

mediocrem inflationem, 3 granulis media in parte utrimque instructam, habentes,

et ordinationem criuciformen 4 granulorum (uno intra quemque marginem

lateralem atyue uno intra quemque polum) praebentes; membrana ad polos

eellulae atque in angulis lateralibus grosse punctate, Long, 30; lat. 26; crass, 17;

isthm, 7.

Fig. 3

1 Stanrastrum gracile Ralfs.

2 Stawrustrum gracile Ralfs, fa, mint-

mun fa. VOV.

3 Stavrastrumn crenulatum var, continen-

tale Messile. fit. onantmiferiow fa.

noy,

4 Stowrastrum — tetracerum (Kuetz.)

Ralfs.

5 Staurastrum sayittariun Nordst,

6 Staurosirum pseudosuecicwm sp, may,

7 Staurastrum. turgescens De Not, Fa.

& Stawvasirum Smithii (G. M. Smith)

Teiling,

9 Cosmarinm punctidatum var. subpure-

punctulahin. (Nordst.) Boerges.

10 Cosmariwm punctulatum. var. subpunc-

tulatwae (Nordst.) Boerges. Fa,

Vi Cosmnariun Nnactun Ralfs.

12) Casmarium pseudoquadratulium sp. nov.

13) Casmavrinn truncatelhon (Perty) Rab.

14 essalcivon Baileyi (Ralfs) Nordst.

aR.

Cosmarium retusiforme yar. major Gutw. Vig, 4, No. 9. L. 36; W. 32;

T. 18; 1.9. Breakneck River, C24X, Gutwinski, R., 1892, p, 20.

Cosmarium rotundum sp. nov. Fig. 3, No. 6, Cells relatively large, length

about 15 times the width, longitudinally broadly oval in outline, the semicells

semi-oval in outline, the lateral basal angles slightly thickened and ont-turned,

the lateral margins broadly convex to a dome-shaped apex; sinus narrow and

closed throughout, the apex only slightly enlarged; wall coarsely pitted with a

large tubercular protuberance in the mid-region of the semi-cell; in side view

semicells broadly oval in outline with a protuberance in the mid-region on either

side, 2 truncated lobe showing at the base of the semicell; in end view broadly

oval, with a protuherance in the mid-region on each side, the poles of the figure

with a truncated Jobe which extends out slightly. L. 57-60; W. 30; T. 22; L 9.

Mount Compass, B42.

Cellulae maiores, longitudina circa 14 plo latitudine, longitudinaliter late

ovatae, semicellulae semi-ovatac, angulis lateralibus basalibus subincrassatis atque

extrorsus divergentibus, lateribus late convexis, apice tholiformi terminatis, sinus

angustus, omnino imapertus, apice paulum anipliato; membrana grosse lacunata,

protuberatione magna tuberculari media in semicellula; semicellulae a latere

visae Jate ovatae, protuberationem utrimque media in parte, atque lobum trun-

catum in basi semicellulae praehentes; semicellulae a vertice visae late ovatae,

protuberatione utrimque media in parte, polis figurae lobum truncatum paulum

extensum habentibus, Tong. 57-60; Jat. 30; crass, 22; isthm. 9.

Cosmurium sexangulare Lund. L. 39; W. 31; 4, 10. Rocky River, Ci2.

Sou’ West River, C27. West and West 1908, p. 81, pl. LX XII, fig, 3.

Cosmarium subtumidum Nordst. var. pachydermum yar, nov. Fig. 1, No. 18.

A variety differing from the typical by haying a more open sinus and a thickening

of the wall in the mid-region of the semicell; side view of semicell transversely

oval-pytamidate; end view broadly oval with the lateral margins showing thick

walls. L. 27; W. 22; T. 15; 1. 6. Dam on Kangaroo Island, C39. West and

West 1905, p, 192.

Varietas a planta typica differens sinu imagis aperto, et crassitudiie mem-

branae media in semicellula; semicellula a latere visa transverse ovato-pyramidata ;

a vertice visa Jate ovata, margine laterali membranas crassas praebente, Long. 27;

lat. 22; crass, 15; isthm, 6.

Cosmarinm tinctum Ralis. Fig. 1, No, 16. Fig. 5, No. 11. A small form of

the typical plant which has an open sinus and a relatively thick wal] that is

yellowish in colour. L. 12; W.9; 1. 6. Brealsneck River, C24X. West and West

1505, p. 26,

The Australian plants agree especially with a form reported by Insam and

Krieger (Hedwigia 76, pl, I. fig. 11, 12, 1936).

Cosmarium truncdiellum (Perty) Rab. Fig. 5, No. 13. 1. 9; W. 10; T- 5;

I. 4. Breakneck River, C24XK. West and West 1908, p. 72.

Cosmarium turgidum Ralfs. L. 186; W. 94; 1, 82. These measurements are

approximate, since only one crushed cell was seen. Mount Compass, B42. West

and West 1908, p. 115, pl. LAX, fig. 1-3.

ARTHRODESMUS

Arthradesmus phimus Turn. fa. convexus fa, nov, Vig. 3, No. 9. A form

differing from the typical by having a broadly convex apex, upper lateral angles

ending in a short, stout spine which is almost horizontally extended (or slightly

upward). L, 12-14; W, 14-17; T, 8; 1. 6, Breakneck River, C24. West and

West 1912, p. 104.

Forma a planta typica differens apice late convexo, angulis superioribus

lateralibusque spina brevi crassaqte, fere horjzontaliter (aut patluin sursum)

extansa termitiatis. Long. 12-14; lat. 14-17; crass. 8; isthm. 6.

Arthrodesmus phimus var. occidentalis West and West fa, minimissimus

fa, fioy, Fig, 3, No. 10. A minute form in which the semicells are slightly more

stout, and which are broadly oval in outline rather than narrowly elliptic as in

the variety. L.5; W. 5; 1 2-5, Breakneck River, C24, C24X. West and West

1912, p. 104.

Forma minuta, semicellulis panlula crassioribus et late avatis potius quam

anguste ellipticis ut in varietate. Long. 5; lat. 5; isthm. 2:5,

XANTHIDIUM

Nanthidium armahtm (Bréb.) Rab. var. depressum var. nov. Vig. 4, Na. 1.

Semicells relatively somewhat wider than in the typical, furnished with three

irregularly dentate verrucae just within each lateral margin and a stout deflected

spine near the basal angles; sinus narrow and more nearly closed than ia the

typical; face of semicell with a double circle of granules; in side view semicell

broadly oval, four verrucae showing at the apex and an oval pattern of eight

verrucae in the mid-region enclosing a pair of spines; lateral margin in side view

with @ prominent tubercular thickening showing a double row of granules, a pair

of iubercles showing at the base of the semicell in the mid-region. L. without

arms 104, with arms 114; W. without arms &9, with arms 97; T. 67: I about 34.

Mount Compass, B42. West and West 1912, p. 51.

Semicellulae relative latiores quam in planta typica, wibus verrucis irregu-

lariter dentatis admodum intra quemque marginem lateralem, atque spina crassa

deflexa prope angulos basales praeditae; sinus angustus, magis inapertus quam in

Specie; facies semiccllulae duos circulos granulorum habens; semicellula a latere

visa late ovata, praebens 4 verrucas ad apicem, at que media in parte ordinationerm

ovatam 8 verrucarum par spinarum includentem}; margo lateralis a latere visis

habens incrassationem tubereularem prominentem duos cireulos granulorum prae-

bentem, pari tuberculorum ad basim semicellulae media in parte. Long. sine

brachiis 104, cum brachiis 114; lat. sine brachiis 89, cum brachiis 98; crass, 67;

isthm. cirea 34,

Xanthidium simplicius Nordst. var. pseudosmithii var. nov. Fig. 4, No, 2.

A variety with a prominent facial protuberance in the mid-region of the semicell ;

upper lateral angles furnished with a single stout spine; two spines at the lower

lateral angles of the semicell; sinus widely open, the apex broadly convex s in side

view semicells broadly oval to nearly circular with a decided thickening and pro-

tuberance in the mid-region on each side, the pole furnished with a long stuut

spine, with one or two smaller spines in the centre of the figure (base of semi-

cell). L, without spines 27, with spines 37; W. without spines 27, with spines 39;

T. 18; 1. 9, Mount Compass, B42. Nordstedt, O., 1888, p. 44,

Varietas protuberationem facialem prominentem media in patte semicellulae

praebens ; angulis superioribus lateralibus semicellulae spine unica crassa pracditis;

angulis inferioribus lateralibus duobus spinis praeditis; sinus late apertus, apice

late convexo; semicellulae a latere visae late ovatae ad fere circulares, incrassa-

tione at que protuberatione perspicua media in parte utrimque praeditac; spinam

longam ctassamque ad polum atque 1 vel 2 spinas minores media in figura {ad

basim semicellulae) praebentes, Long. sine spinis 27, cum spinis 37; lat. sine

spinis 27, cum spinis 39; crass. 18; isthm. 9.

This yariety should be compared with both X, simplicius and NX, Smitha.

Tt is more lke the former tham the latter, but indicates that these two species

might be combined.

STAURASTRUM

Stavrastrum connatum (Land.) Roy and Biss, fa. L. 42; W. with spines

48; I. 12. Mount Compass, B42. West and West 1923, p. 15, pl. CXXX, fig. 6-8.

Staurastrum crenulatum var, continentale Messik. fa. mammiferum Ja. nov,

Fig. 5, No. 3. A form differing from the typical variety by having a spine-tipped

marmunilla on each side at the base of the semicell, producing a slightly narrower

sinus; vertical view triangular with a triangular pattern of paired granules at the

crown and tratisverse rows of granules on the arms, J,. 23; W. 30; I. 6. Happy

Valley Reservoir, B50. Messikommer, E., 1927, p. 107,

Forma a planta typica differens possessione mammillae spina minutae utroque

in latere ad basin semicellulae, sinum paululo angustiorem efficientis; cellula a

vertice visa triangularis, ordinationem triangularem granulorum binorum ad

coronan) nechon ordines transyersos granulorum, in brachiis habens. Long. 23;

lat. 30; isthm, 6,

Staurastrum gracile Ralfs. Fig. 5, No. 1. L. without processes 42-45; with

processes 51-61; W, with processes 77-80; T, 9-10. Abundant in the plankton of

Happy Valley Reservoir, B50. West and West 1923, p. 96.

This is a form of an extremely variable species (which has been confused

with other species by various authors) that is smooth at the base of the semicell

rather than bearing granules as do many of the other expressions of St, gracile.

Staurestrum gracile Ralfs fa minimum fa noy, Fig. 5, No, 2. A form

similar in shape and proportions to the typical, but with a reduction in granulation,

and smaller in size; end view showing minute granulations arranged in pairs and

forming a triangle about the crown, and with the surface of the arms bearing

mintte granules (solitary near the distal end of the arm, tranaversely in twos

or threes approaching the body of the cell), L. without processes 24, with pro-

cesses 34; W. with processes 44; 1. 9. Plentif{ul in the plankton of Happy Valley

Reservoir, BSO, together with the specific form.

Forma conformatione proportionibusque plantae typicae similis, reductionem,

autem granulationis habens et minor; semicellula a vertice visa binas granulationes

minutas, et circum coronam triangulam efficientes, praebens, nection i superficie

brachiorum granulationes minutae (singulae ad extremitatem distalem brachii,

transverse binae ternaeve ad corpus cellulae), Jong. sine processibus 24, cum

processibus 34; lat. cum processibus 44; isthm. 9.

This should be compared with St. pingue Teiling which it closely resembles,

but which is smaller and differently shaped at the base of the semicells.

Staurustrum mucronatwa Ralfs, fa, L, 21; W. with spines 24; [. 5, Rocky

River, Cl2, West and West 1923, p. 11, pl. CAXX, fig. 10-12.

Siuuustriom muhcum Bréb, L. 21; W. 21; 1, 6 Breakneck River, C24,

West and West 1912, p. 179, pl, CX VIII, fig. 16-20.

Staurasirum pseudosuecicum sp. nov. Fig. 5, No. 6, A medium-sized species,

width slightly greater than the length, slightly campanulate at the base, and

extended inlo approximately horizontally projecting arms, which are trispinate

at the tip; a circle of granules at the base of the semicell just above the isthmus

which is relatively wide; apex broadly convex bearing a marginal row of five

bidentate verrucae: vertical view fusiform, the lateral margin broadly convex in

the mid-region and showing an oval pattern of paired granules at the crown

(medianly in the figure), L, 28; W. with processes 33-50; T. 13; 1. 7. Break-

neck River, C24, C24X.

Species mediocris, latitudine paululo maiore quam longitudine; semicellulae

biradiatae, ad basim paulum campanuilatae, et in brachia fere horizontaliter pro-

jecla, ad cacumen trispinata, extensqe; circulus granulorum ad basim semiccllulae

admodum supra isthmum latiorum; apex late convexus, ordinern marginalem

5 verrticatum bidentatarum ferens; cellula a vertice visa fusiformis, margine

laterali Jate convexo media in parte et ordinationem ovalum granulorum binorum

ad coronam (figurae media in parte) fereng, Long. 28; lat, cum brachiis 35-50;

crass. 13% isthm. 7.

Our plants are questionably assigned a new naine pending the appearance of

additional material for examination. It is unlike other biradiate species.

Stawraskrum punctulatum Bréb. fa, L, 30; W. 24; 1. 8. Rocky River, ci2

West and West 1912, p. 179, pl, CKXVII, fig. 8-11.

Staurastrum sagittorium Nordst. Fig. 5, No, 5, In vertieal view ctther 8- or

S-radiate. L. 27; W. without processes 57; I. 13, Rocky River, C12, Breakneck

River. C24X. Nordstcdt, O., 1888, p 37,

Staurastrum Smithii Teiling (Syn.: St, covtortum GM, Smith). Fig. 5,

Noa. & |. without processes 12, with processes 45; W. with processes 54; I, 6,

Happy Valley Reservoir, B50, Smith, G. M., 1924, p. 98.

Staurastrum tetracerum (Kuetz.) Ralfs. Fig. 5, No. 4. L. 20; W. 24; I. 4:5.

Sow West River, C28. West and West 1923, p. 118,

Staurastrum turgescens De Not. fa. Fig. 5, No. 7. L. 22; W. 18; 1. 6. Break-

neck River, C24X,. West and West 1912, p. 167,

HYALOTHECA

Hvyalotheca dissiliens (Smith) Bréb. L. 16-17; W. 26-27. Motint Compass,

B42. West and West 1923, p, 229, pl. CLXI, fig, 16-27.

SPHAEROZOSMA

Sphaerozosima excavatum Ralfs. L. 9; W.9; 1. 4:5 Breakneck River, C24X.

West and West 1923, p. 211, pl. CLX, fig, 1-3.

DESMIDIUM

Desmidium Baileyi (Ralis) Nordst, fa, Fig. 5, No, 14, L. 16; W. max, 24.

Sou’ West River, C27, C28.

With its irregular and somewhat inflated lateral margins, the Australian plant

differs somewhat from the Eyropean and American forms.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Exurvine, F. 1881 Anteckningar om Finska Desmideer. Acta Soc. Fauna et

Flora Fenn, 5, 1-17. 1 Pl.

Fritscu, F. E.,. and Rien, Frorence 1924 Freshwater and subacrial algae from

Natal, Trans. Roy. Soc. Sth. Africa, 11, 297-398, 31 text figures

GutTwinski, R. 1892 Salvandae pnoritatis causa. Diagnoses nonnullarum

algarum novarum in Galicia orientali anno 1890 collectarum. La Nuoya

Notarisia, Ser. 2 3, 17-22

Hermert, A. 1891 Desmidiaceae alpinae. Ver, d. k. k. Zool.-Bot. Ges. in Wien,

41, 587-609. Pl. 5

Kriecer, W. 1937, 1939 Die Desmidiaceen, in Rabenhorst’s Kryptogamen

Flora von Deutschland, Oesterreich und der Schweiz. Band 13, Teil 1,

Lief. 1-4, 1937; Teil 2, Lief, 1, 1939, Leipzig

LuNDELL, P. M. 1871 De Demidiaceis quae in Stiecia inventae sunt observa-

tiones criticae, Nov. Acta Reg. Soc. Sci. Upsala, 3, 8, 1-100. Pls. I-V

LuETKEMULLER, J, 1902 Die Zellmembran der Desmidiaceen, Colin’s Beitrage

z, Biol. Pflanzen, 8, 347-444, Pls. 18-20

MessrkommMeEk, E, 1927 Biologische Studien im Torfmoor von Robenhausen

unter besonderer Beriickfichtigung. Inaug. Dissert., Univ. Zurich, 1927.

(Mitt. Bot. Mus. Univ. Zurich, 122, 1-171. 6 Pls, 1 text fig.)

Norstenr, O, 1870 Symbolae ad floram Brasiliae cognoscendam. Fam. 18

Desmidiaceae. Vid. Medd. d. Naturh. Foren. i Kjébenhavn (1869),

No. 1415; 195-234. Pls. 2-4

Norpstept, O, 1888 Freshwater Algae, collected by Dr. S. Berggren in New

Zealand and Australia. K. Vet. Ak. Handl., 22, 1-18

Prayrarr, G. I. 1907 Some new or less known Desmids found in New South

Wales. Proc. Linn, Soc. N.S.W., 32, 160-201

Prayrarz, G. I. 1910 Polymorphism and Life-history in the Desmidiaceae.

Ibid, 35, 459-495

Sxuya, H. 1937 Algae, in Symbolae Sinicae, Ergebnisse der Expedition der

Akademie der Wissenschaften in Wien nach Siid-west China, 1914 bis

1918. Herausgegeben von H, Handelmezzotti. Teil 1, 1-105. 12 Figs.

3 Pls.

Smitu, G. M. 1924 The phytoplankton of the inland lakes of Wisconsin, 2.

Wisconsin Geol, Nat. Hist. Surv. Bull. 57, 1-227. Pls. LII-LXXXVIII

West, W. and West, G. 5. 1907 Welwitsch’s African Freshwater Algae.

Jour. Bot., 35, 1-7; 33-42; 77-89; 113-183; 235-243; 264-272; 297-304.

Pls. CCCLXV - CCCLKX

West, W., and West, G. S. 1904-1912 Monograph of the British Desmidia-

ceac. Ray Society, London. 1, 1904; 2, 1905; 3, 1908; 4, 1912

West, W., West, G. S., and CarTEr, NELLIE, 1923 Monograph of the British

Desmidiaceae, 5. Ray Society, London

A NEW APPROACH TO THE PROBLEM OF HUMAN EVOLUTION

BY A. A. ABBIE

Summary

The paper presents a brief survey of some of the best known human and near-human fossils to set

out the difficulties they present in interpretation. A review of archaeological finds indicates that

cultural attainments cannot be equated with physical or menatal attainments and are no index of

evolutionary development. The morphological characters of ancient physical types, particularly

Neanderthal Man, are analyzed and shown to lie within the range of human variation. It is

considered that the only distinguishing human feature is absolute and relative brain size, and that all

the fossils considered, with the exception of Australopithecinae, are simply variants of the normal

human pattern. It is considered, further, that the present method of trying to trace human evolution

by comparison of adult forms is futile. The only common stem that can be found for the primates

lies in an early embryonic series. In this series a sufficiently generalized precursor for man could be

produced by practically any of the primates. Consequently, it is unnecessary to go very far back into

primate history to find the ancestral form.

A NEW APPROACH TO THE PROBLEM OF HUMAN EVOLUTION

By A. A. ApBrE *

[Read 11 Oct. 1951]

SUMMARY

The paper presents a brief survey of some of the best known human

and near-human fossils to set out the difficulties they present in interpreta-

tion. A review of archaeological finds indicates that cultural attainments

cannot be equated with physical or mental attainments and are no index of

evolutionary deyelopment. The morphological characters of ancient physical

types, particularly Neanderthal Man, are analyzed and shown to lie within

the normal range of human variation. It is considered that the only distin-

guishing human feature is absolute and relative brain size, and that all the

fossils considered, with the exception of the Auséralopithecinae, are simply

yatiants of the notmal htiman pattern. It is considered, further, that the

present method of trying to trace human evolution by comparison of adult

forms is futile, The only common stem that can be found for the primates

lies in an early embryonic series. In this series a sufficiently generalized

precursor for man could be produced by practically any of the primates.

Consequently, it is unnecessary to go very far back into primate history to

find the ancestral form,

INTRODUCTION

While the fact of human evolution is not in doubt there is still great

uncettainty over the course which it has followed. Most writers agree that

man’s origin is associated with the primates, but which—if any—reprcsents

the directly ancestral form and who are his nearest relations today are still

the subject of controversy. Wood Jones (1929) finds the common ancestry

in shrews, Le Gros Clark (1949) traces an evolutionary sequence which

starts with the shrews ard passes ultimately through the Miocene apes and

the Australopithecinae. Gregory (193+) postulates a common lemuroid ances-

try for all modern hiyher primates and relates man closely to the great apes.

There are many other possible schemes. The problem is to discover a primate

sufficiently like man to be acceptable ag a close relation, yet sufficiently

generalized to qualify as a possible ancestor. The only satisfactory candi-

date so far discovered is man himself,

A further major problem is man’s relatively late appearance on earth.

His one million years or so is a small fraction of the 40 million years allotted

to monkeys and apes or the 60 million for lemurs. On the traditional view

the factors which went into making these animals must be associated with

those which went into the making of man. Yet, despite considerable search,

this great interval of time is not eyen within sight of being bridged.

The purpose of this paper is to show how much our thinking on human

evolution has been constrained by a too naive conception of the Darwinian

theory. It is felt that when this restrictive outlook is replaced by a broader

biological approach many of the difficulties in the interpretation of human

fossils will diminish or vanish altogether. In particular, it is hoped to show

that a generalized human ancestor is not necessarily so remote as it some-

times seems to he.

* Department of Anatamy, University of Adelaide.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust, 75, September 1952

PREHISTORIC REMAINS

ANATOMICAL EVIDENCE

Here attention is directed almost entirely to a few of the mast difficult

of human or near-human fossils. Man is the only positive fact in human

evolution, and all hypotheses involving other primates must remain suspect

so long as the relationship of those primates to man is itself in doubt.

However, reference tu other primates is included in later consideration of the

roblem.

; Australapithecinace—These were first described hy Dart (1925) from the

Taungs skull. Few anthropologists endorsed Dart’s claim for human affini-

ties for this skull (see Keith, 1929) and it languished until the discovery of

similar material at Sterkfontein and Kroomdtai (Dart, 1940; Broom, 1946),

In these creatures the skull has tiany anthropoid characters, including pro-

tuberant jaws, an exposed premaxillary suture and a braitt within the anthro-

poid range (Schepers, 1946), On the other hand, the teeth are more human

(Dart, 1925; Keith, 1929; Gregory and Helltnan, 1939: Le Gros Clark,

19502) and the forward site of the foramen magnum suggests an ipright

posture. The claim for an upright posture has been sustained by the hip

bone, which is strikingly humanoid (Dart, 1949; Le Gros Clark, 1950 b).

The Taungs skull is rather doabtfully referred to the late Pliocene or lower

Pleistocene, the Kroomdrai remains to the middle Pleistocene (Dart, 1940).

Pithecenthropinae—The discovery of Pithecanthropus by Dubois in 1891-2

(see Dubois, 1896) seemed to provide the anticipated intermediate form

between ape and man, combining a simian type of calvaria with a human

type af femur. Indeed, the mixture proved too strong for same to stomach

and they postulated a more or less fortuitous association of human and ape

gemains, Later discoveries by von Koenigswald (see Weidenreich, 1945 a),

however, confirmed the original pronouncement and disclosed that the sitna-

tion of the foramen magnum is consistent with an upright posture. Sinan-

thropus, discovered much later (Black, 1934) does not differ significantly

{rom Pithecanthropus (Weidenreich, 1940a; Le Gros Clark, 1945). Roth

have been assigned to a period between lower and middle Pleistocene in age-

Neanderthal Man—Until the discovery of Pithecanthropus Neanderthal

Man provided the nearest approach to the expectations of evolutionists. His

low brow, heavy eyebrow and occipital ridges, backwardly-displaced foramen

magnum, prominent jaws and small mastoid process, together with a femur

and caleaneum which betokened a shambling gait, all fitted into the picture

so nicely, In 1864 King named the creature Homo neaderthalenusis and

Schwalbe and others assigned him to an entirely distinct human species,

Neanderthal Man proper belongs to the lower part of upper Pleistocene

horizons,

Piltdewn Man—This skull, too, presents a cutious mélange of simian and

Humian features, The most recent reconstructions (Elliot Smith, 1927; Keith,

1929, 1938) indicate a modern type of cranium with a good mastoid process

but no great development of supraorbital and occipital ridges, Ou the other

hand, the teeth posses simian characters and the mandible betrays some

evidence of a “simian shelf’. The usual controversy over whether or not

the remains all belonged to the same individual has been virtually disposed

of by the fluorine method (Oakley, 1950). Oakley puts this fossil between

middle and upper Pleistocene.

While each of these groups might be considered a step in the evoltition-

ary advance towards modern man, each presents points of difficulty. Ignoring

the possibility of chronological overlap, Australopithecus and Pithecanthropus

could conecivably represent successive stages, but Neanderthal Man—their

CULTURES

[Bronze ____]

10,000 Rigen

25,000 yrs.

TABLE OF

QUARTERNARY

CHRONOLOGY

AS RELATED

PHYSICAL

Modern” |

TO CULTURES

AND PHYSICAL

REMAINS

(in part after Zeuner)

Sainjeay wispow, pue

sidoayyueuts =

yespwooay |

UBS, JO SaunjiW Butien yyw syinye snoiauny -— — —— — — — —

zquicosuems

sndoijuedayiig

Upper

Palaeolithic

4 Varieties |-

Mousterian

190,000 yrs.

400,000 Yrs.

(Bunyeg ‘Xouddy) suo}je10e19

490,000 yrs.

eZuney (2)

BNISOIW

ONY

ansoond

Boe00900 yrs. ¥

Fig. 1

Simplified outline of Quaternary chronology.

heir presumptive—is considered not to have had an_erect posture and so is

disqualified from inclusion in a series between erect Pithecanthropis and erect

modern man; also, he occurred too late, averlapping ancient examples of

modern man (fig. 1). DPiltdown Man, too, mixes simian and human charac-

ters, but he al&o occurred too Jate to be considered ancestral to modern man.

In fact, practically every hominoid fossil presents some physical or chrono:

logical discrepancy, and it is little wonder that many anthropologists have

despairingly assigned them all to specialized offshouts from seme common

generalized stem which has progressed undeviatingly up to modern man,

That common stem unfortunately remains purely hypothetical, for ix

hag not produced a single convincing example. Nevertheless, it seems likely

that there is a common stem and a stiggestion is presented later. But in this

conception the representatives of the stem appear altogether different from

those usually visualized by evalutianists,

ARCHAEOLOGICAL Evinence

For Europe, workers have now established a fairly clear and orderly

sequence of stone implement evolution (e.g,, Peyrony, 1927; Capitain, 1931;

and others), often referable to specific geological horizons (see Zenner’, 1950).

In many instances, however, cultures overlap, intermingle or seem displaced

from the accepted chronological order, and ihe problems posed by these non-

conformities are far from being solved.

In only a few cases have distinctive cultures been decisively associated

with human remains (fg. 1). The Swanscombe skull may now be assigned

with fair confidence to a lower Pleistacene horizon containing Acheulian

implements (Oakley, 1938, 1950), Neanderthal remains are referred to the

Mousterian cultures of the early upper Pleistocene. But from the end of

the lower Palacolithic all cultures are associated with human remains indis

tinwuisable frum those of modern man. Sinee the Swanscombe skull is alsa

indistinguishahle from that of modern man (le Gros Clark, 1938; Morant,

1938) the sole problem of physical anthropology in Europe at present centres

around Neanderthal Man, Indeed, Neanderthal Man has so hypnotized

anthropologists that—as Keith (1929) and leakey (1950) have complained—

modern-type skulls found in ancient strata are often automatically dismissed

as intrusions. In fact, European anthropology might almost he described

as “Neanderthalology,” for no findings outside the Neanderthal offer any

serious difficulty,

Despite the accumulation of much detailed information, the positive con-

tribution to our knowledge of man in Pleistocene times is very meagre. This

information relates mainly to central and western Europe, with some exten-

sions to Africa and the Near East. Even in westerty Europe the geological-

archacological association is not always conformable to the accepted plan,

while in eastern Europe the correlation begins definitely to fail (Zeuner,

1950). Consequently, as Zeuner has emphasized, there is little present justi-

fication for extending lo more distant parts ol the world—e.g., eastern Asia

or Australia—a chronology based upon the geological successiin in @ rela-

tively restricted region. Similar geological formations elsewhere are not

nécessarily cantemporaneous,

There is an unfortunate tendency to confuse geology, achacology and

physical anthropology, and to describe one in terms of the other. Thus, a

geologital horizon may be referred to as “Acheulian” or “Aurignacian”,

Much worse is the conftision of physical characters with cultural findings.

Such terms as “Chellean Man" or “Levalloisian Man" are commonly

employed, with the implicit assumption of a distinct physical (ype to be

associated with the artifacts he left behind. Even Zeuner (1950, p, 164) sins

here when he tries to fit cultural remains to a supposedly Neanderthal hand

found in the Crimea (see also his discussion on p. 304). Actually, the sole

claimant to physical distinction so far discovered in Europe is Neanderthal

Man, who is related, more or less legitimately in a relatively restricted region

only, to the Mousterian culture series. But there is no guarantee that Nean-

derthal Man invented the Mousterian culture or that other peoples, who did

not resemble him at all, did not use it, Further, there is no evidence that

similar cultures are (or were) everywhere contemporaneous, The “Iron

Age” culture Europeans who first explored the Pacific found modern-type

men in Melanesia and Polynesia in a Neolithic phase, others similar in Aus-

tralia in a late Mesolithic phase (Abbie, 1951), and yet others in Tasmania

in a phase so primitive as almost to defy classification, Clearly, it is as pross

an anthropological crime to equate culture with physical characters as it is

to equate language with physical characters.

European (nconetus) Chingse

Fig, 2

Sections through the orbital region of yarious skulls to Mlustrate the part played

hy the supraorbital ridge as a roof to the orbit. (F, H. = Frankfurt Horizontal.)

RE-EXAMINATION OF MORPHOLOGICAL CRITERIA

Weidenreich (19462, p. 201) has pointed out that the tendency to

minute sub-classification of fossil man complicates the problem to the point

where the leading line of evolution is lost and only singular forlorn speci-

mens remain. The best way to simplify the problem appears to be to discover -

to what extent the physical non-conformities, i.e., the ‘‘simian’’ features, in

human remains are mcompatible with the “human” features in the same

remains. In-other words, it is necessary to determine whether the normal

range of human variation is wide enough to embrace the so-called “simian”

features. 5

Since the outstanding event in European physical anthropology of Pleis-

tocene times was the apparently unique intrusion of Neanderthal Man no

substantial progress can be made before he is set in his proper perspective.

Most of the data for this are craniological.

CHIMpANZEE

MANDRILL

Fig. 3

Primate skulls to illustrate the inconstant relationship between jaw size and size

of supraorbital ridge, Note also the combination of facial and alveolar prognathism.

NEANDERTHAL MAN

The Brain—According to Hechst (quoted by Le Gros Clark, 1937) a

brain as small as 788 cc. has functioned in the normal human fashion, And

it would appeat that any brain from about 800 cc. to nearly three times as

much, may be compatible with human behaviour. As is well known, the

brain of Neanderthal Man falls well within these limits. Much of the length

of Neanderthal skulls is due to prominent supraorbital and occipital tori,

The endocranial index is much higher than the ectocranial index (Weiden-

reich, 1945b; Abbie, 1947) and the shape of the Neanderthal brain is well

within existing human proportions. Incidentally, most of the energy spent

upon trying to deduce cerebral characters from endocranical casts has proved

wasted effort. Symington (1916), Ie Gros Clark, Cooper and Zuckerman

(1930) and Packer (1949) have all shown that primate casts give little more

than maximum dimensions and general proportions. Detailed analysis such

as Schepers (1946) attempts for the Anstralupithecinoe can have very little

value in the present state of gur knowledge.

Supraorbital Ridges—The size of these ridges plays an important part in

determining whether a skull has a simian appearance or not, Lurge ridges

give a lowering appearance as well as accentuating the slope of the forehead

(Gfg.5), While large ridges are often associated with large jaws that is not

always so, nor, despite widespread belief on the subject, is the primary

purpose of such ridges to support heavy jaws and jaw muscles. Bolk (192?)

showed that in primates where the face protrudes in front of the skull the

eyes no longer lie under the cranial caviety and would be unprotected above

unless the frontal bone extended forwards to cover the orbits (fig. 2). The

first development of the ridges is, then, related to protrusion of the ntuzzle

but in many primates, 2g., Hylobetes, Papto, the ridges remain little more

than a thin roof to the orbit, which is sometimes almost funnel-shaped as in

Hapale and Tarsiys. Certainly in the gorilla the ridges are very massive and

are associated with very massive Jaws (fig, 3), but even the gorilla shows a

wide range of variation (Schultz, 1940), The chimpanzee and orang alsa

have proportionately large jaws but the ridges are much less prominent. The

rang, indeed, with mure massive—but less protuberant—jaws than the

chimpanzee, has relatively inconspicuous ridges. Yet more striking, the

mandrill has yery protuberatit, jaws and strong associated musculature but

the ridges are little more than terminal thickenings of a thin orbital roaf.

The Miocene apes of East Africa also combine prominent jaws with very

little ridge formation (Le Gros Clark and Leakey. 1951). However, the fact

that hoth the orang and the Miocene apes combine very protuberant jaws

with almost no ridge formation indicates that Bolk's views do not provide

a complete explanation for the ridges.

hi hominids a similarly mixed association can be shown, The Pilie-

conihropinge had both targe ridges and large jaws, But Broken Hill Man,

with ridges as large as the gorilla, had much smaller jaws, while Piltdown

Man, with no particular ridge development, had simian-type teeth and jaws.

Not all Australian aborigines are markedly prognathous (fig. 5), but even

in those which are the development of the ridges varies widely and the brow

ranges from an almost purely Neanderthal type to an upright sniooth iore-

head of which any European could be proud [Abbie, 1951). The aboriginal

skii]] described by Burkitt and Hunter (1922) combined a Neanderthaloid

talvaria with facial orthognathism and alveolar prognathism. Negroes are

typically prognathous but lack any marked ridge formation, Europeans and

other ethnic groups also show a wide range of ridge development associated

with an cqually mixed assortment of jaws. On the other hand, the low

retreating: forehead of Lord Darnley had little supraorbital formation (Pear-

son, 1928),

Clearly, the size of the eyebrow ridges can vary independently of jaw

size, and if is not possible with certainty to infer from any given calyaria

what the jaws were like ot from any set of jaws what the calvaria was like

(fig. 5). lt was failure to recognize this fact that led to the controversy

ever the Piltdown remains. It has been shown on statistical grounds that

there is no correlation between shape of head and size of jaw (Abbie, 1947).

Even without statistical support it seems equally clear that there is no corre-

Tation between ridge size and juw size. In other words, these features vary

independently,

Occipital torus—This has been considered im detail by Weidenreich

(1940 b). He points ont that the human torus is not a purely muscular

marking like the nuchal crest of the gérilla and he believes that the torus,

together with the zygomatic arches and supraorbital ridges, provides a strong

buttress round the base of the skull to withstand the thrust of massive

jaws and their musculature. His opinion cannot be accepted without some

reserve. As already noted, there ts no necessary relation between size of

jaws and stipraorbital ridges; nor does the view account for the absence of

a tores in Piltdown Man, despite the apparently simian jaws. And what

role does the nuchal crest af the gorilla play in this context?

Mastoid Pracess—A small process is considered a simian character, a

large one more human. This cannot be wholly true: in the gorilla the pro-

cess shows a wide range oi variation (Schultz, 1950) and the same applies

to other anthropoids (hg, 4A). While small processes are cammon in the

Australian aborigine there is a wide range up to us large as in any European

(fig. 4B), Moreover, a small process may be associated with cither a small

or a large occipital crest, and similarly for a large process.

Jaws and Teeth—Protuberant jaws are considered an anthropoid char-

acter, straight jaws human; but there are all intervening grades.

Facial prognathism is produced by elongation of the jaws as a whole,

alveolar prognathism depends mainly upon protrusion of the anterior teeth

and the alveolar margins. Frequently the two kinds are combined--as typi-

cally in the Neanderthaloid, Australian aborigine and negro—but this js not

always so (Hurkitt and Hunter, 1922; Parsons, 1930). In primates, at least,

true facial prognathism depends mainly upon the anteru-posterior length

of the crowns uf the lateral teeth—molars, premolars and often the canines

{figs, 4, 4C, 6}. Long teeth require long Jaws to house them,

Alveolar prognathism is rather more camplicated. In apes it depends

ta Sore extent upon the size of the canines and their associated diastemata.

That is not an important factor in the human, even though a maxillary

diastema has been described for Pitheconthrapus LV (Weidenreich, 1946 a)

and fer a modetn negress (Schultz, 1948).(? At least one contributory cause

ia the production of alveolar prognathiam uppears to be a discrepancy in

the size ol the intra- and extra-alyeolar portions of the teeth, Narrow roots

widening to broad crowns will produce a splaying out of the alveolar region,

both laterally and frontally (fig. 4€, gorilla}. This involves mainly the

canine-incisor series, with more or less acute alveolar slope according to the

degree of crown-root discrepancy. In the mandible the symphyseal slope

might well amount toa “simian shelf’, Since taoth size varies independently

of jaw size (Regg, 1939), varying grades of dental disproportion will produce

corresponding grades of alveolar prognathism, Several such grades are found

in Uwe Australian ahortgine, with reciprocal degrees of prominence of the

chin (fig. 4C).

The Heidelberg macdlible, which some consider belongs to the Neander-

thal sé€ries, can now be matched by “modern” human examples, both ancient

and recent (Keith, 1913; Weidenreich, 1943).

Taurodontism—This was cansidered a specific peculiarity of Neanderthal

Man (see Keith, 1929), occurring in al! grades from a minor enlargement of

the molar pulp cavity up to its “typical” condition. However, early degrees

of taurodontism have since been deseribed in a South African fossil as well

as in some of the Palestinian remains (Keith, 1931). According to Weiden-

reich (1943) tauredontism has alsa been found in orangs and in Esquimeux.

It appears dccasionally in mudern white man [pl v). On the other hand,

f} Also recetitly observed by the writer id a living aborizine,

CHIMPANZEE 3 CHIMDANZEt & GORILLA &

7, <F

ABORIGINE d ABORIGINE d ABORIGINE 3

BS xd ee ee

Phe

Goaniad Aponiane ¢ ABOQIGINE d RUROPEAN &

Bothrocraspedote Amblycraspedote Oxycraspedole

Fig. 4 '

(See bottom of facing page for description)

one of the most “typical” of Neanderthal skalls—La Ferrassie—betrays no

evidence of taurodontism (Houle, 1923).

Analysis of Campbell's (1925) observations indicates that the crown

patlern of Neanderthal molars does not differ significantly from that of the

Australian aborigine. There is no evidence that this, in turn, differs signi-

ficantly from that of the European. Consequently, there is no reason to

helieve that in any particular the molar teeth set Neanderthal Man specifi-

cally apart from the rest of humanity (see Coon, 1939, p, 25).

Norial Margin—This presents an outstanding non-conformity in Nean-

derthal Man since he is typically as. oxycraspedote as. the modern European

(Keith, 1929), irrespective of any “simian” characters the rest of the skull

may betray. The Australian aborigine presents all grades from an almost

“simian gutter” to an almost European condition (fg. 4D), again irrespec-

tive of the presence or absence of “simian” features elsewhere. A similarly

mixed association can be found in the skulls of other peoples and it seems

clear that the formation of the narial margin varies independently of the

remainder of the skull.

Foramen magnum—A relative backward displacement of the foramen

magnum described for some Neanderthal skulls was considered evidence for

a slooped, shambling gait. However, Sergi (quoted by Weidenreich, 1947)

has shown that there is no evidence that the position of the foramen in Nean-

derthaluids taken over all differs significantly from that in modern man,

In the so-called Dinaric types of modern Europe (Coon, 1939) both the ears

and the foramen magnum are placed relatively postertorly, yet the Dinaries

are as tipright as any other Europeans. The argument for a Neanderthaloid

peculiarity in posture and gait thus loses much of its force,

General—With the possible exception of Heidelberg Man, Neanderthal

Man’s predecessors were less ape-like than he. Swanscombe Man fs indis-

tinguishable from modern man, while the Stenheim and Ehringsdorf remains

ate merely “Neanderthaloid”, ‘The same applies to the Tabiin and Galilee

skulls of Palestine (McCown and Keith, 1939) and to the Solo and Wadjak

skulls of Java. Coon (1939) describes Neanderthaloid characters in upper

Palaeolithic, modern-type, skulls, Burkitt and Hunter (1922) have done the

same for a recent aboriginal skull, while the recent Enropean Gardarene

skulls (Keith, 1931) are remarkably Neanderthaloid, Further, skulls which

betray many ‘“Neanderihal” features can be seen today in any European

community, In faci, both before and since the Neanderthal series, and also

running parallel with it, are all farms intermediate between it and the

“modern” type. Under the circurnStances there seems to be no justification

for distinguishing Neanderthal Man as a separate species, or for Coon's

(1939) view that the intermediate grades, e.g., in Palestine, are the result

of interbreeding between Neanderthaloids and moderns. On the contrary,

the only conclusion jtistifable is that Neanderthal Man, even in his extreme

form, is to more than a local specialization within the normal range of human

variation. This is in harmony with Weidenreich’s (1943) view.

DESCRIPTION OF FIGURE 4.

A. YVariously sized mastoid processes in atithropoids.

The same in Australian aborigines.

Gorilla’s mandible ta ilustrate alveolar prognathism;

two extremes in the ahoriginal series; a European

for comparison.

DD. The arial margin in Australian aborigines to Ulustrate

the wide range.

Obs

‘SOOBJ WOT} SELIVATED JO SeIIEATeI WO] SodeF JONINs

VesiasntiT HEY Yo2es 0} Bundureye jo seBZuep ay} oeorpur Aoyy pue opqissod st suonemqmos

ay} Jo Auy “sersesTYo pue soovy SuBueydsajul-oresour yeu ayy Jo yoadse 9uQ

¢ “Sry

BIFy TENB0g8 uy BR UMo yy 3283 yeulBnoge quim aor UuMo Uli, DOe) TeUIBUSGe .UTAN aae) uUMo

MOhBed un))e

foyuteg p40}

VIAVAIVS

- Nvadoan]

Boty Ueadoins yy 208)

aomy upedoin] YM

aovy umMo

CS VIAVATVD

WNIDIWORY

THE PHYSICAL MOSAIC

There is growing evidence that the skull is composed of a moasaie of

features which, within wide limits, can vary independently of one another.

That is the case with head length, head breadth and size of jaws (Abbie,

1947), The maximum head breadth, in turn, may be either [rontally as in

Basques or in the parietal region as is more common. It also appears that

head height can vary quite considerably in skulls of the same cranial index

(see Coon, 1939, p. 127). And it has been noted that tooth size and jaw

size vary independently. The present survey indicates that narial margius,

supraorbital ridges, occipital ridges and mastoid processes also vary inde-

pendently.

All this is perfectly intelligible on the particulate theory of inheritance—

each jeature being determined more or less independently by its own special

gene or genes (Dobzhansky, 1937; Huxley, 1942). The most reasonable

intetpretation seems to be that these developments depend more upon differ-

ential growth processes than upon evolutionary or functional factors. When

such featiires attain exwherant proportions it appears best to regard them

simply as examples of extreme differentiation carrying normal lines of deve-

lopment to excess, but such excess need not affect all possible points equally

or simultaneously,

What applies to the skull applies equally ta the rest of the body, That,

ton, appears to comprise a mosaic of independently variable features held

together in only loose harmony. There is plenty of evidence for such indc-

pendent general variation in the works of Davenport (1926), Krogman (1941)

and others, The association of physical characters in a wide variety of

permutations and combinations, and the fixation of more stable associations

under conditions of initial isolated inbreeding in particular environments,

account adequately for both the wide range of human variation aiid the

incidence of more or less distinctive ethnic groups.

Evidently, if these features are normal individually they are equally

normal in combination. It is, therefore, of no moment ii several such features

occur simultaneously in a single person to give a rather more ape-like appear-

ance than is considered customary for “modern” man.

An apparently incongruous assemblage of physical characters proves a

stumbling black only to those obsessed by too rigid a preconception of what

the line of human evolutiun should have been. The principle of “correlation

of parts” serves well enough when comparing animals of different orders Or

genera. hut it is only misleading when applied to minor differences of degree

within what appears to be a single species. Amy individual physical feature

may appear anomalous in some setting, but provided the feature itself falls

within the normal range of human variation there is ao reason why it should

not form a normal component of any human physical pattern.

Many of the difficulties of interpreting human fossils have arisen from

comparing an isolated extreme example with a modern mean; comparison

with a modern range of variation would have disposed of some of those diffi-

culties, This point is made by Schultz (quoted by Weidenreich, L946h)

and by Weidenreich himself. It is becoming increasingly appafent that a

so-called “ethnic type” is no more than a statistical assemblage of indepen-

dent variables of which there is rarely any single complete concrete example.

Unless a more flexible approach is adopted physical anthropology will quality

with chemistry as “the science of things that don't exist”,

Taking these considerations into account it will be seen that there is no

reason why the anthropoid lustralopithecns should not have humanaid teeth

‘2zynyog ydjopy aq Aq payussasd Aypury pnys

TE[OUI-puodas B UIOIf Sl vazuEdUTIYD ayeulay OY, “ezis aes 312 Ajayetxordde 07

UMBIP ][@ ere Ady} UOStreduIN0d azEWPIIey OF, “UNIOY peyeUOIU BOUTMIOD ApPANEOr

@ Woly saaigop SuLdsea 0} D]EQUaIAYIP AdY] MOY AMOYs 0} ST[NyS Ieuan

9 “By

—- __ diddod LUN

a1usg ae TNGSS aie

Sump 1m aaruediuigs

w)suUraS 7 4 PreMed

PhD mma

—— JINiosoay

Nviivoisn?

Sdleuniasiig Ion Shida! OsoveaneaO SHAT

eviOM AnANYYad isold SOLYNOIN

and limbs or why the human Piltdown skull should not have anthropoid

jaws and teeth. Equally, there is no reason why the more anthrepoid skuli

of Pithecanthropus should not be associated with a human-type femur or the

Jess anthropoid skull of Neanderthal Man with a more simiaf-type femur.

This renders rather futile such debates as to whether or not the Grimaldi

remains are negroid and Chancelade skull esquimoid. Bath can be malched

within the Australian aboriginal range—and probably within other ranges—

of human variation.

Apart from the whale and the elephant man has the largest brain kuown,

and apart from the marmoset—Hupale—he has the highest brain/boiy-

weight ratio, The combination of these twe factors appears to provide the

necessary neural substratum for the wide range of sacio-economic variability

that distiguishes man above all other animals. When, therefore, we look for

something distinctively human we look for a primate with a cerebral capacity

of 800 ec. or more. That includes ail the disputed examples of humanity

except the Australopithecinue, With that possible exeeption we have no right

to consider any recognised hominid as being anything else but human, with-

out any specific—much less generic—distinction. Within that cerebral

Tange, too, there is no warrant to regard any individual or gronp as neces-

sarily of a higher or lower order of mental ability.

A POSSIBLE COMMON STEM

At present the most we can say about early man is that he probably

appeared first in the lower Pleistocene and that every example found so far

had a cranial capacity above the required minimum, We know that some

kinds had more anthropoid characters—particularly in their skul!ls—others

less (although this fact appears to have little ethnological significance), We

know, too, that on a statistical basis man has shown a more aor less steady

increase in mean stature and decrease in mean head length. On the cultural

side we have eyidence of a fairly progressive enviranment control! which

started slowly but hus steadily accelerated up to the present day, Thal,

however, is all we know with certainty in our search for clues to the factors

behind evolution.

Two possible clues emerge. One is the progressive increase in stature

ant! in brachycephalizatinn, the other is the progressive control of the envir-

omment, There is now ample evidence for the increase in stature (see eg.,

Ie Gros Clark, 1945) and there is abundant evidence that such an environ-

mental improvement as hetter nutrition can effect such physical improve-

ment. even within a few years (see e.g,, Le Gros Clark, 1939; Abbie, 1946,

19484). The same applies (o immigrants to a more favourable environment

(Boas, 1940; Shapiro, 1939). Boas, Shapira and others have also shown that

environmental improvement produces alteration in head shape. Analysis

of this alteration indicates that the change is towards a mean cranial index

within the foetal range of 78-82 (Abbie, 1947). On the evolutionary time-

scale there is evidence that these physical changes have been most apparent

in those peoples who have made most progress in controlling their enyiron-

meut,

Progressively longer retention of the foetal form of skull is an example

of the [oeltalization first desctibed by Bolk (1926). Other human examples

are the relative lack of hair and the lack of pigment which characterizes

some himan ethnic groups (de Beer, 1940), Tnerease in statute, which con-

notes an extension of the foetal capacity for growth, is also an expression

of foetalization—-even though the outcome is further temoval from the factus

physically. The concept of foetalization makes it necessary to reverse the

usual ideas on human evolution.

A glance at the foetal skulls of most primates shows how essentially

similar they all are, with smooth round cratia and small jaws (fig. 4), Such

primates as the gorilla, which subsequently develop large jaws and teeth

and heavy supraorbital and occipital ridges, have differentiated farthest away

from the foctal standard (“gerontomorphism’'). Those, such as man, which

show a progressively stronger tendency to retain the smooth skull and small

jaws have differentiated Icast (“paedomorphism”). Anthropoid characters

are, then, not primitive but specialized: the less anthropoid the characters

the more primitive and less specialized they are (see Wood Jones, 1931),

Evolution up ta man has not been marked by a progressive reduction of

simian features as is usually assumed; it is distinguished simply by failure

to attain the simian degree of differentiation in a number of physical chat-

acters.

Not all modern human physical characters are foetalized, of course. A

highly-arched nose, large mastoid process, prominent chin and the human

foot are quite the reverse. Nevertheless, it is apparent that foetalization

underlies most of the major elements characteristic of human evolution.

Mere prolonystion of the growing period permits an increase in overall

dimensions which, up to an optimum that is still uncertain, confers a definite

advanlage in the struggle for existence, Even more important, such pro-

longation of the growing period allows the brain io acquire dimensions

considerably greater than in any other primate (Abbie, 19486). Moreover,

retention of the foetal form of skull provides the maximum cranial capacity

with the minimum expenditure of bony material (Abbie, 1947),

Pursuit of the concept of fuetalization casts an interesting light upon the

problem of human origins. If all primate foetuses are so alike, at what stage

do they become distinguishable from one another? In other words, how far

back into foetal existence mtist one go to find an indifferent common gen-

eralized form that might become any kind of primate?

If a common generalized foctal form could be discovered the problem

of man's ancestry would be much closer to solution than it is now. Purely

as a working hypothesis, such a form is visualized here as resembling a

buman embryo of about seven weeks’ gestation (fig. 7). At that stage the

total development is that of a generalized primate and, while the digits of

the hand are differentiated, those of the feet are not, so that there is na

external indication whether the great toe will become free and appasable as

in apes or remain fixed and adducted as in man, Although there is inade-

quate information on other primate embryos it seems likely that they all pass

through such a stage, While it is true that the ultimate fate of this embrya

is alteady determined at conception, it is equally true that a minor shift in

emphasis could direct differentiation into any of the lines that end up each

in its own specific kind of primate.

This is probably a gross over-simplification of the problem, but it serves

to illustrate the thesis advanced here, namely, that 2 common ancestry for

the primates is to be sought amongst primate etnbryos, not adults. And if

there are different kinds of humans—which appears unlikely—then their

common apficestry is to be sought in the same source. That is merely an

extension of von Baet’s modification of the Meckel-Scrres Jaw. If it 1s

correct man's ancestry and affinities are not to be found by comparison of

primate adult characters, and it is irrelevant to the problem whether man’s

adult physical make-up lies closer to the shrews, tarsiers, lemurs, monkeys,

apes or any other that could be thought of. Theoretically, any of these

could by some embryonic twist have given rise to the human stock at any

time. Conseqtiently, there is no pressing need to go really far back into

primate ancestry to discover a form sufficiently generalized to have given

rise to man,

Approximate} Adult

Ageorfull | Craniat

bitferertiation} Cacacity

CORDED RRO ROROROL

EUROPEAN

INeanDeDTHAL MAN

First Permanent Molar

common stem

Fig. 7

A scheme to illusirate the suggested common primate stem, and the manner

in which distinctive forms of various primates have been derived from it by a

combination of the processes of gerontomorphism and paedomorphism.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

I am particularly indebted to Dr. T. D. Campbell, Director of Dental

Studies in this University, for lending me the “taurodont” tooth from the

Ramsay Smith Collection. Miss G. D. Walsh is responsible for the illustra-

tions, To them both I must express my gratitude,

REFERENCES

Asprz, A. A. 1946 “Physical Anthropology —A Biological Science.” Aust.

J. Sci., 8, 38-40

Asse, A. A, 1947 “Headform and Human Evolution.” J. Anat, Lond., 81,

233-258

Apsie, A, A, 1948a ‘The Individual and the Environment.” Med. J, Aust.,

(1), 321-327

Apsiz, A. A. 1948b “Na! No! A Thousand Times No!” Aust. J. Sci, 2, 39

Appiez, A. A. 1951 “The Australian Aborigine.” Oceania, 22, 91-100

pe Beer, G, R.. 1940 Embryos and Ancestors, Oxford

Brcc, P. R. 1939 “The Evolutionary Reduction and Degeneration of Man's

Jaws and Teeth.” Proc. 10th Nat. Cong. Aust, Dent. Ass., 642-654

Brac, D. 1934 “On the Discovery, Morphology and Environment of Sinan-

thropus pekinensis.” Philos. Trans., Ser. B, 223, 57-120

Boas, F. 1940 Race, Language and Culture. New York

Borg, L. 1922 “On the Significance of the Supraorbital Ridges in Primates.”

Proc. Kon. Akad. Wetens. Amst., 25, 16-21

Borx, L, 1926 Das Problem der Menschwerdung. Jena.

Bourz, M. 1923 Fossil Men. Elements of Human Palaeontology. London

Broom, R. 1946 “The South African Fossil Ape-Men, The Australapi-

thecinae,” Transvaal Mus. Mem, No. 2

Burerrr, A. St: N., and Hunter, J. 1. 1922 “Description of a Neanderthaloid

Australian Skull, with Remarks on the Production of the Facial Charac-

teristics of Australian Skulls in General.” J. Anat., Lond., 57, 31-54

Campsett, T, D. 1925 ‘“Dentition and Palate of the Australian Aboriginal.”

Univ. Adelaide Pub. No. 1, under Keith Sheridan Foundation

Capirain, L, 1931 La Préhistoire, Paris

CLARK, W. E. Le Gros 1937 “The Status of Pithecanthropus,* Man, 73:

Cruark, W. E. Le Gros 1938 “The Endocranial Cast of the Swanscombe

- Bones.” Report on the Swanscombe Skull, J. Roy. Anthrop. Inst.,, 63,

61-67

Cuark, W. E. Le Gros 1939 “The Scope and J.imitations of Physical Anthro-

pology.”” Proc, Brit, Ass. Adv. Sci.

Crark, W. E, Le Gros 1945 “Pithecanthropus in Pekin,” Antiquity, 19,

155

CrarK, W. E. Le Gros 1949 History of the Primates, London

Crarx, W. E, Le Gros 1950a “South African Fossil Hominids,"’ Nature,

166, 791

CiarK, W. E. Le Gros 1950b “New Palaeontological Evidence Bearing on the

Evolution of the Hominoides,” Quart. J. Geol, Sci., Lond., 105, 255-264

CrarK, W. E. L& Gros, Cooper, D. M., and Zuckerman, 5. 1936 “The Endo-

cranial Cast of the Chimpanzee.” J, Roy. Anthrop. Inst., 66, 249-268

Crark, W. EE. Le Gros, and Leaxry, L. S. B. 1951 “Fossil Mammals of

Africa, No. 1, The Miocene Hominoidea of East Africa.” Brit, Mus.

(Nat. Hist.) Pub.

Coon, C. S. 1939 “The Races of Europe.” New York .

Dart, R, A. 1925 “Australopithecus africanus: the Man-ape of South Africa.”

Nature, 115, 195-199

Dart, R. A. 1940 ‘The Status of Australopithecus.” Am. J. Phys. Anthrop.,

26, 167-186

Darr, R. A. 1949 “The First Pelvic Bones of Australopithecus prometheus:

Preliminary Note.” Am, J. Phys, Anthrop., N.S., 7, 225-258

Davenrort, C. H. 1926 “Human Metamorphosis.” Am. J. Phys. Anthrop., 9,

209-232

DoszHansky, T. 1937 Genetics and the Origin of Species. New York

Durnors, E, 1896 “On Pithecanthropus erectus: a Transitional orm between

Man and Apes.” Sci, Trans, Roy, Dub. Soc., 6, (Ser. 2), pub, in 1898,

1-18

Grecory, W. K. 1934 Man's Place among the Anthropoids. London

Grecory, W. K., and Hertman, M. 1939 “The Dentition of the Extinct South

African Man-Ape Australopithecus (Plesianthropus) transvaalensis

Broom, A Comparative and Phylogenetic Study,” Ann, Transvaal Mus.

19, 339-373

Huxtry, J, 1942 Evolution, The Modern Synthesis. London

Jones, F. Woop 1929 Man’s Place among the Mammals. London

Jones, F. Woon 1931 “The Non-meirical Morphological Characters of the

Skull as Criteria for Racial Diagnosis, J, Anat., Lond., 65, 179-195

Keitn, A. 1929 “The Antiquity of Man.” London

Kerr, A, 1931 “New Discoveries Relating to the Antiquity of Man.”

London

Krirn, A. 1938 “A Resurvey of the Anatomical Features of the Piltdown

Skull with some observations on the recently discovered Swanscombe

Skull.” J. Anat, Lond., 73, 155-185 and 234-254

Krocman, W. M. 1941 “Growth of Man,” Tab, Biol., 20

Leakey, L. S. B. 1950 “The Age of Homo sapiens.’ Mankind, 4, 196-200

McCown, T. D., and Keira, A, 1939 “The Stone Age of Mount Carmel,” 2,

Oxford

Morant, G. M. 1938 “The Form of the Swattscomhe Skull”” Report on the

Swanscombe Skull, J, Roy. Anthrop. Inst., 68, 67-97

Oaxiex, K. P, 1938 “Correlation of the Deposits of the Barnfield Pit.”

Report on the Swanscombe Skull, J. Roy. Anthrop. Inst., 68, 555-38

Oarrey, K. P, 1950 “Relative Dating of the Piltdown Skull.” Proc. Brit.

Ass. Adv. Sci., 343-344

Packer, A. D. 1949 “A Comparison of the Endocranial Cast and Brain of an

Australian Aborigine.” J. Anat., Lond., 83, 195-204

Pasay te ve 1930 “Alveolar and Facial Prognathism.” J. Anat., Lond. 65,

Pearson, K. 1928 “The Skull and Portraits of Henry Stewart, Lord Darnley,

and their Bearing on the Tragedy of Mary, Queen of Scots.” Bio-

metrika, 20B, 1-104

Pevaony, D. 1927 Elémetts de Préhistoire, Paris

Scuerers, G. H. W. 1946 “The South African Fossil Ape-Men, The Austra-

lopithecinae.” Transvaal Mus. Mem. No. 2

Scuuntz, A. H. 1948 “The Relation in Size between Premaxilla, Diastema

and Canine.” Am. J, Phys. Anthrop., N.S., 6, 163-179

Scuuttz, A. H. 1950 “The Anatomy of the Gorilla,” Henry Cushier Raven

Memorial Volume, arr. and ed, hy W. K. Gregory, New York

SHarrro, H. L. 1939 “Migration and Environment. New York

SmitH, G. Extior 1927 Essays on the Evolution of Man, 2nd Ed., London

Symincton, J. 1916 “Endocranial Casts and Brain Form: a Criticism of some

Recent Speculations.” J. Anat., Lond., 50, 111-130

WEeWweNREICH, F. 1940a “Some Problems dealing with Ancient Man.” Am.

Anthrop., 42, 375-383

Wemenrercu, F, 1940b “The Torus Occipitalis and related Structures and

their Transformations in the course of Human Evolution.” Bull. Geol.

Soc. China, 19, 479-544

WEIDENREICH, F. 1943 “ ‘The Neanderthal Man,’ and the Ancestors of ‘Homo

sapiens, ” Am. Anthrop., 45, 39-48

Wewenreicu, F. 1945a “Giant Early Man from Java and South China,”

Anthrop. Pap. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., 40, 1-134

WEIpenreicH, F, 1945b “The Brachycephalization of Recent Mankind.” South-

western J, Anthrop., 1, 1-54

WEIDENREICH, F, 1946a “Maxillary Diastema as a Criterion of Generic Dis-

tinction.” Am. J. Phys. Anthrop., N.S., 4, 199-201

WewenreicH, F. 1946b “Generic, Specific and Subspecific Characters in

Human Evolution.” Am, J. Phys. Anthrop., N.S., 4, 413-431

WewenreicH, F. 1947 “Some Particulars of the Skull and Brain of Early

Hominids and their Bearing on the Problem of the Relationship between

Man and Anthropoids.” Am. J. Phys. Anthrop., N.S., 5, 387-427

ZEUNER, F, EF, 1950 Dating the Past. London

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1952 Vol. 75, Plate V

“Taurodont” molar of recent European origin from the

Ramsay Smith Collection in the Adelaide Dental Hospital.

Skiagram by J. A. Cran, M.D.S.

TERTIARY FAULTING IN NORTH-EASTERN EYRE PENINSULA, SOUTH

AUSTRALIA

BY KEITH R. MILES

Summary

A distinctive pattern of meridional block-faulting in the country between Whyalla and Cowell,

north-eastern Eyre Peninsula, has been developed as a result of movements accompanying the

foundering of the Spencer Gulf region during the Plio-Pleistocene. The meridional trend of many of

the Tertiary fault scarps is a reflection of pre-existing foliation trends in the Pre-Cambrian bedrock.

Mapping of the scarps was greatly assisted by the use of aerial photographs. There are many

examples of dislocation and rejuvenation of senescent pre-Tertiary drainage as a result of the

faulting movements. The region provides excellent material for the study of the results of

geologically youthful faulting in soft “overmass” sediments.

YERTIARY FAULTING IN NORTH-EASTERN EYRE PENINSULA,

SOUTH AUSTRALIA t

By Kerto R. Mixes *

[Read 11 October 1951]

SUMMARY

A distinctive pattern of meridional block-faulting in the country between

Whyalla and Cowell, north-eastern Eyre Peninsula, has been developed as a

result of movements accompanying the foundering of the Spencer Gulf region

during the Plio-Pleistocene, The meridional trend of many of the Tertiary fault

scarps is a reflection of pre-existing foliation trends in the Pre-Cambrian bedrock.

Mapping of the scarps was greatly assisted by the use of aerial photographs.

There are many examples of dislocation and rejuvenation of senescent pre-

Tertiary drainage as a result of the faulting movements. The region provides

excellent material for the study uf the results of geologically youthful faulting in

soft “overmass” sediments.

INTRODUCTION

Early in 1948 a stmp of country approximately 28 miles wide, running

northerly from latitude 33°45’ S. near Cowell for about 104 miles to latitude

32° 15’ 5, heyond Port Augusta in the north-eastern corner of Eyre Peninsula,

was flown and photographed by units of the Royal Australian Air Force at the

request of the Department of Mines of South Australia. later in the same year

the writer, assisted by other officers of the Mines Department, commenced an

intensive geological survey of the region, which includes the economically

important iron-rich hills of Iron Knob and the Middleback Range. At the time

of writing this survey was still in progress, but regional mapping of most of the

countty lying between the Middleback Range and the coastline of Spencer Gulf

had been completed.

This mapping, cartied out on a scale of 37-40 chains to an inch, using the

aerial photographs already mentioned, has revealed a number of very interesting

features of geology and physiography, not the least of which is an extensive

pattern of block-faulting, which is the subject of the present paper, Faulting in

this area has been known for many years and was first identified and described

by R. L. Jack (1914) following a reconnaissance geological and hydrological

survey of parts of Counties Jervois, York and Buxton. Later it was recogmised

that the whole of the eastern coastline of Eyre Peninsula was bounded by block-

faulting. C. Fenner (1930) referred to this as the ‘‘Lincoin Fault” in discussion

of the major structural and physiographic features of South Australia, and later

(1939) compared some of the faults with the “dirt scarps” of the Para Fault

immediately west of the city of Adelaide.

During the course of the present survey it has heen possible, with the aid of

the air photos, to tecognise and delineate the faults in considerable detail and to

distinguish their characteristic features.

PHYSIOGRAPHY AND GEOLOGY

The greater part of the region under review is physiographically mature to

sehescent, flat and low lying or very gently undulating with only occasional

* Department of Mines, South Australia

+ Published by permission of the Ditector, Department of Mines, South Australia

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 75, September 1952

isolated hills or ridges. Close to the coast is a long marrow strip of salt-water

marshes and sand-dunes standing just above highwater level, often fringed on

the seaward side by mangroves, and extending along the coastline southwards

from Whyalla to Cowell and beyond.

Beyond these marshes the land gradually rises to a flat soil-and-alluvium-

covered coastal plain standing 50 to 100 feet above sea level, covered sith salt-

bush, bluebush and myall. This coastal plain ranges from two to eight miles in

width, but near Whyalla is broken by Mount Young and the Whyalla Hills. It is

interrupted to the westward hy the system of north-south fault scarps to be

described below, These have the total effect of stepping up the plain ta the west-

ward, in general block by block, to a height of about 490-450 fect.

The upper plain is a base-levelied, gently undulating tableland extending

westwards to the Middleback Range and well beyond. The general level stanils

at between 450 and 650 feet above sea level. To the westward and south-westward

of Whyalla this plain is broken by a number of rocky north-south-trending ridges

such ag the Middleback Range (900-1,400 feet) and Moonabie Range (about

850 fect), but farther southwards it is relieved only by low, smooth, rounded hills.

To the northward and north-westward of Whyalla are the dissected remnants of

an original higher level tableland which extends far to the north-westward of

Port Augusta,

Drainage channels within the area under review are well defined only in the

immediate vicinity of where they rise amongst the higher level ridges. Within

the plains, with few exceptions, they consist of broad and diminishing flood lines.

Not even the best-defined drainage channels stich as Salt Creek or Myall Creek

reach the sea. To the westward of the Middleback Range a decadent southerly

drainage is marked by a number of salt lakes flanked by gypsum dunes. Eastward

of the range a senescent drainage system trending southerly to south-easterly has

been partially dislocated by the block faulting. Short fault-searp consequent water

courses, such as Deep Creek, are in process of eroding back some of the recently

farmed scarp faces.

A very great part of the area under discussion is covered by yeologically

recent superficial deposits of soil and alluvial sands and clays, and ubiquitous

travertine ecment. These deposits mantle almest all of the coastal plain between

Whyalla and Cowell and much of the upper plain, To the southward and west-

ward of the Middleback Range sand dunes forming continuous lines of parallel

ridges trend N.W.-S.E. and cover much of the country.

At scattered localities on the flanks of the fault scarps are exposed the

remnants of what were probably extensive deposits of grit and saridatone over-

lying shell-riclt marine limestone (Pliocene) formed during an inenrsion of the

sea over much of the areas occupied by ihe coastal and upper plains. This lime-

stone fies ditectly upon Pre-Cambrian bedrock.

The basement rocks tittderlying the plains and exposed in the low rises of

the undulating country, and in the hill ridges and the upper tableland, are believed

to comprise a considerable range of rock types—from sandstones, grits and con-

glomerates of probable Cambrian age and basal grits and quartzites of the Pro-

terozoic Adelaide System, to Archaean igneous and metamorphic rocks. The

latter include stecply-folded banded iron formations and associated schists of the

Middleback Range and also a complex series of schists, gneisses and migmatites,

and toliated granitic rocks. Later igneous rocks include coarse porphyritic granite,

felspar porphyry and dolerite-amphibolite. Composite quartz veins occupy a num-

ber of extended fissutves in the older rocks.

It is apparent that the area under review has been the subject of some

extremely long periods of erosion which have continued up to geologically recent

times, This is reflected in the generally base-levelled character of much of the

topography, the high level plateau of the Cambrian sandstone and conglomerate

formations, and the gently undulating to flat upper plain with its pediments of

fairly deeply weathered granitic schists, gneisses and migmatites.

PART OF

NORTHEASTERN EYRE PENINSULA

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

snomuo’ TERTIARY FAULT SCARPS

Favir Scares

QuimrzQeere =}

4 Zoont AUGUSTA

‘

ant

“bon

THE FAULT SCARPS

The distribution and pattern of faulting has been determined in the field and

from the aerial photographs by recognising and delineating the characteristic topo-

graphic features. Their distribution is shown in fig. 1,

in the field a fault scarp can often be distinguished by the occurrence of a

rise or fall in otherwise almost perfectly peneplained country, and by the remark-

able continuity and straightness of the resulting escarpment (fig, 2). In slightly

undulating country, or where the fault displacement has been small, it may became

virtually impossible to recognise on the ground the characteristic topographic

features of faulting. From the aerial photograph, however, it is possible to identify

and delincate with ease the fault scarps of all sizes down io those in which the

total displacement has been no more than a few feet, They appear as typically

straight or gently curved light-coloured lines which usually truncate all other

features of topography, soil and vegetation distinguishable in the photograph

(pl. vi, fig. 1).

The principal fault scarps in the region lying between the Middleback Range

and Whyalla have a strong general meridional] trend with a lesser development of

cross-linking scarps trending east-west or slightly south of westerly. For con-

venience of description and identification these scarps have been given names as

shown in fig. 1.

The first scarp encountered in travelling from Whyalla to Iran Knob is the

Roopena Searp which crosses the road and railway near Roopena Siding, at about

13 miles from Whyalla, and extends northerly for about 20 miles. This is an

east-facing scarp and has an average height of about 10 fcet, but for many miles

it rises no more than five or six feet above the eastern plain (pl. vi, fig, 2).

Branching of the scarp at about 12 miles north of the Whyalla-lron Knob road

indicates a splintering of the fault line at this point.

The next main scarp, Randell Scarp, crosses the Whyalla-Iron Knob road

at about 15 miles from Whyalla and rung southerly from a point four miles north

af the road, in two broad arches, first curving towards the west and then towards

the east, crossing the Lincoln Highway at 10 miles west of Whyalla, This scarp

traverses the full length of the Hundred of Randell and enters the Hundred of

Poynton to the south, where it joins the Poynton Scarp, a bold north-easterly

trending feature which, with an east-west trending branch, overlooks the coastal

plain to the east and south.

At tts northern end Randell Scarp faces westward and attains a maximuin

height of about 30 feet; bat at about five miles south of the Iron Knob road it

rapidly loses height and dwindles into the plain, only to re-appear at a few chains

farther south, on the same line, as an east-facing scarp which gradually increases

in elevation above the coastal plain to.a maximum of ahout 75-80 feet. Approach-

ing Poynton Scarp, its elevation above the Poynton block is about 20-25 feet,

Near here a second parallel scarp stopped at 14-2 miles to the west, forms a

splinter block on the Randell fault block.

Poynton Scarp first rises at about three miles south of the Lincoln Iighway

and trends first southerly and then south-south-westerly for five miles, where it

is joined by a branching north-south scarp (maximum height 35 feet), and then

swings southerly for several miles, From here Poynton Scarp steps to the west-

ward for about four miles and breaks into a number of north-south splinter

scarps, only to swing at right angles, westerly again as a prominent 60 Ft. escarp-

ment which can be traced for about five miles, first crossing the Murninnie Scarp

and finally dying out against the Moonabie Scarp (pl, vi, fig. 4), A feature of

Poynton Scarp has been the discovery of traces of Tertiary marine limestone along

the foot of the scarp at a number of localities. Similar limestone occurs overlying

granite-gneiss, on the banks of Deep Creek, on the Poynton-Nonowie fault block

(pl. vii, fig. 3). Average height of the scarp is about 45-50 feet,

The next major scarp-line runs roughly parallel to the southern half of

Randell Scarp and crosses the Lincoln Highway at about 14 miles from Whyalla.

It passes at half a mile west of Nonowie Station homestead and has been named

Nonowie Scarp. It is about 14 miles long and has a number of small forks or

branching scarps, all facing easterly. Maximum height is about 80 feet near the

Lincoln Highway, the scarp reducing to about 15-20 feet as it approaches Poynton

Scarp, Here delineation becomes difficult due to undulating outcrops of gneiss

on the up-slope side. To the north the scarp extends for some distance at a

steady height of about 40 feet, but finally dics out at seven miles north of the

Lincoln Ilighway. Beyond this there are the discontinuous remnants of an

irregular west-facing scarp which may represent the northerly extension of the

Nonowic fault line, and which suggests that, as with the Randell Scarp already

described, a whole block of country in this vicinity has undergone hinged faulting

movements about an east-west axis of cross warping.

Fig, 2

Pre-existing drainage pattern dislocated

by portion of Ash Reef Scarp.

Farther west again is a well-defined topographic feature which starts at its

northern end as a west-lacing scarp trending south south-easterly. This scarp

pradually gives way to a gentle ridge covered by loose quartz rubble, and farther

south again where it enters the Hundred of Ash it becomes a long straight com-

posite quartz reef ridge which finally swings south-easterly across granitic gneiss

country near the junction of the Lincoln Highway with the Whyalla~Kimba road.

This feature has been named Ash Reef Scarp, This is the most westerly of the

fault scarps identified in the northern half of the area under reyiew. Maximum

height of Ash Reef Scarp is about 40 feet. Where the scarp merges into the

quartz ridge its height is reduced to about 15-20 feet above the surrounding plain.

The presence of the quartz tecfs along the fault line of this scarp is of consider-

able significance and will be discussed later in considering the age of the faulting.

Murninnie and Moonabie Scarps are two parallel, short and very’ straight

north-south trending scarps, cach of which face easterly, dies out to the north-

ward and swings sharply to the west at its southern extremity, producing in turn

the effect of two rectangular hinged Eault blocks, tilted downwards to the south,

Murninnie Scarp, so named because the workings of old Murninnie Copper

mine [Jack (1930), p. 42] are exposed in its flank close to where it crosses

Poynton Scarp, rises about 20-30 feet above the Poynton-Nonowie fault plain,

Farther south it stands at between 75 and 80 feet above the coastal plain (pl. vi,

fig 3). Granite gneisses and migmatites are exposed along much of Murninnie

Scarp except towards its southern end, where east south-easterly trending sand

duties spill over the dwindling scarp face.

Moonabie Scarp extends southerly from where it crosses the Lincoln Iligh-

way at about two miles east of the Moonabie Range, for about 11 miles to a

point where it swings sharply to the west. At Lincoln Highway the total displace-

ment ts about 3-4 feet, but this increases steadily to the southward until at about

five niles south the maximum measured height of the scarp is about 180 feet

(pl. vi, fig. 4). Here on the flanks of the uplifted block is exposed a belt of much

felspathised, highly brecciated cherty sediments. Going farther south the scarp

face gradually diminishes in height and is transgressed by sand dunes following

the regional cast south-casterly trend.

Moonabie Scarp ends against a short straight scarp which ruts in a soyth-

westerly direction for nearly eight miles, where it fades out in sand dune country.

This scarp has an average height of 20 feet and faces south-easterly over the

coastal plain. It serves to link Moonabie Scarp with the next prominent feature,

the Charleston Scarp.

Charleston Scarp runs east and west at just south of the southern boundary

of the Hundred of Charleston. It faces south, has a length of about 12 miles

and a height ranging from 10 feet to about 30 feet. Near the scarp boundary

imuch of the uplifted Charleston-Moonabie block is covered by sand dunes. It is

tweached by Salt Creek in whose banks are exposed considerable thicknesses of

prestiwably Tertiary fluvatile grits and gravels, apparently overlying Pre-

camtbrian granite and gneiss.

The final scarp in the area under discussion, the Cowell Scarp, can be seen

irom the coastal plain as a bold scarp feature running continously in a south-

westerly direction from Charleston Scarp at four miles west of Salt Creek to

four miles west of Cowell, and weli beyond. Maximum displacement along

Cowell Scarp is not known, but it probably varies from not iess than 50 feet to

over 100 feet. Dissection of the scarp near Cowell has resulted in exposures of

Precambrian gneisses and metamorphosed sedimentary recks.

So much for the individual fault scarps—let us now consider the fault scarp

picture as a whole. It is apparent from a review of the entire general pattern of

faulting in the area surveyed that the general regional movement has been dawn-

ward to the south-east, along a broad south-west north-east axis, #.2., parallel to the

western coastline of Spencer Gulf, Individual scarps have been produced by con-

temporaneous differential movements of successive parallel blocks of country so

that, with a few notable exceptions (vtz,, the morthern portion of Ash Reef,

Nonowie and Randell Searps), in going westward, each has been stepped upward

relative to the coastal plain, and to each other, or conversely they have been

stepped downward to the eastward, Furthermore, since the scarps die put to the

northward, it appears that the fault blocks have been tilted or warped. down to the

southward along hinged fault lines, In the exception cited above the fault blocks

have apparently been warped along an east-west axis, possibly as a result of

secondary or later fault movements which have reversed the direction of some

scarp faces.

This general pattern of faulting is consistent with the type of irregular tear-

ing along the grain of the country which would be expected at the boundaries of

a major “graben” or similar down-faulted block which lies oblique ot transverse

to this regional grain. In this instance the major transverse down-faulting was

provided by the “foundering” of Spencer Gulf, the predominant movement being

south-east block downward relative to Eyre Peninsula. The regional grain of

the country is represented by the foliation trend lines of the Precambrian base-

ment rocks, That some minor tearing movements were along pre-existing fissures

or lines of weakness in the older Precambrian rocks is suggested by the develop-

ment of a relatively youthful fault scarp along the extension of a line of possibly

Precambrian or early Palaeozoic quartz reefs (the Ash Reef Scarp). There are,

however, other major lines of quartz reefs shown in fig. 1, which although repre-

senting ancient fissures and lines of weakness, did not yield during the period of

block-faulting movements responsible for the scarps described above.

Fig. 3

Portion. of Randell Scarp showing, early

stage dissection and development of scarp-

consequent and rejuveriated water-courses.

AGE OF FAULTING

There is atmple evidence that the fault scarps described in the preceding

section are comparatively youthful featires. Perhaps one of the most striking

examples of such evidence is the effect of the faulting upon the drainage pattern

in many portions of the upper pédiment-plain, as revealed in the air photos and by

surface mappineg..

Much of the present decadent drainage pattern on the upper plain between

Whyalla and Iron Knob and the Middleback Range has been inherited directly

from, or is unchanged from, the pre-faulting topography, in which a fairly high

degree of base-levelling or peneplanation is displayed. In places the faulting has

dislocated the drainage, either damming hack or diverting old drainage lines or

else rejuvenating old channels or promoting new ones.

Fig, 2 shows how development of the west-facing Ash Reef Scarp has

dammed back a number of easterly-directed drainage channels and produced

several shallow ponds or claypans, This scarp ranges in height from less than a

foot at its northern extremity up to 40 feet opposite the largest claypan flat. The

scarp line is very straight and entirely undissected by any scarp-consequent

drainage channels. It consists of a simple soil slope, or “dirt scarp” of Fenner

(1939, p. 86). Other examples of similar claypans or natural dams can be seen

along the northern portions of Roopena Scarp where the low east-facing scarp

(height 5-10 feet) has transgressed pre-faulting south-westerly drainage.

Fig. 3 illustrates how the faulting has promoted small scarp-consequent

drainage chatnels and rejuvenated senescent easterly drainage on portion of

Randell Scarp, near the Linco!n Highway (pl. vii, fig. 2). The scarp face, which

has a height of about 70-75 feet is in process of becoming irregularly dissected,

and the original soil slope is being modified in its lower levels by the development

of an outwash apron of alluvium washed from the crest of the scarp,

As to the precise geological age of the faulting, it is possible to define a lower

limit to the faulting period, as the Tertiary marine limestone which, as already

mentioned, has been found at the foot of Poynton Scarp and also on the Poynton-

Nonowie fault block, is believed to be of Lower Pliocene age similar to the so-

called ‘‘Adelaidean” (Kalimnan) of the Adelaide-Hallett Cove district, At Deep

Creek this marine limestone, which is rich in shell casts, has been cut off against

granite-gneiss by a steep-angled fault (pl. vii, fig. 4)-

It is probable that the faulting movements continued through the Pliocene

and into Pleistocene time, with various isotatic readjustments accompanying the

foundering of the Spencer Gulf and Gulf St, Vincent region and the development

of the Mount Lofty Horst block. This period coincides with the so-called

Kosciuskan Epoch of major block-faulting movements responsible for many

mountain features along the eastern coast of Australia.

REFERENCES

Jack, R.L. 1914 Geol. Surv., S.A., Bulletin 3

Fenner, C. 1930 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 54, 1-36

Fenner, C. 1939 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 63, (1), 79-87

, Plate Wi

ite

™

Vol.

Aust, L952

y. Soc. 5.

Roy.

Trans.

‘davog ouuiuinyy wo.

Jp Buryooy, ‘dirog uojusog Jo uoysod Buisey-ynos vy

¢ SL,

"[ ‘Sy UT pazeIsH[L Bare Wi prot qouyy wory 10

Yon “divos payoassip-uow ys qy-g~ e& ‘divog euadooy

Z Sy

‘ued ({eISVOD) ABMoO] 9] WlOIy

(Jo9} OS WSley) davag stuuuinyy poysessip Apaed ayy

¢ Bly

“¢ unt ‘euadooy ‘7ZOT ‘ON O1l0yd “WW (2994 ONO'ST Wott

OVOUd — RI. (RAMI qouyy uolp-eyeAy Ay ‘Suipig

euodooyy teou sdavog [ppurey pue (jysi1) eusdooy so ye

T Bly

5, Plate VT

Haat

Vol.

"ae

ANOO

ayeyd = paddero-olpt9ariy

Joye juanbasuos-divos paye

orq-yney TL

DAnfal EB JO pRolfL of Ty,

Sty

yney sty

Buo[e JUDULOAOLUE

Aq paadrasoid

puke UMO1Y}-UMOp

SESv BON Sa) KL

UMOYS AUO]SOLUT]

DULIVUE YLT, “Yea

daaq ye ssious

-O]TIUBLIS uric

-ULBODTG Ul WyNRy

ousI01g -1s0od vy

pay

JpurYy v8I[} Uo

yueq oyy di

Jayyey

WOl, paspo[sip usoq sey punossoi0f

V9] OY} Ul Jap[nog ouojsaun, ayy, “Yo[q-3NB yy otMouoN

-NOJUAG ay} uO ‘YooI1y daoqy] Jo syuRQ ot} UL ssiaud-o}1URLS

PeteyyLIM SUIATIOAO DUOSIULP OUL

¢ “By

AP (auadold) Aieysa

“G29! O8T

ystoy)

IS aiqeuoosy jo uoisod juouoid

BASIC IGNEOUS ROCK OF THE WORUMBA REGION, SOUTH

AUSTRALIA

BY ALAN H. SPRY

Summary

A group of basic igneous rocks occurs about twenty miles east of Hawker in the Flinders Ranges.

The regional features of the locality have been discussed by the author in a previous paper. The

varieties present are described as dolerites and basalts and invariably show the effects of

uralitization, saussuritization, etc., due to deuteric and hydrothermal alteration. These basic rocks lie

almost entirely in a fault block in the centre of Worumba Anticline, where they have intruded pure

and impure dolomites, phyllites and quartzites which are stratigraphically placed almost at the base

of the Adelaide System. The intruded sediments show slight regional metamorphism but very little

contact alteration.

BASIC IGNEOUS ROCKS OF THE WORUMBA REGION,

SOUTH AUSTRALIA*

By Avan H, Spry

[Read 8 November 1951]

SUMMARY

A group of basic igneous rocks occurs about twenty miles east of Hawker

in the Flinders Ranges. The regional features of the locality have been discussed

by the author in a previous paper. The varieties present are described as dolerites

and basalts and invariably show the effects of uralitization, saussuritization, ¢tc.,

due to deuteric and hydrothermal alteration. These basic rocks lie almiost entirely

in a fault block in the centre of the Worumba Anticline, where they have intruded

pure and impute dolomites, phyllites and quartzites which are sttatigraphically

placed almost at the base of the Adelaide System. The intruded sediments show

slight regional metamorphism but very little contact alteration,

THE BASIC ROCKS

Two major varieties of igneous rocks are found in the area, and the division

is made according to prominent lithological characteristics. The medium to coarse

grained rocks with ophitic to intergranular texture are called dolerites, while the

fine-grained, amygdaloidal varieties are named basalts. These terms replace the

“diabase” and “melaphyre” of Benson (1909) and Howehin (1907, 1928, etc.).

There is considerable doubt whether all the basalts are truly extrusive, so

that the division is made on a lithological rather than a genetic basis for con-

vettience.

Fretp RELATIONS

The basics are restricted to the disturbed axial zone of the Worumba Anti-

cline, and while the majority intrude the phyllite-dolomite fault block there are

a few which have penetrated the Sturt Tillite in the area about Morgans Creek.

Text figure 1 shows the distribution of the igneous bodies with each occurrence

numbered. The folding and faulting within the fault block was too complex ta

resolve in the time available and consequently only structural trends are indicated

in this map.

The group numbered 5 to 15 (excluding 13 and including B.1) appear to

be very closely related. Particularly in the southern part, the area appears to be

almost completely underlain by igneous rock with only narrow strips of sediment

separating individual intrusions. The sediment may be remnants of the roof over

a large solid mass.

Number 44 is a narrow elongated mass which forms the ridge just west of

Mount Craig and is shown in more detail in text figure 2. It appears as several

stnall, disconnected outctops in the south, then as a solid, curved, dyke-like mass,

It is by far the most interesting and important of all the intrusives, as it shows

clear evidence of differentiation, differential alteration, metasomatism and mineral-

ization and warrants more attention than was allowed in the field observation.

The group numbered 49 to 53 shows a distinct meridional grouping and

strongly suggests a line of intrusions along a fracture. It is notable that the

* Section of an Adelaide University Commonwealth Research Grant Thesis,

Trans. Roy, Soc. S: Aust., 75, September 1952

’

A 6258) 3

o') 0% 1} 2" f

he 65 & £6) pp a

Fig, 1

Geological map illustrating

the occurrence and distribu-

Fe] ate ur tion of the dolerites, ete.

within the phyllite-dolomite

fault block,

7] GLACIAL BEDS

[* ] HAGNESITIC BEDS

PHYLLITE-DOLOMITE

FORMATION

PHYLLITES & SLATES

57% DOLERITE 8.1 ™ BASALT

vt STRUCTURAL TRENDS 7 FAULT

+ HORIZONTAL «= VERTICAL

LITHOLOGICAL BOUNDARY

SCALE

2 3

direction of major and minor fold axes and major and minot faults in the area

around is north-south. also,

Number 61 is the only body which shows any distinct tendency to dyke

formation as it trends along the strike of the sediments, but is associated with

several plug-like masses,

The oecurrence of the basalts is interesting, as they all occur as apparently

intrusive, irregularly circular masses and show no evidence in the field of being

flows, either subaerial or submarine.

Number B.1 is a body which is over 400 feet across the steike of the sedi-

ments, but only about 100 feet along it. It appears right in the middle of a group

of doleriles and appears to merge into one intrusion, although this feature ts most

indefinite becayse of soil cover. The rock is amygdaloidal and moderately jointed,

_ Number B, 2 is a slightly elongated body which rung along the strike of the

sediments in the bed of Morgans Creck. It outcrops only a few feet from a

dolerite which shows obvious intrusive relations.

Number B.3 again occurs in the midst of a group of dolerite intrusions jiist

north of Willow Creek. Jt is glassy and shows very strongly developed close

jointing wich the juint planes covered with epidote.

Tue Porm or THE INTRUSIONS

The shapes of the igneous bodies are very irregular and tend towards sub-

ciceular or oval bodies with strongly elongated dykes or sills rather uncommon.

The term “sill” might be applied to some clongated bodies which appear to haye

been intruded concordantly, but very often these are dykes which have forced

the sediments immediately surrounding them into a vertical position parallel to

the elongation of the igneous mass. The terms plug or stock are the only ones

suitable to describe the vertical pipedike bodies which are so common,

The form of the amygdaloidal or glassy basaltic bodies is frequently similar

to that wf the dolerites, thus suggesting that the basalts are intrusive. ‘There 1s

no doubt that interbedded flow basalts da ocour at various places in the Flinders

Ranges, but there is no evidence to support such an origin for the rocks in this

area, Iloward (1951) has described elongated outcrops of rather flatly dipping

amygdaloidal basalt at Blinman. The author has seen these, and it is apparent

that they have all the properties of flows, similar to those at Wooltana described

by Mawson (1927), Basie pebbles have been found in beds overlying basalts by

Mawson at Wooltana (1927) and Elatina (1949), and also at Enorama by

Howard (1951), so that there is no doubt that there was at least some contem-

poraneous effusive activity in the northern Flinders Ranges. Howchin (1922)

has teferred to “volcanic necks” of basaltic material at Blinman and Wirrealpa

and it seems likely that the intrusive amvgdaloidal plugs were “feeder” pipes to

true Hows higher in the System, The close association in the field of extrusive

and intrusive forms of the same magma has been repeatedly observed in rather

mobile zones, and Marshall (1940) described an occurrence in the Catboniferous

strata of the Midlands Counties of England. Tle noted that the criteria which

normally indicate a flow may also be seen in a minor intrusion, The presence of

(a) amygaloidal texture, (b) glassy or fine-grained edges, (c) lack of alteration

of the sediments, may thus be found in both intrusive and extrusive igneous rocks

as they apparently are in the basalts at Hawker.

The close association of intrtisives and extrusives in several areas tn the

Flinders Ranges is probably due to the presence of a long-lived deep-seated weak-

ness in the crust along which the rise of basic magma took place at widely spaced

times.

THe Metcuanics or INrrusion

The basics occur singly or in small and large groups throughout the Mount

Lofty-T'linders Ranges and the groups are ysually located in an easily recngnisable

zone of tectonic activity. These zones of weakness frequently ocetir along or

100

near the axis of an anticline ot dome, and this feature is seen at Mount Painter,

Mount Stewart, Blinman, Enorama, Oraparinna and Worumba. Text figure 6

shows the distribution of the known basic intrusions which belong to this group

and it may be seen that the fields are distributed along the axial portion of the

geosyncline with the greater number of intrusions in the highly disturbed zones

in the north, The extreme tectonic activity is shown in all areas by the occurrence

of great masses of crush breccia as shown in pl. viii, fig. 1, and the dolerites

frequently intrude the crush zones as shown by Sprigg (1949). Occasionally

the igneous rock is itself brecciated by later movement. In the Worumba area

we have the formation of an anticline which by continued thrust from the south-

east became overturned. Large faults developed (the main one parallel to the

axis of the fold) and a fault block was moved up many thousands of feet (at

least 4,000 feet) into the axial zone, and this was followed by the intrusion of

over 60 small bodies along the central portion, during probably a relaxational

tensional phase after the folding,

c te Ed 30 CHATHS. o3 to 70 Ril ao CHAE

—— —

DOLERITE DYKE SYSTEM AT ACID OYKE SYSTEM AT

GOSNELLS WA ARMIDALE N.S.W.

asTen DAVIS 194

wicene 2

e313 i¢ 20 30 40 CHAINS. J 20 40 CWAIND

i eee

GROUP OF DOLERITE PLUGS GROUP OF DOLERITE PLUGS

EAST OF HAWKER S.A, HAWKER S.A-

Fig, 2

Some minor intrusions illustrating varying

degrees of regularity of conditions during

intrusion,

Despite Howchin’s frequent mention of dykes in the Flinders Ranges, the

majority of the bodies are irregularly shaped plugs, Groups of plugs may occur

along a line, but any regularity is usually lacking and this gives some idea of

the conditions during intrusion when comparison is made with other minor intru-

sions, A dyke system of similar material and age from Western Australia has

101

been shown by Davis (1940) to possess a marked regularity as indicated in text

figure 2. Here the dolerite was intruded into a massive granite and the [orm

of the intrusion ts due to a well-developed joint system in the country rock,

An example of varying regularity taken from Armidale in New South Wales

is shown also in text figute 2. Here a large acid dyke (80 yards wide and over

a mile long) breaks in the centre where there is a zone containing a number of

small, irregularly shaped and distributed dykes with no relation to each other

or to the main dyke. There js probably a large tensional fracture which controlled

the formation of the major dyke but in the irregular, closely jointed central por-

tion all uniformity ig lost,

Thus a regular system of intrusions depends on regularity of the orogenic

forces during intrusion and a regular response of the country rock to the forces,

The response will depend on the homogeneity of the country rock and this will be

reflected in a regular system of joints or larger fractures,

The zones of intrusion in the Flinders Ranges lie along major striuctiral

weaknesses, but the irregularity of form and distribution of the intrusions is

caused primarily by the lack of homogeneity of the sediments and the consequen-

tial varying responses of beds of differing competency to orogenic forces. ‘The

forces themselves were not at all uniform in the small, highly contorted and

crushed zones which suffered igneous intrusion.

THE PETROGRAPHY OF THE IGNEOUS ROCKS

DOLERITES

Tn general the dolerites are dark green in colour with a fine to moderately

coarse grain and textures varying between ophitic, intergranular and allotrio-

morphic. They originally consisted of augite and labradorite with accessory horn-

blende, imemite, apatite and quartz, but have typically suffered the secondary

processes of uralitization and saussuritization, Olivine does not occur in this

area but has been found as serpentine pseudomorphs in similar rocks in the

Flinders Ranges.

The pyroxene was originally a member of the augite-pigeonite series and

measurements on the universal stage gave optic axial angles from 15° to 50°.

Quite often different crystals in the sare rock gave a 2V range of 5° and in one

specimen a range of 17° was obtained, indicating a strong variation in the lime

content of the mineral, and this is a reflection of the strongly varying lime content

of different dolerites. The pyroxene is very pale green or colourless and occasion-

ally shews polysynthetic twinning. It i$ usually altered to uralitic actinolite which

may be pale green and fibroys or somewhat better ci'ystallized with colours Fro

bluc-green to greenish-hrawn.

The plagioclase was originally labradorite bit only in a few cases was the

unaltered mineral found, as saussuritization usually clouds the laths. with epidote,

zoisite or sericite with the simultaneous production of fresh albite,

A well-formed greenish-brown hornblende may be primary, Accessories are

skeletal grids of ilmenite with leucoxene, apatite and quartz. Sphene is present

in one specimen and riebeckite replaces. the pyroxene in two others,

Rock [9098] from outcrop number 16 is a typical specimen. It is mediam-

grained with an irregular texture which is ophitic in some parts and hypidio-

morphic to seriate in others, The rock consists chicHy of amphiboles with altered

plagioclase, and a little pyroxene,

102

The pyroxene ig a pale stibecalcic augite with an optic axial angle varying

between 44° and 50°. There is abundant pale fibrous actinolite which is uralitic

and forms pseudomorphs aiter the amphibole, A little hornblende, pleochyaic

fram dark-brown to blue-green occurs as well formed crystals often intimately

associated with ilmenite. The plagioclase remains as highly altered laths, some

containing reasonably large flakes of white mica and others being cloyded with a

dense aggregate of zoisite and epidote, Only a little fresh regenerated albite is

present together with a little biotite, skeletal grids of ilmenite with leucoxene

and quite an appreciable amount of interstitial granophyric quartz.

Rock [9087] from outcrop 24 ts a fine-grained greenish dolerite. It has an

irregular texture, being intergranular and ophitic in parts, There is abunrlant

amphibole and a little pyroxene with fresh labradorite and this is one of the Few

rocks fn the area which contains primary plagioclase. It is colourless with

inoderately high relicf and is twinned on combinations of the albite, Pericline and

Carlsbad Jaws, Measurements on the untyersal stage showed it to be biaxially

positive with an optic axial angle of 76° and a maximum extinction from the

01D of 30°, thus indicating an acid labradorite. The plagioclase shows all arrested

stages in the alteration to ziusite, epidote and sericite. The pyroxene is a colour-

less sub-calcic augite with an optic axial angle of 47°. It is altered to a pale

green-yellow actinolite which occurs as matted, fibrous masses. Subhedral crystals

of brown to blue-green hornblende also are present. Accessories are ilmenite and

slender needles of apatite,

Rock [908i] from outcrop 54 is an uncommon porphyritic dolerite, some-

What similar to Johannsen's (1941) “devonite”’. It has a porphyritic texture

with a few large, highly altered laths of feldspar set in a medium-grained, inter-

granular groundimass. The phenocrysts are completely altered to mica or epidote

aml show a herringhone structure which is probably residual after original

twinning, Smaller crystals are interlocking laths of labradorite (Ab,..) twinned

on cumbinations of the albite, Pericline and Carlsbad laws, and these are fresh

with a slight banding due to extremely fine inclusions. The pyroxene is colourless

although sometimes faintly pleochroic and is surrounded by an indefinite brown

amphibole. Epidote is abundant and a little imicaceous haematite (?) and yellow

chalcedony is present,

Rack [9100] from outcrop 32 is dark green and conststs chiefly of partly

uralitized sub-calcic augite (2V=47°) which bas an ophitic relation towards

the highly altered plagioclase, A yein carrying a felted mass of fibrous amphibole

cuts the rock. This amphibole 1s pleachroie with Z—= bluish-green and thus differs

from ibe uralitie variety common to the rest of the rock which is pleochroic from

ligttt to dark brown.

ia rock [559{ from outcrop number 43, the pyroxene varies in different

crystals from a pigtonite (2V = 30°) to a sub-calcic augite (2V — 47°).

Rock [429A] from outcrop 28 is mediuni-grained and of a bluish-green

colour and fs cut by veins of calcile up to 3” wide, Distinct crystals of a blue

amphibole and flakes of biotite are visible in the hand specimen. It has the

typical doleritic intergranular texture, with plagioclase laths forming an inter-

locking mesh enclosing biotite and occasional large phenocrysts of blue

amphibole with an ophitic relation, The plagioclase is albite and is compara-

tively fresh in appearance with comparatively few inclusions, Twinning Is

irregular and on the alhite law with broad twins. The amphibole is pleochroic

with X = light blue, Y== deep blue and Z— bronze to dark brown, It has a

high optie axial angle and is probably negative, Extinction angles from the fibres

103

vary up fo 7°. The mineral is a member of the crocidalite group which has a

widely variable composition and is close to rivbeckite, Biatite is very abundant

ag fresh brown flakes together with skeletal grids of rutile and a little calcite.

BASALTS

The basalts are grey to black, fine-grained rocks with an amygdaloidal struc-

ture. The amygdales are usually filled with calcite and less often with siderite,

epidote, quartz, chlorite or biotite. The groundmass may be hypidiomorphic

granular, intergranular, ataxitic or glassy (now devitrified), The minerals com-

posing the groundmass are indistinct but usually consist of albite, actinolite,,

chlorite, calcite, epidote and iron ore, Secondary alteration is invatiably well

advanced and no evidence of primary olivine, pyroxene or labradorite was found,

Rock [9091 C] from outcrop number B, J is light grey and fine-grained with

numerous small amygdales about 3 to 4 mm, in diameter filled with calcite, It ts

holocrystalline with a partly intergranular groundmass. The rock consists chiefly

of tiny interlocking albite laths (some well formed) with abundant calcite, green

chiorite and a little brown biotite. Ilmenite with leucoxene is abundant as small

ragged grains and etthedral crystals, The amygdales are rounded and filled with

well-crystallized minerals which form concentric layers. The otter zone is rich

in iron ore, followed by alternating layers of chlorite and biotite with a core of

brownish sidetite, The biotite and chlorite are frequently intergrown and merge

into each other,

Rock [9093] is dark coloured and porphyritic with greasy green felspar

phenocrysts and amygdales containing calcite and biotite set in a dense, black

groundmass, It is hypocrystalline with the phenocrysts and amygdales set

in a dense, black devitrified glassy groundmass, The plagioclase pheno-

erysts are frequently euhedral and Jath-shaped and are composed of

aliite (Ab,,), They are well twinned and have abundant inclusions of epidote.

Corrosion by the groundmass (mesostasis) is shown where the material has

entered along cleavages and twin planes. Biotite occurs as red-brown flakes which

are (reqiiently bent. Calcite and chlorite also occur as small aggregates and sheafs.

The amygdales are filled with calcite, biotite, epidote and pale-green actinolite.

The amygdaloidal appearance and high degree of mineralogical alternation

has resulted in these basalts being referred to as spilitic. However, it is seen that

there are considerable critical differences when the praperties of the spilites and

these basalts are compared. Spilites occur as sulmarine or subaerial flows of

intrusives with pillaw structure common but not universal. The vesicular parts

have been converted to amygdales cnutaining calcite, chlorite, chalcedony, qitartz,

agate, epidote and zeolites, The tocks are basic with occasional plassy material

and typically contain albite, augite, chlorite. epidote, calcite and actinolite. Thus

it may he seen that the basalts are spilitic in this sense. In addition both groups

have altered dolerite, keratophyres and sndic granites associated with them.

Llowever, the chief distinguishing features of the spilites is the chemical com-

position and it is here that considerable differences are seen. The most critical

point is the presence of large amounts of soda, and particularly a high Na,O/K,O

ratio. From the analysis given hy Mawson (1926, 1942) it is seen that the basalts

contain less than 33% of Na,O while K,O may he present up to 2:76%, giving

a soda-potash tatio much higher than the typical spilite. Also the F'cQ, CO,,;

TiO,, H,O ate not abnormally high as in most spilites and ALO, is not deficient.

A keratophyre found by Howchin (1916) at Mount Remarkable does show

definite spilitic characteristics with 6-1% of Na,O and only O4t% K,O,

Tuer ALTERATION oF THE Basic Rocxs

The most typical feature of this group of dolerites is the almost invariable

presence of secondary minerals. The rocks were composed of labradorite, augite

(usually low in lime), occasionally olivine and accessory hornblende, ilmenite,

apatite, biotite and quartz. The results of uralitization, saussuritization, chloriti-

zation, etc,, are visible and there is secondary serpentine, albite, epidote, zoisite,

actinolite, chlorite, sericite and leucoxene in practically all the dolerites atid basalts.

Some rocks are more altered than others and consequently all stages in the forma-

tion of the host of secondary minerals are seen,

The first alteration to take place is that of olivine to sctpentine and iton ore.

This was not faund in the rocks of the Hawker area but was described by

Benson (1909) at Blinman,

Fig. 3

A variation diagram showing the variation

in chemical composition of eight members

of this group.

Saussuritization is next to take place and in very few cases only ig the

original labradorite found. The alteration clouds the plagioclase laths with a mass

of tmy granules of colourless zcisite or clinozoisite or yellow epidote. Occasionally

secondary albite is sufficiently developed to be recognisable as fresh colourless

crystals. ‘The plagioclase breaks down into a mixture of albite and zoisite with

epidote or actinolite entering the aggregate when iron ot magtiesia are available.

The white mica which occasionally forms large flakes is rather more difficult to

explain, The mica appears to be the potash vatiety sericite rather than the soda-

patagonite and there are two possible sources of the potash. Vogt (1921) stated

that normal plagioclase may contain 1p to 12% of orthoclase in solid solution

and consequently the 2% or less of potash in these dolerites is probably present

in the plagioclase (biotite is rarely present). Consequent breakdown of ithe

plagioclase would precipitate the orthoclase as sericite with a concurrent freeing

of excess potash. In some cases the potash appears to have entered the plagioclase

from outside and altered it along cracks and cleavages, The potash concentrated

in the late stage liquor may be assisted by that liberated by sericitization of ortho-

clase in causing sericitization of the plagioclase.

The pyroxene, which is an augite usually low in lime, alters peripherally

to a pale fibrous actinolite which often entirely replaces the original mineral. The

process presumably takes place after saussuritization as it is much more often

partly arrested, although it appears to take place concurrently in many of the

tocks. The actinolite in some cases is darker and shows distinct blue-green and

blue pleochroic colours. In several cases (e.g., rock [9095]) a sodic amphibole

near riebeckite in composition appears. The bluish tint in the actinolite is pro-

bably due to small amounts of soda (at least partly liberated by. réaction with the

plagioclase), although it may be caused by the presence of a little ferric iron,

105

An idiomorphic brown hornblende is often present and has heen regarded

here as secondary by Benson (1909). Williams (1890) regarded all such amphi-

bole as secondary and Shand (1943) states (hat apparently primary hornblende

is sometimes secondary after pyroxene. There is a conflict of opition on the

matter but in this case the hornblende is regarded as primary because of the size

and perfection of the erystals and the Jack of replacement evidence, The horn-

blende is typical of cooler and mere hydrous conditions ihan the augite and

probably crystallized at a moderately advanced stage in the consolidation of

e rock,

Tlmemite is the common iron ofe in these rocks and it occurs as skeletal grid-

shaped masses. It alters commonly to Icucoxene although it is frequently fringed

with hornblende, suggesting that it contributed iron in the growth of that mineral.

In one highly altered rock [9095] there are skeletal grids of rutile, suggesting a

final stage m the breakdown of the ilmenite with loss of iron,

No attempt is made to list a serics of hypothetical chemical reactions show-

ing the processes of alteration as it seems likely that the changes were not

separate reactions. The serpentinization of olivine involves the addition

of silica and water, and takes place easily without concurtent reactions, but

gaussuritization and uralitization appear to be somewhat independent. All the

reactions Tequire additions of water and most also require silica,

The mineralogical changes of these rocks are similar to those found in a

great many other places. As early as 189), Williams attributed the alteration to

stress and this has been confirmed with many greenschists, but in this case there

is no evidence of shearing. Ophitic and intergranular textures are often perfectly

preserved in the completely altered rocks and the secondary minerals are

frequently well formed and in large crystals,

Harker (1939) indicated that uralitization and saussuritization may take

place under conditions of therinal metamorphism, but there is no evidence of later

igneous activity in this area.

Sutton and Watson (1951) and niany others have shown similar ntineralogi-

cal changes in the doleriles of the Scottish Highlands to be due to regional meta-

morphism, but there is little similarity in the regional conditions of the rocks

under discussion, The dolerites are frequently found in zones which have been

regionally metamorphosed and cften may be shown to post-date the meta-

morphism, although in some areas {he dolerites themselves are extensively altered.

Benson (1909) presumed that the changes were due to age and the over-

lying load of sediments, and Mawson (1923, 1926a, 1926b) has agreed with this.

The long time that has elapsed since these magmas consolidated and their burial

beneath a very thick series of subsequent strata would give opportunity for some

readjustment im their mineral contents. There is, however, mo evidence that

age alone has any particular effect on rocks, as many Archean dolerites are quite

fresh while some Tertiary dolerites show considerable alteration, Also, it is

widely demonstrated that not only yarious members of a group, but also different

parts of the same intrusion show differing degrees of alteration.

It has heen generally accepted hy Browne (1920, 1922), Cole and Gloe

(1939), Davis (1940), Prider (1945, ete.) and others that the retrograde

mineralogical changes are usually due io deuteric activity in a manner somewhat

resembling the “autolysis theory" proposed by a number of workers to explain

the alteration of spilites. There is much evidence to support the concept of

alteration by late stage liquors ducing consolidation, although the basic reason

why sume dolerites should be fresh and others completely altered is obscure.

106

The secondary minerals are typically stable at moderately Jow temperatures,

but are often well crystallized and fill veins across the rock, thus indicating a

ready source of magmatic heat during the period of formation. The quartz

frequently has crystallized after the uralitic actinolite, indicating that the final

stage of consolidation of the magma took place after the secondary alteration.

There is a distinct relation between the order of crystallization of the

minerals and the order of alteration, and as might be expected the earliest. high-

grade minerals to form are first to become unstable and be altered,

The order of the beginning of the formation of the primary and secondary

minerals is probably as follows :—Olivine (with apatite and ilmenite), labradorite,

augite, hornblende, serpentine, albite-epidote-zoisite-sericiteleucoxene, actinolite,

biotite and riebeckite, quartz, calcite, chlorite-tourmaline.

There appears to have been a concentration of silica, water and alkalies

during consolidation, and these attacked the anhydrous early-forming minerals

forming the assemblage stable under hydrous low-grade conditions, The varying

degrees of alteration of the dolerites then would presumably be due to the varying

amounts of volatiles remaining in the consolidating rocks, A puzzling anomaly

which becomes apparent is the lack of metamorphic effects by the dolerites. If the

magma was so fich in volatiles as to cause deuteric attack of the earlicr formed

minerals, then it would be expected that these volatiles would be an active agent

in altering the wall rock, Watistrom (1950) notes that a magma enclosed by

impervious walls may have the volatiles concentrated and this have abundant

deuteric effects while a magma with purous wall rock may loose its volatiles and

appear “dry”, However, there is no evidence of a large amount of water retained

in the consolidated dolerites which frequently show only 1% of total water, and

there is no sign of metasomatism of the wall tock which wild be expected if

the volatiles were lost. Osbourne (1929) described a dolerite which contained the

typical actinolite-epidote assemblage caused by deuteric activity but with a meta-

somatic aureole containing high-grade minerals. It seems apparent that the

residyal volatiles which cause the autometamorphism of the igneous rock are

independent of the earlier released volatiles which cause metasomatism in {he

wall ruck, and probably pass out of the dolerite in the very last stage of con-

solidation, being so cold that they do not affect the surruunding rocks, This

may be the origin of the quartz veins occasionally seen in the courltry rack and the

large white quartz “blows such as that close to dolerite outcrop number 2,

In the large mass (number 44) just west of Mount Craim there is sufficient

dolerite exposed in the hill to show a considerable vertical change in the rock,

This is due partly to a gravitational differentiation process which is discussed

later and partly duc to another factor. The lower parts of the intrusion are richer

in ferromagnesians and iron ore, while the upper part is richer in feldspar and

quartz, and is also much more altered than the rock beiow. The top of the intru-

sion is a rock rich in albite, quartz and riebeckite. It is considered that during

consolidation there was a two-way movement through the magma with the heavier,

earlier-forming minerals sinking, and the lighter, later-consolidating part of the

magma rising. This latter portion would be fich in silica and alkulies and would

hydrothermally alter the previously consolidated upper part of the intrysiort.

Thus in a few extreme cases where rocks rich in ricbeckite, albite, biotite, sphene,

apatite, tourmaline, rutile and calcite occur, there has probably been hydrothermal

as well as deutertc activity.

An examination of all ayailable chemical analyses shows no apparent relation

between the chemical composition and degree of alteration, apart from the

extreme cases mentioned above where hydrothermal actiun has taken place. The

late stage fiuids responsible for the formation of the secondary minerals wonld

107

be rich in silica, alkalies and water and the dolerites usually contain about 49%

SiO,, 3% Na,O, 2% K,O and 1% H,O. There is no significant variation in these

components between unaltered rocks and those in which no original pyroxene,

plagioclase or olivine is visible. Thus if there was an excess of these constituents

then they must have been quietly lost to the wall rock. The differing degree of

alteration of the dolerites may possibly be related to degree of differentiation and

consequently to the distance from the roof of the intrusion, so that the apparent

prices in alteration between the igneous masses may depend on the degree

of erosion,

reser

Fig. 4

A modal variation diagram showiug the minera-

logical differences between three differentiates.

te Ty or)

Srecipit. Ghatite

CHEMICAL COMPOSITION OF THE Basic Rocks

A variation diagram, text figure 4, illustrates nine analyses of dolerites and

basalts from the Ilinders Ranges.

A. Dolerite from Rasetta Head (anal. Yeates), Browne (1920),

B. Dolerite from Blinman (anal, Benson), Benson (1909).

C, Dolerite from Blinman (anal, Benson), Benson (1909).

D. Dolerite from Wirrealpa (anal. Robinson), Mawson (——).

E, Dolerite from Broken Hill (anal. Stone), Mawson (1926a),

F. Basalt from Wooltana (anal. Chapman), Mawson (1926),

G. Dolerite from Wooltana (anal. Alderman), Mawson (1926),

H. Dolerite from Wooltana (anal, Alderman), Mawson (1926).

I, Dolerite from Blinman (anal. Howard), Howard (1951).

Thus it can be seen that there is a reasonably wide variation in composition,

even in rocks which are closely related in the field. The lime and potash are par-

ticularly variable. Rocks in Northern and Western Australia which are presumed

to be members of the same province usually contain about 1% less soda.

‘There appears to be a tectonic contro! of the chemical and mineralogical

composition of the rocks with normal basic types in the stable portions of the

shield in the western and northern parts of Australia and rocks approaching the

spilites in the moderately unstable Adelaide System miogeosyncline with truc

spilites in the mobile eugeosyncline to the east.

DIFFERENTIATION

Processes of differentiation appear to have taken place both on a large and

small scale during the lower Palaeozoic period of intrusion, The minor ditferen-

tiation effects appear to he intimately associated with the deuteric and hydro-

thermal activity during crystallization, The dolerite body, number 44, illustrates

this. A range of rocks from the bill which is several hundred feet high shows a

decrease in specific gravity from the base to the top and an accompanying lighten-

ing of colour as the melanocratic constituents decrease and the leucocratic pro-

portion becomes greater,

10%

A variation diagram, text figure 4, ilhistrates the mineralogical differences

with relation to the specific gravity of three specimens taken at the base, half way

up, and the top af the hill, and text figure 5 shows the differences in texture under

the microstope.

Rock specimen [9085], taken as low as possible from the intrusion is a

dark-coloured, coarse-grained dolerite with a specific gravity of 3:1. It has a

texture which is chiefly hypidiomorphic with variations to intergranular ard

ophitic and consists of 49% of amphiboles, 44% of plagioclase with abundant

(7%) iron ore. Pale fibrous uralitic actinolite forms pseudomorphs after

pyroxene and shows polysomatie structure together with some occasional herring-

bone xtructure which is probably residual after simple twinning in the pyroxene.

GATAEAELT aNTrAKD

FLARIOCLADL,,

- BUTT

i} Ineinenow re

acdinmaire

sa Tiare

File 3525

Figs. 5

Microskewles showing the mineralogical and textural variation between

three differentiates,

Idtoblastic hornblende is also present and is pleochtoie from yellow to brown

with a bluish-green colour sometimes appearing, The original feldspar has been

completely changed to zoisite of sericite. The plagioclase now present is pure

albite and is quite fresh and irregularly twinned, A small quantity of quartz ts

present as graphic and myrmekitic intergrowths with the albite. lron ore is

fairly abundant as skeletal grids and granules and appears to be partly micaceous

haemetile as well as ilmenite, It is almost invariably surrounded by a growth

ef fresh brown hornblende and in one instatice contains a little brown siderite.

A specimen [9094] from half way up the hill js a light greenish-grey rock,

medium-grained and with a specific gravity of 2-95. It is holocrystalline with an

irregular texture and grain-size. The rock appears to have originally had ani

intergranular texture which has been obscured by the subsequent mineralogical

changes. The rock contains 52% of ferromagnesians and 479% of plagioclase.

There ts both primary pyroxene and secondary amphibole present. The pyroxene

is a colourless pigeontte with an optic axial angle of 15° and occasionally displays

polysynthetic twinning, The amphibole is a very pale actinolite with brilliant

polarization colours. There is a very little brown hornblende also present. The

plagioclase has been completely altered to zoisite and the original laths have been

replaced by aggregates of tiny granules polarising in anomalous blues. Some

fresh albite is present, sometimes as intergrowths with quartz. A few scattered

skeletal grids of iron oye occur with secondary leucoxene. There is also a little

chlorite, apatite and sphene present,

109

Specimen [S43] from the top of the intrusion is a light-coloured, medium-

grained rock with a specific gravity of 2°8 and resembling a keratophyre. It

shows the characteristic intergranular texture with interlocking feldspar laths

enclosing amphibole crystals. Plagioclase is most abundant (5895) as large sub-

hedral Jaths. It is a pure albite and is comparatively fresh with abundant tiny

inclusions. Twinning in very irregular and is chiefly on the Carlsbad law with

lesser albite and Pericline twinning giving a “checker-board” appearance. Myr-

mekitic intergrowths with quartz are very common, and the quartz shaws good

replacement textures In many parts, There is arly 17% of amphibole and this

occurs as irregular, anhedral, fibrous masses which are pleochroic from X = dark

blue-black, Y and Z bronze and has a very low extinction angle, thus resembling

riebeckite. Also present are apatite 4%, sphene 6%, and a little haematite, epirlote

and calcite.

There i§ 4 concentration of minerals lighter in colour and weight in the upper

pari of the intrusion and these are also typical of the later stages of crystalliza-

tion, There is a complete lack of primary olivine, labradorite or pyroxene in the

top of ihe body and this part is more altered than the base. The dilferentiavon

appears to have been primarily due to a settling of the early-forming, heavy ferric

minerals leaving a magma of lower specific gravity and containing a higher pro-

portion of silica, alkalies and titania. The primary labradorite and augite in the

upper part were completely replaced by secondary minerals due to deuteric attack

ani] there was probably continuous enrichment in the lighter constituents rising

from below during consolidation, thus causing hydrothermal alteration of the

crystallized minerals. Consequently the closed system with its deuteric activity,

which is typical of the dolerites, becomes an open system and hydrothermal changes

resulted in the formation of the extreme alkaline rocks which are sometimes

found, These rocks. contain sodie amphibole, alhite, quartz, calcite, biotite, sphene

or rutile and are typified by specimen [S 29a]. This is probably the explanation of

the origin of a dolerite described by Wymond and Wilson associated with croci-

dolite near Robertstown (1951). That dolerite contains a sodic amphibole and

tourmaline.

The hydrothermal enrichment of the upper zone occasionally continued into

the reof rock and produced a metasomatic zone rich in soda amphibole, albite,

sphene and haematite.

Apart from the few rocks of alkaline composition and doleritic texture,

which tay be satisfactorily explained, there also occur isolated occurrences of

small rather acid bodies in sther areas. Howchin (1916) described an associa-

tion of aplitic and keratophyric types with the dolerites of Mount Remarkable,

METAMORPHISM

Within the fault block some rocks show evidence of low-grade regional

metamorphism, while practically none show any effects of thermal metamorphism.

lt would be expected that the impure dolomites and calcareous phyllites would

respond easily to temperature changes and be markedly affected by metamorphism.

A few phyllites are found which are recrystallized and reveal the production of

biotite, chlorite and talc indicative of the biotite-chlorite sub-facies of the green-

schist facies of Turner (1946). The regionally metamorphosed rocks are rather

sporadic in their occurrence and are not widely developed.

The basic intrusions occur in large numbers im various areas in the Flinders

Ranges where regional metamorphism also is evident. This is most strongly

shown about domes and anticlines at Mount Painter and Freeling Heights in

the extreme north, and progressively less to the south at Mount Stewart,

Hlinman, Enoranja, Oraparinna and Worumba. There appears to be a genéral

110

restriction of the more abundant basic rocks and the highest grade of meta-

morphism to zones of weakness associated with anticlinal axes,

Apart from the phyllites, there is a little more evidence of regional meta-

morphism in its dying stages in the area concerned. About a mile north of

Yednalue there is a large outcrop of an irregular, coarsely crystalline rock com-

posed chiefly of quartz and dolomite with microscopic tourmaline and rutile,

and it should be noted that titantum and boron metasomatism is typical of the

lower Palaeozoic regional metamorphism province, There is a distinct possibility,

however, that this rock may be the hydrothermally altered roof of a dolerite

intrusion.

As the intrusion of basic magma has frequently taken place into pure dolo-

mites, it is of interest to compare the limited contact effects here with the striking

metamorphism in other unrelated areas,

The dolerite mass, outcrop number 18, near Morgan’s well, is over a quarter

of a mile in diameter and qttite coarsely grained, but does not show any apprec?-

able contact metamorphism.

Alteration was found in one place only and even then was limited tn a few

square feet of outcrop near dolerite outcrop number 44, A small mass of iron-

rich skarn occurs in the impure dolomite, The altered rock [9067 and 543],

varies from lght-yellow to dark-brown in colour and is very irregular in grain

and texture.

The hand specimen shows aggregates of fibrous amphibole, blades and

granules of haematite, and a few apophyses filled with yellow dolomite crystals

The minerals range in size from haematite blades 2 mm. long to amphibole fibres

less than O-L mm. in length, The rock is chiefly dolanitic with haematite,

feldspar and fibrous amphibole together with a little sphene, grossular, apatite,

phlogopite, chlorite and nitile, There are segregations rich in various minerals,

particularly haematite, The feldspar occurs as xenoblastic, clouded crystals

occasionally shewing poorly-defined twinning; it is probably oligoclasc-andesine.

Amphibole is present probably in two varieties, but the fibres are too small to

permit optical properties to be determined. The fibres are pleochroic from blue

to mauve or blue to yellow with low extinction angles and modcrate birefringence

and is presumably soda-rich. The rock indicates metasomatism by fluids rich in

iron, soda, titania and silica by the dolerite.

It is seen that in the only case of appreciable alteration by the dolerite,

metasomatism was the prime factor in producing changes, and it is cunsidered

that the action of “fluids” frotm the basic rock is of far greater importance in

producing metamorphic effects than heat. Tilley and Harwood (1931) found

Jarnite, spurrite, gehlenite, ete., produced in chalk by a dolerite intrusion only

300 yards by 200 yards in size, and the effects were attributed to mctasomatisin

as well as metamorphism.

Osbourne (1929), Chapman (1950), Holmes and Harwood (1928) have

described contact effects of dolerite dykes and sills where a typical high-grade

assemblage of minerals was produced, and on each case a process involving

metasomatism was suggested, It is odd that the dolerites which are typified by

late-stage alteration products due to a concentration of active magma constituents

should show the lack of metamorphism usually attributed to a “dry” magma.

Howchin, Prider, and Mawson have noted the lack of metamorphism of the

country rock by the dolerites. The occurrence of a bi-mica gneiss and garnet

tock in the contact zone of some Blinman dolerites described by Howard (1951)

is possibly due to the combined action of régidnal and thermal metamorphism.

THE ECONOMIC IMPORTANCE OF THE BASIC INTRUSIONS

There is additional evidence in this area to support the generally accepted

eonviction that the dolerites are genetically related to mineralization particularly

of copper and less of silver-lead. Text figure 1 shows a very close relationship

in the field of seven groups of disused workings with the basic igneous rocks.

The workings range from shallow pits to quite deep shafts and there is an adit

more than 300 feet long in towards the dolerite onterop number 44, This Jatter

intrusion has four shafts along its contact with the country rock, as shown by

text figure 2. The dump shows ore containing bornite, chalcopyrite and pyrite

with a little azurite and malachite, as replacement deposits in an impute and

brecciated dolomite. Near dolerite outcrop number 41 there is a brownish, com-

pact indurated argillite containing abtmdant limonite pseudomorphs after euhedral

crystals of pyrites. The rock shows no sign of mineralogical changes due to

metamorphism. It seems to be a general fcature that copper mineralization occurs

close to the igneous rocks and is most common in dolomites and breccialed zones.

The occtirrence of masses of haematite is also a notable feature associated

with the dolerites and the positions of five bodies in indicated in lext hgore L-

The haematite occurs in Jarge masses of solid mineral or as small veins nf highly

micaceous speeularite which are usually associated with crushing, The larger

massive bodies are pipelike replacement deposits and have usually been investi-

gated io discover whether they form “ironstone caps"? to mineral deposits, but

without any success. Small amounts of bladed and granular haemative occur in

a patch of skarn rock in contact with the dolerite of outcrop number 44.

A little blue asbestos (crocidolite) occurs in an outcrop, a highly-altered

dolerite (number 28), but does not appeat to be economically important.

There are deprisits of barytes in the area but these do not appear to be related

to the igneous rocks, although barytes has been found as a gangue mineral in

copper deposits associated with dolerite.

The relation between the igneous rocks and mineral deposits has been

repeatedly mentioned in reports from the Flinders Ranges and even further afield.

Outside of South Australia the association of copper minerals and these

Proterozoic-Palaeozoic dolerites has been reasonably established, Prider (1945),

Matheson and Tiechert (1945) and Browne (1949) in particular have pointed

out the occurrence of copper, silyer-lead and gold minerals with the dolerites of

Weslern Australis and the Northern Territory.

The deposits show the mineralogical association, textures and field occnr-

rence which are typical of mesothermal contact ore bodies formed by pucumato-

lytic action in the zone of alteration of an igneous intrusion.

RELATED ROCKS

During work on the basic rocks east of Hawker the author was struck

with the similarities, even down to minute mineralogical details, between these

and other rocks seen in the Mount Lofty and Flinders Ranges. Other occurrences

have been inspected and a further resemblance was noticed in the field relations.

An examination of the literature and of specimens and slides [rom the museum of

the Adelaide University has revealed a group of basic rocks (dolerites and

basalts) which are so distinct in their peirological nature that there sects little

donbt that they form a distinct province. The rocks occur throughout Southern,

Northern and Western Australia in the area which has been called “the shield”

and form flows and intrusions ranging from Karly Upper Proterozoic ta Midd'e

Cambrian in age and lying among Adelaide System, Nullagine, Cambrian aud

i12

Archean rocks, David (1950) has grouped this suite in his Cambrian igneous

rocks. The localities in the Mount Lofty-Flinders Ranges area, where rocks of

this group occur, are indicated on text figure 3.

Details of all these occurrences would be too extensive to include in this

contribution, but the map presented gives a good idea of their distribution. In

addition to the basic rocks in the Mount Lofty-Flinders Range area there are

many others further afield which should be included in this province. The

Western Australian geological record is replete with accounts of similar magma

types intruded and extruded in late Precambrian and early Palaeozoic time.

These could well be included with the South Australian examples in an overall

discussion on subcrustal magmas of that period. However, any such elaboration

must be reserved for a future occasion.

L a

Ne syiscvtuma ® WE REELING)

~ = V2

We PATTER

woourawa tf

yes cone t]

& uy, stewart / 7

Pe '

DLINGANTA ovIRREALeA

| Senonana’,

7 Onu7aRinna {

f Unwin “~

cs]

AIAE AME Ste

otany

AADIUH Hitt

AWT GRAINGER Fig. 6

‘ ScT, AEMARKAGLE Map showing the distribution

fosemoninee Leal? of the known occurrences of

OF DUTCROF OF THE basic rocks of this group.

ADELAIDE SYSTEH

= SPALOING /

ROWRATSTOWN S

~y\ smWYME |

aveastous® {

ry *

WT PLEASANT

isis | THe pasic

ruin / ROCKS OF THE

MT LOFTY AND |

mma,“ FLINDERS RANGES

THE AGE oF THE Bastc AcTIVITY

The actual age of the basic rocks is difficult to establish, but there seems no

doubt that vulcanism began early in Adelaidean times and culminated in the Early

Palaeozoic, Basalts are found below the Sturt Tillite at Wooltana and above at

Blinman and flows occur extensively through the Nullagine of Western Australia.

Rasalts form the base of the Cambrian in the north and north-west of Australia.

Dolerites may have been intruded before sedimentation ceased but it is presumed

that the majority were emplaced at a time related to the period of folding of the

113

Upper Proterozoic and Lower Cambrian strata in the Adelaidean Geosyncline.

This occurred in the interyal between the lossiliferous Middle Cambrian and the

Permian tillite and the exact dale is not known. The folding was probably during

David's. (1950) Tyennan orogeny, and the igneous activity associated is possibly

contemporaneous with the Heathcotian lavas of Victoria, the Cambrian spilites

of King Island and Tasmania and the Brisbane greenstones.

The dolerites were intruded both before and after the period of regional

metamorphism and acid intrusion in the Lower Palaeozoic, Dolerites which are

metamorphosed or intruded by acid rocks are found at Encounter Bay, Woad-

side and Mount Remarkable, although the majority appear to be later than both

the folding and the metamorphism.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Benson, W.N. 1909 “The Basic Rocks of Blinman, South Australia.” Trans.

Roy. Soc. S, Aust., 33

Browne, W. R, 1920 “The Igneous Rocks of Encounter Bay, South Aus-

. tralia.” ‘Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 44

Browne, W. R, 1922 “Report on the Petrology of the Broken Hill Region.”

Mem. Geol, Surv. N.S.W., No. 8, app. 1

Browne, W. R. 1949 “Metallogenic Epachs and Ore Regions in the Com-

monwealth of Australia.” Proc. Ray. Soc. N.S.W., 83

Crapman, — 1950 “Contact Metamorphic Effects of Triassic Diabase at Safe

Harbour, Penn.” Bull. Geol. Soc. Amer., 61

Cote, W. F., and Guor, C. S. 1939 “The Geology and Physiography of the

Malkup Area.” Journ, Roy. Soc. W. Aust., 26

Davin, T. W. E, 1950 “The Geology of the Commonwealth of Australia”

Davis, C, E. 8. 1940 “The Geology and Physiography of the Gosnells Area.”

Journ. Roy. Soc, W. Aust., 27

Harker, A, 1939 “Metamorphism”™

Homes, A., and Harwoov, H. F, 1928 ‘The Age and Composition of the

Ubin Sill.” Min. Mag,, 21

Howarp, P. F. 1951 “The Basic Rocks of the Blinman Dome,” Trans. Ray.

Soc. S. Aust.

Howcuin, W. 1916 “Geology of the Mount Remarkable Area.” Trans. Roy.

Soc. S. Aust., 40

Jonanwson, A. 1941 “Descriptive Petrography of the Igneous Rocks,” 11

Jowanwson, A. 1941 “Descriptive Petrography of the Igneous Rocks, 2

Marsnart, CE, 1940 “Field Relations of certain of the Basic Igneous Rocks,

ete.” Q.J.G.S., 98

MatHeson, R. S., and Trecuert, C. 1945 “Reconnaissance of the Easi Kim-

berly." Ann. Prog, Rep. Geol. Sury. W. Aust,

Mawson, D. 1923 “Igncous Rocks of the Mount Painter Belt.” Trans. Roy,

Soc. S. Aust., 47

Mawson, D. 7926a “Igneous Rocks of South Australia.” Aust. Ass. Adv. Sei.,

Mawson, D. 1926b “Wooltana Basic Igneous Belt.” Trans. Ray. Soc, S. Aust.

Ospourne, F. F. 1929 “A Contact-Metamorphic Mineral Deposit in Ontario.”

Econ. Geol., 24

Pemer, R. T. 1945 “Igneous Activity, Metamorphism and Ore-Formation in

Western Australia.” Pres. Add. Journ. Roy. Soc. W. Aust., 31

SHann, 5. J. 1943 “Eruptive Rocks”

114

Spriec, R.C. 1949 “Thrust Structures in the Witchelina Area.” Trans. Roy.

Soc. S. Aust., 73

Sutton, J., and Warson, J, 1951 “Varying Trends in the Metamorphism of

Dolerites.” Geol. Mag., 88

Tittey, C. E., and Harwoop, — 1931 “Dolerite-Chalk Contact at Scawt Hill,

County Antrim.” Min. Mag., 22

Voct, J. H. L. 1921 “The Physical Chemistry of the Crystallization and Mag-

matic Differentiation of Igneous Rocks.” Journ. Geol., 29

Wautstrom, E. E, 1950 “Introduction to Theoretical Igneous Petrology”

Witiiams, G. H. 1890 “The Greenstone Schist Areas of the Menominee and

Marquet Regions of Michigan.” United States Geol. Surv., Bull. 62

‘}YSII oy} uO sreadde sam ay}

0} Surddip ouojseury apy, ‘ayiejop Jo pasodurod 318

‘pp loquinu doijno jo asp iwiatyynos }J2] PUB dIJUBD OY} OF S][I] 2UT, eM-Y]IoU JY} Woy

ay} wo suiddos9jno o}L19[Op asivo0d JO Siap[Nog papunoy, waye1 ‘Zo aaquinu do1djnG aysjop JO AdIA JosOpD VW

b 31y ¢ Sly |

‘SJUIWBBIY 9} payusued pur

PAMoP SEY SSELUPLNOLS JUajaduroout 91} apm poinporay

‘punorsyxoeg ayy ur seodde (9u0js aaey ayypAyd oy} Jo syied 9fqW4q atour oy, “Worsmayut

-puvs punog jo) sesury sioppy puke aovyy “Sspmicy AWjOp B Awau BINdIIq Ysnso 10 oM0}I92 [RII

ay} aya ‘uonemI0; azyiuropop-ayyjAyd ayy Jo pasod I ‘3uy

“WO B18 PUNOISIIOF AY] UI STI Suppor eyp ‘aru.

ay} 1O yoy ysnl [py peoimos ysiy oy se sivadde yy “ysvo

a -yNos sy} Wor; gE Jaquinu doi9yNO aqejop JO MdIA VW

a Z 314

Soc. S.

rans. Roy.

THE POSTORBITAL WALL - A COMPARITIVE AND ETHNOLOGICAL

STUDY

BY M. R. HONE

Summary

The paper surveys the formation of the posterior wall of the orbit on a comparative basis. The wall

is developed essentially by the extension of bony flanges from the frontal, sphenoid and zygomatic

bones. The maxilla may take part. With growth of the wall communication between the orbit and

the temporal and infratemporal regions becomes restricted to a narrow fissure. The wall is most

complete and the fissure narrowest in the Cercopithecidae, the orang and the gorilla. The gibbon

and the chimpanzee have wider fissures. The human condition resembles that of the chimpanzee.

Human skulls show a wide range of variation in shape and size of the fissure. Statistical analysis

discloses no ethnological significance in this.

115

THE POSTORBITAL WALL

A COMPARATIVE AND ETHNOLOGICAL STUDY

By M. R. Hone *

[Read 8 November 1951]

SUMMARY

The paper surveys the formation of the posterior wall of the orbit on a

comparative basis. The wall is developed essentially by the extension of

bony flanges from the frontal, sphenoid and zygomatic bones. The maxilla

may take part. With growth of the wall communication between the orbit

and the temporal and infratemporal regions becomes restricted to a narrow

fissure. The wall is most complete and the fissure narrowest in the Cerco-

pithecidae, the orang and the gorilla. The gibbon and chimpatizee have

wider fissures. The human condition resembles that of the chimpanzee.

Human skulls show a wide tange of yariation in shape and size of the fissure.

Statistical analysis discloses no ethnological significance in this.

INTRODUCTION |

The bones and general arrangement of the orbit in various orders have

been described by many authors, eg:, Duckworth (1904), Whitnall (1921),

Martin (1928), Le Gros Clark (1934), This paper presents a general survey

of the formation and closure of the postorbital wall. followed by more detailed

study of the human condition to determine whether or not the bony pattern

has any ethnological significance, The animals discussed in the first part of

this paper have been chosen less to suggest a close evolutionary pattern

than as affording a good example of each stage of development.

ONTOGENESIS

SUBMAMMALIA

In fishes, the orbit is composed af a prefontal, postfrontal, frontal, and

a yarying number of bones on the ventral border grouped as lacrimals (Owen,

1868). Medially, the base of the eye is separated from its partner by the

presphenoid.

In the frog the eyes face Jaterally and are surrounded by the parietal,

frontal, sphenoid, ethmoid, nasal and maxilla. There is no bone posteriorly.

In reptiles the orbital margin is composed of the following five bones:

jugal, postorbital, frontal, lacrimal, and maxilla. An example is seen in the

skull of Trachysaurus rugosus (fig. 1), which shows a jugal bone laterally, a

postorbital and frontal above, a lacrimal and part of the maxilla in front, and

the rest of the maxilla below. Separation of the eyes is as in fishes, The eye

stil faces laterally. The medial and posterior surfaces of the eye have no

bony protection but are adequately supported by muscle.

In birds, although the eye still faces laterally, there is usually greater

bony protection. An interorbital septum, either complete or incomplete has

developed out of the prefrantals, while the lacrimals and the postorbitals

afford additional support.

* Department of Anatomy, University of Adelaide.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust, 75, September 1952

116

“MAMMALIA

The skulls examined were:

Rodentia

Suborder Lagomorpha

Family Leporidac u.. ane | Or gictolagus cuniculus = 1

Carnivora

Family Canidae vase Hee we = Vulpes vulpes 1

Family Felidae vee US catttees 1

Primates

Suborder Prositmii _ aa wws LOY Varin 1

Suborder Anthropoidea in sere

Superfamily Cercopithecida ww Papia babuin 1

Cynocephalus sp. 1

Cercopithecus iantalus 1

Muacacus rhesus 4

Macacus fascicularis 1

Superfamily Hominoidea 2.00

Family Pongidae ... ... o Hylobates 1

Simia 1

Gorilla L

Anthropithecus 3

Tue Rasnit (fig, 2)

The cranial wall of the orbit is formed by two upward projections of

the basi-cranium, namely, the orbito-sphenoid (anterior or lesser wing) and

the ali-sphenoid (posterior or greater wing). The remainder is formed of

membrane bone, the frontal and jugal part of the squamosal (Bensley, 1918),

The apex of the orbital cavity extends practically to the midline, Above,

the frontal bone slopes laterally and upwards; below, the sphenoids slope

laterally and downwards. The cranium bulges laterally behind so that the

eye is given adequate protection at the back by the frontal and the temporal

bones and the frontal carries a small posterior superior orbital process above.

Tue Fox (fig. 3)

The bony orbit is formed by the frontal, lacrimal, jugal, and ali- and

orbito-sphenoid, The apex of the orbital cavity does not extend as far

towards the midline as in the rabbit, but the orbit is just as deep relatively

because the jugals stand out further from the side of the skull, and they run

straight on to the sides of a much rounder cranium. Behind the orbit the

cranial wall, composed of sphenoid and frontal, is so far removed from the

eye that it gives little protection or support, Hence the posterior superior

orbital process is larger and there is a distinct inferior process on the jugal

as well, The larger post-orbital processes of the frontal and jugal, com-

bined with the upward direction of the jugal bone as it runs backwards,

almost complete the fourth side of the bony margin round the orbit.

The direction of the orbit changes with the species. In the fox the axis

points more anteriorly than in the rabbit although its general direction is

still lateral. But in short-faced dogs such as the pekingese the eyes have

moved more towards the front (Weidenreich, 1941). However, there does

not appear to be any compensatory enlargement of the posterior orbital pro-

cesses in this condition.

THE Car (fig, 4)

The bony walls of the orbit are generally similar to those in the dog but

the skull is shorter and wider and the orbit faces more anteriorly. Thus,

there is no longer a frontal wall as in preceding specimens. The greater

width of the cranium has pushed the jugal process of the temporal bone later-

ally and so the lateral wall of the orbit (the jugal bone) is also displaced

laterally. The cranial wall still forms the pasterior orbital wal] but, as in

the dog, because of the frontal position of the orbit, gives little protection

or support to the orbital contents. The posterior orbital processes are much

better developed than in the dog.

Fit. é, Jugal portion of savamoea\

REPTILE [Trochysaurus rogasus) -RABBIT, LOryctolagus cuniculus] Fig.

a sntol,__-Post. sup. prox. of orbit

= Ze Post inf proc, af orbit

Pe of Temporal = “Jugal Jugal proc. of temporal = 'Sphenoid

FOX (Vulpes vulpes) Fig, 3 CAT [Felis cots) Fig +

Fig. 1-4

Tue Lemur (fig. 5)

The suture lines were fused in the skull available but the boundaries of

most of the bones were distinguishable, The eyes are directed almost to

the front, the post-orbital bar is complete and there is just a hint of the

posterior orbital wall forming. The jugal bone runs up the posterior side of

the orbital bar and so forms the beginning of the posterior wall. The frontal

helps by providing a roof for the orbit, which extends laterally and slightly

posteriorly as well. Medially the orbit is closed behind by the cranial wall

but laterally the orbit opens freely into the temporal fossa.

Mention must be made here of a specimen of the flying “lemur” of Malaya

(Galeopithecns volans) in the Adelaide Museum. This is not a true lemur but

it shows an interesting transitional stage. The postorbital bar is not quite

complete, but the gap is filled by a bar of cartilage,

Tue Tarsier (fig. 6)

Unfortunately, no skull of the tarsier was available, but there are many

good accounts of the osteology of Tarsius spectrum.

The postorbital bar is completed hy the union af processes from the jugal

and frontal (Wood Jones, 1929), Above, the frontal sends a flange pos-

teriorly to meet the parietal; below, the jugal meets the sphenoid in a similar

manner, but leaying a gap underneath. This gap is bordered by the sphenoid,

palatine and maxilla and represents the inferior orbital fissure of other

primates.

118

Tur Macagugs

Two species were examined, one adult Macacus fascicularis, and two adult

and two young specimens of Macacus rhesus, The posterior wall is thick and

well formed, The inferior orbital fissure is small and in most cases the

sphenoid overlaps the maxilla in a curved manner so that the opening prac-

tically faces caudally,

MMT LBL

Alisphenoid Temporal

TARSIER [Tarsius spectrutt, Wood Jones 1929) Fig.6,

Notice thal inferinr-orbital fisgure snd

Plerygo-moxillary fissure are wide

MACAQUE [Mgcocus rhezus ~ young! Fig. 7, Fig. 7, teortd]

Fanetal

ee C ——- ay Inferior-orbitg! Fissure

eee, 3 Preryjo maxillary fissure

Fig. 9

CERCOPITHECIDAE. [ Papo babyinl ve Fig. 8.

Fig. 5-9

Macacus FAscicunaris (fig. 7, skull No. 4)

In this specimen, three bones form the boundaries of the inferior orbital

fissure: the greater wing of the sphenoid, the jugal and the maxilla, The

fissure is directed caudally; the sphenoid forms the lateral border and the

maxilla the medial border. The jugal forms the tip, being almost excltided

by the other two bones. The frontal bone forms the main part of the postor-

bital wall, with the sphenoid and jugal forming the basal and lateral portions

respectively,

119

Macacus resus (fig. 7, skulls No, 1, 2 and 3)

The arrangement of the bones round the inferior orbital fissure is the

same as in the above specimen, but the proportions of the postorbital hones

differ. The frontal takes a very small part, most of the wall being formed

by the sphenoid and the juga).

In two young macaques the inferior orbital fissure was large and the

pterygo-maxillary fissure wide, This shows a less developed form of the

postorbital wall.

OF Fae

YP SEAS K

Fildtine _ Inferior-orbital fissure

Prerygo-mavillory fissure ond Pheryp palatine foisa

GIBBON [Hijlobaes) Fig. 10.

GORILLA [Gorlis} rete; female unstie some Fig '\2, CHIMPANZEE. [Anthropithecus troglodytes} Fig. 13.

Fig. 10-13

The remaining examples of the Cercopithecidae (fig. 8) are sitnilar to the

macaqiies, except in Cynacephalus (fig. 9). Here the postcrior wall is complete

and the inferior orbital fissure is not visible from the lateral aspect. The

bones that form the bordets of the fissure are the same as in the macaques

but the temporal bone runs forward to make contact with the jugal bone,

separating the frontal from the sphenoid.

Gipson (fig. 10)

Unfortunately, in the specimen available, the suttire lines were tainly

obliterated but thé zygomatico-frontal, zygomatico-parietal, zygomatieo-

maxillary, and palato-maxillary sutures were detectable. The boundaries

120

of the inferior orbital fissure are formed by the sphenoid and jugal above and

laterally, the maxilla and palatine below and medially, and the sphenoid and

palatine behind. The inferior orbital fissure is quite wide, especially at the

posterior end. ;

The postorbital wall is formed mainly by the jugal bone, with the greater

wing of the sphenoid forming the posterior portion and the frontal the

superior portion.

Orane (fig, 11)

Once again, most of the sutures had fused, but it was possible to tell

that the walls of the inferior orbital fissure are formed by the same bones

as in the gibbon. However, the palatine plays only a small part in forming

the lower and posterior wall as compared with the condition in the gibbon.

The fissure is a narrow slit.

The postorbital wall is composed of the jugal, the greater wing of the

sphenoid and the frontal. It is doubtful whether the maxilla could be con-

sidered to take part.

THE Goritra (fig, 12)

Two specimens of gorilla were examined, a male and a female. Although

the female skull was much smaller than the male, the postorbital wall was

exactly the same.

The inferior orbital fissure is at the junction of the floor and the lateral

wall of the orbit. The boundaries are: the greater wing of the sphenoid

above and behind, the jugal in front, and the maxilla and palatine below and

medially. The greater wing of the sphenoid has well overlapped the border

of the maxilla, giving the inferior orbital fissure a downwards direction.

This condition was more marked in the gorilla than in the orang. The over-

lapping sphenoid close to the maxilla reduces the fissure to 4 narrow slit.

THE CHIMPANZEE (fig. 13)

Three chimpanzees were examined and they showed considerable differ-

ences,

In all three the postorbital wall is formed by the frontal above, the jugal

in front, and the greater wing of the sphenoid behind.

Two skulls had wide inferior orbital fissures, unobstructed by a sphen-

oidal flange, and the inferior orbital grooves were plainly visible. The

pterygo-maxillary fissure was wide and the palatine could be seen through it

in the floor of the pterygo-palatine fossa. The spheno-palatine foramen

could readily be seen from the lateral side. In the third specimen the

inferior orbital fissure was also wide but the greater wing of the sphenoid

overlapped the maxilla to produce a condition superficially resembling that

found in the gorilla. The ptetygo-maxillary fissure was the same as in the

other specimens.

It is interesting to note that in the Family Simiidae, the inferior orbital

fissure has moved downwards and occupies the infero-latera! angle of the

orbit. The maxilla forms the lower border of the fissure, This is different

from all observed specimens of the Cercopithecidae where the inferior orbital

fissure isin the middle or lower portion of the postorbital wal], hence allow-

ing the maxilla to form part of the postorbital wall,

121

Man

The development of the postorbital wall has been dealt with im the first

part of this paper. The gorilla and the orang betray more marked differ-

entiation in this part than does man whose inferior orbital and pterygo-

maxillary fissures are relatively large as in the chimpanzee, Martin (1928)

giyes the follawing aveas for comparison In size:

Anthropoids ease 7 8q. mM,

Europeans xs. = jm Be-Bley «ap

The object here is to deal with the postorbital wall in man and to deter-

mine—

(a) if there are any variations that may distinguish different ethno-

logical groups.

(b) the form of these variations and the reason, if any, for their

occurrence.

Anthors who have generalised on this part of the skull have hinted that

ethnological differences occur. Martin (1928) says that the negro has the

largest inferior orbital fissure, while in the Japanese it is mainly narrow and

looks downwards, Wood Jones (1930) lists the spheno-maxillary fissure

among the morphological features that should be taken into account when

examining a skull for “racial” distinction, Others stress the large size of

the fissure in ihe Australian aborigine. These statements seem to rest upon

simple visual observations on small numbers of skulls. It is felt that more

reliahle canclusions might emerge from statistical analysis of measurements

trade upon a larger number of skulls.

One hundred Australian aboriginal skulls, mostly of South Australian

origin, ten European, three Chinese, two Japanese, and four African skulls

were examined. To ayoid unnecessary complication only male skulls were

selected, It is unfortunate that more non-aboriginal skulls were not avail-

able for comparison,

Tue Australian AnoricinaL Sut. (fig. 15)

The postorbital wall is formed mainly by the zygomatic bone anteriorly

and the greater wing of the sphenoid posteriorly, The frontal and the maxilla

may play a part in the wall on the extreme superior and inferior borders

respectively. There is a certain amount of individual variation in the size

and shape of these bones and when the zygomatic and the sphenoid mect

the frontal at a more inferior leyel than usual the frontal forms part of the

postorbital wall. Similarly, the maxilla may have a process that runs up the

anterior border of the inferior orbital fissure, so becoming one of the bones

of the postorbital wall.

The suture lines show only small individual variations, The borders of

the inletior orbital fissure are formed by the sphenoid, zygomatic and the

niaxilla, except in 28%, where a spheno-maxillary junction excludes the

zygomatic bone,

The inferior orbital fissure at first glance appears to have no particular

shape, but on closer analysis three main types tan be distinguished, as noted

by Wood Jones (1930). The first is the “narrow” type, the second is the

“wide” type, and the third is the “wide at the anterior end” type (fig. 15).

In the hundred skulls examined, type three represented 48%, while types

one and two represented 24% and 28% respectively. With each of these

three main types there may be two additional variations, The sphenoid may

he close to the maxilla or it may be some distance laterally, Using these

122

two variations, six subtypes can be formed. The type with the sphenoid

close to the maxilla and with a narrow inferior orbital fissure has the most

complete postorbital wall, while the type with a wide fissure and well separ-

ated sphenoid has the most deficient postorbital wall.

12 months

® years

5 years

6 years

Tempora|

re 4

t Frontal Y7 — Postorbital wall ‘Spheno-max,

H Suture

Greater wing of Sphenoid Shull no.6

“Thin plate'ot Sphenoid

Inf. orbital. Fissure

‘ *

Zyrtec ‘Warrow” type

Shull na.34

NU!Thin plate'ot Zygomatic .

Pi \Nosla Wee hipg

Skull'no: 24

Wide anterior

end” type

MAN. CAborigne Skultno.2) Fig 75, Skull no. 11

Fig. 14-15

The pterygo-maxillary fissure is a part of the general spheno-maxillary

system. It continues the posterior end of the inferior orbital fissure, and

for completeness must be considered also. For each skull a record was kept

of the depth (either deep or shallow) and of the width (wide or narrow).

There seemed to be no size relationship between the two fissures. In many

cases a wide pterygo-maxillary fissure was associated with a narrow inferior

orbital fissure. The infra-temporal surface of the sphenoid plays a part in

the lateral projection of the area of the inferior orbital fissure. Although

that surface does not alter the actual size of the fissure it may, as a spine,

crest or thick bulge, hide the posterior end of the inferior orbital fissure from

the lateral view to a varying degree.

The greater wing of the sphenoid, as it forms the superior border of

the inferior orbital fissure, may be divided into two parts. The posterior

part is thick in the region of the infra-temporal crest and the pre-pterygoid

spine, but the anterior part is a. thin plate. This thin plate ts in contact with

$23

a thin plate-like extension from the zygomati¢ (fig, 15, skull No. 2). Most

variations in the inferior orbital fissure occur where these thin plates micet.

The size of the anterior end of the inferior orbital fissure depends upon

the degree of development of these plates, and on the distance the sphénoid

is lateral from the maxilla.

Reference to the foetal skull is instructive (fig. 14). The fissure is wide

and runs downwards into the pterygo-palatine fossa, connecting tits fossa

with the orbit. In the 12-month-old skull (fig. 14), the inferior orbital fissure

is still wide but the pterygo-maxillary fissure has become nartower. In the

2, 5, and 6-year-old skulls (fig. 14), the thicker part af the sphenoid has

grown down in the region of the infra-temporal crest, but the thin plates

of the sphenoid and zygomatic are undeveloped, leaving the fissure still

widely open in front. It is easy to see that, from this generalised stage,

the inferior orbital fissure could either remain wide or narrow to a slit

according to the amount of subsequent expansion of the two thin plates- In

the foetus the horizontal projection of the area of the fissure is large and the

sphenoid is well lateral to the maxilla. The area may remain large in the

adult skull or it may be decreased either by enlargement of the maxillary

sinus or by medialwards expansion of the sphenoid.

Three aboriginal skulls have been chosén which show the three most

common variations in this region.

Skull No. 24 (fig. 15) shows the tisual formation of bones in the postor-

bital wall, with zygomatic anterioriy, greater wing of the sphenoid posteri-

orly and the frontal superiorly.

The bones forming the boundary of the inferior orbital fissure are of

the common pattern, The greater wing of the sphenoid forms the posterior

border, the zygomatic, maxilla and palatine forming the anterior, inferier

and posterior borders respectively.

In this case the inferior orbital fissure is exceptionally wide and can

be classified as the “wide” type. The pterygo-maxillary fissure is also wide.

In skull No. 6 (fig. 15), the boundaries of the inferior orbital fissure

show some variation. The posterior, stipetior, and inferior borders of the

fissure are formed by the palatine, the greater wing of the sphenoid and the

maxilla respectively. The maxilla has sent a process in a postero-superior

direction to meet the sphenoid and exclude the zygomatic from the fissure-

This small maxillary tongue thus forms part of the postobital wall. “The

inferior orbital fissure is small and well covered by the pre-pterygoid spine

of the sphenoid, and is typical of the “thin” type. The pterygo-maxillary

fissure is narrow and the pterygo-palatine fossa small.

Skull No. 11 (ig. 15) shows the “wide at the anterior end” type. The

two thin plates of the sphenoid and the zygomatic are not so well developed

and have left a large opening in the anterior end of the fissure.

The following measurements were made on the right side of all the

skulls employed for this investigation. Ne female skulls were measured but

the female skulls examined were similar to the male, In two skulls of 11

and 12-year-old aborigines, the normal adult form was present. Lvidently

the final pattern is attained relatively early and this would accunt for

absence of obvious sexual distinction (sce Abbie, 1947),

1. The length of the fissure —i.e,, from the palatine to the most anterior

point of the fissure.

2. The maximum width—This was found in most cases to be at the anterior

end, tut in a few in the middle or the posterior end.

124

3. Width at the anterior end—This was in most cases the same as the

maximum width,

4. Width at the pterygo-palatine end.—This was variable, in some cases

the end was large and rounded, in others just a natrow slit.

5. Distance of the sphenoid from the maxilla—This figure was arrived at

by averaging the horizontal widths at the anterior end, the middle and

the posterior end. The mean of these figures gave a basis for comparison

between different skulls.

6. Area from lateral side-—This is the horizontal projection of the area of

the fissure.

7. Area from the base of the skull—This is the vertical projeccion of the

atea of the fissure.

_ The measurements were recorded in Tables I, IT and III (Appendix 1).

All figures were examined for their degree of variability, Those obtained

at the 5% level are as follows (all measurements in mm.).

1. Length of fissure - - + - between 35.3 and 24.6

2. Maximum width - - - - - 79 and 2.1

3, Width at anterior end = - - - 3 83 and 1.5

4. Width at pterygo-palatine end - 4g 49 and 1.5

5, Distance sphenoid from maxilla - " 41 and 0.9

6. Area from lateral side - - . - 92.5 and O

7. Area from base - = - - F 118.6 and 13.3

Take 1 as an example. There isa difference of range of 10.7 mm. This

is 38% of the mean length of the fissure (30 mm.). The other figures show

an even greater percentage variation. In the face of sich variation it is

impossible to give any definite size or shape for the inferior orbital fissure

in the South Australian skull (Appendix 2).

Similar tests were applied to the European, Chinese and African skulls.

Once again, no standard pattern could be found. Thus, so far as this com-

parative material goes, there appear to be no standard shapes of sizes of

the inferior orbital fissure in different peoples. With this variation, it would

seem unlikely that there is any ethnological significance in the size and

shape of the fissure. This conclusion is confirmed by statistical analysis of

the measurements taken (Appendix).

Combining the aboriginal skulls and the European in the “t” test for

these figures, no significance was found in any of them at the 5%, level

(Appendix), This shows that, as far as these observations go, there is no

significant difference between the South Australian aboriginal and European

inferior orbital fissures. This is contrary to what might be gathered from

inspection alone. Similar “t" tests were carried out between the Aboriginal

and the Chinese and African skulls, and once again no significant difference

was found.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

I am indebted to Professor A. A. Abbie for suggesting this subject for

investigation and for advice and assistance throughout, I am also indebted

to the Director of the South Australian Museum, who allowed me to use

material in the Museum collection.

RECAPITULATION

1. Separation of the orbit from the temporal fossa has been followed from

fishes up to man.

125

2. The postorbital wall, which effects this separation, is formed mainly by

flange-like extensions from the surrounding bones—frontal, sphenoid and

zygomatic. The maxilla is sometimes involved, Communication with

the temporal and infratemporal regions is gradually reduced to a spheno-

maxillary fissure which becomes partially differentiated into a plerygo-

maxillary fissure and an inferior orbital fissure.

3. The first stage of this process in primates is seen in the lemur. It reaches

an extreme, reducing the inferior orbital fissure in particular to a narrow

slit, in the Cercopithecidae and in the orang and gorilla. The condition

is less extreme, and the fissures are generally wider, in the gibbon and

chimpanzee and in man. A limited phylogenetic survey indicates that

the final form of the inferior orbital fissttre is determined largely by the

development of thin, plate-like extensions from the sphenoid and zygo-

matic. The final form is, apparently, attained relatively early in deve-

lopment.

4. In man the inferior orbital fissure shows a wide range of variation in size

and shape. Statistical comparison of the Australian ahorigine with a

limited number of skulls of different origin disclosed no signicant ethno-

logical distinction.

REFERENCES

Aspire, A. A. 1907 Headform and Human Evolution. J. Anat., Lond., 81, 233

Benstey, B. A. 1918 Practical Anatomy of the Rabbit, second ed. Toronto

University Press

Crark, W. E. te Gros 1934 Early Forerunners of Man. London

Ducxwortu, W. L. H. 1904 Morphology and Anthropology. Cambridge Uni-

versity Press

Jones, F. Woop 1929 Man’s Place among the Mammals. [ondon

Jonss, F. Woop 1930 The Non-metrical Morphological Characters of the

Skull as Criteria for Racial Diagnosis, J. Anat., Lond., 65, 179

Martin, R. 1928 Lehrbuch der Anthropologie. Jena.

Owen, R. 1868 Of the Anatomy of the Vertebrates. London

Werwenreticu, F. 1941 The Brain and its Role in the Phylogenetic Transforma-

tion of the Human Skull. Trans. Amer. Philos. Soc., N.S., 31, 321

Wuitnatt, S. E. 1921 The Anatomy of the Human Orbit. Oxford

No. of skull

CONAN RWH

126

- APPENDIX 1

TABLE I — ABORIGINAI SKULLS

i 2 3 4 5 6

; 438

2 gS 8 ee OO fF

a4 - 3B # g8 &

a 5 q a2 a8 4

a 5 wi

8 B 4 Se gk og

g 5 = £5 an =

2 i Zo Zs Bg Se

4 = & § 28 As a5

33 5 5 1 4 42

31 6 6 3 3 29

28 5 4 5 4 15.5

29 4 4 3.5 3 24

30 6 6 2 2.5 36.5

31 3 3 1.5 1.5 4

32 4 4 4 3 21

30 5 3.5 5 3 36

30 6 6 3.5 25 26

30 7 7 4 4 47

30 8 8 2 2 35

27 4 4 2 15 27

34 6 2 2 2.5 54

30 7 7 4 2 108

25 7 7 2 3 46

28 5 5 2 3 21

28 5 5 3 2 19

29 7 7 1 15 30

28 2.5 25 2 1 10

25 5 5 2 4 10

37 7 7 4 4 53

26 2 I 2 1 11

30 3 3 2 15 22

33 6 6 Z 2.5 58

31 5 5 5 3.5 21

28 5 5 4 2.5 34

31 4 4 3 3 21

22 4 4 2 2 15

31 5 5 3 3 25

31 7 7 2 2.5 47

28 6 6 3 3 40

34 5 5 4 25 20

33 6 5 2 25 50

33 3 3 3 2 2

28 7 7 2 2 52

27 7 7 2 3 36

27 3 1 3 15 2

34 4 4 4 3 15

32 5 5 4 3 13

33 5 5 3 3 21

23 4 4 4 2.5 10

32 7 2 4 3 49

Area from base

127

TABLE 2

ABORIGINAL SKULLS (continued)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

oe eB = ei ae

2 3 8 BE FR

5 3 3 5 ge g 2

= a 5 q ae Be & 4

s 3 s id o um 3

6 % & zs 4 aa 13 *

¢ 5 Ki zy m8 BS te g

z 4 s 58 38 AS eter} <

43. ~~ ~—-30 5 5 2 2 44 76

44 34 7 7 2 3 101 45

45 32 5 5 3 25 39 87

46 30 3 2 3 2 4 25

47 31 5 5 3 2 58 74

48 32 5.5 5.5 4 25 52 87

49 25 9.5 9.5 4 3 33 57

50 30 5 5 5 3 54 81

51 30 4 4 2 1.5 23 42

52 30 7 7 3 2 47 63

53 29 3 2 3 2 7 58

54 33 45 45 3 25 58 88

55 26 1 4 4 2 0 56

56 34 1 11 5 6 215 203

57 28 4 4 3 2 11 63

58 35 6 6 3 25 85 95

59 32 5 5 3 2.5 53 90

60 34 4 4 3 2.5 67 71

61 25 2 2 1 i 8 27

62 32 6 6 4 3 61 77

63 32 4 4 4 2.5 37 80

64 30 2 2 2 2 15 42

65 28 4 4 4 2 6 49

66 30 4 4 3 2.5 10 65

67 25 3 3 3 2 6 55

68 35 6 6 3 2.5 44 68

69 28 4 4 3 2 45 49

70 25 6 6 5 2 43 77

71 35 8 8 3 2.5 71 47

72 30 5 5 3 2 47 59

73 29 4 4 3 25 61 53

74 30 4 4 4 25 41 63

75 31 7 7 3 2 76 61

76 29 3 3 3 2 20 50

77 30 4 4 3 2.5 29 70

78 29 5 5 3 2 38 53

79 28 5 5 4 3 34 64.

80 32 7 7 3 3 75 90

81 29 4 4 4 25 20 86

82 31 2 2 1.5 15 0 35

83 29 4 2 4 2 18 51

84 30 6 6 4 3 53 g9

Sock wm

oS tn

CANA) No. of skull

wyvy

aN rR

ire)

wow wos

an aA uw

i=]

100

mw he SEAN A MN BWN

wad oe

128

TABLE 3

ABORIGINAL SKULLS (continued)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

2 % 8 a ae

2 a 3 a 2 ae = A

3 g + ee “2 g g

a a a ge 2 =

3 f sé a fe

#y Be 8s 3 &

4 s 29 S8 AS C3 <

31 5 6 6 3.5 36 103

30 4 4 4 25 8 70

27 5 5 4 3 50 82

31 6 6 4 3 a7 83

32 3 3 3 2 29 47

32 5 5 3, 2 38 52

32 6 6 4 3 62 102

6 6 4 25 48 74

27 6 6 5 3 54 123

29 4 3.5 4 3 7 80

25 4 4 3 2.5 4 55

30 6 6 4 2.5 62 87

32 4 4 4 2 38 68

30 5 5 3 2.5 29 85

31 7 7 4 3.5 79 116

31 4 4 2 1.5 19 50

EUROPEAN SKULLS

28 4 4 3 2.5 35 62

28 6 6 5 2 39 75

28 3 3 3 2 9 37

29 5 5 4 2 40 65

32 3 3 3 2.5 30 91

25 5 5 3 2 21 32

27 4 4 3 25 17 61

27 7 7 3 2 34 43

27 4 3 4 2 9 50

31 5 5 3 25 31 59

AFRICAN SKULLS

30 7 7 4 25 65 64

27 8 8 4 3 64 97

27 8 8 4 25 67 82

29 3 3 2 2 34 51

CHINESE SKULLS

32 4 2 4 2 20 74

30 5 5 2 15 42 34

30 3 3 2 1.5 10 39

JAPANESE SKULLS

28 2 1 2 1.5 3 37

32 7 7 4 3 30 87

129

APPENDIX 2

LENGTH OF FISSURE MAXIMUM WIDTH

Aboriginal. Aboriginat.

Sx? = 90558 (2997-2100 = L05 Sx,? = 2776 (9-04) 100 2+0-05

S738

Sx; = 2997 with 99d.f. Sxq = 504-5 with 99 dF

Ky = 29-97 =>¥196 X, =5:0 =1'98

O74" = 90558-89820 29-97- = 45:36 O42 = 2776-2545 50-% =129

> 238 Kbelween3$3&246 = 221 cx belween7-9 &2-4

European. European.

Sx2° = 7990 5xp2 = 226

Sxq 2 282 Sxo = 46

Xo +262 Ko =46

G-p? » 7990 - 7950 Gp? = 226-211-6

3.40 = 14-4

——s —=—=—

Combined. Combined.

OR? - Ke) = TH +9?

=7:3B4A = 11:38 = (3-37)2

1-8 = -53 at stod.F

337

WIDTH AT ANTERIOR END

Aboriginal

Sxj* = 2640-5

Sxy = 484-6

Ry 74:9

Oy? = 2640-5-2342

= 298'5

(49-cX) =+3-42

, Cs belweenS-3 64:5

European.

Sx? = 219

Sxp = 45

Ro =45

O52 = 219- 202-5

= 165

Combined

2 5g 2472

OR = %Qj= Qj + Op 22-99-1-65

4 70d 40

= 4-64 =(2-154)2

Cs “AS 1857 at 110 df.

not significant(Ps -a5)

not significant (P + -6)

OR? - Ba) = Sie + See

= 2-21+4-44=35-65 = (1: 91)2

C=-4 = -209 ato df

TS —=—

not significant(P> - 83)

WIDTH AT PTERYGO-PALATINE FOSSA END

Aboriginal.

Sxj? = 1101 (3-2-cx)100 = + 1-98

Sxq = 3205

=3-2 3-2-%

1401-1027

042

at4:7

Chbetween4 9 &1-5

European.

Sxp2 = 120

SXo =34

XQ =34

Oa? =120-115-6

=4-4-

Combined.

«2 | 2

O(K, — Ag)= G4 + oo

706 10

='74+ -44

=41:18 =(4-086)2

C e. a a 84) at 110d.F

> nol significanl(Ps -85)

130

DISTANCE SPHENGID 15 LATERAL FROM AREA FROM LATERAL SIDE

Aboriginal. Samm Aboriginal, ~~~

Sxj* = 686-75 (2-5-o)100 = 11-98 Sx y*=217451 5 (38-39-0190 2 +4-95

4 “T4131

Sx, = 284-5 ad Sx1 =3785

%y 225 25-% =f1-64 4 = 37-85 38:°39-K=t54-4

Oi? =686-75-617-7 -,cxbetweena-1& -9 O42 =217431-1435300 . cx betweend2-5&0.

= 6941 = 74131

European. European.

Sxo2 =49 Sxo? =8255

Sx =22 Sxp =265

Ko =2-2 Kp =265

Gp? =A9-48-4 Oo? =8255-7021

= 26 sf234

Combined Combined.

O(x? -xo)= O72 + Gs? = -69+ 06 OfR,? -%y) = 701-S + 125-4

100. TO

=-751 = (866)? =824-7 = (28-718)2

CT a-3 =.347 also d.f. t =11-89 =-44sat sod fF.

7866 ah 26-72 Ae

nol significant (Ps 73) not significant 0+ -68)

Sxy? = 522361 G6-99- oon +#1-96

Sx, = 6699 Kea

Ky = 66-99 66 -99-&=53-67

Oj? =522561-448700 - cx betweentl8-6m15-3

= 7346)

European.

S$xo* =35919

Sxo =575

Xa =57°5

O37 =35919-33070

=2849

Combined .

OfRy - Ry)* = 734-61+284-9 =1019-5 = (51-93)

‘95

not significant (P= -77)

C =9-49 =0.297 attiod f.

THE ADELAIDE SYSTEM AS DEVELOPED IN THE RIVERTON-CLARE

REGION, NORTHERN MOUNT LOFTY RANGES, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY ALLAN F’. WILSON

Summary

A reconnaissance geological survey of the Riverton-Clare region has revealed a thick and extensive

development of a remarkably complete sequence of the lower formations of the Adelaide System

(Late Proterozoic). A feature is the thick ilmenitic sandstone lithologically identical with the basal

grits of Howchin’s type area in the Torrens Gorge, and at Aldgate, and also with Mawson’s “Basal

Quartzite” of the Flinders Ranges. This sandstone, however, does not pass down into an

unconformity with the Older Pre-Cambrian, but fairly gradually gives away to at least 8,000 feet of

alternating shales, sandstones, and occasional calcareous rocks. These were not bottomed, and thus

represent the oldest sediments of the Adelaide System of this area.

131

THE ADELAIDE SYSTEM AS DEVELOPED IN THE RIVERTON-CLARE

REGION, NORTHERN MOUNT LOFTY RANGES, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

Ry Attan F. Wiison*

[Read 8 November 1951]

1. SUMMARY

A reconnaissance geological survey of the Riverton-Clare region has

revealed a thick and extensive development of a remarkably complete

sequence of the lower formations of the Adelaide System (Late Proterozoic).

A feature is the thick ilmenitic sandstone lthologically identical with the

basal grits of Ilowchin’s type area in the Torrens Gorge, and at Aldgate,

and also with Mawsoti's “Basal Quartzite” of the Flinders Ranges. This

sandstone, however, does not pass down into an unconformity with the Older

Pre-Cambrian, but fairly gradually gives way to at least 8,000 feet of altern-

ating shales, sandstones, and occasional caleareous rocks. These were not

bottomed and thus represent the oldest sediments. of the Adelaide System

of this area.

Dolomites of the Torrens Gorge are represented by upwards of 1,100

feet of mainly cream dolomites: Those arenites, which are taken as compar-

able with the Stonyfell (Thick) Quartzite near Adelaide, are al least of

double its thickness, There are over 4,000 feet of dolomitic shales and inter-

bedded dense blue-grey dolomites reminiscent of the Beaumont Dolomites,

and a “Sturtian” tillite of meagre proportions. The total thickness of the

Torrensian (Lower Adelaide) Series is about 30,000 feet, which is consider-

ably more than thrice the thickness in the type area. This estimate, however,

could be somewhat reduced should more detailed mapping reveal repetition

due to faulting,

During middle Palaeozoic tiines the geosynclinal pile was thrown into

a series of meridionally trending folds of considerable magnitude, but there

is virtually no metamorphism and igneous rocks are absent in the area under

discussion,

In general, compressional forces appear to have come from the cast,

In part of the area, however, there is a major drag on the meridionally

trending structure, This indicates that in the western part of the area there

has been a major moyement “south and down” relative to a “north and up"

Movement on the east, Study of consequences of such relative movement

Satisiactorily explains the peculiar variations in trends of fold axes shown

by subsidiary folds near the nose of the major drag,

Only two major faults were recognised; these, the Alma and the Gilbert

Range faults, are more tr less meridional and have allowed renewed move

ment during the late Tertiary.

Mineralization is so meagre that various building stones appear io com-

prise the main direct interest for the economic geologist.

2. INTRODUCTION AND PREVIOUS INVESTIGATIONS

it was originally proposed to carry out a detailed study of the western

section of the Mount Lofty Ranges with a view to studying facies changes

from Howchin's type locality for the (late Proterozoic) Adelaide System

some 70 miles to the south. However, the author's departure from South

Australia in 1949 has necessitated publication of this unfinished work in its

present form.

SS ———— wr

* Department of Geology, University of Western Australia.

pense Roy. Soe. S. Aust., 75, September 1952

rt il

S i

ADTROX.

132

SCALE OF MyLes

Fault

inal axis

R CuPh prospecie ;—— Railways.

‘

’

2 Anticli

* Synctinal axis

; Mos, s-9 refer, to analysed Limetones

¥ berticaé Seals

so) S$ Overturned ;

section; & Trigs

/2P,

Lit

“Strike, Dip

Land Suryecy plans (2 inches = 1 mile) were used as base maps in the

first instance, but the map for publication has been drawn on a scale of

1 inck = I mile. Chain, compass and abney-level, or pacing compass and

aneroid methods were used. Unfortunately, aerial photographs were nut

available till almost at the end of this work. As much of the Jand is culti-

yated, many photographs only serve to aid location of one’s position which

is not difficult to fix by normal methods. The structure south of Auburn,

however, could be verified by their use and considerable help obtained in

tracing the arenaceous formations further north to link with the reconnais-

sance work done near Clare, Little stricture could be seen from photographs

taken N.E. of Auburn.

The area surveyed is bounded roughly by the Gilbert Range on the east,

the Clare-Parrel] Flat line in the north, the Alma Fault Scarp in the west,

and the Riverton-Rhynie line in the south (i.e. 25 miles N.-S. x 18 miles

E.W, is the maximum area studied), (See fig. 2.)

No previous attempt has becn made at geological mapping, indeed only

scanty references to this area can be found in the literature. Howchin (1927)

observed “‘Sturtian” tillite in the Gilbert Range between Tarlee and Kapunda.

Hossfeld (1934) named the formation beneath the tillite the Gilbert Range

Subglacial Quartzite, thus recognising the extension of this valuable marker

bed tnto the area now under discussion. Both Ilowchin (1929, p.30) and

Jack (1923, p. 28) suggest that the famous Mintaro Slates are possibly .of

fluvio-glacial origin, or are associated at least in some way with the tillite

which Jack casually mentions as occurring a few miles west of Mintaro.

Jack (1925) notes the use of slate for building stone near Auburn (p. 35)

and Clare (p, 27), and of freestones near Clare (p. 65). In various South

Australian Mining Reviews occasional mention is made of small alluvial

gold or copper deposits,

4. PHYSIOGRAPHY

The Riverton-Clare region is part of the Northern Mount Lofty Ranges

which have been limited to those highlands between the latitude of Gawler

in the south, and Crystal Brook-Jamestown line in the north. Fenner (1931,

p. 317) in his gencral description of the area states that “ihe mountains to

the north and south of this region (Flinders and Mount Lofty Ranges,

respectively) are of much higher relief and lower economic value that the

meridional ranges and ridges of the Northern Mount Lofty Ranges with

their wide alluvial-filled valleys. Over the greater part of this region the

soils are excellent; cultivatio# extends alike over the hills and the valleys.

so gentle is the relief: but there are also some steep and stony hills of

pastoral value only." The climate is typically Mediterranean with a, reliable

winter-muximum rainfall of between 18 and 30 inches.

KEY TO FIGURES I and 2

(1) River Wakefield Group of alternating sandy shales

(2) Rhynie Sandstune, ilmenitic arkosic sandstone with interbedded Dolomites

(3) Skillogalee Dolomites

(4) Woolshed Flat Shales

(5) Undalya Quartette

(6) Watervale Sandsione, argillaccons, and lensing out E.

(7) Auburn Dolomites ahd interbedded dolomitic shales, divided hy six into

upper (U.A.) and lower (1. A.) members

(8) Mintaro Shales, with Leasingham quartzite member

(9) Gilhert Range Quartzites and interbedded Fluvio-placial Sediments

(10) Glacial and Fluvioglacial Sediments and Shales

(11) Laterite

134

In the area under discussion both the gentle relief and best soils are

confined to those areas underlain by argillaceous, tillitic and dolomitic rocks.

The arenaceous rocks form resistant ridges, and invariably give rise to poor

sandy soils, The general relief falls off to the south from an average elevation

in the Clare-Farrell Flat region of about 1,300 feet to about 800 feet in the

neighbourhood of Riverton, No detailed topographic survey has yet been

undertaken in this region,

The water courses throughout the area are mostly mature-subsequent,

Elsewhere in the Mount Lofty and Flinders Ranges the drainage is mature-

subsequent in the upper courses but is juvenile-consequent along the margins

following earth movements in late Tertiary and Receni times, Study of the

maps will reveal that not only do streams rum parallel to the major forma-

tions but the wnusual deflections in the Wakeficld and Woolshed Flat Creck

appear ta be contrulled in the main by the east-west cross-fold anticlinal

axis and thickening of the arenites on the noses of the major pitching folds.

The lack of obvious superimposed streams and conseyuent slreams

(excepting those along the Alma Fault Scarp) presents an interesting

problem. The lack of superimposed streams suggests that no significant

superficial deposits have been laid down in this area on the poorly peneplaned

surface. In this connection it is interesting to observe that the only residual

laterite surface discovered had an appreciable dip of up to 5° eastward into

the old valley of the Light. The Light, and probably most of the other majar

streams, were flowing through mature river yalleys in pre-laterite times.

The area was insufficiently peneplaned for the laterite deposits to have any

appreciable effect on the drainage systems.

4. GEOLOGY

The area under discussion was part of the great Adelaide Geosyncline

of late Proterozoic-early Palaeozoic age. Its position is an interesting one in

that it is in the Northern Mount Lofty Kanges and between 60 and 9)

miles north of Howchin’s type area for the Adelaide System near Adelaide,

and about half-way between the type area and the Peterborouyxh reeien

which has been thought to have been a very deep part of the geosyncline.

The area is almost entirely made up of a varied suite of sediments

(sandstones, shales, greywackes, dolomites, and tillites) of upper Proterazaic

age. Though considerably folded and less conspicuously faulted the sediments

are virtually unmetamorphosed. For descriptuye purposes the various units

of the Adelaide System are described in ascending stratigraphic order.

A, STRATIGRAPHY

T. PROTEROZOIC

{1) ApELADE System

(a) River WAKEFIELD GrouP

An extensive group of alternating sandy phyllites, quartzites and oecas-

ional lenticular bodies of dolomite and limestone comprise the oldest rocks

outcropping in this area. The group makes good outcraps in most of the

consequent water courses dissecting the Alma Fault Scarp, but it is particu-

larly well developed in those which join the River Wakefield within 3 ur 4

miles west of the Scarp.

The sediments are all fine to medium grained, with graded hedding

well shown in certain horizons, No coarse grits or conglamerate lenses were

found and many are typical greywackes. Slump structures and occasignal

minor cross-bedding al! indicate the west-north-west as the source of detrital

135

material. Heavy mimeral concentration is tincommon. Iltnenite+rich zones,

however, have been noted several hundred stratigraphic fect below the great

ilmenitic formation, the Rhynic Sandstone, into which the River Wakefield

Group appears to pass without unconformity (eg. 2 miles E. of Hoyleton,

on the road to Leasingham). The colour of the sediment is usually a pale

dove-grey, Nd red beds are noted.

Interbedded usually with the argillacecous sections of the group ate occasional

tarbonate rocks of various types. Immediately beneath the bridge on the Wake-

field 5 miles north-west of Rhynie is a calcareous zone in sandy phyllites

ind sandstones. On atialysis a sample (Table I, No. 1, and No. 1 of map)

from a 6 fee, thick calcareous bed revealed a high ratio of CaCO,

to MgCO, (viz. 82 : 1). This is far greater than that of any other of nine

calcareous rocks analysed from the area. In handspecimen the rock 1s best

described as a white arenaceots oolitic limestone.

More commonly the caleareous members are pale cream-coloured massive

very finely-grained dolomites, similar in appearance to those of the strati-

graphically higher Skillogalee Dolomites, Examples are reported to oceur

24 miles east of Hoyleton on the Leasingham road, and near the road 3 miles

ae west of Rhynie. Unfortunately, no analyses of dolomites of this type were

made,

Another calcareous rock was noted less than } mile upstream from the

bridge over the Wakefield, five miles N.W, of Rhynie, It is a 2-3 foot lens of

thin-bedded dense blue-grey dolomite. The rock is intercalated in light-grey

sandy phyllites,

Throughout the area the River Wakefield Group has heen thrown into

a series of minor folds. In addition these beds show considerable crushing

and shattering near the large Palaeozoic fault zone (rejuvenated in the late

Tertiary to form the Alma Fault Scarp). Most Palaeozoic faults in the Mount

Lofty Ranges betray their presence by large displays of a cellular “fibrous”

quartz which appears #7 sitw in places, but is more commonly seen as

abundaiit Hoaters in the fields,

Notwithstunding the folding and faulting it seems that about 8,000

feet of sediments of this group are exposed within the type area.

(b) Ruvyir SANDSTONE

This formation comprises the backbone of a ridge extending from near

Rhynie ta beyond Clare, The formation ts essentially an ilmenite-rich icld-

spathic sandstone. There are plentiful but thin intercalated sandy shales

and shaly sandstones. In places (e.g., just tpstream from the junction of

Woolshed Flat Creek and the Wakefield) a bed of some 20 feet of coarse

conglomerate may be seen, which may be traced along the strike for a

furlong before it lenses out, On account of this feature, viz., the limited

linear outcrop of any particular horizon, the assemblage of ilmenitic sand-

stones is. best considered as one formation.

One of the most characteristic features of this formativun js the striking

development of coarse crossbedding which is clearly outlined by abundant

detrital ilmenite and haematite. In none of the several other arenaceous

formations in the area is the crossbedding thus delineated. Ilmenite has been

nated in the River Wakefield Group (q.v.) and indicates a transition between

that group and the Rhynie Sandstone. In one area (14 miles east of Wake-

field Reserve) the Undalya quartzite was found with considerable ilmenite

crossbedding, ‘These exceptions need not nullify a useful field criterion.

Slump structures are present but much rarer than in the slower-forming

sediments of the River Wakefield Group, Graded bedding and impressions

made by dropped pebbles in bands of heayy minerals are well shown in

parts. Ripple marks were not neticed. This wealth of primary features

greatly facilitates the determination of sequence. The crossbedding indicates

that the source of detrital material was west-north-west, a fact borne out

by the close resemblance of certain of the Northern Yorke Peninsula granites

and the fragments of pink granite in the conglomerates.

i\n interesting feature is the lack of a coarse facies (conglomerate or

grit) at the base of this formation. Rather it is found that the River Wake-

feld Group contains in places ilmenile-bearing arenites and indicates a fairly

gradual shallowing of the sedimentary basin. The conglomerate occurs as

isolated lenses throughout the formation but particularly about two-thirds

of the stratigraphic distance up from the “base,”

Careful study of primary structural features (crossbedding, supplement-

ed by graded bedding) has shown that this massive arenaceous formation

has suttered considerable folding, thus rendering difficult an estimation of

true thickness, An instructive section is that afforded by a 14 miles walk

upstream along the Wakefield from its confluence with the Woolshed Flat

Creek, Though all the beds dip steeply eastward there are at least four

changes in sequence direction, In this particular section the steeper set of

beds (i,e., 80°-90° E.) usually “young west,” whereas the more shallowly

dipping set (1.e,, 65°-70° E.) “young easi.” This complex structure was not

expected in such a massive formation but same of the folds can he seeu

from the top of the south bank of the Wakefield when one looks north from

a paint ¢ mile due north of Mr. Bowden’s homestead which is ?/, mile up

the Woolshed Flat Creek above its confluence with the Wakefield. These

structures are large tectonic drags on the west limb of a major north-pitching

syncline,

Interbedded Dolomites

A surprising feature of this formation is the presence of a number of

dolomitic members. These are well exposed in the bed of the Wakefield

about one mile upstream from its confluence with the Woolshed Flat Creek.

En a band 150-200 feet thick the typical rock is a cream-colored dense fince-

grained calcareous magnesite. On analysis (see Table I, Nu, 3 anil No, 3 of

map) a CaCO,; MgCO, ration of 0°21 was found. The rack is homogeneous

and perfectly fresh, There are no magnesite mud-curls or “Mawsonella” in-

clusions as in some dalomites of the Upper Torrens Group. The magnesite,

though similar in appearance, differs chemically from normal Skillogalee

dolomites,

A very pale dull-blue fine-gramed dense dolomite occurs as a narrow bed

some five feet thick toward the base of the major band of cream-coloured

magnesite, On analysis this rock proves to he a narmal dolomite with

CaCO,: MgCO, ration of 1:24 (Table I, No. 2, and No, 2 of map). In

this it is similar te the cream-coloured dolomite which outcrops on the

road just west of Kemp's homestead 34 miles N.W. of Rhynie, This appears

to be interbedded in the same Rhynie Sandstone but is probably nearer

its contact with the Skillogalee Dolomites than those described above

(mapping was hurried and general in this area). It is a cream-coloured

dense fine-grained dolomite which on analysis showed a CaCO.,: MgCO,

ratio of 1-21 (Tabte I, No. 4 and No. 4 of map}. Comparison with other

analyses in Table I indicates the remarkable purity of this dolomite.

(e) SKILLOGALEE DoLcsires

The major dolomites of the area fnrm a very important stratigraphic

marker as they separate the two most impartant sandstones. They are cream-

137

‘sash[QUE MOT

— *

Fpoomyed "ML = “GML ' 01g “A SeUL = “TW L)

TOP pepueq

cae 256 Ue B°8e £8 “ Aoid-antq ApeoqD =

TT 2°86 OZ L998 be ‘ ‘jop Aas8-anpq —

(Or yaEm

‘n0sse) ayisousew

OTIS ,,BT[SUOS

60°0 Toor 912 O'% s‘9 ‘TM L -MER,, £998 3YSTT aa

"jop (suasi0], *Q)

80 o£001 oro OT TE BP LE 92LE ‘EWE 1p Aaz8-anjq aig se OPT

OL £66 Le ttt 60s ¥ “od

ot 5°66 BL S'tr e'6b ‘AML “Jp Hq 44BIT ad

‘Jop (suarioy “T)

£a'T ve'66 Zz'T 02'9 OPT 98°08 * ‘op wes nqueysry

T2'T 82001 86'0 baa OP b+ 9L°ES 9% ‘JOp ureeia —

2 YI

‘Qosse paq sysau

120 04°66 261 S°IT PS"TL 99°bT “ -Heur ‘O]2o weet —

€ qv

£21 OS°66 99o°L erer oz-8¢ eee & “OOSSE “JOP BIq eed —_

au0}SoUNy

02°8 00°00T 09°0 869 a4's eL'or “LLL | aH ooo Apueg a

'o4N rot “olv 9272 WOIe[at107g

fO9%0 +%o%7 8 ‘osur "*on38W «(for = isdyeuy wondrrasag paisaBang

one

(5 “OND “Od

(y °ON) “od

{E°ON

SZuds) op (suvez

“10, "()) anoeywoyy

‘sop

‘oq

aa30r) sustI0L

reuly

“PH “8S pue 012 ‘95 wq

sayedoyys daddy peor uo aaxqy ‘AW'N ‘WF

‘od

‘Op (suasoy “Q)

Thquieysey

‘SOP seazeFoIPAS

27S ausyy reddy

"SS amdyy

dnasg pPayexeA “a

aSi1ory suaioy,

(dye

"MN ‘UE S) pPyeyeM df)

‘PH ‘59 99S “PRPUPIEM ‘A

(amar “MN “MH #2)

BUY “PH 905 ‘sng “B>g

‘jaq pros uo ‘s.dimay Je3Ny

“oct

(®M4q ‘MIN “HW S) PPy

AEM “dO “PH ‘89 99S “A

$ UspMog ita { plegeye A "a

(eméqy ‘M'N "W S)

PRAEA “AO “PH “sf JIS

‘E'S oSpig §ppyeyeA Jeary

worneus0g

‘ware odAy apreppy oy} UL puke sIe[D-UOJaANy 9y} Ul pedorsaap se

‘souag (apleppy Jamo) uelsuaro] Woz sayuojop jo saskjeuy

1 HIV

AyyEo0"T

“ON

138°

ce'l

LTT

bet

92'T

Ort

9e°L

‘os

FOOD

oney

‘sasA[euR MIU = y

(ueusery “AL VW

= M'M'V !seaseg ‘vy “L = ‘a’V'L ‘38000 ESOL = “LD

ZC0L

¥°Z01

1°66

O°TOT

05°66 Ore

OZ00L ~=— 84'T

99°66 $9°P

rot ="olV

+ ®o"ea

b'Se

BSE

Lee

06°6¢

Seer

Zoe

‘a49

“Tosuy

Ore

£°CE

e°6e

SOF

FL6e

06°6£

BALE

°oo2N

Ser “ACV

LP i

Ure "

B 2 ic: anh

OR LE €

OTOP dg

CPrLE aAWL

‘yop Aais y1eq =_

‘Top Avra yey —_

‘jap Aas yreq =

‘jop Aad yleq _

“OP

Aai3 Yep asuaq ‘od

‘jop A313

-onyq 2suap ‘Wey ‘od

‘TOP

Asia yep asuacy ‘sJop ywourneag

worpdirasacy wOI}B]P1107)

pesesang

‘od AY wrequnoy

‘om quounrag

“od yo-winy puowsg duno;

‘s[op juounesg quouneag

YOM. ppeg

‘PH ‘46£ Pue 96F “99g "Jaq

“s]op uIngny peor ua *qyIOMa[PpesS dPaN

PRY

-yeM “IO ‘PH Géz “28g

“s]op ningny “Ty qinqny Ss “ul 24 pecs ug

PIOg27e MA

‘dn ‘PH ZS ‘a's ‘uinqny

“s[op HIngny "y “MSM "ur Be pros vo

UOMeUl108 J Aqyea0°7

SoLaG (apreppy IJeMoT) uUeisuslIoy, Wol, sajw0jogd

Il WIdVi

jo sasdjeuy

fai

abl

afl

Pras

“ON

199

coloured fine- to medium-grained dense dolumites with occasional inter-

bedded dulomitic shales. Neither residual magnesite boulders nor “primary”

magnesitic mud-curls were noted in the major development of the formation

in the Skillogalee Creek and near Rhynie. However, in a road metal quarry

half a mile west of Saddleworth a considerable quantity of high grade mag-

nesite has been developed on the weathering of pale-blue dolomites which

appear tu belong to the same formation.

The formation has a variable thickness qwing to its relative incompet-

ency and position betwecn two thick sandstone formations. The map shows

moreover, that although the dolomites have “spread” themselves around the

noses of the pitching folds near Rhynie, on the west limb of the major north-

pitching syncline they are tightly squeezed and seem to disappear somewhere

in the latitude of Watervale, Their disappearance is best explained as due

to tectanic causes, for the Auburn Dolomites likewise disappear in the same

relative position, Moreover the dolomites prubably reappear in a milder

tectonic setting further north in the Wirrabarra Forest region as Mawson’s

“Magnesite Series,”

On analysis a typical specimen from this formation (Table 1, No. 5 and

No. 5 of map) revealed a dolomite remarkably comparable with the light-buff

Castambul (Lower Torrens) Dolomite“ of Howchin’s type area (see also

Table I, No. 6 and 7). It has a CaCO,: MgCO, ratio of 1-23.

Near the bridge at Undalya the dolomites are tightly folded and re-

erystallized into light-buff and cream marble. About one mile downstream

pale-blue dolomitic rocks are well developed. They occur intimutely associated

but stratigraphically above the light-buff and cream dolomites so typical

of the Skillogalee formation, In one place (+) 95 feet of blue dolomite

was found overlain by 560 feet of dark-grey sandy shale which in turn

is overlain by the Undalya Quartzite. This blue dolomite may prove to be

the equivalent of the Montacute (Upper Torrens) Dolomite of Howchin's

type area. However, none of the cherty or magnuesitic mud-curls so typical

of that dolomite was noticed. Unfortunately the author reached this import-

ant area towards the end of a day’s traverse and had no opportunity to

revisit.

In the main Skillogalee Creek area no dolomite was found which could

be correlated with the blue dolomites mentioned ahove, but the pale-blue

dolomite which is the host of the secondary magnesite near Saddleworth

may be comparable. In the Rhynie area (} N.W.) some 100 yards south of

the Woolshed Flat road between section 210 and 557 Hundred of Alma a

natrow band of cherty blue-grey dolomite occurs stratigraphically above a

little pale-blue dolomite and much of the typical Skillogalee cream and white

dolomite, It is below the Woolshed Flat Shale and Undalya Quarizite. In

appearance and on analysis it closely resembles members of the Montacute

(Upper Torrens) Dolomite (Table 1, No. 8, [No. 6 of map| and cf. Nos.

10 and 11). This dolomite which is thin-bedded and contorted is about 30

feet thick tn this locality.

Hence, although the Skillogalee dolomites are characterized by cream

dolomites, in several areas notable blue-grey members appear in the upper-

most sections of the formations, No sedimentary magnesites were noticed,

@) An article by Mawson and Sprigg (1950} appeared several months after the

script of this paper was in the hands of the Society, and certain changes in neomnenclarure

have been imade necessary. The formation names in parentheses are those appearing in

papers previous to that by Mawson and Sprigg (1950). -

740)

(d) WootsiEp Frat SHALES

Light grey well-banded shales and sandy shales outcrop on the cscarp-

ment just nerth of the Woolshed Flat road one mile W.N.W. of Rhynie.

Similar outcrops occur in most places where the Undalya Quartzite is able

to protect these friable sediments, They ate mostly too arenaceous to show

either good slaty cleavage or drag folds.

stratigraphically these shales include all the shales from the Rhynie

Sandstone to the Undalya Quartzite. In most places the Khynie Sandstune

appeers to pass almost directly into the Skillogalee Dolomite formation.

Elsewhere, however, (particularly N.E. of Undalya) the Skillogalee Dolomite

is a much narrower bed and is flanked on either side by several hundreds

of feet of Woolshed Flat Shales,

(e) Unbarya QuarTzITs

A large road-metal quarry has been cut in this formation at the bridge

over the Wakefield at Undalya. The rock is a well-bedded medium-grained

feldspathic white and cream quartzite, and occurs with niimerous minor

interbedded sandy, (?) carbonaceous and pyritic shales. In contrast ta the

Rhynie Sandstone this quartzite very rarely contains conspicuous bands of

heavy minerals. The only noteworthy concentration was seen as numerous

floaters (near in situ) near the crest of the eastern escarpment of the north

pitching incline 3 miles N.N.W. of Rhynie, Crossbedding is not rare and

slumping unknown, but graded bedding can be used to good effect as a

* sequence criterion, This quartzite was apparently laid down under more

placid conditions that the Rhynie Sandstane—indeed the black pyritic shaly

members suggest a partly stagnant environment.

The thickness of this formation is variable. A section along E-F through

the Wakefield Reserve gave a minimum thickness of 2,500 feet. West of

the Undalya the quartzites are shallow dipping and at least 2,500 fect thick.

There is possible thickening on the noses of the pitching folds and the west

limb of the regional north-pitching syncline is attenuated. In places it is

anly 500 feet thick,

Turther east a sandstone occurs which has been mapped as the equiva-

lent of the Undalya Quartzite. The Saddleworth Sandstone, as it could

be called, forms a prominent ridge on the west side of the River Gilbert

between Saddlewarth and Riverton. Certain members are gritty, but it is

characteristically a shaly sandstone, with considerable shaly intercalations,

Sketch section C-D shows the proposed interpretation of its stratigraphic

pusition, and further mention is made under the Auburn dolomites.

(f) Ausurw DoromitEs

Numerous dark-grey very fine-grained dense dolomites occur as bands

some 18 inches to two feet thick within well-bedded blue-grey dolomitic

silty shales and shaly sandstones which outcrop extensively near Auburn

and between Riverton and Saddleworth. In the west the formation is divided

by the Watervale Sandstone into upper (U_A.) and lower (L.A.) members:

that is, in the deeper waters to the east of Riverton the sandstone has “lensed

out” allowing the two dolomitic members to merge. The possibility of

repetition by faulting of the Undalya Quartzite and the Lower Auburn

Dolomites as the Watervale Sandstone and Upper Auburn dolomites

(respectively) has tiot been overlooked. In the limited time for thie recon-

naissance, however, no evidence for faulting was encountered and subsequent

study of the air photographs suggests that the succession is normal.

144

A fairly good section may be seen near the main road from Auburn to

Skillogalee. Cherty nodules with some limonitic pscydomorphs after mat-

casite are a feature of some of the dolomitic shales in the first big read-

cutting west of Auburn, Some of the shales look carbonaceous and generally

give the appearance of having been deposited in a quiescent poorly-aerated

marine enyifonment. (Similar leatures are well exposed in the first railway

cutting on the Clare railway one mile from Riverton, and also in the banks

of the Gilbert half a mile to the east.)

This road eventually passes down out of the Upper Auburn Dolomites

into the Watervale Sandstone, the variable nature of which is well shown

in the creek to the south of the road. Beneath the Watervale Sandstone

the Lower Auburn Dolomites begin as several well formed bands inter-

bedded in dark-grey dolomitic shales. An analysis (Table IT, No. 12 was made

of a two foot thick dolomite outcropping on the main road to Skillogalee

32 miles W.S.W. of Auburn (No, 7 of map).

Another analysis (No, 13, Table IT) was made of a dolomite from the

same formation where it outcrops in a small cutting on the main road 1}

miles south ef Auburn (No. 8 of map), Here the rock is a laminated and

somewhat contorted blue-grey dense fine-grained dolomite, There are con-

siderable quantities of limonitic and pyritic pseudomorphs after marcasile.

In the Riverton-Saddleworth area the Lower and Upper Auburn Dolo-

mites merge into one, Good exposures occur in road and rail cuttings in

the vicinity of {he two towns. An analysis is published (No. 14, Table 11)

of a typical dense dark-grey dolomite which outcrops near Saddleworth on

a aie road between Section 396 and 397, Hundred vf Saddleworth (No. 9

of map).

It is apparent from Table TE that the three new analyses are chetnically

very similar to typical members of the Beaumont Dolomites near Adelaide.

In hand specimen and field associations they cannot be differentiated.

In the east bank of the Gilbert 200 yards south of the railway bridge

which ig one mile north of Riverton, there occurs a bed several inches thick

of dull-white ooliti¢ limestone interbedded with typical dense blue-grey dolo-

mites and dolomitic shales.

{g} WATERVALE SANDSTONE

Tn the type locality alternating sandstones and sandy shales outcrop

in a ereek which runs parallel and south of the road to Skillogalee 34 miles

W.S.W, of Auburn, They may be seen to overlie stratigraphically the Lower

Auburn Dolomites, and about 2} miles from Auburn just south of the road

may be found grading into the Upper Auburn Dolomites, The nearest suit-

able place name for these sediments is Watervale. To the west of this town

the formation trends norihward to Clare, where certain more arenaceous

members are quarried as a freestone Most of the sandstone members in this

formation, however, contain a notable amount of clay, with plentiful detrital

muscovite in many places. This tends to give the rock a good fissility. Detrital

iron ores were not noted, but crossbedding and slumping are fairly common-

The formation becomes increasingly dolomitic both top and bottom as

is passes, respectively, into the Upper and Lower Auburn Delomites. It

lenses out towards Riverton (which is “offshore”) allowing the two dolomite

sections to merge,

(h) Mintaso Spanzs

Between the Auburn Dolomiles and the Gilbert Range Quartuites there

is a large development of light-grey, blue-grey and light-fawn shales, Their

ready disintegration into 4 rich soil has controlled the location of the best

142

wheat farms in the area. Natural outcrops are poor and considerable difficulty

was encountered in choosing a type section. Reasonable exposures exist

along the Section A-B but considerable thinning by squeezing between

Massive arenites is apparent. Another section along F-G is not so good

and strike faulting may occur beneath the plentiful soil cover.

oe eh

<0 /RIVERTON

Fig. 2, See Key to Wig. i

143

The lower half of the formation consists of a pale blue-grey calcareous shale

with minor silty and arenaceous members. Sly cleavage was rarely noted. The

upper kalf is more argillaceous but is still notably calcareous in places. No lime-

sturie members, however, were discovered, Slaty cleavage is fairly well

developed in the Clare region but elsewhere is poorly shown, The shale, of

lght-fawo and light-grey colour, has a marked banding not unlike that of

the Glen Osmond Slates near Adelaide, and the slight difference in grau

size renders it distinctly varyuid.

In ihis cannection it is significafit to recall that Jack recorded that

aceasional pebbles have been taken from the Mintaro slate quarries, and

suggested that it may indicate a relation to the Sturtian cillite: Mapping

now shows that the shales at Mintaro are close ta the base of the Gilbert

Range Subglacial Quartzites. If Howchin’s correlation with Tapley's Hill

Slates were toa he correct they should otcur above the quartzites.

Occasional narrow quartzite bands occur as members within the Mintaro

Shales. The best developed has been called the Leasingham Quartzite

member. This fawn feldspathic medium-grained sandstone is hest seen on

the crest of a low rise west of Auburn in Section 288, Hundred of Upper

Wakefield. A small buff sandstone was observed in a contorted area In main

road cutting 34 miles east of Riverton (Section 467, Hundred of Gilbert).

‘Two major quarries have been opened in the Mintaro Shales, One and a

half miles N. of Auburn (Section 216, Hundred of Upper Wakefield) is a

large “slaie’ quarry which has produced a good building stone (Jack 1923,

p. 35). Stratigraphically it is about 1,000 feet above the hase of formation.

A more important grotp of quarries exists about one mile west of Mintaro

where @ laminated shallow dipping blue-grey shale yields high-grade large

“slate slabs and flagstanes (ibid, p. 28). Stratigraphically these shales are

yery high in the formation and soon give way to the Gilbert Range Quastzites

and associated glacial sediments.

These white feldspathic quartzites (or sandstones) comprise a major

mapping unit in this area. They are resistant to weathering aiid form fair

outcrops which can be traced for tnany miles by means ot aerial photographs.

Immediately above ihe major and uppermost sandstone (there may be two

or more minor, probably lenticular, sandstone members) a tillite and associ-

aled Nuvieglacials occur, Owing to the ready erosion of the illite a careful

search for shed erratics may be necessary to confirm the identity of this

key sandstone formation,

Both Howehin (1927) and Segnit (1945) describe these sanidstanes as

occurring beneath the “Sturtian tillite”’ three miles west of Kapunda. a few

miles south of the area under discussion. Hossfeld (1934) was able to trace

this “subglacial quartizite” from the Tanunda area to the Gilbert Range.

In the time available the only section actually meastired over this forma-

tien was that to the S.E. af Clare along Section A-B. Here the Mintaro

Shales rive way suddenly to a 2 fuot-thick white feldspathic sandstone. Then

follows about 300 feet of shale and sandy shale identical with the Mintaro

Shales below. Then occurs the major arenite (about 250 feet)*, a dense

white feldspathic sandstone, Its resistant nature results in the prominent

delineation of the north-pitching syncline on the nose of which is Mount

Horrocks. No pebbles were seen in this sandstone,

() ‘This formation name seems te have been first used by Hossfeld (1934) in his

tkelcli section on p. 48.

() TInfortunately, during reméval from South Australia the author's last field qote-

book became displaced, hence only data already transterréd at that time io the mister

plan and drawn sections could be used for estimation of thicknesses along A-L,

144

(j) GvactaL AND FLUuviocLaciaL SEDIMENTS

It was only in the last stages of the reconnaissance that these were

discovered in the Clare region and the work had to be discontinued before

the group could be properly studied. The only section studied in any detail]

was that along A-B. On top of the Gilbert Range Quartzites about 400 feet

ADELAIDE REGION RIVERTON = CLARE REGION

TAPLEY HILL StATES

10,500 ft.

BELAIR GROUP

GLEN OSMOND STATES : a)

1550 ft a as occurs

LAr (LOVER MEMSERS)

HEACMONT DOLOMITES a ] 2,200 ft.

Fig. 3

145

of blue-grey sandy laminated shale occur. This is followed by ten feet of

Aluvioglactal grit and about 300 feet of non-bedded and poorly-bedded light-

grey tillite. Krratics of granite and gneiss are common and outnuumber those

of quartzite in this area, Occasional! glacial striac were observed, Above the

tillite ig an unknown thickness of well-laminated blue-grey sandy shales and

norma!) shales, After abaut 800 feet they pass under cultivated land reappear-

ifig on the east flank of the syncline some three miles away. It is suspected

that this large group af sediments is predominantly fluvioglacial.

(2) CoRRELATIONS

Figure 3 illustrates the main features of correspondence between the

Riverton-Clare region and the type area near Adelaide. However, a tew

features need comment,

(a) River WAKEFIELD Grove AnD RHYNIE (1LMENITIC) SANDSTONE

‘The ilmenitic sandstones of the type area are usually found unconform-

ably overlying the Older Precambrian metamorphic rocks as at Aldgate.

In the Riverton-Clare region, however, field work now indicates that a great

thickness of sediment lies comformably beneath a comparable ilmenitic sand-

stone, the Rhynie Sandstone. This reminds one of Sprigg’s 1945 record of

of a new group of alternating shales and sandstones in the Torrensian (Lower

Adelaide) series, Ile tentatively placed the new group above the “‘basal’*

fImenitic sandstone but was uncertain of the true stratigraphic position

Recent work by geologisis of the South Australian Geological Survey seems

to indicate that a large group of shales and sandy shales lies conformably

beneath an ilmenitic sandstone in several parts of the Mt, Lofty Ranges

(R. C. Sprigg, verbal communication, July, 1949.)

In addition, the author recalls that some of the feldspathic ilmemitic

sandstones of the Warren Reservoir area apparently are stratigraphically

above a considerable thickness of metasediments of a type corresponding to

the River Wakefield Group. Similarly, at the Little Gorge, Normanville, a

coarse ilmenitic feldspathic sandstone has been overturned but stratigraphi-

cally overlies phyllonitic and schistose rocks in a conformable manner. Thus

the unconformable break at the base of the late Proterozoic sediments is not

at the base of the ilmenitic sandstone in all cases as at Aldgate and West

Humbug Scrub. lt seems likely that “the original Archaeozoic floor to the

geosyncline was uneven, presenting a sedimentary environment of the Archi-

pelago type. In this manner rapid variations in sediment type and thicknesses

of basal or near basal units would be expected, As more sediments accumu-

lated on the sinking geosynclinal floor the effects of the original topographic

irregularities wuuld be neutralized,” (Sprigg 1946, p. 328.)

(b) SxkrLLoGALEe DoLomites

The cream Skillogalee Dolomites may be compared with the dolomites

of the Torrens Gorge, which comprise the cream-colored Castarnbul (Lower

Torrens) Dolomite, phyllites, and the blue-grey Montacute (Upper Torrens)

Dolomites, Of these, the Montacute (Upper Torrens) Dolomite is more im-

portant that the Castambul (Lower), In the Riverton-Clare region, however,

the bulk of the Skillogalee Dolomite formation comprises cream dolomites ;

phyllites are nearly absent and relatively meagre blue-grey dolomjtes occur

only near the top of the formation and only in some localities, Sedimentary

magnesiles were not recognised.

146

{c) The Ausurn Dotomzrras (bifurcated in the west)

follow the Undalya Quartzite which is correlated with the Stonyfell (Thick)

Quartzite. Analyses in Table II indicate the remarkable chemical similarity

of these dolomites and the Beaumont Dolomites which are not So extensively

developed in the Adelaide region, Sedimentary magnesites were not

recognised,

(d) The Minrago Suares, Giunerr Rance Quantzires

and glacial and fuvioglacial sediments are probably contemporanedaus with the

Glen Csmond Shale, the Glen Osmond Quartzite and Sturtian Tillite of the

type dred.

About 9,000 feet of sediments have been recorded in the Torrensian

(Lower Adelaide} Series in the type area (Mawson and Sprigg, 1950, p71).

The Riverton-Clare region gives an approximate measure of the order 6f

30,000 fet, This estimation wiil undoubtedly be modified on completion of

detailed mapping but it nevertheless indicates a remarkable increase in this

region.

Concerning the Flinders Ranges Sprigg (1946, p. 328) has suggested

that Mawson's Magnesite Series (Mawson, 1941) is contemporaneous with

the Torrens Dolomites. The mapping in the Riverton-Clare region appears

to confirm this view, The remarkable development of sandstone and con-

glomeraic (in part ilmenitic), so consistently found beneath the Magnesite

Series, is considered by Mawsun (1947) to be the basal formation of the

Proterozoic sequence (in the Flinders Ranges). However, in view of this

recenl mapping the author is not happy about this conclusion, The large

development of the River Wakefield Group must be taken inta account, and

need for careful investigation of the Clare-Spalding area is indicated,

Hossfeld in his extensive work on the north-eastern Mt. Lofty Ranges

(1954) has suggested fundamental changes in the Adelaide Series as first

described by Howchin. Two unconformable series are erected, viz., the Para

and the Narcoota Series. Hossfeld's Para Series appears ta correspond fairly

well with the Torrensian (Lower Adelaide) Series as now defined by

Mawson and Sprigg (1950); it outcrops in the Adelaide region and cto the

west of the Humbug Scrub Archaean block and continues north of Gawler.

Like the Para Series, the Narcoota Series has a basal ilmenitic sandstone,

but this is thought by Hossfeld to correspond to the Glen Osmond Quartzites,

The setjuence above this “basal” sandstone ig reasonalily comparable with the

Sturtian (Middle Adelaide) Series of the type area. Im the Clare region,

however, a complete sequence (without unconformity) is indicated from the

lowest parts of the Adelaide System (Hossfeld's Para Series) up through the

Gilbert Range Quartzite into a tillite and the equivalent of Tapley’s Hill

Slates. These upper formations are in Hassfeld’s Narcoota Series, and the

Gilbert Range Quartzites which were used as a marker bed in this area have

been traced south as far as Greenock which is near the centre of Hossfeld's

map. Tlis map, however, does not clearly show the relation of this important

bed to the ilmenitic “basal” Narcoota beds near by, nor has the ilmenitic

sandstone been discovered north of Greenock in proximity to the Gilbert

Range Quartzites.

Grave difficulties of this type arise when an attempt is made to integrate

Hossfeld’s broader findings “and those on the western margins of the

geosyncline,

It. TERTIARY

(2) Laterite has been observed in a few places on the eastern side of the

Gilbert Range. It has formed over sandstone and tillite on a gentle easterly-

147

dipping poorly-peneplaned landsurface. This material was probably formed

during Miocene or Pliocene times.

( b) Numerous coarse conglomerates occur as remnant aprons along the Alma

Fault Scarp, which appears to have been a prominent physiographic feature

from (al least) early Pleistocene,

B, TECTONICS

Sprigg (1946) has already outlined the broader features of the Palaeozaic

orogeny as it affected the Mt, Lofty Ranges, particularly near Adelaide, In

that region both folding and faulting Were much more intense than in the

Riverton-Clare area.

In this area the Proterozoic sediments were thrown into a series af

meridionally trending folds of considerable magnitude, The peculiar variation

in trend of fold axes, and the variation of dip of axial “planes” suggests that

pure compressional force from the east would be an insufficient cause for

the fold pattern, In the map the trend lines of the Gilbert Range Quarizites,

the Undalya Quartzite and the Rhynie Sandstone indicate that in the Clare

region there is a major drag on the normally meridional fold axes. This has

been brought about by movement of the western area (near Blyth) south-

wards and downwards relative to the castern areas (near Waterloo) which

have apparently moved northwards and upwards. This would account for

the prevatling shallow northerly pitch of the major folds. Further, the strange

basin slructure west of Rhynie and north-easterly trending 5.-W, pitching

anticline to the west of Undalya are to be expected from such relative maye-

ments near the nose of ihe major drag.

Palaeozoic faulting is less important in the Riverton-Clate region than in

the vicinity of Adelaide, The faulting does not appear to interrupi ihe section

fo any great degree. There appears ta be a normal fault on the west side of

the Gilbert Range. -Minor silver-lead-copper mineralization took place along

this zone of weakness.

A fault has been postulated between Khynie and Riverton. On strati-

graphic evidence the east black has been downthrown about 1,000 Jeet. The

most important fault zone in the area is the Alma Fault (so named from its

appearance in the Hundred of Alma), Later movement in the Kosciusko

phase (late Tertiary) has given rise to the notable fault scarp which forms

the western margin of the Ranges proper, Abundant cellular quartz floaters

occur in proximity to the fault zone and suggests that it was an original

reverse fault which has in more recent times reopened as a normal fault,

‘Time was not available to study criteria in the field, but Sprigg (1945) has

pointed out similar phetiomena in the Adelaide tegion,

C. ECONOMIC GEOLOGY

No Palaeozoic granite occurs anywhere in the area, and the degree of regional

metamorphism is negligible, Small silver-lead-copper sulphide vein-fillings occur

in association with the Gilbert Range fault zone. An old copper mine is

reported in a blue-grey dolomite about six miles west of Rhynie near the

River ‘Wakefield (Section 275, Hundred of Alma),

Numerous small auriferous quartz veins occur meridionally throughout the

Rhynie Sandstone and other arenites, especially in the Clare region where

the folding has been more intense. These may well represent concentrations

im “gash veins” of detrital gold in the sandstones. In themselves none is

payable, but most of the meagre gold of the area has been won from

associated alluvial depnsits. The Mintaro area has produced most gold, and

148

prospectors have found small amounts in many places along the Wakefield

and its major tributaries.

Tale is often found in small quantities in crests of tightly folded anticlines

in the Skillogalee Dolomites (¢.g. road metal quarry } mile W.N.W, of

Rhynie).

Magnesite was obtained as a valuable by-product of a dolomite road metal

quarry at Saddleworth. It occurs in the blue sections of the Skillogalee

Dolomite, and probably represents the Montacute (Upper Torrens) Dolo-

mite which is noted elsewhere for its weathering to magnesite, and (in

the Flinders Ranges) for its sedimentary magnesite members. No payable

sedimentary magnesites have been discovered in this area.

Road Metals—Quarties are found in all of the major arenaceous formations.

The Skillogalee Dolomites are a popular stone, especially in the Rhynie area.

Building Stones—R, L. Jack (1923) has described the major building

stones of the area. Freestones are plentiful—indeed must of the feldspathic

arenaceous formations have been quarried with varying success for this

purpose,

Highgrade flagstones or slates ate still quarried at Mintaro, These occur high

up in the thick Mintaro Shale formation which appears to be the equivalent

nat of the Tapley’s Hill Slate but of the Glen Osmond Shales. A large quarry

exists in the same formation north of Auburn. Other formations have had

limited use in several towns in the district.

Tn the latter stages of this reconnaissance a group of senior students

of the University of Adelaide assisted in the Rhynie area. Outstanding

among these were Messrs. Rowley, Reynolds, Dore, Lowe and Richardson.

Mr. Rk. C. Sprigg was able to arrange through the South Australian Mines

Department for nine partial analyses of dolomites to be undertaken. Some

of the drafting costs were met by Commonwealth Research Grant admin-

istered by the University of Western Australia.

6. REFERENCES

Barnes, T. A., and Kreeman, A. W. 1934 “The Blue Metal limestone and its

associated beds.” Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 58, 80-85

Ferner, Caartes 1931 “South Australia—a Geographical Study.” Whit-

combe and Tombs, Adelaide

Hossrermm, P. S. 1934 “The Geology of part of the Northern Mount Lofty

Ranges.” Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 59, 16-67

Howe, W. 1906 “The Geology of the Mount Lofty Ranges, Pt. IL”

Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust., 30, 227-262

Howcutn, W. 1915 “A geological sketch map with descriptive notes on the

Upper and Lower Torrens Limestones in the type district.” Trans. Roy,

Soc. S. Aust,, 39, 1-15

Howcurn, W, 1927 “The Sturtian Tillite in the neighbourhood of Eden, and

in the Hundreds of Kapunda, Neales, English, South Australia.” Trans.

Roy. Soc. S. Aust.; 51, 330-349

Howcrtn, W. 1929 “The Geology of South Australia.” Gillingham, Adelaide

Jack, R, L. 1923 “The Building Stones of South Australia.” Bull. 10, Geol.

Survey of S. Aust.

Mawson, D. 1941 “Middle Proterozoic Sediments in the neighbourhood of

Copley?! Trans. Roy. Soc, S. Aust,, 65, (2), 304-311

149

Mawson, D. 1947 “The Adelaide Series as developed along the western

margin of the Flinders Ranges.” Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 71, (2),

259-280

Mawson, D., and Spricc, R. C. 1950 “Subdivision of the Adelaide System.”

Aust. Journ. Science, 13, No. 3, 69-72

Seenit, R. W. 1939 “The Pre-Cambrian-Cambrian Succession.” Bull. 18,

Geol. Survey of S. Aust.

Spricc, R. C. 1945 “Reconnaissance Geological Survey of portion of the West-

ern Escarpment of the Mount Lofty Ranges.” Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust.,

70, (2), 313-347

THE MORPHOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENT OF THE EMBRYO OF

GRYLLULUS COMMODUS WALKER (ORTHOPTERA: GRYLLIDAE)

BY HELEN M. BROOKES

Summary

The embryo arises on the dorsal surface of the egg near the posterior pole. After 48 hours at 25.2°C

it is completely immersed in the yolk and becomes greatly convoluted and twisted. In the pre-

revolution stages it is separated from the yolk dorsally by a membrane. After revolution the embryo

is closed dorsally by the amnion while engulfment of yolk into the mid-gut proceeds. Definitive

dorsal closure takes place after about 94% days. A cuticle is secreted over the entire surface of the

body and is shed shortly after eclosion. The development of body form in embryos incubated for

specified periods is described and illustrated.

150

THE MORPHOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENT OF THE EMBRYO OF

GRYLLULUS COMMODUS WALKER (ORTHOPTERA: GRYLLIDAE)

By Heren M. Brookes *

[Read 8 November 1951]

SUMMARY

Vhe embryo arises on the dorsal surface of the egg near the posterior

pole. After 48 hours at 25°2°C. it is completely immersed in the yolk and

becomes greatly convoluted and twisted. In the pre-revolution stages it ts

separated from the yolk dorsally by a membrane. After revolution the em-

bryo is closed dorsally by the amnion while engulfment of yolk into the

mid-gut proceeds, Definitive dorsal closure takes place after about 94 days,

A cuticle is secreted over the entire surface of the body and is shed shortly

after eclosion, The development of body form in embryos incubated for

specified periods is described and illustrated.

During blastokinesis the embryo twice passes about the posterior pole

of the egg. Revolution of the embryo is defined and described in the living

egg. It occurs after 64 days’ incubation at 25°2°C. and is achieved without

apparent active movements of the embryo.

The eclosion of the nymph from the egg and from the emmbryotiic cuticle

is described.

INTRODUCTION

During experimental studies of the biology and ecology of Gryllulus

commodus now being made at this laboratory (Browning, 1952), the need

has arisen for some knowledge of the morphological development of the

embryo in a controlled environment. In this paper the movements of the

embryo during blastokinesis and the development of the external form of

the embryo are described for diapause-free eggs which were incubated in

damp sand at a constant temperature of 25-2°C.

MATERIAL AND METIIODS

About 200 adult crickets were collected in March, 1950, fram cracks

in soil at the Waite Institute and put into cages containing trays of clean,

damp sand. When it became apparent that the females were ovipositing

freely fresh trays of sand were introduced into the cage and at the end of

ene hour these were remuved, the eggs sieved out under water and fixed

within half an hour, Similarly, eggs not more than four and a half hours old

were abtained and fixed. These served for the study of the very early stages.

A large number of eggs not more than eight hours old were obtained

in this manner and these were placed in damp sand at 12°8°C. for 30 days

to permit the completion of diapause (Browning, 1952), At the end of this

period these eggs were transferred to a thermostat held at 25°2°C. A sample

of about 100 eges was taken from these at the time of transfer to the in-

cubation temperature and further samples were taken at intervals of 8 hours

thereafter for 3} days. After this samples were taken every 24 hours until

hatching occurred aiter 164 days. These eggs served for the study of all but

the early stages of development (0 to 8 hours old).

* Waite Agricultural Research Institute, The University of Adelaide

Trans. Roy. Soc. 5. Aust., 75, September 1952

isl

There were in all twenty-three samples of eggs fixed, representing

23 different stages. It was not practicable to assess a mean stage of deyelop-

ment for a sample but it was comparatively easy to recognise a modal stage

of development for each group, i.e. the stage which had been reached by

the majority of embryos in the sample. This stage was taken as character-

istic; the twenty-three stages which were determined in this way have been

illustrated in figure 3 and numbered 1 to 23 for easy reference elsewhere in

the text. Similarly a number of stages in blastokinesis were recognised. These

have been illustrated in figure 1 and designated by the letters A to R.

In any sample of eggs the modal group was quite well defined, usually

including more than half the eggs, but there were always some embryos

lagging behind. Sometimes there were a few in advance of the stage reached

by the majority. In this the eggs resemble those of the grasshopper Melanophis

differentials (Slifer, 1932b). For example, in a sample of sixty-five eggs. in-

cubated for 44 days at 25°2°C., forty-nine had reached the same stage of

development (figure 3, stage 11), four were in stage 10, five in stage 8, two

in stage 7, while five were one day in advance (stage 12). The variability

found in each sample is shown in Table I below.

TABLE IL.

Showing the distribution of development in samples of eggs imcuhated for

specified periods at 25°C, The embryos have heen classified into three

classes: (a) those behind the modal stage of development, (b) those in the

modal stage, (c) those in advance of the modal stage.

Time Percentage eggs Time Percentage eggs

at Stages Modal Stages at Stages Modal Stages

25.2°C behind stage ahead 252°C behind stage ahead

0 hours 36 45 18 ok days 23 48 29

8, 15 81 4 7* 33 67 —

16 ,, 26 55 19 8 34 49 17

24, 18 71 il % 44 56 —

32) Cs; 60 40 _— 104 —«,, 21 79 _—

40, 42 58 _ iit , 8 92 —

4 C«, 58 42 —_— izs, 7? 93 —

56 52 48 — it, 6 a4 —

oF, 67 33 — 144, 2 98 —_

33.days 37 63 153, 3 07 —

4), 17 75 8g 16}, 7 95 —

5+, 21 79 —_

Atter dissolving the chorion from the shell in a 3 per cent. solution of

sodium hypochlorite, according to the method described by Slifer (1945)

the eggs were fixed in Bouin’s picro-formol in a water bath at 60°C. for

twenty minutes. Whole eggs were stained in bulk in aqueous borax carmine

(Grenacher’s) for from one to twenty-four hours and destained in acid alcohol

(0°5% HCl in 70% alc.) for from one to two weeks. Tt was found necessary

to slice the shell in the region of the embryo to allow penetration of the

stain, Sections were cut at 6 » and 8 ag, stained in Mayer’s acid haemalum

and in Delafield’s haematoxylin, and counterstained in aqueous eosin,

All drawings were made using a camera. lucida.

OBSERVATIONS

Tur Ecc

When first laid the ege of Grylluius commodus is about 2 mm. long,

slender, slightly convex dorsally and tapering towards the posterior pole.

152

The shell consists of a semi-opaque chorion at first, but a tough transparent

cuticle is laid down below the chorion very soon after the egg is laid and

this increases in thickness for some time. A transverse line of weakness in

the cuticle near the anterior end indicates the junction of the “cap” which

is usually pushed off during eclosion. A smaller cap occurs at the posterior

end; it is: possible that this covers the micropylar area, although the micro-

pyles were not observed. The length of the egg may increase by about fifty

per cent. by the time the embryo is ready to hatch.

The yolk is finely granular. A central longitudinal “core” is apparent

in eggs 14 hours old and persists for at least sixteen hours. It is straight

when viewed anteriorly but curves towards the venttal surface at the middle

of the egg. This resembles the “condensation cytoplasmique interne”

described by Darbois (1950) in Crsdlus campestris, G, bimaculatus and G.

bermudensis, In transverse sections of eggs up to 14 hours and 44 hours

old the “core” is seen to consist of yolk particles that are smaller than the

surrounding yolk, Later, the yolk particles become grouped into larger

polyhedral masses.

A B Cc D E F G H {

40 64

Stages reached by the embryo of G. commodus during blastokinesis when

incubated at 25-2" C, for varying periods.

P q

BLASTOKINESIS

The term blastokinesis refers to all the movements of the embryo by which

it changes orientation in the egg. Two stages in blastokinesis have been

recognised—anatrepsis and katatrepsis. During anatrepsis the embryo moves

tail first towards the anterior end of the egg; during katatrepsis it moves

head frst towards and around the posterior pole and then ascends towards

the anterior pole. Revolution is the term used by Wheeler (1893) and adopted

here to describe that part of katatrepsis in which the embryo ruptures the

ammnio-serosa and reyolves around the posterior pole (fig. I, stages M-O and

plate 1).

ANATREPSIS

The embryo of G. commodus is of the immersed type. It arises on the

dorsal surface of the egg near the posterior pole. During the first 16 hours

the embryo moves tail first around the posterior pole, usually in a superficial

153

position (stages A-C). Gradually it sinks into the yolk until, by the 40th

hour, only the most posterior part remains at the surface (stages D-F).

By the 48th hour it has become immersed (stage G). Once free in the yolk

the embryo moves towards the anterjor pole; in some cases the tail may

reach about one-fifth of the length of the egg [rom the anterior pole.

Irregular convolutions along its length and a spiral twisting suggest thai

the embryo is capable of vigorous movement (stages H-I). Eventually it

straightens out except for the posterior abdominal segments and its ventral

surface comes to face the dorsal surface of the egg (stage L). Such activity

renders it difficult to determine at what point anatrepsis ends and katatrepsis

begins; certainly the embryo has begun katatrepsis by the end of 44 days

(stage K).

Fig. 2

Posterior portion of the egg of G. commodus

showing the embryo about to revolve

around the posterior pale. am, ammion;

am + se, amnio-serosay an, antenna; ¢.am,_

cephalic amnion; Ir, labrum; P.P., pos-

ferior pole: se, serosa; sh, shell; y, yolk.

as fin

KATATREPSIS

During katatrepsis the yolk contracts from the posterior pole, leaving

a clear space filled with fluid, As the embryo advances toward the posterior

pole a translucent area appears on the dorsal side of the egg where the yolk

is apparently being liquefied between the amnion and serosa, At 64 days the space

between the yolk and the posterior pole occupies about one-sixth of the

length of the egg (stage M), The amnion fuses with the serosa to form the

ammnio-serosa which is at this stage greatly distended with amniotic fluid.

The embryo is ready to revolve when the protocephalic lobes are visible

through the transparent aninio-serosa at the posterior boundary of the yolk

(fig. 2),

REVOLUTION

Reyolttion of the embryo was observed at room temperature in several

living eggs from which the chorion had been dissolved. An embryo in the

stage shown tn Fig. 2 touk ahout three hours to move itto a position where

the protocephalic lobes and labrum press against the amnio-serosa. So great

was this pressure that the labrum was forced back against the body and

the amnio-serosa stretched into a deep bulge by the protocephalic lobes.

After about thirty minutes the labrim suddenly swung downward, indicating

that the amnio-serosa had been ruptured. Revolution proceeded rapidly

in the earlier part. Within five minutes the protocephalic lobes, antennae

and mouthparts had in turn emerged from the yolk into the amniotic fluid

at the posterior pole. The yolk had contracted by about one-quarter of the

length of the egg. Revolution is completed when the yentral surface of the

embryo faces the ventral surface of the egg and the abdomen has straight

ened ont (stage O). The whole process of revolution was completed in about

twelve hours (plate tx),

154

B HOURS

16 HOURS 24 HOURS

32 HOURS

River

‘5

6% pays 7% nays

Fig. 3

The development of body form in the embryo of G, commodus. Each stage corresponds

to the stage in Fig. 1 incubated for the same period. Stage 13 represents an embryo

in the course of revolution, from which the yolk has been dissected away, Fig. I4a is

the lateral view of stage 14, All stages drawn to scale.

ab, abdominal segment; an, antenna; ce, cercus; ddc, definitive dorsal closure; e, eye;

esp, eye-spot; Ib, labium; Ip, labial palp; Ir, labrum; md, mandibular segment; mx,

maxillary segment; mxp, maxillary palp; pc, protocephalic lobe; pde, provisional

dorsal closure; ph, protocephalic region; pl, pleuropodium; pt, protocormic region;

se, serosa; st, stomodacum; th, thoracic scgment; y, yolk.

155

95 DAYS

10% gays 13 DAYS

124% DAYS 13% pays i4% pars 16% pays

Fig. 3 (continwed)

No active movements of the body walls or appendages were observed during

revolution. In this G. commiodus differs from Melanoplus differentialts in which

revolution is accomplished by vigorous movements of the embryo (Slifer,

1932a).

In the final stages of katatrepsis the embryo continues to move towards

the anterior end of the egg while growing in length until the head reaches

the anterior pole (stages P-R). Thus, during blastokinesis, the embryo has

twice passed about the posterior pole of the egg.

156

EcLosion

The head of the embryo pushes against the anterior end of the egg

until the cap is forced off and the insect emerges. Alternatively, a split in

the shell may occur in the region of the back of the head, As the embryo

heaves the split is enlarged and the thoracic segments emerge, followed

by the head and antennae, The body bends backward and forward until the

insect is freed. The teeth on the chitinous armature of the labrum do not

appear to aid hatching (c.f. Cappe de Baillon, 1922).

Immediately after eclosion the nymph casts off the embryonic cuticle.

This is accomplished by vigorous expansion and contraction of the body,

causing a split in the cervical region. Rhythmical contractions begin in the

cerci and sweep upward so that the cervical vesicle collapses, the vertex

and labrum expand, and the vesicle expands. The tear increases in length.

Gradually the thorax and head are withdrawn and the appendages tn

sheathed, Finally the embryonic cuticle is kicked off by the hind legs and

the nymph is free.

DEVELOPMENT or Bopy Form

Embryos taken from the sample of eggs which have heen stored at

12°8°C. for 30 days are about 0°05 mm. long, roughly pear-shaped with an

anterior median notch, and slightly convex (fig. 3, stage 1).

After incubation for 16 hours a constriction forms which divides the

embry into a protecephalic and a protocormic region. Soon protocephalic

lobes appear; they expand laterally and begin to curve backward (stage +),

‘The protocormic region, or “tail” lengthens until the embryo ig about half

to two-thirds as long as the egg (stage 5).

Primary segmentation of the embryo begins after 32 hours’ incubation

and proceeds gradually from the anterior to the posterior end (stage 6).

By the time the embryo has become immersed in the yolk (48 hours) primary

segmentation is complete, The labrum has developed into a globular swelling

between the protocephalic lobes, leaving the stomodaeum exposed; the

antennal, mandibular, two maxillary, three thoracic and elevén abdominal

segments have hecome demarcated. The embryo apparently decreases in

length due to convolution and ventral flexure of the posterior abdominal

segments, but it begins to widen as secondary segmentation takes place

(stage 9},

The appendages of the first and eleventh abdominal segments persist as

pleurspodia and cerci respectively. The pleuropodia are of the evaginate

type; they develop as long, slender, glandular structures arising laterally from

the pleural membrane of the first abdominal segment by means of a narrow

stalk (plate x, fig. C). The cerci develop into slender conical structures

lying close to the ventral wall of the body,

After incubation for 54 days, when the embryo is approaching reyolu-

tion, the appendages have assumed their characteristic form. The labrum,

which has grown downward to conceal the stomodaeum, shows a transverse

groove in the middle and a median notch on the posterior margin. The

posterior abdominal segments remain flexed forward, The embryo at this

stage occupies about half of the length of the egg (fig. 1, M).

After reyolution is completed the embryo has increased greatly in thick-

ness due to partial engulfment of the yolk; about half of the yoik is enclosed

after incubation for 6 days (fig, 1, O and fig. 3, stage 14). At this stage

the free margins of the body wall begin ta fuse in the mid-dorsal line.

157

beginning at the posterior end. The first traces of eye-pigment appear as

an orange streak, The abdomen straightens out, with the cerci lenthening

and tying along the ventral surface of the body. The yolk is completely

engulfed after 94 days, when the embryo has grown to occupy about seven-

eighths of the length of the egg. A cuticle is secreted by the embryo over

the entire surface of the body at this stage so that the appendages are

enveloped individually, The eyes are pigmented light brown with their

tnargins clearly defined, A pair of fine black lines marks the chitinous thick-

ening in the embryonic cuticle at the lateral margins of the labrum. The

pleuropodia have grown to about one-quarter of the length of the embryo

(plate x, fig. d). The embryo has attained its full length after about 104

ays’ incubation.

Changes occurring during the next six days consist mainly of increasing differ-

entiation and pigmentation of the body parts. Am embryo incubated for 114

days (stage 19) shows light brown pigmentation of the labrum. A transverse

reddish-brown band appears on the cerci, By the end of 143 days’ incubation

pigmentation tn the head region is extensive. The chitinous armature of

the labrum bears numerous forwardly-projecting teeth and is equally

developed on cach lateral margin. In this G, commodus resembles Gryllus

campestris and Gryllomorpha dalmatina but differs From Nesmobius sylvestris in

which the armature is fully developed only on the right side (Cappe de

Baillon, 1922), An embryo incubated for 164 days is ready to hatch. The

head and face are mottled light brown, the eyes black, the mandibular teeth

reddish-brawn and the lateral margins of the labrum black. All the spines

and bristles that inyest the embryo may be seen adpressed flat beneath the

transparent embryunic cuticle. Fine black bristles encircle the antennal

segments, giving them a uniformly dark appearance, and strong black spines

outline the legs. The posterior abdominal segments are pale reddish-brown

with a brown band across the cerci, Rows of black bristles occur dorsally

on the anterior and posterior margins of the thoracic segments. A row of

brawn hristles marks the posterior margin of each abdominal segment.

DorsaL CLOSURE

The embrys in the pre-revulution stage is separated from the yolk

dorsally. When a living embryo was dissected from the egg in Ringer's

solution a delicate membrane was observed extending over the dorsal surface

im a manner resembling the ventral amnion. It appears to extend from the

blind end of the stomodaeum to the proctodaeum, but was not seen posterior

to this. In section the menibrane is seen enclosing non-cellular material

abutting on the inner side of the embryo and forming an intact harrier to

the yolk (plate x, fg. a), This structure resembles the “ental membrane”

described by Miller (1940) in the embryo of the stonefly Pteronarcys proteus

and that described by Roonwal (1937) as the “first provisional dorsal

closure” in Locusta migratoria, lt is not known at which stage in G, commodus

the membrane is laid down.

At the time when revolution has just been completed the body walls

have met in the mid-dorsal line and “closed” the embryo in the posterior fifth

of the body. For the remainder of its length it is still trough-like (fig. 3,

stage 14a). The inside surface of the embryo is cayered by the membrane

described in the preceding paragraph, The amnion, haying turned inside out,

now forms a temporary dorsal wall of the embryo (“second provisional

dorsal closure’* of other authors). The space between these two membranes

is the incipient mid-gut and it now contains about half of the yolk (plate x,

fig. bj), The true body walls continue to grow around the incipient mid-gut

158

beginning at the posterior end and meeting in the mid-dorsal line to com-

plete the definitive dorsal closure of the embryo. The final stage in this

process is illustrated in fig. 4. It occurs after about 94 days’ incubation at

25°2°C,

Actiye movement within the embryo ts seen for the first time at stage

14. Waves of contraction which seem to be initiated at the posterior end

surge upward along the free lateral margins of the body wall! to the head.

The abdominal segments expand and contract rhythmically. The appendages

do not exhibit independent movement.

Fig. 4

Anterior portion of the egg of G. commodus

showing the final stage in engulfment of

yolk and contraction of the serosa. A.P.,

anterior pole: ec, embryonic ciiticle; se,

serosa; sh, shell; y, yolk,

OS (7/71.

CONTRACTION OF THE SEROSA

The serosa, which lines the shell and encloses the yolk gradually con-

tracts from the posterior pole as the yolk presumably becomes assimilated by

the growing embryo (fig. 1, K-M). By the time the embryo is ready to

revolve the serosa has contracted by about one-sixth of the length of the

egg. After rupture of the amnio-serosa in front of the labrum the serosa

remains attached to the ammfion at the top of the protocephalic lobes

(cephalic amnion, fig. 2), The serosa, now open at the posterior end, shrinks

towards the anterior end of the egg. After revolution, the open rim of the

serosa adheres to the embryo ventrally by means of cephalic amnion and

dorsally by the remainder of the everted amnion, which temporarily forms

a dorsa! closure. Here the serosa thickens and makes a horizontal con-

striction about the yolk (fg. 1, O and fig. 3, stage 14). As the head of the

embryo approaches the anterior pole the serosa becomes thickened and

reduced in area until it forms a cap-like structure over the un-enclosed yolk

at the head of the embryo, In a stained preparation the nuclei of the serosal

cells are seen tightly packed together as the last of the yolk is being enclosed

in the mid-gut (fig. 4). Finally the serosa is withdrawn into the head at the

junction of the coronal and occipital sutures.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

The author gratefully acknowledges her indebtedness to Dr. T. QO,

Browning for his guidance, advice and criticism throughout the work. Mr.

K. P. Phillips made the photographs in text figures and plates.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1952 Vol. 75, Plate

oi age

poate:

The embryo in a living egg of Gryllulus commodus photographed at

various intervals during revolution.

The protocephalic lobes and labrum emerging from the yolk and projecting

freely into the fluid at the posterior end of the egg.

After 20 minutes at about 18° C. the antennae hang freely in the fluid. The

ege has accidentally rolled slightly so that the mouthparts are seen ventrally.

After 50 minutes the maxillary palps have emerged from the yolk, followed

by the labial palps.

After 75 minutes the mouthparts are free and the first pair of legs are emerg-

ing from the yolk.

After 170 minutes the head has reached half-way up the ventral side of the

egg; the mouthparts, legs and pleuropodia are free; the remainder of the

abdomen is being withdrawn from the yolk.

After 280 minutes the embryo is in the final stages of revolution. The

abdomen is beginning to straighten out as the head moves towards the anterior

pole. The everted amnion encloses portion of the yolk dorsally.

‘Trans. Roy, Soe. S. Aust., 1952 Vol. 75, Plate X

Fig.

Provisional dorsal closure and pleuropodia in Gryllulus commeodus.

a Transverse section of an egg (stage 11) through the embryo in the region of

r¢

the first leg, showing the inner side of the embryo separated from the yolk

dorsally by a membrance. X110.

Transverse section of an egg (stage 14) through the embryo in the region of

the labrum and maxillary palps. The yolk is enclosed in the incipient mid-gut,

which is bounded dorsally by the amnion, forming a provisional dorsal closure.

110.

Transverse section of an egg (stage 14) through the embryo to show the way

the pleuropodia arise. Note the slender stalk and the large, widely-spaced

nuclei in the wall of the pleuropodium. X110.

A fully-developed pleuropodium adhering to the transparent shell of an egg

incubated for 123 days, showing the point of attachment of the stalk.

an, antenna; dde, definitive dorsal closure; Ir, labrum; m, membrane covering the

dorsal side of the embryo; mxp, maxillary palp; pde, provisional dorsal closure; pl,

pleurepodium; se, serosa; stk, stalk of pleuropodium; y, yolk.

139

REFERENCES

Browninc, T. O. 1952 The influence of temperature on the completion of

diapause in the eggs of Gryllulus commodus Walker. Aust. J. Sci Res.,

B., 5, 112-127

Capps bE Baitton, P, 1922 Contribution anatomique et physiologique a Pétude

de la reproduction chez les locustiens et les grilloniens. IJ. La ponte et

l'éclosion chez les grilloniens—conclusions générales. La Cellule, 32, 7-

193

Darpors, M. 1950 Comparaison des oeufs de trois especes de Gryllus et de

leurs hybrides. Bull. biol. France et Belgique, 84, 76-100

Mutter, A. 1940 Embryonic membranes, yolk cells and morphogenesis of the

stonefly Pteronarcys proteus Newman. Ann, ent. Soc. Amer., 33, 437-

476

RoonwaL, M, L. 1937 Studies in the embryology of the African migratory

locust, Locusta migratoria miyratorioides Reiche and Frm. II, Organo-

geny. Roy. Soc. Lond., Phil. Trans. (B), 227, 175-244

Suiuver, E. H. 1932a Insect development. ITI. Blastokinesis in the living grass-

hopper egg. Biol. Zbl., 52, 223-229

Suirer, E. H. 1932b Insect development. 1V. External morphology of grass-

hopper embryos of known age and with a known temperature history.

J. Morph., 53, 1-9

Suirer, E. H, 1945 Removing the shell from living grasshopper eggs. Science,

102, 282

Wueever, W. M. 1893 Contribution to insect embryology. J. Morph., 8, 1-160

PRECAMBRIAN TILLITES OF THE EVERARD RANGES, NORTH-

WESTERN SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY ALLAN F. WILSON

Summary

An unmetamorphosed Late Proterozoic succession begins with the Moorilyanna conglomerate. This

fluvioglacial formation may be correlated with Ayers Rock and Mt. Olga on the northern flank of

the Musgrave-Warburton Block, and the Sturt tillite near Adelaide. The reddish Chambers Bluff

tillite occurs several thousands of feet above these basal beds, and may be correlated with the

Elatina tillite in the Flinders Ranges. As the Mt. Chandler quartites are sub-horizontal, and overlie

unconformably the Chambers Bluff tillite, they are not Nullagine, but most likely Ordovician.

160

PRECAMBRIAN TILLITES EAST OF THE EVERARD RANGES,

NORTH-WESTERN SOUTH AUSTRALIA

[Read 8 November 1951]

By Attan F, Witson*

SUMMARY

An unmetamorphosed Late Proterozoic succession begins with the

Moorilyanna conglomerate. This fluvioglacial formation may be correlated

with Ayers Rock and Mt. Olga on the northern flank of the Musgrave—

Warburton Block, and the Sturt tillite near Adelaide. The reddish Chambers

Bluff tillite occurs several thousands of feet above these basal beds, and may

be correlated with the Elatina tillite in the Flinders Ranges. As the Mt.

Chandler quartites are sub-horizontal, and overlie unconformably the

Chambers Bluff tillite, they are not Nullagine, but most likely Ordovician.

ms w WELL, "

SENG 08 5 oth, ¢ GRANITE BD

EVERARD ' WEVERARD PARK"

RANGES

Fig. 1

Sketch map to illustrate approximate distribution cast of the Everard Ranges

of (?) Upper Cretaceous (crossed rtiling), (?) Ordovician (vertical ruling),

Proterozoic (oblique ruling), and -Archaeozoic Systems (unruled, but also

includes some sandplain),

INTRODUCTION

Lockhart Jack in 1915 was the first to recognise a tillite near the Everard

Ranges, Central Australia. He correlated it with the Sturt tillite near

Adelaide, and as such this would be the most hortherly occurrence of Pre-

cambrian tillite known in Australia. (At the time of his feport the Sturt

tilliile was considered to be Lower Cambrian in age,)

It was to investigate his tillite claim that a hurried trip was made to

the locality in February 1949 while the author was on field work elsewhere

in Central Australia. From what was seen in the time available, Lockhart

Jack’s interpretation of the area is valid, but another important tillite was

discovered,

* Department of Geology, University of Western Australia.

Trans. Roy. Soc... Aust., 75, September 1952

ist

THE PROTEROZOIC SUCCESSION

Rast of the Everatd Ranges the Adelaide System (Proterozoic) oceurs

as two major blocks preserved by downthrows into the Archaean rocks, Oue

of these blocks of sediments lies a little to the north of Moorilyanna Hill.

The sedimentary succession has already been shown in Lockhart Jack's

sketch section (1915, section facing p. 44). The most significant features

are as follow.

North-east of Moorilyanna Hill he reported that these beds lic uncon-

formably wpon the Precambrian gneisses. The sediments are cut by large

quartz veins, but by neither pegmatite nor dolerite dykes which are plentiful

in the gneissic complex. The basal beds consist of conglomerate containing

pebbles and boulders of an unusually large variety of rocks. They dip south

off the gneisses at 30° to 35°, and this dip is maintained to the fault contact

with the gneissic complex about five miles south. The conginmerate (for

which the name “Mvorilyanna conglomerate’? is proposed) has interbedded

arkose, Huvioglacial and slate members which make the formation between

2,500 and 3,000 feet thick, The matrix uf some of these boulder beds is much

mote shaly than is normal for a conglomerate, and thin-section study leaves

little doubt that much of this basal formation is of glacial origin.

This formation is followed by about 4,000 feet of light-grey slaty sedi-

ments with several prominent bands of quartite and conglomerate. Some of

these scem to be of fluvioglacial origin. Then appears about 1,000 feet of

dark-grey shaly material with interbedded pebble-bearing strata. As first

recorded by Lockhart Jack, this is similar to certain facies of the famous

Sturt tillite. The six or seven thottsand feet of sediments stratigraphically

beneath this material represent outwash from a nearby ice-capped mountain-

ous terrain, but this patticular 1,000-feet section of the succession 1s best

explained as a deposit conditioned in the main by melting of icebergs,

Numerous well-faceited erratics up to 18 inches across wete found, but none

as yet with definite glacial striac.

The succession continues through another two or three thousand feet

of slates and conglomerates, but is terminated abruptly at an epidotized

fault-contact with the Archaean gneissic complex.

The other (and larger) block of the Adelaide System lies to the south

of Chambers Bluff, Mt. Chandler and Indulkana Creek, and may be traced

southward for several miles to Mt, Johns where it is covered by (?) Ordo-

vician sandstones. This area is made up primarily of slates, with lesser

quantities of quartzite, grit, dolomite and tillite, These sediments are cut

by quartz veins, but by neither the pegmatite nor dolerite dykes which ate

so plentiful in the nearby Archacan gneissic complex, Lockhart Jack shows

a fault-centact with this complex.

The writer made a rapid reconnaissance south from the well 13 miles

E.S.E. of Moorilyanna Hill. The contorted gneisses make a (concealed)

fault-contact with slightly folded unmetamorphosed dnlomitic shales 1{ miles

south of the well, ie. 6 miles N.N.W. of Chambers Bluff, At this particular

place nearly two thousand feet of dolomitic shales and vccasional pale-fawn

dolomites were encountered, most of which dip south about 30° to 40°. Then

followed a white dense feldspathic quartzite which is about 200 feet thick,

No unconformity seems to exist between the quartzite and the underlying

shales. Above this yuartzite was discovered a tillite, for which the name

“Chambers Bluff tillite’ is proposed. A thickness of about 300 feet 1s exposed

before the series is unconformably covered by the sub-horizontal (7) Ordo-

162

vician quartzites. A prominent slaty cleavage (E-W, dip N. 45°) could

easily be confused with bedding in this virtually non-stratified tillite. It is

otherwise unmetamorphosed.

The Chambers Bluff tillite consists of a non-surted rock-fout matrix

with numerous erratics (up to three feet in diameter) of quartzites, granites,

gneisses, limestone and various plutonic and volcanic rocks. Many are

faceited, and several excellent examples of striated erratics were collected

gm siti,

The most impressive feature of the tillite is its unusual colour. The

bottont half of the exposed tillite is fawn in colour, but the formation grades

upward into a pinkish-brown facies, and finally into about 30 fcet of dark

purplish-red tillite. The colours appear ta be neither a surface effect nor

telated to the nearby unconformity with the (?) Ordovician. Microslides

indicate that some of the red members of this tillite contain up to 50%

haematite, although they mostly contain only about 10%. The iron seems

to be part of the original sediment and not a replacement feature. The source

of the iron is unknown.

In colour the Chambers Bluff tillite is similar to the Elatina tillite which

was recently described by Mawson (1949). This oceurs about 9,000 feet

stratigraphically above the (grey) Sturt tillite in the Adelaide System of

the Fiinders Ranges. However, tuffaceous material, which is characteristic

of the Elatina tillite in the type locality, was not noticed in this new tillite,

although the considerable number of remarkably fresh basic volcanic erratics

may be significant in this respect,

‘The Chambers Bluff tillite appeats to be several thousands of feet strati-

graphically above the grey glacial and fluviogiacial sediments associated with

the Moorilyanna conglomerate, which are probably of Sturtian age.

CORRELATIONS

The Moorilyanna conglometates and associated fluvioglacials resemble

the great boulder beds and arkoses of Mt. Olga and Ayers Rock on the

northern flank of the Musgrave Ranges. As recorded by Ellis (1937, p. 24),

Blatchford was the first to recognise the probable importance of ice action

in the deposition of the Mt. Olga boulder beds. Many facctted boulders (but

none with detinite glacial striae) were seen, and the matrix of many parts

of the Mt. Olga conglomerates is suggestive of tillite. In the writer's

Opinion, however, the bedded character of the deposit shows that, like the

Moorilyanna beds, these are largely the result of outwash from the nearby

mountaingus ice-capped terrain. In addition, there may have been a little

detritus frum Hoating icebergs. Thus the basal beds of the Adelaide System

in this region of Central Australia may be co-eval with the Sturtian {glacial}

Series us developed in the Flinders and Mt. Lofty Ranges.

Mawson (1947, p. 275) has shown that must of the non-fossiliferaus

sub-horizontal quartzites and grits of Eyre Peninsula and west of Lake Tor-

rens are probably basal beds of the Adelaide System and not Ordovician or

Cambrian, as Lockhart Jack (1927) and Segnit (1939) and others have sug-

gested. On this basis, however, some prefer to consider that the similar

quartzites of the Mt, Chandler Range are, likewise, basal beds of the Adelaide

System. This cannot be so, for the Mt. Chandler quartzites unconformably

overlie the Chambers Bluff tillite. The Mt. Chandler guartzites are in tutn

everlain wiih slight unconformity by Upper Cretaceous Sandstones.

The Mt. Chandler quartzites are, therefore, post-Adelaide System but

pre-Upper Cretaceous. H. ¥. L, Brown (1905) and Lockhart Jack (1915,

163

p. 23) correlated them with the lithologically similar beds across the North-

ern Territory border at Mt. Kingston and Mt. Watt where Ordovician fossils

have been found. At the new tillite locality a htirried examination of

the grits and sandstones just above the unconformity showed abun-

dant worm tracks and unusual circular impressions as well as gall-like

nodules and typical clay-pellet impressions, an assemblage which is remark-

ably similar to that in undoubted Ordovician Sandstones some 120 miles to

the north. Owing to lack of better evidence, the Mt. Chandler quartzites,

which unconformably overlie the Chambers Bluff tillite, could continue to be

considered of Ordovician age.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

Though the author was in Central Australia on field work financed in

part by a Commonwealth Research Grant administered by the University of

Adelaide, this particular investigation was made possible only by the gener-

ous co-operation of Mr. and Mrs. Rex Lowe of Kenmore Park cattle station

in regard to transport and hospitality, The map was prepared for publication

by the Geology Department, University of Adelaide,

REFERENCES

Brown, H. Y¥. L. 1905 S, Aust. Parl, Paper, No, 71

Etxis, H, A. 1937 Annual Report of Geol. Survey of W. Aust, for 1936, 16-31

Jack, R. Lockwart 1915 Geol. Survey of S. Aust., Bull. 5

Jacx, R. Lockuart 1927 Dept. Mines 5. Aust. Report Book No. 10, 247

Mawson, D. 1947 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 71, (2), 259-280

Mawson, D. 1949 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 73, 117-121

Secnit, R. W. 1939 Geol. Survey S. Aust, Bull, 18

SEDIMENTS OF THE ADELAIDE SYSTEM IN THE MOUNT

PLANTAGENET AREA, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY ALAN H. SPRY

Summary

In the Mount Plantagenet area, about 20 miles east of Hawker and 240 miles north of Adelaide,

sediments of the Adelaide System are broadly folded into the Worumba Anticline and the

Holowolina Syncline. The geology of the Hundred of Adams, Warcowie, Basedow and Wonoka

and the country to the east is discussed. An upfaulted block of sediment from lower in the System

has been introduced into the centre of the Anticline, replacing the western limb. The sediments of

this block are rather sharply folded and crushed with the intrusion of about sixty small dolerite

bodies. The nature of the sediments and estimate of the thickness of the formations represented is

given. It is suggested that sediments of the Adelaide system of this area were laid down in very

shallow water in miogeosyncline.

164

SEDIMENTS OF THE ADELAIDE SYSTEM

IN THE MOUNT PLANTAGENET AREA, SOUTH AUSTRALIA *

By Aan H. Spry

[Read 8 November 1951]

SUMMARY

In the Mount Plantagenet area, about 20 miles east of Hawker and 240 miles

north of Adelaide, sediments of the Adelaide System are broadly folded into

the Worumba Anticline and the Holowolina Syncline. The geology of the Hun-

dred of Adams, Warcowie, Basedow and Wonoka and the country to the east

is discussed, Ari upfaulted block of sediment from lower in the System

has been introduced into the centre of the Anticline, replacing the western limb.

The sediments of this block are rather sharply folded and crushed with the

intrusion of about sixty small dolerite bodies. The nature of the sediments and

an estimate of the thickness of the formations represented is given, It is suggested

that sediments of the Adelaide system of this area were laid down in very shallow

water in a miogeosyncline,

CONTENTS

SUMMARY - - - - - - - - - - -

INTRODUCTION - - - - ~ - - - - -

REGIONAL STRUCTURE ~ - - - - - - - -

‘TopoGRArity = - - - - - - - - -

PROTEROZOIC FORMATIONS OF THE ADELAIDE SYSTEM!

The Phyllite Dolomite Formation - - - - - -

The Yednalue Quartzite - - = - - - - -

The Magnesite-Dolomite Formation - - - - -

The Calcareous Siltstones - - - - - = =

The Lower Glacial Beds - - - - - - - -

Interglacial Beds - - - = = = = = os

The Upper Glacial Beds - —- - cS te de

The Fluvioglacial Beds (mainly slates: y)- = - - -

The Quartzite Formation - - - - - -

The Oolitic Limestone - - - - - = - -

The Calcareous Slates - - - - - - - -

The Chocolate Slates - - - - - - - -

Composite STRATIGRAPHIC COLUMN IN THE MouNT PLANTAGENET

REGION - - - - - - - - - -

INTRODUCTION

Owing to its comparative inaccessibility, only little previous geological work

has been undertaken in this area. Segnit (1929) published geological notes on

portion of the Hundred of Adams. Winton (1922) briefly mentioned some

dolomites in a discussion of the guano deposits of the Arcoota and Good Vriday

caves, Professor Mawson made reconnaissances into portions of this area in

* This work was undertaken during 1950, aided by a Commonwealth Research Grant.

The author wishes to thank Professors D. Mawson and E. A. Rudd for encouragement

and assistance; also Dr. D. RK. Bowes, B. Jennings and J. Spry for assistance in the

field. Assistance was received also from R, C, Sprigg and A. Nic of the Geological

Survey of South Australia, Best thanks must go to Brian Dearlove of Worumba Station

for his most generous. hospitality during my stay in that area.

Tratis. Roy, Soc. S, Aust., 75, September 1952

165

cotinection with his investigation of the geology of the Warcowit region and

the Bibliando Dome. David (1950), following Segnit, indicated that certain af

the racks (a fawult-block) are Earlier Precambrian, but we disagree,

Score oF THE Present INVESTIGATION

Only a small portion of the area is covered by detailed survey sheets and

even these are so inaccurate as to be uscless for mapping. Consequently the map

was prepared from trimetrogon aerial photographs, Three vertical runs and the

enclosed oblique photographs were plotted by radial line methods, The accuracy

of this map is strictly limited both by the complete lack of reliable ground control

and the inherent faults due to the use of oblique photographs,

Time limitations and lack cf facilities prevented complete detailed mapping

and attention had to he directed only to the broader regional features.

The primary object of the research assignment for thesis was an inyestigu-

tion ef the igneotis intrusives. These, however, are involved in a fault block

and for ‘the better comprehension of the latter a fuller examination of the sur-

rounding sediments was deemed necessary, The structure and initisives of the

fault-block are discussed in a separate paper,

Economic ASPECTS

Apart from copper mineralization about the basic intrusions which is dis-

cussed elsewhere, there is little of econamic interest in this area. Barytes occurs

in scattered places along the great north-south fault and small quantities were

found west of Worumba and at Morgan Well. The sedimentary magnesite which

outcrops to the north-west of Yednaluc and west of Mount Plantagenet does not

show promise of economic exploitation, At Yednalue the thickest bed is fiftcen

feet and there is & total of less than eighty fect distributed through almost two

thousand feet of sediment. The deposits near Mount Plantagenet are most diffi-

cult to reach and the remoteness of both occurrences would in any case limit

their economic use.

Guano was found in several caves located in or near the Brighton Limestone

hotizon to the south of Holowolina, but this deposit was removed long ago,

REGIONAL STRUCTURE

Throughout the whole of the Flinders Ranges the Adelaide System has heeu

thrown into a series of broad folds. The folding of the Upper Proterozoic sedi-

ments took place duting Lower Palaeozoic time, perhaps as early as Upper

Cambrian. The trends of the fold axes are approximately east-west ou Kangaroo

Island, then turn north-south on the Fleurieu Peninsula. The north-south trends

continue almost to Hawker where the outcropping of the Adelaide System splits.

One arm continues to Lhe north while the other turns to the east to Broken Hill.

In this central zone, domes and basins are cammion (at Cradock, Bibliando,

Wilpena, Oraparinna, Mnorama, Blinman, etc,}, and in the area under consideration

large folds with curved axes occur. The Bibliando Dome warp appears again to

the west by a pitch reversal of the east-west auticlinal axis and forms an anticline

plunging to the east. The direction of the axis continues to be east-west until

about sixteen miles from the Dome where it swings sharply ta the south, The

majority of the western limb of this anticline has been removed by faulting but

the eastern limb continues for about thirty miles to the south. This fold will be

referred to as the Worumba Anticline, There is a large drag structure on the

northern limb where the axial direction changes and a secondary fold over a mile

across is outlined by the interglacial quartzite which is extensively broken by

small faults. To the north and west of this fold, the sediments are overturneil

and dip steeply to the south across the plains to the Druid Range

166

Towards the south-east the beds are folded in a great synclinal trough. At

the northern part the axis trends east-west and the plunge is to the west. The

axis then swings to the south and the fold continues for about thirty miles without

plunge until the trough closes with a pitch to the north. This fold will be

referred fo as the Holowolina Syncline.

AA ;

any

rh eau

7) Bef a

WOTCAGLACIAL GUARTIOTE

f WATERGLACIAL SHALES & SAYETOEES

[ET] wowen acral pees .

INI CLEANERS SiLFA tomes

THE) ssvstsive-povonste renmerion ¢

(eae VROWALUE Q@AATIOTE 4

(i) PUTLLITE- DOLOMITE FOAHATION 67

ne of sonvtownen of yrericat

> 4 AVebatead Aine vA PATEL MAE oats)

Bs ;

ramer

Fig. 1

A geological map showing the regional features of the

Worumba-Holowolina area,

The folding within the fault block is on a smaller scale with folds similar

to the large structures and with generally north-south axes. The abundant in-

cotupetent dolomites and phyllites in this block are contorted while the quartzites

are frequently shattered.

In addition to the small faults and crush zones which are obvious in the

field, there are three major faults with considerable displacements, The phyllite-

dolomite formation is bounded on all sides by these faults, and has moved up as

a great block cutting off portion of the western limb of the Worumba Anticline,

167

The great north-south fault which passes to the west of Worumba is very tenuous

in outline. This fault is accompanied by considerable shearing and brecciation

and has a stratigraphic displacement of about nine thousand feet in the north

and about fourteen thousand feet in the south, Segnit (1929) recorded this as

an unconformity, but apart from the brecciation in the fault zone, the fault trans-

gresses over five thousand fect of sediments in twenty miles. The phyllite-dolomite

formation is in cortact with the lower glacial beds, the upper glacial beds and

the fluvioglacial slates and the relation is not onc of unconformity. Just north

of Morgan Creek there is a cross fault which causes a tongue of the phyllite-

dolomite formation to ru into the upper glacial and fluvioglacial beds.

MOLG WIL UNA

Srvceine

vaset fase font Fealr

SLE

Fig. 2

Sketch sections across the map showii in fig. 1-

Another large fault occurs parallel to rhe north-west limb of the Anticline

and meets the north-south fault near the drag structure previously mentioned,

The stratigraphic throw of tine thousand feet of this fault is difficult to account

for. Both the beds and the fault appear to be steeply dipping and any moyement

would be along the bedding planes and a large stratigraphic displacement would

not occur. The tenuous outline of the faulls and their large stratigraphic throw

suggests that the faults may he low angle thrusts. The Anticline is quite asym-

metric and overturned, and these features are {teqtiently associated with thrusts.

However, it was established in several places in the ficld that the attitude of the

fault was approximately vertical. There was probably considerable horizontal

movemerit along this fault. Another structural peculiarity occurs in the eastern

part of the Anticline. Like many anticlines in the Flinders Ranges, the dips

steepen towards the centre of the fold giving a “pinched” structure. ITowever,

the interglacial shales which are vertical in the centre appear to be a great deal

thicker than their normal thousand feet. It is likely that there is some puckering

in the axial zone, but outcrops were too poor to establish this in the time available.

The pattern of forces required to produce these structures is complex and

indefinite. A strong thrust from the south-east would produce the fold system

with curved axes and would also account for the overturning in the north-west-

The secondary drag fold was next to form, due to shearing in a north-east direc-

tion. The faulting was probably associated with the last stage of this second

folding and appears to have been due to vertical forces transmitted through the

168

basement. The theory of the strain ellipsoid was applied to the structures in an

effort to explain the fold-fault system by a simple set of forces, but it was found

that there was no simple explanation which would account for the combination

of folds with curved axes and intersecting normal and partly transcurrent faults.

TOPOGRAPHY

The area is subject to moderate aridity. High temperature and low rainfall

condition the processes of weathering, In its distribution the vegetation is mainly

dependent on the underlying rock types. For itistance, eucalypts flourish on

magnesia-tich soils over the magnesite-dolomite formation, also on the inter-

glacial shales, while stunted pines and spinifex are usually restricted to the high

barren ridges composed of glacial and glaciofluvial beds.

There is a sudden change from the flat alluvial plain in the west to the rugged

peaks of the interglacial quartzite ridge. The higher ground is controlled by the

arcuate form of the Worumba Anticline and a series of ranges sweeps atound

from the south-west to the northeast. The area in the south-east is smoother,

and low rounded hills occur in the region of the limestones and calcareous shales

of the Holowolina Syncline,

The drainage system may he divided into two portions. The one shuws a

distinct relation to the geological structure while the other is characterised by

a more obscure regional control, The rivers which drain the Worumba Anti-

cline illustrates the first of these ‘The anticline is normal in that it is well eroded

in its axial zone, There is a slightly trellised river system with consequent,

subsequent and obsequent streams,

Rivers of the second drainage type are typified by the Wofioka which flows

along the base of the Druid Range across a wide alluvial plain, Willow Creek

and Morgan Creek (together with a host of small unnamed watercourses) flow

out of the hills across this plain to the west, It is of some interest that the Morgan

shows a well-preserved truncated meander with the present course several feet

below the old bed.

The topographic expression of the more prominent formations is sum-

marized below.

The phyltite-dolomite formation—The folded phyllites, dolomites and quartz-

ites within the fault-block show a variety of forms, The dolomites are surprisingly

resistant and some ridges with a quartzite core are most rugged, The slates and

phyllites weather to rolling grassy hills. The dolerite plugs are not particularly

resistant but may form quite high conical hills as at the “Three Sisters” about

six miles north-west of Worumba.,

The Yednalue guartzite—This horizon is more notable in a physiographic

than a stratigraphic sense and it farms the range of rounded hilts to the east of

the road which leads north-west from Yednalue.

The magnesite-dolomite forniation is easily eroded and rarely forms obtru-

sive hills, It supports a stunted eucalypt flora, This feature is very noticeable

Just north-west of Yednalue where a narrow belt of trees is visible in the aerial

photographs.

The glacial beds—The tough conglomerates, quartzite and siltstones form a

series ul high rugged hills. Mount Plantagenet (pl, x, fig. 3) is the highest point

in the area and is composed of the upper glacial beds,

The quartsite formation—The massive siliceous members of this formation

stand up as a well-defined range from Yednalue to Holowolina.

The immensely thick Pound Sandstone formation, regarded by Mawson as

probably constituting the base of the Cambrian sequence, extends as the Druid

Range in sky-line relief along the northern limit of the area under consideration.

lid

PROTEROZOIC FORMATIONS OF THE ADELAIDE SYSTEM

During field investigation the Proterozoic rocks were sub-divided into forma-

tions according to their lithological characteristics and a local name was given

to each. Correlation with the sequence in the vicinity of Adelaide (Mawson and

Sprigg 1950) is possible by mcans of the main market horizons, and the jorma-

tions may be renamed with some certainty of a correct relation to the type

gequence. The nomenclature conforms as closely as possible with the s#rati-

graphic code (Raggatt 1950). In the following discussion of the nature and the

possible environment of deposition of the beds of the Adelaide System in this

area, the local field name and the probable equivalent in the type section are giver.

A series of stratigraphic columns shown in fig. 3 illustrates the correlation

in various afeas in the Mount Lofty-Flinders Ranges and shows the correctness

of Mawson’s (1947) contention, namely, the distinct thickening towards the

centre af the geosyncline (at Hawker and Bibliando), with thinning most marked

towards the edges (particularly Copley). An attempt is made to determine the

tectonic environment during the various phascs of deposition.

mone & love

satvousth apa

‘

OM M-Le Herel aad

FP AL ea nite seme

=e (este Gores warren TH

Seats buna afew Leal cused 2s tis Tae

? iE eh eeeth S haenareee

PUT MoT,

wh ae HDT

SD avert santreny”

ADELAIDE BIBLSaNDO WILPENA MUNDALLIO COPLEY

Fig. 3

Stratigraphic columns showing the correlation between the Hawker area and

the type section at Adelaide. Additional columns show the general thickening

io the orth and to the centre of the geosyncline and thinning towards

the western edge.

THE PRHYLEITE-DOLOMITE FORMATION

This formation consists of more than two thousand two hundred feet of

dolomite, phyllite and quartzite and is probably the equivalent in the Adelaide

area of the Castambul Dolomite together with the slates, phyllites and quartzites

immediately above and below it it. ‘The similarity to the “argillites and dolomites”

near Mount Painter which Mawson (1948) called the Arkaroola Series is strik-

ing. These beds underlie a massive quartzite which Mawson correlated with the

Emeroo Quartzite as the base of the Adelaide System and were regarded as aii

older series. The formation is richly dolomitic in part, and is also slightly meta-

morphosed and contains basalts “in part, at least, jutrusive”. If this correlation

is correct then the thin Yednalue quartzite would be the equivalent of the massive

arenite horizons at Emeroo Range, Mount Aroona, etc.

The formation is typified by the occurrence of great thicknesses of pure and

atgillaceous dolomites and dolomitic shales and phyllites, Some beds show cross-

bedding and there is an indication in several localities that slumping and intra-

formational brecciation may haye taken place. The formation is confined to a

block whose limits are marked by faults, A low grade of regional metamorphism

170

prevails irregularly over this fault-block. There has been intrusion and possibly

extrusion of basic magma at a period related to the early Palacozoie folding.

Petrographically, the rocks are characterised by the presence of doloinite,

angular quartz particles and fragments of fresh angular feldspar with secondary

chlorite, biotite and tale. Apart from fhe abundance of carbonate, the phyllites

resemble low-rank greywackes which have been mildly metamorphosed ta the

green-schist facies (Turner, 1948).

Phyllites which occur between Woruniba and Mount Craig, are light-grey

rocks with a poorly developed schistosity, They contain porphyroblasts of

allothogenic quartz up to 2-3 mot. in diameter, with feldspar (angular to sub-

rounded) set in a groundmass containing abundant fresh greenish-brown biotite

and idioblastic dolomite and a little talc. Accessories are apatite, iron ore and

tourmaline.

The dolomites vary in colour from deep blue-grey to yellow and are fre-

quently rather fine-grained. Some recrystallization, however, usually increases the

grain size in an irregular manner. There is a wide range of pure to argillaceous

aud arenaceous varieties. Specimen [S16] is a fine-grained dolomite from

Morgan Well, It shows bands rich in angular quartz or feldspar through a

granoblastic mass of dolomite. A little pyritcs and rutile are present.

Specimen [9014] which occurs near the contact of the large dolerite intru-

sion north-east of Morgan Well is fine-grained, yellow, and exhibits occasional

idioblastic dolomite crystals. It ig porphyroblastic with large well-formed

dolomite laths set in a groundmass consisting of rounded dolomite crystals in a

fine mesh of tale, A little secondary quartz occurs in veins. The rock contains

52-29% of insoluble material which is chiefly tale, 22°0% of Ca CO, and 25-0%

of MgCO,,

The quartzites are usually reddish-brown in colour with a very fine grain.

They oceur in beds irom several inches to hundreds of feet in thickness.

The presence of dolomite in most of the rocks of this formation, together

with the variable ratio of CaCO, to MgCO,, suggests that the magnesian lime-

stones may have been formed by a process of penecontemporaneous dolomitiza-

tion. However, it will be shown later that the dolomite was probably precipitated

under extreme chemical conditions. The beds probably formed in moderately

shallow to deep water in a tectunically active area.

THE YEDNALUE QUARTZITE

This horizon has no definite equivalent elsewhere and is only notable for

its topographic expression, In its thickness of 750 feet there is less than 500 feet

of quartzite and most of this occurs in narrow bands with shale. The largest

arenaceotis bed is about 280 feet thick. The rock is a rather coarse-grained cross-

bedded arenite which varies from 4 sandstone to a quartzite, The chief signifi-

cance of this bed is that it marks a period of dominantly clastic deposition after

the dolomites of the phyllite-dolomite formation and before the dolomites and

magnesites above. It indicates a fairly shallow-water environment and moderately

stable tectonic conditions,

THE MAGNESITE-DOLOMITE FORMATION

This horizon is remarkably persistent and has heen noted in many places

in the Flinders Ranges by Mawson (19418, 1947), and was correlated with the

Upper Torrens Dotomite, (now called the Montacute Dolemite, Mawson and

Sprigg; 1950) by Sprigg (1946). The extreme conditions required for the deposi-

tion of sedimentary magnesite were probably not repeated during deposition of

the Adelaide System, and consequently the magnesite horizon is probably the sunst

retiable marker horizon for correlation purposes.

171

Iti a well-exposed section, three miles north-west of Yednalue station, this

fortnation extends fot about 2,300 feet. Of this thickness only 70 feet js mag-

nesite, while there is about 1,300 feet af shale, almost 1,000 feet of dolomite and

20 feet of grit and saidstone, The magnesite is distributed through the lower

1.400 feet of the formation as beds of a foot or two in thickness, although a bed

of impure pellet magnesite is 12. feet thick. The sequence shows a poorly

developed cyclic form with a large number of thin dolomite, shale, magnesite

and prit beds.

The shales are usually soft and grey in colour and weather more quickly

than the other sediments. They contain an appreciable amount of carbonate,

The dolomites are usually a dark blue-grey and vary from massive, flagey

yaticties to thinly-laminated shaley rocks. Some horizons contain abundant black

rounded chert fragments. A compact dark-blue dolomte [S66] is very fine-

grained and contains 410% of MgCO,, 55°69 CaCO, and 3% of inseluble

material, The insoluble porlion contains a little angular quartz and a consider-

able amount of fine, black carbonaceous matter. An arenaceous dolomite [9072|

is a light-grey rock with abundant grains of glassy quartz set in a Ane-grained

dolomite matrix. It has a porphyroblastic texture shown by quartz and teldspar

fragments together with ooliths in the finely crystalline dolonnite base. ‘The quartz

varies in size up to 0-6 mm. in diameter and shows angular outlines due to well-

developed secondary growth about originally rounded erains, The feldspar is

fresh microcline showing crosshatehing. The ooliths are both round and

avoid up to O-6 mm, in diameter. They are composed of dolomite with

a crystalline centre and a dark fine-grained border, Finely divided tale and ruti‘e

occur in the crystalline matrix. Chemical analysis shows 390% Ca CO,, 40°1%

Mz CO, and 28-69% of insoluble material,

The urenaceous rocks vary from quartzites to gritty dolomites. A coarse

buff-coloured quartzite [S26] found one and a half miles west of Wornmha, ts

stib-arkosic. Tt contains angular te sub-angular quartz grains varying in size from

an average of O'1 mm, to 0-6 mm. There is lesser alhite and microcline present as

moderately fresh grains. Tourmaline and limonite are acvessuries,

A dolomitic grit outcropping three miles north-west of Yednalue is a light-

erey gritty rock, It consists chiefly of rounded to angular fragments of quartz

with lesser fresh albite and mictocline with a dolomite cement, Also present are

a few ooliths and a rock fragment (graphic quartz-feldspar intergrawth) with

alittle tale and chlorite, Roth the quartz and feldspar show the effects of second-

ary etilargement, The quartz tends towards fully-formed erystalline shapes, while

the albile and microcline show a secondary peripheral zone with cleavages and

twinning continuous across the whole crystal, The occurrence of anthigenic

microctine which shows the typical eross-hatching is rather unique,

A well-banded dolomitic, siltstone [9073] from Willow Creek, about three-

quarters of a mile west of Woruntba also occurs in this formation. It is a dark-

coloured strongly banded rock which is very fine in grain, A partial chemical

analysis shows 68% quartz and 32% dolomite with ouly a slight amount of

at'villaceous material, The quartz is present as very small angular particles, The

bedding is shown by bands rich in Gne-grained dolomite, with poorly developed

ripples arid cross bedding visible,

The magnesitic beds oecur to the north-west of Yednalue and again west

of Worumba and Mount Plantagenet. In the latter area the sequence ts indefinite

and the relation to the nearby phyllite-dolomite formation is not clear, A bed of

material resembling a pellet magnesite occurs on the south end of the ridge west

of Mount Craig. The rock consists of a number of round buff-coloured pellets

cemented by dark-blue dolomite, In one band the pellets are roughly spherical

and about § mim, in diameter, while in the other the pellets ave rather oval and

172

several cm. across. An analysis of a pellet gives 57% Mg CO,, 38% Ca CO, and

3% of insoluble material, The pellets are often corroded about the edges, and

some Goliths are present, This bed shows some lithological similarities to the

pellet magnesite, but its field relations rather indicate that it is a member of the

phyllite-dolomite formation.

The magnesite itself occurs in two distinet forms, There are beds entirely

composed of white eryptocrystalline magnesite which is hortiogeneons and breaks

with a conchoidal fracture. The beds which are referred to as pellet magnesites

consist of rounded fragments of the eryptocrystalline variety, cemented by

crystalline carbonate. The most common pellet rock is typihed by [S39] from

the western flank of Mount Plantagenet. It is a pale bluish-grey ruck, and an

analysis shows 83'2% Mg CO,, 70% CaCO,, 3-5% Fe,O,, Al,O,,, ete., and

6'1% insoluble material. The magnesite pellets are rounded tu angular in shape

and vary in size up to 10 tam, in diameter. Under the microscope they appear

as a brownish mass of exceedingly fine-grained material. Same authigenic tale is

present, and this forms the bulk of the insoluble fraction.

A light-grey breccia [S28] which occurs one mile west of Worumba on

Willow Creek is a subarkosic pellet magnesite rock and is different from the

common variety described above. It contains sub-angular to angular fragments

of quartz and feldspar up to 20 mm. across, together with highly angular mag-

nesite pellets up to 4 mm. Jong. The feldspar is very fresh and is occasionally

poikiloblastically associated with dolomite, suggesting that the feldspar may be

authigenic. The quartz shows the effects of secondary peripheral growth, and

a little tale is present.

The pellet magnesite is seeri tu be directly derived from the cryptocrystalline

beds by a process of penecontemporaneous erosion, This process is similar to one

described by Howchin (1920) for the formation of mud-flake breccias and was

recognised by Mawson (1947). The lower bands of white are broken up {pos

sibly by subserial drying) and the flakes incorporated in the bed above.

The origin of the white cryptocrystalline magnesite, however, presents a

difficult problem,

A certain amount is known, or may be deduced conceming the environment

of deposition of the magnesite, and this in turn forms a basis for suggestions for

a mechanist: of deposition. The formation contains examples of ripple marks,

cross bedding and sun cracks, while some magnesite beds contain ooliths, The

pellet magnesites were formed by erosion and redeposition of the massive mag-

nésite. These facts indicate that deposition took place in an environment that

varied between mud flats and very shallaw water, The preseri¢e of pure dolomites

and magnesites with alternations of shales, indicates that tectonic conditions were

stable. The gritty bands are in the minority and indicate brief periods of tectonic

activity, The presence of angular quartz and fresh feldspar, and a fragment of

quartz-feldspar rock in the sediments points to an igneous or metamorphic terrain

for the source of the clastic material, The magnesite is found over a large area

in the Flinders Ranges, and thus it seems likely that deposition took place in a

large, calm, shallow basin. From the peculiarity of the type of sedimentation, it

does not seem likely that this basin was capable of free circulation with the

open ovean,

When Mawson (1941a) established the existence of bedded magnesite hori-

zons as part of the Adelaide System, he first suggested that the outcrops might

be explained as due to surface secondary enrichment in magnesium of original

dolomite, with the expectation that the high magnesia valye would fade at depth.

However, the above speculation ceased when mining opetations commenced.

The continuity in depth of the magnesite was then proved, alsa the pellet struc-

173

ture exhibited by some of the magnesite beds demonstrated a primary sedimentary

origin,

In searching for an explanation to account for this notable precipitation of

magnesite, despite the apparent lack of organic remains in the Proterozoic rocks

of the Adelaide System, consideration may be given to the possibility that it was

effected by primitive algae. Jong ago in Upper Proterozoic limestones of the

Adelaide System in South and Central Australia there was found (Mawson 1925

and Mawson and Madigan 1930) structures whose origin was referred to the

activities of algae. Twenhofel (1939) mentions that some algae may secrete up

to 25% of magnesium carbonate. However, from the complete lack of organic

remairs in this formation, and the lack of knowledge of an organism which could

precipitate 100% magnesium carbonate, it seems likely that a theory of organic

precipitation is untenable,

If now we consider that the magnesium carbonate was precipitated from

solution as such, then this may have been due to evaporation or to chemical

reaction, The extrenie fineness of grain of the magnesite and the lack of usso-

ciated salt deposits or salt paramorphs in associated argillaceous beds tends ta

contradict an evaporite origin.

Thus it seems most likely that the magnesium carhonate was precipitated

by a chemical reaction under abnormal conditions.

On account of the small concentration of magnesium in sea water and the

greater solubility of magnesium carbonate as compafed with calcium carbonate,

it is obvious that the possihility of direct precipitation of magnesite from sea

water as we know it today, even under the most abnormal physical chemical

environment, must be very small indeed.

Even allowing for considerable differences in the saline content of the waters

of Precambrian seas, as suggested by Daly (1909), it is not obvious how

there could be precipitated such large scale deposition of magnesite as is embodied

in the Adelaide Series.

Bam (1934) suggested that sedimentary magnesite might be due to the

precipilation of hydro-magnesite, which is relatively insoluble. This apparently

would change to magnesite under the influence of carbon dioxide in solution,

over a period of time. To explain the origin of certain American sedimentary

mignesites he postulated a basin containing brine rich in sodium carbonate into

which Howed a solution containing abundant magnesium salts,

Baleman (1942) mentions the occurrence of 200 feet of sedimentary mag-

nesia in Nevada, and other deposits in Kern County, California, Idaho, British

Columbia and Germany, These are apparently local deposits associaled with salt,

gypsum, shales and limestone. He adopts Bain’s mechanism of deposition,

Tt is possible that Bain's explanation or some modification of it may account

for the magmesites of the Adelaide System. They were deposited in un extensive

geosynclinal basin but on a scale far exceeding that considered by Bain, To

reproduce the conditions postulated by Bain contemporaneous vulcanism is

required. So far the existence of such is known on a limited scale only, How-

ever, it may be that an area of more intense volcanic activity existed to the east

of the basin.

To summarize, it is considered that the magnesite was precipitated from

solution as hydromagnesite by chemical reactions. The process took place in a

large shallow basin, under possibly arid conditions. It would appear probable

that intense volcanic activity contributed waters rich in sodium carbonate which

reacted with magnesium salts in solution to proditce insoluble hydro-magnesite.

174

Tue CALCAREOUS SILTSTONES

This group occurs only to the north-west and west of Yednalue, It is strati-

graphically above the magnesite-dolomite formation but dees not extend up as

far as the lower glacial beds in this area. The rocks outcrop over a series of low

hills and dip at increasingly shallow angles to the west towards the alluvial

plains, bordering the road from Cradock to Hawker, These are a series of blue

caleareous siltstones, quartzites and a little limestone. The beds show cross bed-

ding and intraformational slumping.

Rock [9070] is fairly typical of these calcareous siltstones, It is a light-grey

fine-grained rock showing cross-bedding etched m relief by weathering. Jt con-

tains angular quartz particles up tu 0°15 mm, across set in a fine-grained matrix

rich in calcite and indefinite micas. There are a few flakes of recognisable sericite

and biotite.

Rock [9068] approaches the sub-greywacke facies more closely than any

other rock in this area, It js fine-grained and greenish with a dense homogeneous

texture, and consists of subangular quartz and lesser microcline set in an indefinite

micaceous groundmass. The texture is irregular with large areas of the matrix

free from the large clastic particles. A partial anatysis yielded 24:9% CaCO,,

1% MgCoO, and 74% of insoluble material. The matrix is difficult to resolve but

coisists mostly of green chlorite with abrindant calcite and limonite and with

accessory tourmaline, iron-ore and zircon,

The teridency towards poorly washed and sorted sediments becomes more

notable in this division, and the approach in lithological character to the grey-

watke facies probably indicates tectonic instability as a pretude to glaciation.

THe Lower GLACIAL Beps

The lower glacial horizon is equivalent to the Bibliando glacigene beds to

the east (Mawson 1949), and these have been tentatively correlated with the

arkoses and varye-like shales of the Mitcham Quartzite.

In this area, the beds occur only on the western overturned portion on the

northern flank of the Worumba Anticline, Here the formation extends far about

3,870 feet and contains gritty tillite and boulder beds together with abundant

shales and siltstones. There are numerous erratics in the tillite of dolomite,

quartzite and shale which are lithologically identical with beds lower in the

Adelaide System. This feature has been noticed frequently and Mawson (1948)

has staled that there was terrestrial glaciation with erosion of the previously

deposited sediments, In this particular series of glacial heds there is compara-

tively little true unsorted boulder tillite and the beds are chiefly fluvioglacial in

arigin, There is a little limestone interbedded near the base. The thickness of

3,870 feet given for this formation is not the actual maximum as the lower part

of the sequence has been removed by faulting. Thus there is a period between

the lower glacial beds and the undetlying calcareous siltstone of which there is

no record m this area.

INTERCLACIAL BEDS

The formation which separates the upper and lower glacial horizons is

correlated directly with Mawson’s (1948) Willyerpa quartzite and the accom-

panying shales at the Bibliando Dome. They would appear to be contemporane-

ous with the Mitcham quartzites at Adelaide. Almost 900 feet of quartzite and

230 feet of shales and siltstones at the western part of the Worumba Anticline

are compared with the 1,200 icet arkose and quartzite and the 850 feet of

arenites with some minor silty and shaley bands at Bibliando.

175

The quartzite forms a massive rugged range which outlines the form of the

Worumba Anticline in bold topographic relief. A specimen [9075] is a light

reddish-brown quartzite with a hard massive appearance, A little decayed feldspar

appears as spots of kaolin but there is not sufficient tcldspar present to suggest an

arknse similar to those which occur in this horizon at the Bibliando Dome. It is

a medium-grained granulose rock consisting almost entirely of quartz in well-

rounded grains up to 0-4 mm, in diameter. A few grains of quartz are sub-

angular and there is a little chert present. Secondary peripheral crystallization

is frequent, and the rock has a strong siliceous cement, It is of interest to note

that the suite of accessory minerals (tourmaline, apatite, zircon, rutile, muscovite,

and iron ore) is typical of this horizon in the Bibliando Dome, about 25 miles to

the cast.

This rock is an orthoquartzite typical of a tectonically stable shelf in a norma

climate rather than a geosynclinal deposit with glacial assoctations.

Tae Urrer Gracia Gens

This series of glacigene rocks is most irregular in its developments, even

thongh it is equivalent to the Sturt tillite at Adelaide, and consequently is a wide-

spread persistent horizon throughout the Flinders Ranges. In the northern parts

of the Bibliando Dome, Mawson (1948a) has shown it to be 4,550 feet thick and

containing almost 400 fect of true tillite with grits, shales, siltstones and sand-

stones. At 25 miles west on the northern part of the Worumba Anticline it is

scarcely recognisable and consists of almost 1,000 fect of blue-grey gritty

quartzite with bands of angular gritty tillite, On the western flank of Mount

Plantagenet, it is well developed with three distinct boulder-tillite horizons.

There are etratics of quartzite, limestone, pegmatite, gillimanite schist, gramite

and slate. In the lowest part of the sequence there are tilliles with

matrices containing up to 50%. CaCO,,. /

A specimen of tillite [9106] from this locality has a fine-gramed base. Ih

one thin section there are four pieces of fine-grained basic igneous rocks, the

largest being 3°9 mm, across. These consist chiefly of weathered plagioclase laths

with calcite and micaceous material. The most abundant rock type present as

fragments is 4 quartz-calcite-albite rock. This occurs as subangular particles up

to 2:6 mm. x 1:2 mm. in size and composed of varying proportions of the three

minerals. Also present are quartzites, a plagioclase-mica-quartz rock, a biotite-

feldspar-quattz schist together with the minerals quartz, microcline and plagio-

clase, Authigenic minerals are calcite, talc, biotite, chlorite and muscovite, The

finely divided groundmass is rich in indefinite micas and iron-ore.

A siltstone [S31] from just above the lower tillite bed is a light-coloured

rock, fine in grain and showing well developed cross-bedding. It contains abundant

liny angular quartz. grains with a little albite in a matrix of green micas, Calcite

is abundant and is concentrated in certain bands, Also present are minor amounts

of sevicite, iron ore and limanite,

THe Trarmioa.actar. Beps

This formation extends from the upper limit of the upper glacial horizon

almost to the limestone of the Brighton horizon and is correlated with the Tapley

Hill Slates near Adelaide. The thickness and lithology is variable in ditferent

parts of this area. Along the Waiaca Creek, the sequence consists of 8,000. feet

of blue-grey banded siltstones and slates, with shales and narrow cross-bedded

yuartzites, Small sandy lenses are common in the lower parts.

A siltstone [9066] from Walaca Creek, is a dark-grey fine-grained rock with

a fine banding. A prominent feature, particularly in the field, is a system oi

small calcile-filled gash veins, It consists chiefly of sinall angular quartz frag-

176

ments (0-1 mm. in diameter) with lesser feldspar in a fine matrix of indefinite

micacteous material. There are bands ncher in feldspar and chlorite. A small

gash vein filled with calcite showing comb structure is prominent although the rock

contains only 4% of CaCO, hy analysis.

THE QuartTzitE ForMATION

This formation outcrops as the line of hills to the west of the Yednalue-

Holowolina road, Here it occurs as almost two thousand feet of buff to blue-

grey quartzites and siltstones with a little grit, limestone, slate and sub-grey wacke.

It ts one of the few horizons in the Adelatde System which shows rapid facies

changes along the strike and south of Warcowie, on the other limb of the anticline,

this formation is scarcely recognisable and is represented by a little over 300 feet

of grey quartzite and grit.

A siltstone [9078] from the Holowolina road is a fine-grained grey rock

showing no bedding, and breaking with a conchoidai fracture. It is even-grained

and consists chiefly of angular quartz (averagimg 0-1 mm, in diameter), together

with abundant chlorite and a little biotite. Angular albite and microcline are

preserit with accessory iron-ore, rutile, tourmaline, muscovite, apatite and zircon.

Some beds approach low-rank greywackes, and this formation may represent

sedimentation during the dying phase of the tectonic activity during glaciation,

Tue Ooutrce LIMESTONE

This bed is equivalent to the Brighton limestone at Adelaide and is a useful

and persistent marker horizon. It occurs as a buff oclitic limestone between

240 teet and 300 feet in thickness, and varies to grey, non-oolitic and arenaceous

varieties. On analysis it was found to contain 98'2% of CaCO, and is thus the

lowest non-magnesian limestone in the Adelaide System in this area.

A specimen [9063] from the Holowolina road is buff and oolitic with a

sight banding. It consists of an aggregate of ooliths cemented by crystalline

calcite, pl. xi, fig. 5. The ooliths are rounded or ovoid in shape and average

0'8 mm. x 0°6 mm. in size. Individuals have a dark-coloured finely crystalline

centre, the whole being composed of calcite. Some ooliths contain a moderately

large quartz fragment and some of this silica is authigenic. There is a well-

defined preferred orientation shown by the long axes of the ouliths; Sprigg

[1946] kas attributed this elongation to flow during folding. Also present are

minor amounts of quartz, microcline and tale. The quartz almost invariably

shows the effect of secondary peripheral crystallization with the consequent

obliteration of the original clastic shape. Some show the growth of prism and

pytamid faces, wlile others are raunded with pitted surfaces.

This bed grades upwards into grey limestone and grey calcareous shales

and some difficulty was experienced in mapping the extent south of Holowolina,

where the dips are very flat on the nasa of the syncline.

The nature of the limestone indicates deposition in very shallow water under

stable tectonic conditjons.

THE CaLcakkous STALES

justi above the oolitic limestone there is a variable thickness of calcaréous

shale which forms the base of the chocolate shales, These beds cover a large area

in the centre of the Holowolina syncline and appear to be 3,500 feet thick, whereas

along the Waiaca Creek there is less than 1,200 feet. In the former area the

sequence begins with 200 feet of grey limestone which merges into the oolitic

limestone below and the grey caleareous shales above.

The apparent thickening of the zone between the politic limestone and the

clyacnlate beds ts probably due to the lack af the typical red colour of the lower

part of the chocolate slate formation.

17?

Tue CHocoLate SLATES

The upper part of the Marinoan Series of the Adelaide System is charac-

terized by the presence of chocolate and purple slates and quartzites. Here almost

8,000 feet of steeply dipping (overturned) chocolate-coloured beds occur in a

zone parallel to and south of the Druids Range (Mawson 1941b). The sequence

is composed chiefly of slates, siliceous slates and shales, siltstones and grey

quartzites with abundant thin grey limestones in the upper parts. Cross bedding,

ripple marks, sun cracks and curious flowing markings (pl. xi, fig. 4) occur. At the

very top there are several hundred feet of blue, buff and grey limestones showing

intraformational slumping. There follows six hundred feet of red sandstone

before the massive white Pound Sandstone of Cambrian age is met.

The depositional environment of the “red beds” of the Adelaide System

is rather unique and has been investigated by a number of workers. The beds

show the characteristics of shallow water deposition under moderately stable

conditions. The sediments are not particularly well washed or sorted but do not

resemble preywackes. The flow markings shown in pl. xi, fig. 4 suggest mud

flow amount small prominences on the sea floor and also indicate that the floor

may have been sloping. These sediments are not unlike those of the clinoform

environment of Rich (1951) because of the slumping, but resemble the undoform

type with their ripple marks and cross hedding. There is no clear division here

and the sediments probably formed on a minor slope in very shallow water.

It is concluded that the chocolate beds were laid down in very shallow water,

which may have been terrestrial (lacustrine) or marine under normal climatic

conditions in a moderately stable tectonic environment,

COMPOSITE STRATIGRAPHIC COLUMN IN THE

MOUNT PLANTAGENET REGION

This composite stratigraphic column is made up of a series of sections taken

in various parts of the area as follows: Formations 14 to 12 were measured along

Waiaca Creek, 11 and 10 Morgan Creek, 9 Waiaca Creek, 8 Worumba, 7 to 5

Waiaca Creek, 4 to 2 two miles north-west of Yednalue, 1 along Morgan Creek.

The thicknesses in the last portion of the section are approximate, and the

beds shown constitute only portion of this formation,

CAMBRIAN

14 POUND SANDSTONE (Cambrian) - ~ - - - 2800

2200 ft. White quartzite and sandstone,

600 ,, Red sandstone.

PROTEROZOIC

13 CHOCOLATE SLATES - - - - - - ~ 6100

450 ft. Blue, grey and buff limestone

R800 ,, Chocolate slates with interbedded grey limestone.

700 ,, Chocolate slates.

1500 ,, Chocolate slaty quartzite, thinly bedded, showing riople marks

and slumping; and a little pink quartzite.

66 ,, Light grey fused quartzite with ctirrent bedding.

2580 ,, Finely-laminated chocolate shales with tipple marks and sun

cracks and narrow bands of cross-bedded quartzite,

12 CALCAREOUS SHALES - - - - - - 1300

in the tpper part.

150 ,, Soft prey shale.

45, Laminated siltstone.

210 ;, Soft grey slate

90, Slaty quartzite.

290 ,, Soft blue slate,

178

11 OOLITIC LIMESTONE - - - - - - (240-300)

240 ft. Gritty and oolitic buff limestone.

10 QUARTZITE FORMATION - - - - - - 1820

120ft. Blue limestone, becoming siliceous and gritty at the top.

1300 ,, Blue-grey siltstone showing facies changes along the strike.

400 ,, Slaty siltstone with varying amounts of argillaceous or

arenaceous material.

9 FLUVIOGLACIAL SLATES - - - - - - 8200

220 ft. Blue gritty shales,

70 ,, Coarse blue-grey grit.

970 ,, Slates and siltstones with irregular sandy lenses.

150 ,, Sandstone showing cross bedding.

30 ,, Slaty siltstone.

20, Blue quartzite,

480 ,, Banded blue siltstones.

30, Quartzite.

1765 ,, Siltstones and slates, blue to grey in colour, strongly banded

and showing cross bedding. There are numerous bands of

quartzite about 4” thick.

150 ,, Grey quartzite.

4235 ,, Siltstone and. quartzite.

8 UPPER GLACIAL BEDS - - - - - - - 1650

5it. Tillite.

500 ,, Gritty slate and quartzite.

20 ,,, Tillite.

1000 ,, Slates, siltstones, grits and gritty slates with erratics.

120 ,, ‘Tillite with interbedded Hmestones up to 20 ft. thick,

7 INTERGLACIAL QUARTZITE - - - - - - 890

155ft. Quartzite.

10 ,, Coarse angular grit.

150 ,, Quartzite.

150 ,, Siltstone.

255 ,, Gritty quartzite.

45 ,, Breccia,

125 ,, Quartzite.

6 INTERGLACIAL SLATES - - - - . - 430

410 ft. Purple to chocolate siltstone and slates.

20, Gritty quartzite,

§ LOWER GLACIAL BEDS - - - - - - - 3879

3870 ft. Quarizites, siltstones, shales with bands of gritty tillite,

boulder beds and a little limestone at the base.

4 CALCAREOUS SILTSTONE - - - - - approx. 4850

1000 ft. Blue calcareous siltstone showing cross-bedding.

1500 ,, Bluish quartzite with bands of siltstone and limestone.

1000 ,, Quartzite.

350 ,, Grey limestone,

1000 ,, _Blue-grey calcareous quartzite and siltstones showing cross-

bedding and intraformational slumping.

3 MAGNESITE-DOLOMITE FORMATION - - - - 2300

53{t. White flaggy marble.

62,, Soft grey shale.

29 ,, Coarse white marble.

51 ,, Grey shale with magnesite pellets.

22 ,, Dolomitic shale.

197 ,, Blue cherty dolomite with narrow bands of magnesite.

91 ,, Laminated dolomite and shale.

19 ,, Dolomite with white magnesite bands.

179

73 ft. Soft grey shale.

49 ,, Dolomite with white magnesite bands.

65 ,, Impure shaley dolomite.

48 ,, Dolomite.

45 ,, Soft dolomitic shales,

41 ,, Dolomite and shale,

40 ,, Soft shale.

39 ,, Dolomite with a little magnesite and grit.

12,, Impure pellet magnesite.

42 ,, Dolomite and shale with a little grit.

15, Pellet magnesite.

4,, Grey dolomitic grit with cross-bedding.

1, Coarse pellet magnesite.

59, Flaggy blue-grey dolomite with a narrow grit bed.

34, Dolomite with narrow bands of crypto-crystalline and pellet

magnesite.

90 ,, Blue slaty dolomite.

14,, Dolomite and peliet magnesite,

32, Soft bluish shale.

71, Blie-grey dolomite.

4,, Grit with cross bedding,

120 ,, Shale with a little dolomite and magnesite.

935 ,, Laminated and flaggy blue-grey dolomite and shale.

2 YEDNALUL QUARTZITE = 2 - 2 ; ‘ 750

150 ft. Sandstone Anely bedded or massive.

25.,, Shale with a little sandstone.

25 ,, Somewhat fractured quartzite,

12,, Shale.

40 ,, Shale with narrow quartzite bands.

60 ,, Sandy shale.

15, Sandstone,

45, Shale with a little sandstone.

280 ,, Sandstone and quartzite.

95 .,, Impure limestone and shale,

1 PHYLLITE-DOLOMITE FORMATION - - - - 2200

300 ft. Dolomite.

» Blue lamimated slates.

35 ,, Dolomite.

10 ,, Siltstone-quartzite.

1700 ,, Impure dolomite,

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Bary, G. W. 1934 ‘Types of Magnesite Deposits and their Origin. Econ. Geol., 19

Bateman, A. M. 1942 Economie Mineral Deposits. New York

Daty, R. A. 1909 The First Cambrian Fossils and the Evolution of the Limestone. Bull.

Geol. Soc. Amer., 20

Davin, 1. W. FE. 1950 The Geology of the Commorwealth of Australia. London

Howcwix, W. 1920 Autoclastic, etc, Breccias and Conglomerates, etc. Trans. Roy, Soc.

S. Aust, 44

Mawson, D, 1925 Evidence and Tndications of Algal Contributions in the Cambrian and

Precambrian Limestones of South Australia. Trans. Roy, Soc. S, Aust., 39

Mawson, D, 1941a Middle Proterozoic Sediments in the Neighbourhood of Copley. Trans.

Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 65, (2)

Mawson, ). 1941b The Wilpena Pound For-nation and Underlying Proterozaic Sediments.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust, 65, (2)

Mawson, D. 1947 The Adelaide Series as Developed along the Western Margin of the

Flinders Ranges. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 71, (2)

Mawson, D. 19482 The Late Precambrian Ice-Age and Glacial Record of the Bibliando

Dome. Journ. and Trans, Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 82

Mawson, D. 1948b Sturtian Tillite of Mount Jacob and Mount Warren Hastings. Trans.

Roy. Soc, S. Aust., 72, (2)

180

Mawson, D., and Manican, T. 1930 Pre-Ordovician Rocks of McDonnell Ratge.

Q.J.G.S,, 86, (3)

Maweiny D., and Srenit, E. R. 1948 Purple Slates of the Adelaide System. Trans. Roy.

Soc. S, Aust., 72, (2)

Mavsos, D., er, SH R. C. 1950 Subdivision of the Adelaide System. Aust. Journ.

c, 13,

Raccatr, H. G. 1950 Stratigraphic Nomenclature. Aust. Journ. Sc., 12, (3)

Ricw, J. L. 1951 Three Critical Environments of Deposition. Bull Geol. Soc. Amer., 62

Secnit, R. W, 1929 Geological Notes from ihe Hundreds of Adams, Flinders Ranges.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 53

Spricc, R. C. 1942 The Geology of the Eden Moana Fault Block. Trans. Roy. Soc.

S. Aust., 66, (2)

Spricc, R. C. 1946 A Reconnaissance Geological Survey of Part of the Western Escarp-

ment of the Mount Lofty Ranges. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust, 70, (2)

Turner, F. J. 1948 Evolution of the Metamorphic Rocks Geol. Soc. Amer. Mem. 30

TwenHoreLt, W. H. 1939 Principles of Sedimentation. New York

Winton, L. J. 1922 Report of the Guano Deposits, etc. Sth. Aust. Dept. Mines Rev., 36

181

ROYAL SQCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA (INCORPORATED)

Receipts and Payments for the Year ended 30th September, 1951]

RECEIPTS PAYMENTS

£s, da £5. 4 Es. d £58, d

To Balance, 1st October, 1950 64 6 7 By ‘Transactions (Printing &

« Subscriptions... wy. + 211 010 Lublishing Vol, 73, pt. 2,

» Subscriptions ‘Associates Tol. 74, pt. 1,, Vol. 74,

Fees from F.N.S. 3115 0 fits” a Saeee Gneele ring ne 846 14 2

» Government Grant for y Reprints se sen vee sues 5110 0

Printing, ete. au 400 0 0 sy Lelbrariary ccspp. eves eene eens 33 0 0

» Grant from Agricultural » Printing, ete. .... 5913 7

Department... 350 0 0 .. Printing Rules - Bylaws 23 12 6

» Sale of Publications and » Leal Expenses .., ™ 246

Reprints : vy POSt&LC vere tee eee tee aso 4714 4

University a. us. on 73 18 11 » Sundries:

Mines Department ... 71 2 0 Lighting nde ve oe OT

Sundries yer nee eee 663-18 0 Insurance oa we ee) =6 0 12

————-._ 208 18 11 Cleaning Rooms .., .. 18 lL 0

» Hire of Rooms... 17 0 Hire Epidiascope ... .... 110

», Interest Re wat. (ect, re 209 0 3 Petties 2. 0 i 9 32, 7

Associates subscriptions

remitted to F.N.S, ... 3115 0

———— = (6:13 3

» Balances—30th Sept., 1951

Savings Bank of S.A. 4. 220 18 9

Aust, and N.Z.

Rank Ltd.... 12915 4

Less Out-

standing

Chqus : 8 11

411

E 10 0

400

17 310

————. 112 11 6

» Cash in Hand Dich ot) LAG

335 6 3

£1476 8 7 £1,476 8 7

Reccipis and Payments for the ENDOWMENT FUND as at 30th September 1951

— : 7 Zs a £ sd

£ s. ad, £ os, d 1951—September 30

1950—October 1 By Revenue Account ws 209 0 3

To Balance— Balance:

Aust. Inscribed Stock 6,010 0 0 Aust. Inscribed Stock 6,010 0 0

Sayings Bank of S.A. 218 7 Savings Bank of S.A. 62 18 7

6,072 18 7 ————— 6,072 18 7

1951—September 30

To Interest—

Inseribed Stock .. ... 199 14 6

Savings Bank of S.A, 9 5 9

—————._ 209 0 3

£6,281 18 10 £6,281 18 10

Audited and found correct. The Stock and Bank Balances have been verified by certificates from

the respective institutions.

F, M. ANGEL Letsc-Anai

N. ANGEL, A.U,A. Com, J > on. Auditors

Adelaide, 9th October, 1951, H. WOMERSLEY, Hon. Treasurer

182

AWARDS OF THE SIR JOSEPH VERCO MEDAL

1929 Prov, Watrer Howcutn, F.G.S.

1930) Jors McC, Buack, ALS.

1931 Pror. Sir Dousras Mawson, O.B.E., D.Sc., B.E., F.R.S,

1933) ror, J, Burton Cienanp, M.D.

1935 Pror. T. TLlaxvry Jonnstox, M.A,, D.Sc,

1938 Por, J. A. Prescorr, D.Sc. FLAC,

1943 Herwert Womersiey, A.L.S., F.RES.

1944 Peor. J. G. Woon, D.Sc, Ph.D,

1945 Creu T. Manman, M.A, BK, D.Sc. IGS.

1946 Herrerr M. Ilann

LIST OF FELLOWS, MEMBERS, ETC.

AS AT 30 MARCH 1951

Those marked with an asterisk (*) bave contributed papers published in the Saciety’s

Trausactions, Those marked with a daggct (+) are Life Members.

Any change in address or any other changes should he notified to the Secretary.

Nolte—The publications of the Society are not sent to those members whose subscriptions

are im arrear,

Bink Honorary FELLows

1945, *Fewwer, C. A. E., D.Sc., 42 Alexandra Avenue, Rose Park, Adelaide—Fellow, 1917-45;

1949,

1945,

1947.

Coineil, 1925-28; President, 1930-31; Vice-President, 1928-30; Secretary, 1924-25;

Treasurer, 1932-33; Editor, 1934-37.

*Crenanp, Prov. J. B. MD., Dashwood Road, Beaumont, S.A.—Fellow, 1895-1949;

Vereo Medal, 1933; Conneil, 1921-26, 1932-37; President, 1927-28; 1940-41; Vice-

President, 1926-27, 1941-42.

Friows.

Arniz, Prom A. A, M.D, D.Sc. Ph.D., University of Adelaide,

Aircenisos, G, D., BLE. Waite Research Institute (Private Mail Bag), G.P.0,

Adelaide.

*ArnerMAn, A. R., Pi.D,, D.Sc., F.G.S. , Div. Indus, Chemistry, C.5,LR.0., Box 4331,

G.P,O., Melbourne, Vietoria—Couneil, 1937-42.

Anperson, Mrs. §. 11, B.Sc. Zoology Dept., University of Adelaide, S.A.

Anprew, Rey J. RR. c/o Methodist Manse, Maitland.

Anoprews, J., M,B., B.S., 40 Seafield Avenue, Kingswood, S.A,

*Anpaewartua, H. G, M.Agr.Se., D.Sc, Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag),

Adelaide—Council, 1950; Vice-President, 1950-51; President, 1951-.

*AnneRwartHA, Mrs, TT. V., BAgr.Sc., M.S. (nee H. V. Steele), 29 Claremont

Avenue, Nethorby, S.A.

*Ancer, F. M., 34 Fullarton Road, Parkside, 5.A.

*ANGEL, Miss L, M., M.Sc, c/o University of Adelaide.

*RartLert, H. K., L.Th., 15 Claremont Averitie, Netherby, S.A,

Brastny, A. K., [Harris Street, Marden, S.A.

Breer, Rk. G, BAgSe, RDA, Linewood Park, Mittel, S.A.

Besa, P. R., D/D\Se,, L.D.S,, Shell House, 170 North Terrace, Adelaide.

Rest, R. J., D.Sc. A.C. Waite Institute (Private Mafl Bag), Adelaide.

Brack, F.C. M.B., B.S., Magill Road, Tranmere, Adelaide.

Bonyry, N. J.. MB, BS, FRCS. (Eng), FRACS, 144 Hill Street, North

Adelaide, S.A.

*Bonvtuon, C. W., B.Sc, A.A.CI, Romalo House, Romalo Avenue, Magill, S.A,

Bonyraon, Sir J. Layrxcron, B.A. (Camb), 263: East Terrace, Adelaide,

*Boomsma, C. D., M.Se, B.Sc.For,, 2 Celtic Avenue, South Road Park, S.A.

Bowzs, D. R,, Ph.D,, M.Sc, D.1.C, F-G.S., 51 Eton Strect, Malvern.

183

Hate of

Election,

1939. Brookman, Mrs. R, D, (nee A. Tarvey), DA, Meadaws, 5,A.

1945. Broucurox, A, C., Farina, S.A,

1948, Brownie, T..0., B.Sc (Sy¥d.), Waite Institure (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide,

1944. *Rurnivcs, Miss N. T., M.Sc, CS.LRO,, Diy, Plant Industry, P.O. Box 109, Can-

berra, ALC.T.

1923. Buon, RK. S., D.Sc. University of Ademide—Couneil, 14h,

1922, *Camecet,, T. BD, D.DSe, DSc, Dental Dept, Adeliide Hospital, Adelaide—

Corneil, 128-32, 1935, 1942-45; live-President, 1952-34; President, 1934-d3,

1944. Casson, P. B., B.Se,, For. (Adel.), 5 Benjafield Terrace, New Town, Hobart.

195}. Cairtemorouun, R. G., BSc, c/o CS.1R,0., Div, of Fisheries, 1 Museum Street,

Perth, WA,

1929, Curistir, W,, M.B., B.S. Education Departtnent, Social Services, 5] Pirie Street

Adelaide—-Treasurer, 1933-38.

$950. Coavsrav, S. BE, B.Sc., 6 Hampton Street, Ilawthorn, S.A.

1949, Couuitver, F. S,, Gealogy Department, University of Queensland,

1930. *Conguuun, T. T., M.Sc. 10 French Street, Netherby, S.:A—Seeretory, 1942-43.

1907, *Cooxe, W. T., DSc, AAC, 4 South Terrace, Kensington Gardens, 8,A—Couneil,

1038-41; Vice-President, 1941-42, 1943-44) President, 1942-4d-

1942. *Coormr, H. M., 51 Hastings Strect, (dlenelg, S.A.

1949-50, 1O5L; President, 1950-51,

7951, Bayan. ALCL, VED. B.Sc, Waite Research Institute, Private Mail Bag, G,.P.O.,

Adelaide,

1924 vs Crresprowy, Str C, 1. C, D.5.0., M.D,, P.R.C.P., 219 North Terrace, Adelaide.

1950. Drawn, C. M, M.B., BS., D.P.H., D.J.M., 29 Gilbert Strect, Goodwood, S.A.

1941, Drcxtyson, S. B, M.Sc, 52 Burnside Road, Kensinglon—Cynnetl, 1949-51; Mice

President, 1951-

1930. rx, E. V., Hospitals Department, Rundle Strect, Adelaide, 3.A.

1944, Dunstone, S. M. L., MB, #S., 124 Payneham Road, St. Peters, Adelaide.

1931. Dwyer, J. M., M.B., B.S. 105 Port Road, Hindmarsh, 5.A.

1933, *Eanpiey, Miss C. M., M.Sc. University of Adelaide—Couneil, 1943-46,

*Kpmonps, S. J,, BA, M.Sc, 56 Fisher Terrace, Mie End, 5A,

*Epourst, A, G., 19 Farrell Street, Glenelg, S.A—Couneil, 1949-,

Freres, Miss. H. M., M.Sce., 8 Tay'or's Road, Mitchuin,, 5.A.

“JintAvson, H. H., 305 Ward Street, North Adelaide—Cowneil, 1937-40,

Fisuer, R. H., 265 Goodwood Rodd, Kings Park, S.A,

+Fry, H. K., D.S.0.,, M.D, U.S, BSc. FRAC P., ‘Yow Tall, Adelaide—Cowiedl,

1933-371 Pice-President, 1937-38, 1939-40; President, 1938-49,

Fuvion, Cor, D., C.M.G,, CBE, Aldgate, §.A.

*Grason, FB. S. H., M.Sc., 297 Cross Roads, Chtrence Gardens, Adelaide.

Goprrey, F, K., Box 951H, G.P.O., Adeiaide.

¢Gotpsack, H., Coromandel Valley, S.A.

7Gosse, Sie James IT, Gilbert House, Gitbert Place, Adelaide,

*Geant, Prov. Sie Krur, M.Se, WLP, 36 Fourth Avenue, St. Pelers, 5 A,

Gray, J, T., Orroroo, S.A.

Greaves, H., 12 Edward Street, Glynde, S.A.

Green, J. W., 4 Holden Street, Kensington Park, S.A.

Georith, H. &., Dunrobin Road, Brighton, S.A.

Gross, G. F., B.Sc., South Australian Museum, Adelaide—Seeretary, 1950-,

Goppv, D. J., Se, Mineral Resources Survey, Canherra, A.O.T,

*Hare, H. M., Director S.A. Museaom, Adélaide~—Perco Afedal, 1946; Council, 1931-34,

1950-; Mice-President, 1934-36, (937-38; President, 1936-37; Treasurer, 1938-1950,

Hau, D, R., Mern Merna, via Quorn, 5.A.

*TIanpy, Mus. J. i. (nee A. C. Beckwith), M.Se., Box 62, Smithton, Tas.

Harars, J. R., B.Se:, 94 Archer Street, North Adelaide, S.A.

Hesnersox, D. L. W,, P.M.B., 20 Bourke, N.S.W.

Herrror, R. 1, B.Agr.Se., Soil Conservator, Dept. of Agriculture, 5.A,

Hocxtne, L, J., 57 Matino Parade, Seacliff, S.A.

Houtoway, B. W,, B.Sc, 33 Kyre Avenue, Kingswood, S.A,

*Hossreip, P, §., M.Sc., 132 Bisher Street, Fullarten, 5.A,

HMowarn, P. F., B.Sc, c/o Great Western Consolidated, Bullfinch, W.A.

Humepz, D, S. W., 238 Payneham Road, Paynchatn, S.A.

Hyrton, J. T., B.Se, 18 Emily Avenue, Clapham.

Irquny, P., Kurralta, Burnside, $.A.

184

Date ol

Election,

1918, *Jexnisox, Rey. J.C. 7 Frew Street, Fullarton, S.A,

1945. *Jessur, R, W., M.Sc., 3 Alma Road, Fullarton, S.A,

1910. *Jonyson, E. A. M.D, M-R.C.S. 1 Baker Street, Glenelg,

1930. Jouns, R. K., B.Sc. Department of Mines, Flinders Street, Adelaide, S.A.

1951. Karaaovic, D., B.A:Sc. (Mun.), 22 Grandview Road, Toorak Gardens, S.A.

1951. Kestine, N. G,, Dept. Arts and Ed., P,A‘C. Preparatory School, 3 Hartley Road,

Brighton, S.A,

1939. TRAE AS, HL. M,, PA.D., M.B,, F.R.GS., Kbaklar Buildings, CP, Tauk Road, Bon-

bay, ia,

1949. *Kinc, D., M.Se., 44 Angwitt Avenue, Mair Athol, S.A.

1933. *Kiveman, A. W., M.Sc., University of Adelaide—Secretary, 1945-48; Pice-Pryesi-

dent, 1948-49, 1950-51; Prestdent, 1949-50,

1922, Lenoon, G. A, M.D, BS., F.ILCP., AMP. Buildiug, King William Street, Adelaide,

148. Lormian, T. RN, N.D.H. (N.%.), Director, Botanic Gardens, Adelaide.

1949. Lower, H. F., 7 Avetiue Read, Highgate, S.A,

1931. *Lupgroox, Mrs. W. V. (nee N. H. Woods), M.A,, Eliinatta Street, Reid, A.C.T.

148. MeCuntocn, R. N., MB.E., BSc. (Oxon), BAgr Sei. (Syd.), Roseworthy Agricul-

tural College, S.A.

1938, Mapbern, C, B., B.DS., D.DSe,, Shell House, North Terrace, Adelaide.

1932, Mann, £. A., C/o Hank of Adelaide, Adelaide.

1939. Mansnair, T. J, MAgeSe, Ph.D., Waite Institue (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide—

Council, 1948-,

1905, *Mawson, Pror. Sir Dovgras, O.B.E,, D.Se, BE, IRS, University of Adelajde—

Verco Medal, 1931; President, 1924-25, 1944-45; Vicw-President, 1923-24, 1925-265

Council, 1941-43.

1950. May, L. H., B.Se., 691 Esplanade, Grange, S.A,

1920, Mayo, ‘THE Hon. Mx. Justice, LL.B., KC. Supreme Court, Adelaide,

1950, Mayo, G. M, E., B.Ag.Sec. Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide, S.A.

1943. McCarruy, Miss D, F,, B.A., B,Sc., 70 Ealton T errace, Kensington Park.

1945. f*Mues, K R, D.Sc, F.GS., Mines Department, Flinders Street, Adelaide.

1951, Mires, J. A, K., M.A,, MLR, B.Chir. (Cant.), 48 Gladys Street, Edwardstown, S.A,

1939, MincHam, V. H., Hammond, S.A.

1925. }Mircuert, Prov. Sir W.. K.GM.G., M.A, DSe, F itzroy Ter., Prospect, SA.

1933, Muircnen., Pror, M. L., M.Se., University, Adelaide.

1951, Mircre, F_J.,c/o The South Australian Museum, North Terrace, Adelaide,

1938, MoorHovse, F. W., MSc,, Chief Inspector of Fisheries, Flinders Street, Adelaide.

1936, *Movunrrorp, C. P., 25 First Avenue, St. Peters, Adelaide.

iy44. Murerrt, J. W., Engineering and Water Supply Dept., Port Road, Thebarton, S.A.

1944, Nrat-Smira, C. A. B.Agr.Sci., 16 Gooreen Street, Rew, Canberra, A,CT.

1944. Ninwes, A. R,, B.A., 62 Sheffield Street, Malvern, S.A.

1945. “Noarincorn, K, 1, B.Agr.Sc., A.LA.S., Waite institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide.

1930. OcKennen, G. P., B.A. c/o Flitders Street Practising School, Flinders St, Adelaide

1947, *Orner, f. L., 65 Fifth Avenue, St. Peters, S.A.

1913. *Ossorn; Prov, T. G, B, D.Se., Department of Totany, Oxford, England—Couscil,

1915-20, 1922-24; President, 1925-26; Vice-President, 1924-25, 1926-27,

1937, *Paxkin, L. W., M.Se., c/o North Broken Hill Mining Co, Melbourne, Vietoriie

169, Parkinson, K. J., B.Sc. 8 Mooreland Averiue, Beverley, S.A

1945, Parrrson, G., 68 Partridge Street, Glenelg, SuA.

1924. Paurt, A. G, M.A. BSc, 10 Milton Avenue, Fullarton, S.A.

1926, *Prrrr, C. S,, D.Sc, Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide—Conneil, 1941-43;

Vice-President, 1943-45, 1946-47+ President, 1945-46,

1948. Powrit, J. K., BSe., CS.LR.O., Division of Biochemistry, University, Adelaide.

1947, Poynron, J. O., M.D. MA. ChB, MRCS, L,R.CP., Institute Mediciite, Wet

Science, Frome Roz cd, Adelaide,

1949, Pratre, R, G, 81 Park Terrace, North Unley, S.A.

1925, *Presoorr, Paor. J. A, CBE, D.Sc, ALC, Waite Institute (Private Mall Bag),

Adelaide—Werca Medal, 1938; Council, 1927-30, 1935-395 [* ige~President, 1930-32;

President, 1932-33,

1926, Price, A. G., C.M.G., M.A, Litt.D., F\RG.S., 46 Pennington ‘Terrace, North Adelaide.

1945. Pevor, L. D,, M.Sc, Dip.For., 32 La Perouse Street, Griffith, N.S,W,

1950, *Rastigan, J. H, B.Sc, Bureau of Mineral Resoutces, Mclbourne Building, Canberra,

ACT.

1931, Ravsex, I, B.Sc, Box 111, Borlertewn, S.A.

Io, Riceman, U. S, MSc, BAgrSe, C.S.LR.0., Division of Nutrition, Adelaide,

185

Date of

Election.

1947, Rieper, W, R, B.Sc, Oceanographic Institute, Gottenburg, Sweden.

1948. *Riwes, G. D., B’Sc., 24 Winston Avenue, Clarence Gardens, SA.

1947. Rix, C. E,, 42 Waymouth Avenue, Glandore, S.A,

1946, “*Rozreson, E. G,, M.Se., 42 Riverside Drive, Sudbury, Ontario, Canada.

1951, Rossex, L. D., ¢/o. High School, Port Pirie, §.A,

1951, Rowe, S. A., 22 Shelley Street, Firle, S.A,

1951, Rowe, S. E., B.Sc., 22 Shelley Street, Firle, S.A,

1950. Rupoo, Por. E. A, BSc. A.M., University, Adelaide, S.A,

1945, Rymitr, J. R., Old Penola Estate, Penola, S.A.

1944, *5anvars, Mtss D, F.. M.Sc., University of Queensland, Brisbane, Queensland,

1950, Saunvers, F. L., 79 Winchester Street, Malvern, S.A.

1933, Scunewer, M., M.B., B.S., 175 North Ter., Adelaide.

1951, Soorr, F. D., B.Sc, c/o S.A. Museum, North Terrace, Adelaide, S.A.

1946, “*Sxenrr, BE. R., M.Sc., C.S.1.R.0., Division of Industrial Chemistry, Box 4331, G.P.O,

Melbourne, Victoria.

1924. *S5ecni7, R. W., M.A., BSc. Engincering and Water Supply Department, Victoria

Square, Adelaide—Secretary, 1930-35; Council, 1937-38; Vice-President, 1938-39,

104041; President, 1939-40.

1925. *Swearp, H., Port Elliot, S.A.

1936, *Sueanu, K,, Fislierics Research Diy. C.S,LR.0., University of W.A,, Nedlands, W.A,

1945, SuperHero, J. H., M.Se, B.A, c/o Anglo-Westralian Mining Pty. Ltd.

1934. Semnkrrerny, R. C, Salisbury, S.A.

1924. Srmpson, F. N., Pirie Street, Adelaide.

1949, Simrsox, D. A. M.B., B.S., 42 Lockwood Road, Burnside, S.A.

1941, "Ser Ts Lasorosn-, B.Se., Department of Post-War Reconstruction, Canberra,

1941. Seuvucort, R, V, MB, BS, D.T.M. & H,, 13. Jasper Street, Hyde Park—Coumcil,

J948-31; Treasurer, 1951-.

1936, Sourawoop, A, R., M.D., M.S. (Adel.), M.R.C.P,, Wootvona Ter,. Glen Osmond, 5, A.

1047, *Srecur, R. L. M.Sc, 15 Main Road, Richmond, $A —Council, 1951-,

1936, 7*Sprics, R. C., M.Sc, Mines Department, Flinders Street, Adelaide,

1951. Sreapman, Rev. W. R,, 1 De Saumarez Street, Kensington Park, S.A,

1947. Spurninc, M. B., B.Ag Sc, Agricultural College, Roseworthy, S.A,

1949, *Spry, A. H., B.Sc., 63 LeFevre Terrace; North Adelaide, S.A.

1938, *Srevaens, C. G., DSe., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide.

1935. SOC A_G, MAgrSe., 11 Wootcona Terrace, Glen Osmond, S.A,—Comrcil,

1947,

1932. Swan, D. C.. M.Se., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide—Secrelory,

1940-42; Pice-President, 1946-47, 1948-49; President, 1947-48.

1948. Swann, F. J. Wa. 38 Angas Road, Lower Mitcham, S.A,

1951, Swresxt, P,, M.Ag.Se., 222 Henry Street, Croydon, S.A.

1934. Symons, I, G,. 35 Murray Street, Lower Mitcham, S.A.— Editor, 1947-,

1929. *Yavuor, 7. K., B.A, M.Sc. Waite Instinite (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide—Counel,

1940-43, 1947-50: Librorian, 1951-—

1950, Tavtor, G. H.. B.Sc, Department of Mines, Old Legislative Council Building, North

Tetrace, Adelaide, S.A,

1948, PT ROM AE: L M., MSc. (Wales), University, Adelaide—Secretary, 1948-50; Council,

950-

193% *THomAs, Mes. I, M. (nee F. M. Mawson), M.Sc, 36 King Street, Brighton.

1940. Tsomson, Cart, J. M., 145 Military Road, Semaphore South, S.A.

1923. *Tinuvare, N. B., B.Sc, South Australian Museum, Adelaide—Secretary, 1935-36;

Council, 1946-475 Vice-President, 1947-48, 1949-50; President, 1948-49.

1945, ‘Trven, N. $., .M.Se., B.Agr.Se., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide,

1937, *Trumme, Prov, H. C, D.Sc, M.Agr.Sc,, Waite Institute (Private Muil Bag),

Adelgide—Couneil, 1942-1945; Mice-Prestdent, 1945-46, 1947-48; President, 1946-47.

1925. Turner, D. C. Brvokman Buildings, Grenfell Street, Adclaide,

1950. Vieren, S. 'T., Port Lincoln, 5,A,

1912. *Wagp, L. K., 1S.0., B.A. B.E., D.Sc., 22 Northumberland Avenue, Tusmore—Council,

1924-27, 1933-35; Wice-President, 1927-28; President, 1928-30.

1941, *Wars, D. C., M.Agr.Sc., Div. Plant Tndustry, C.S.LR.O., Canberra, A.CT,

1936. Warernouse, Miss L. M., 35 King Street, Brighton, S.A

1939, *Weerpinc, Rey. B. J., 5 York Street, Henley Beach.

1949. *Weoener, C. F, B.Se., Department Mines, Flinders Street, Adelaide, SA.

1946. Wuerrer, A. WG, B.Se., Mines Deparment, Flinders Street, Adelaide,

1050. Wiettams, L. D. “Dumosa,” Meningie, S.A,

186

Date of

Election

1946, *Wuison, A. F., M,Sc., University of W.A., Nedlands, W.A.

1938. *Wuxson, J. O., C.S.LR.O., Division of Nutrition, Ade‘aide.

1930. *Womerstey, H., F.R.ES., A.L.S. (Hon. causa), S.A. Museum, Adelaide—Verco

Medal, 1943: Secretary, 1936-37; Editor, 1937-43, 1945-47; President, 1943-44, Vice-

Eegadent, 1944-45; Rep. Fauna and Flora Protection Committee, 1945; Treasurer,

1950-51.

1944. *Womerstey, H. B. S., M.Sc., University of Adelaide.

1944. Womerstry, J. S., B.Sc. Lae, New Guinea.

1923. *Woop, Pror. J. G. D.Sc. Ph.D., University of Adelaide—Verco Medal, 1944;

Council, 1938-40; Vice-President, 1940-41, 1942-43: Rep. Fauna and Flora Board,

1940-; President, 1941-42; Council, 1944-48.

1950. Wooparn, G. D., 20 Kensington Road, Leabrook, S.A.

1943. Woonotanps, Harotp, Box 989H, G.P.O., Adelaide.

1945. Wortuiey, B, W., B.A., M.Sc., A. Inst. P., University, Ade‘aide.

1948. *Wymonnp, A. P., B.Sc. 4 Woodley Road, Glen Osmond, S.A.

1949, Yeates, J. N., LS, A.M.LE., A.M.I.M.E,, Richards Buildings, 99 Currie Street,

Adelaide, S.A.

1944. Zimmer, W. J., Dip.For., F.L.S. (Lon.), 7 Rupert Street, Footscray West, W.12, Vic.

;

GENERAL INDEX

[Generic and specific names in italics indicate that the forms described

are new to

Abbie, A, A.: A new Approach to the Pro-

blem of Huinan Evalution, 70

Adelaide System, in the Riverton-Clare Re-

gion, Northern Mount Lofty Ranges:

Alan F, Wilsot, 131 ;

Adelaide System, in the Mount Plantagenet

Area: Alan H. Spry, 164

Alustrofilaria rhipidurae, 3

Basic Igneous Rocks of the Worumba Re-

gion: Alan H. Spry, 97

Black, J. M.; J. B. Cleland and: An Enum-

eration of the Vascular Plants of Kan-

garoo Island, 22

Brookes, Helen M.; The Morphological De-

velopment of the Embryo of Gryllulus

cummodus, 150

Brown, W. L.: The Dacetine Ant Genus

Mesostruma Brown, 9

Cleland, J. B., and J. M. Black: An Enum-

eration of the Vaseular Plants of Kan-

garoo Island, 22

Corynosoma clavatum, 16

Cosmuritun Ophelii, 62

C. rotundum, 64

Cosmocephaluts anstraliensis, 34

Cotton, Bernard C.: Australian Recent and

Tertiary Mollusca, 38

Cunningham, G. H,: Twa Undescrihed Aus-

tralian Gasterorycetes, 14

Desmils, Some South Australiany G. W.

Prescott and A, M. Seott, 55

Diomedenema diomedeade, 32

Edmonds, 5. J.; T. H. Johnston and: Aus-

tralian Acanthocephala, No. 9, 16

Ericusa orca, 53

Eusetia leterna, 1

Evolution: A New Approach to the Problem

of Human: A. A, Abbie, 70

Fenner, C. H.: Lake Eyre in Flood 1950;

Muds, Salts, ete., 5

Gasleromycetes; Two Undescribed Austra-

lian: G. 11. Cunningham, 14

Gryllulis commodus; Morphological De-

velopment of the Embryo of; Helen M.

Brookes, 150

Heteronympha penelope; On a New Form

of: N. B. Tindale, 25

Hone, M, R.: The Post-Orbital Wall; A

Comparative and Ethnological Study, 115

Hymenogaster effodiendus, 14

science, |

Individual Aspects in the Culture of the

Australian Aborigines; H. V, V. Noone, 1

Johnston, T. Harvey, and §. J. Edmonds:

Australian Acanthocephala, No. 9, 16

Johnston, T. Harvey, and Patricia M. Maw-

son: Some Nematodes from Australian

Birds and Mammals, 30

Kangaroo Island; Vascular Plants of: J. B.

Cleland and J, M. Black, 22

Lake Eyre in Flood 1950; Muds, Salts, ete:

C. E. Fenner, 5

Mawson, Patricia M,; T. H, Johnston and:

Some Nematodes from Australian Birds

and Mammals, 30

Mesostruma; The Dacetine Ant Genus: W,

L. Brown, 9

Micraranthocephalus hemirhamphi, 17

Miles, KK, R.:; Tertiary Faulting in North-

Eastern Eyre Peninsula, 89

Mollusca; Australian Recent and Tertiary:

Bernard C. Cotton, 38

Moniliformis ‘semoni, 18

Moniliformis dubius, 20

Nematodes from Atstralian Birds and Mam-

mals: T, MH, Johnston and P.M. Mawson,

Noone, H. V. V.: Individual Aspects in the

Culiure of the Aiistralian Aborigines, 1

Nototerebra flindersi, 41

Pervicacia subplicata; P. helenac, 40

Plewroploca eucla, 52

Post-Orbital Wall; A Comparative and

Ethnological Study: M, R. Hone, 115

Precambrian Tilhtes East of the Everard

Ranges; Allan F. Wilson, 160

Prescott, G. W., and A. M. Scott;

South Atistratian Desmids, 55

Some

Rissoina wincentiana; R. grata; R. fiscina;

R. jaffa; R. axiscalpa, 46-48

Scott, A. M.; G. W. Prescott and:

South Australian Desmids, 55

Secotium fragariosum, 14

Sediments of the Adelaide System in the

Moust Plantagenet Area, South Australia:

Alan H. Spry, 164

Serrataspicuhum zuttatum, 32

Spirura sp. 36

Some

188

Spry, Alan H.: Basic Igneous Rocks of the } Wilson, Allan F.: The Adelaide System as

Worumba Region, South Australia, 97 Developed in the Riverton-Clare Region,

Spry, Alan H.: Sediments of the Adelaide Northern Mount Lofty Ranges, South

System in the Mount Plantagenet Area, Australia, 131

South Australia, 164 Wilson, Allan F.: Precambrian Tillites East

of the Everard Ranges, North-Western

Tertiary Faulting in North-Eastern Eyre South Australia, 160

Peninsula: K. R, Miles, 89 Worumba Region; Basic Igneous Rocks of:

Tetrameres australis, 33 Alan H. Spry, 97

Tindale, N. B.: On a New Form of Hetero-

nympha penelope, 25

CONTENTS

OBITUARY AND BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE LATE Proressor T, Harvey JOHNSTON

Noone, H. V. V.: Individual Aspects in the Culture of the Australian Aborigines

FENNER, CHARLES: Lake Eyre in Flood, 1950—Muds, Salts, etc. ....

Brown, Witiram L., Jr.: The Dacetine Ant Genus Mesostruma Brown ....

CunNINGHAM, G. H.: Two Undescribed Australian Gasteromycetes

Jounston, T, H., and Enmonps, S. J.: Australian Acanthocephala, No. 9

CLeLanp, J, B:, and BLACK, J. M.: An Enumeration of the Vascular Plants of- Kan-

garoo Island. Second List of Additions and Corrections .. : SS et sist

TINDALE, Norman B.: A New Form of Ng ange Waterhouse Bay

doptera Rhopalocera, Family Satyridae) —

Jounston, H.-T., and Mawson, Patricia: Some Nematodes from Australian Birds

and Mammals .... bs eee hte = < = aa oF Ss

Corron, Bernarp C.: Pherae, Recent and Tertiary Mollusca, (Terebridae, Rissoini-

dae, Fasciolariidae, Volutidae) Spee a ane ae ae rn mrs

Prescorr, Geratp W., and Scorr, ArrHur M.: Some South Australian Desmids

Assiz, A. A.; A New Approach to the Problem of Human Evolution

Mires, Kerr R.: Tertiary Faulting in North-Eastern Eyre Peninsula, South Australia

Spry, ALAN H.: Basic Igneous Rocks of the Worumba Region, South Australia

Howe, M. R.: The Postorbital-Wall. A Comparative and Ethnological Study

Witson Attan F.: The Adelaide System as Developed in the Riverton- Seats Bony

Northern Mount Lofty Ranges, South Australia .... 5x

Brooxes, Heten M.: The Morphological een of the Embryo of eke

commodus Walker (Orthoptera: Gryllidae) ms; on Py ae 7s

Wison; Arran F.: Precambrian: Tillites East of the Everard 1 Ranges North-Western

South Australia eS Pi era pc Wee as See aie set

Spry, Avan H.: Sediments of the Adelaide a stem in the Mount 1 Phatagene Area,

South Australia aS o ah Te ing

Page